Acom HW & Maint 025-9574

Acom
Hardware Installation and Maintenance
025-9574E
Software License
The Zetron software described in this manual is subject to the terms and conditions of Zetron's Software License Agreement,
a copy of which is contained on the product distribution media or otherwise provided or presented to buyer. Installation and/
or use of the Zetron software constitutes acceptance of Zetron's Software License Agreement.
Limited Warranty
Buyer assumes responsibility for the selection of the Products and Services to achieve buyer's or its customer's intended
results and for the results obtained from the Products and Services. If buyer has provided Zetron with any requirements,
specifications or drawings, or if Zetron provides buyer with such materials, such materials are provided solely for buyer's
convenience and shall not be binding on Zetron unless agreed contractually by Zetron. UNLESS AGREED
CONTRACTUALLY BY ZETRON, ZETRON DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES WILL
MEET BUYER'S OR ITS CUSTOMER'S REQUIREMENTS OR SPECIFICATIONS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE
PRODUCTS WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. SUBJECT TO THE LIMITATIONS SET FORTH BELOW,
Zetron warrants that all Zetron Products and Services will be free from material defects in material and workmanship for one
year from date of shipment or performance of the Services (except where indicated otherwise in the Zetron Price Book). For
buyer's convenience, Zetron may purchase and supply additional items manufactured by others. In these cases, although
Zetron's warranty does not apply, buyer shall be the beneficiary of any applicable third party manufacturer's warranties,
subject to the limitations therein. Zetron's warranty covers parts and Zetron factory labor. Buyer must provide written notice
to Zetron within the warranty period of any defect. If the defect is not the result of improper or excessive use, or improper
service, maintenance or installation, and if the Zetron Products or Zetron Accessories have not been otherwise damaged or
modified after shipment, AS ZETRON'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY AND BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY, Zetron shall either replace or repair the defective parts, replace the Zetron Products or Zetron Accessories,
reperform the Services or refund the purchase price, at Zetron's option, after return of such items by buyer to Zetron.
Shipment shall be paid for by the buyer. No credit shall be allowed for work performed by the buyer. Zetron Products or
Zetron Accessories which are not defective shall be returned at buyer's expense, and testing and handling expense shall be
borne by buyer. Out-of-warranty repairs will be invoiced at the then - current Zetron hourly rate plus the cost of needed
components. THE FOREGOING WARRANTY AND THE THIRD PARTY MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES, IF ANY,
ARE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR ARISING UNDER LAW,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, NONINFRINGEMENT AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Limitation of Liability
Zetron makes no representation with respect to the contents of this document and/or the contents, performance, and function
of any accompanying software.
Further, Zetron reserves the right to revise this document or the accompanying software and to make changes in it from time
to time without obligation to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes.
This document and any accompanying software are provided As Is. ZETRON SHALL NOT UNDER ANY
CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE TO BUYER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT LOSS OR DAMAGE ARISING OUT OF OR CONNECTED WITH BUYER'S
PURCHASE OR USE OF ZETRON PRODUCTS, ZETRON ACCESSORIES OR ZETRON SERVICES. IN NO EVENT
SHALL ZETRON'S LIABILITY (WHETHER FOR NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORT, IN CONTRACT OR
OTHERWISE) EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO ZETRON FOR THE ZETRON PRODUCTS, ZETRON ACCESSORIES
OR ZETRON SERVICES.
IP networks by their nature are subject to a number of limitations, such as security, reliability, and performance. Anyone using
non-dedicated IP networks, such as shared WANs or the Internet, to connect to any Zetron Products or systems should
consider and is responsible for these limitations.
2009 Zetron, Inc. All rights reserved. This publication is protected by copyright; information in this document is subject
to change without notice. Zetron and the Zetron logo are registered trademarks of Zetron, Inc. Other company names
and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. This publication may not be
reproduced, translated, or altered, in whole or in part, without prior written consent from Zetron, Inc.
Compliance Statements
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is
operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required
to correct the interference at his own expense.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) for this terminal equipment is 0.1. The REN assigned to each terminal equipment
provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface. The
termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the
RENs of all the devices does not exceed 5.0.
Information on Disposal of Old Electrical and Electronic Equipment and
Batteries (applicable for EU countries that have adopted separate waste
collection systems)
Products and batteries with the symbol (crossed-out
wheeled bin) cannot be disposed as household
waste. Old electrical and electronic equipment and
batteries should be recycled at a facility capable of
handling these items and their waste byproducts.
Contact your local authority for details in locating a
recycle facility nearest to you.
Proper recycling and waste disposal will help
conserve resources whilst preventing detrimental
effects on our health and the environment.
Notice: The sign Pb below the symbol for
batteries indicates that this battery contains lead.
Safety Summary
STOP
Warning! For your safety and the protection of the equipment, observe these
precautions when installing or servicing Zetron equipment:
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the equipment or included in documentation.
Only technically qualified service personnel are permitted to install or service the equipment.
Be aware of and avoid contact with areas subject to high voltage or amperage. Because some components can store
dangerous charges even after power is disconnected, always discharge components before touching.
Never insert objects of any kind through openings in the equipment. Conductive foreign objects could produce a short
circuit that could cause fire, electrical shock, or equipment damage.
Remove rings, watches, and other metallic objects from your body before opening equipment. These could be
electrical shock or burn hazards.
Ensure that a proper electrostatic discharge device is used, to prevent damage to electronic components.
Do not attempt internal service of equipment unless another person, capable of rendering aid and resuscitation, is
present.
Do not work near rotating fans unless absolutely necessary. Exercise caution to prevent fans from taking in foreign
objects, including hair, clothing, and loose objects.
Use care when moving equipment, especially rack-mounted modules, which could become unstable. Certain items
may be heavy. Use proper care when lifting.
Release History
Release
Rev A
21 Apr 2006
Enhancements/Changes
This manual is a combination of the following three manuals, which are hereby obsolete:
025-9531_E Acom Maintenance
025-9528_F Acom CCE Hardware Installation
025-9538_D Acom Console Hardware Installation
Content was reorganized to suit the new manual, duplicate material was removed, and
chapter navigation was added to most chapters.
The following updates or additions are new in this revision:
Added overview of Dynamic Intersite Bearer
RJ45 pinout numbering corrected for DCU cards and EIE cards
Updated MCU4 description and MCU4 LED description to include information about
Dynamic Intersite Bearer
Added UIO configuration examples
Replacing Components chapter rewritten with improved instructions for most
components (specifically: CCC, COV-T and COV-V, DCU, EMU/TIE/EIE, Logger,
MCU4, MCU3, MSU, Optical Switch, SMU, UIO)
Updated or added the following glossary entries: AIMS, AIMS VDU, CFDS, IRR, and
UMS
ADS alarms added to appendix
Corrected MCU LED information
Updated descriptions for serial port 1 and 2
Rev B
10 Nov 2006
Updated jumper locations for Deskmic Option on page 57.

Moved the Logger Subrack card compatibility table from the ALS section to Logger
Subrack on page 106.
Switched to new Acom nomenclature (global change).
Updated Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R) on page 123 to
include the new COV-R card.
Added RIU card to the card compatibility table Acom Line Subrack Card Installation on
page 95.
Updated glossary definitions for COV cards.
Added a new section for the Logger Subrack.
Moved the ChangeOver Subrack card compatibility table from the ALS section to
Changeover Subrack on page 105.
Removed all references to using a logger card in anything but a Logging Subrack
(Logger Card Installation).
Added a new section Radio Interface Unit (RIU) on page 224 for the new RIU card.
Added the COV-R card to the card compatibility table Changeover Subrack Card
Installation on page 106.
Added COV-R card to Changeover Control Card on page 106.
Moved IMS Fault Logs to the front of Appendix C: Alarms and added Fault Log Input
Alarms on page 377 and Fault Log Output Alarms on page 382.
Added part number for new EMU card on page 168.
Added warnings for new EMU jumper settings on page 173 and 292.
025-9574E
Release
Enhancements/Changes
Rev C
Fixed Radio Interface Unit (RIU) on page 224 to reflect the correct name, improve the
overview text, provide a warning about -48v lines, and correct JP29 in the jumper table.
Updated MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS, not as an Intersite
Bearer) on page 188 to show new LED behavior based on the Standby Bearer.
Fixed nomenclature: Changed AIS to ALS, whenever AIS referred to Acom
hardware instead of an Alarm Indication Signal. Standardized on 4W E&M to replace
4W VF when referring to that ACU module. Changed ACS.ini to
AcomConsole.ini
Increased the maximum number of consoles and lines in Capacity on page 27.
Added OLCB and LLCB to Appendix A: Acom Glossary on page 347.
Updated Dual E1 Interface Module on page 86 to add twisted-pair E1 ACU module.
Removed the detailed SMU DSP information from Signaling Management Unit (SMU)
on page 240.
Consolidated detailed information about the ACU into the Acom Console Unit (ACU) on
page 73, and added extra specification information from the DCS-5020 manual.
Added the new section Model 3030 PSAP TDD on page 64.
Added the new section Capacity on page 27, which introduces the dynamic backbone
and related concepts.
Added the new section Channel TX and RX Wiring on page 233 to show how to wire
various radio types to the RIU.
Updated Digital Inputs on page 408 and Internal Link Error on page 409 to show that
they are configurable and to remove references to unsupported numbers of MCUs.
Updated Capacity of DS3 switches on page 103 to include additional resources and
updated capacity.
31 Mar 2008
Rev D
16 May 2008
Rev E
6 Mar 2009
Support for stereo headsets. Monitor Speaker 1 can be redirected to one side of the
headset. Associated new jackbox and cable. Page 44.
RIU card jumper settings corrected. Page 246.
Added Dual E1 Fiber Module section. Page 78.
Only operating systems supported are Windows Vista Business SP1 and Windows XP
Professional SP3.
Changed all terminal-related procedures to assume use of generic terminal software.
Updated DCU Interfaces on page 133 to mention RS-485 and external serial clock.
Added Protected Mode on page 373 to describe the new alarm mode.
Added Zetron Desktop Microphone on page 57.
Added MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS as an Intersite Bearer)
on page 189.
Updated Appendix A: Acom Glossary on page 347.
Updated Acom Console Unit (ACU) on page 73 for new ACU with USB.
Updated Internal Link Error on page 409 and Internal Link Master on page 410 for
MCU configured as ISB.
Updated default passwords for ALS, ADS, and ACU.
Removed older, obsolete equipment (AIU, Optical Switch, Logger Card, Logger
Subrack, and generic desktop PC speaker).
Updated ISB information in the following sections: Intersite Bearers on page 25, Time
Slots on page 25, and Capacity on page 27.
Updated Zetron Speakers on page 54 with connection information.
025-9574E
Contents
Contents
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Documentation Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Associated Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Conceptual Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors and pin-outs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Control Equipment (CCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DS3 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intersite Bearers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Slots. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backbone Time Slots for Local Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearer Time Slots for Intersite Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
21
22
23
23
23
24
25
25
25
26
27
Installation Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
General Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antistatic Work Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
As-Built Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Installer Materials and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back Room (CCE) Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Testing of New/Existing Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Additional Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Install Cable Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
30
31
31
32
33
33
34
35
36
37
38
38
Contents
Check Cabinet Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Room (Console) Preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Loop Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Twisted Pair Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coax Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Network Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
39
39
40
40
40
41
42
42
42
CCE Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

CCE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Up and Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Continuing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 43
. . 46
. . 46
. . 46
. . 47
. . 47
. . 48
. . 48
Console Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Acom Console Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Acom Console Unit Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Headset Jackbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Headset Jackbox with Volume Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Stereo Headset Jackbox without Volume Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Telephone Radio Headset Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Zetron Speakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Configuring the Select and Monitor 1 Speakers for Acom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Configuring Monitor 2 and 3 Speakers for Acom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Deskmic Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Zetron Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Legacy Desktop Microphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Integrator IRR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Software Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Contact Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
VOX Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
SoundBlaster Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Hardware Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
E&M 4-Wire Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring Acom for Integrator IRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Integrator Software Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Configuring Integrator IRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Configure Acom Console to use IRR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Model 3030 PSAP TDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Other Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operator Active Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
025-9574E
Contents
Required Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembling the Operator Active Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Console Unit Modification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMS ACU Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AcomConsole.ini File Modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foot Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Digital Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Quick Checkout Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
66
67
67
68
68
69
71
71
Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Acom Console Unit (ACU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU Internal Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU Main Board Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU Hardware Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU Main Board Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Board COM Ports 1-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Input Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Output Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSP Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACU Expansion Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-In Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators Audio Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual E1 Interface Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual E1 Fiber Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dual 4W E&M Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Line Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subrack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Circuit Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Line Subrack Grounding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Line Subrack Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VoIP Acom Line Subrack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cloning an Acom ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic ADS Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rack Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Circuit Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jumper Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
73
74
75
76
76
76
77
78
78
81
81
82
82
83
83
84
85
86
88
89
92
93
94
96
97
99
100
100
101
101
102
102
103
103
104
105
105
105
106
106
9
Contents
Changeover Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Additional Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Changeover Subracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
106
107
108
108
Acom Card Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Changeover Control Card (CCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections to MSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connections to ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCC Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-T Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-T Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-T Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-T Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-T Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-V and COV-R Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-V and COV-R Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-V Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-R Connector Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COV-V / COV-R Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
112
113
113
114
114
115
115
115
115
115
115
116
116
117
117
117
118
118
118
119
119
119
120
120
121
121
121
122
122
122
122
122
123
123
123
124
125
125
125
125
126
127
127
129
130
130
025-9574E
Contents
COV-V / COV-R Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COV-V / COV-R Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Real Time Clock (RTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Interface Unit (DIU1-2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-2 Functional Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-2 Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-2 Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debug Port Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subrack Backplane Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operational Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Interface Unit (DIU1-4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-4 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-4 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-4 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-4 Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU1-4 Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exchange Interface Unit Card (EIE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
131
131
131
132
132
133
133
134
134
134
135
135
136
138
139
142
142
143
143
143
144
144
144
144
145
145
148
148
148
149
150
150
150
151
151
152
153
153
154
154
154
154
154
154
157
157
157
159
159
160
160
11
Contents
EIE Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIE Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIE Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Control Unit (MCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Functionality in ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Functionality in ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Serial Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
G.703 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Installation in ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Installation in ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Supply Unit (MSU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
161
161
162
162
162
162
162
163
165
166
166
168
168
169
169
171
171
172
172
172
173
173
174
177
177
178
179
180
180
181
182
183
185
185
185
185
186
190
190
193
194
195
196
196
196
197
197
202
202
204
204
205
025-9574E
Contents
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset / Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU Installation in Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Sharing and Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watchdog Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programmable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ring Generator Unit (RGU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Ringer Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Serviceable Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Interface Unit (RIU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIU Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Channel TX and RX Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RIU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RVA Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RVA Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
205
205
206
207
209
211
211
212
212
213
213
213
213
214
215
215
215
216
216
217
217
218
218
219
219
219
220
221
221
221
222
222
222
224
225
225
226
226
228
228
228
229
233
233
233
234
234
235
235
237
237
237
13
Contents
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RVA Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RVA Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RVA Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signaling Management Unit (SMU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Description of Major Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Interface Unit (TIE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIE Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of TIE Functional Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIE Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIE Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIE Alarm Generation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIE Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Input/Output (UIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Physical Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Example Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
237
237
238
238
238
238
238
238
238
240
241
241
243
243
243
244
244
245
245
245
249
249
249
249
249
252
252
253
254
254
255
255
255
255
256
256
258
258
258
258
260
261
262
262
263
263
263
263
264
269
269
270
025-9574E
Contents
UIO Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
270
272
274
275
275
Replacing Acom Cards and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Replacing
Acom CCC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Console Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Console Unit Daughter Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jackbox 950-0474 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Cards in an ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Cards in an ADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RVA Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UIO Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
278
279
280
287
290
291
292
293
297
301
302
303
305
306
Changeover Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Changeover Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
The Acom Line Subrack (ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
MSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Changeover Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Changeover Control Card (CCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V / COV-R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch (COV-T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Card Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Additional Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Backbone Switch Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
ADS Changeover Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Forcing a Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Cloning an ALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Check for Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check for Environmental Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Backup Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Monitoring in IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMS ALS Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.......................
.......................
.......................
.......................
.......................
.......................
.......................
.......................
.......................
319
320
320
321
321
321
321
322
322
15
Contents
Remote Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation and Configuration References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
323
323
324
324
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specific Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recommended Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
.....
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
325
326
326
327
329
329
Appendix A: Acom Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Appendix B: System Failure Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU4 LEDs (in ADS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs . . . . . . . . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
359
360
362
364
366
368
Appendix C: Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Alarm Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMS Fault Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IMS Fault Log Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Log Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Log Input Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Log Output Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALS Alarm Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss of Signal at 64k G703 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slips at 64k G703 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIS from Remote End of 64k G703 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss of Incoming Signal at 2 MBPS Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loss of Frame Alignment of the G.703 2 MPBS Link. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Received Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Excessive EBER G703 2 MBPS for Channels 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Slips Occurring on 2 MBPS Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 MPPS Multi-frame Sync Loss. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 MBPS-CRC-4 Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
371
372
372
372
372
373
374
375
375
375
375
377
382
383
385
385
386
386
386
386
388
389
389
390
390
391
025-9574E
Contents
AIS Detection at 2 MBPS Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Remote Multiframe Alarm on 2 MPBS Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Fault During Restart or Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ring Fail Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarms Acknowledged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Local Input Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Terminal Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIU4 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMU Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2MBPS Clocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote End Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Alarm Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Urgency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Output Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Outputs over the G.703 Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MSU Alarm Inputs/Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarm Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Amux Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acked Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All OK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Terminal Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Input 1 (through 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link A Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Link B Offline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Audio Facilities Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X No Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X Receive Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X Exceeded Bit Error Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X frame slips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of MultiFrame Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X MultiFrame Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X RA1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E1 Slot 0 Link X RA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADS Alarm Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Alarm Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Inputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Link Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Link Master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DS3 Loss Of Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DS3 Loss Of Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DS3 Alarm Indication Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
391
392
392
392
393
393
393
395
395
395
397
398
398
398
398
399
399
399
400
401
401
402
402
402
402
402
403
403
403
403
404
404
404
405
405
405
406
406
406
406
407
407
407
408
408
408
409
410
411
411
412
412
17
Contents
DS3 Link Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DS3 Link Wrapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Ring Off-Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Incorrect DS3 Port Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU NV Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
No Backplane Time Slots Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Packet Memory Exhausted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Packet Memory Insufficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU Packet Memory Exhausted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU E1 Loss Of Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU E1 Loss Of Framing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU E1 Alarm Indication Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU E1 Remote Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU E1 Remote Alarm 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU E1 Remote Alarm 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU LCB Missing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU E1 Framer Slips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MCU LCB Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Boot Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2Mb Clock Source Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCU Selftest Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Alarm Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Alarm Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisor Alarms in IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supervisor Console Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Name Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarms in IMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Device Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample AcomConsole.ini file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
413
414
414
415
415
416
416
417
417
418
418
419
420
420
421
422
422
423
424
424
424
424
425
425
425
426
426
426
427
428
429
430
430
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
18
025-9574E
Documentation Set
Introduction
Documentation Set
This Manual
This manual covers hardware installation and maintenance for the Acom system. The
manual content is designed for those users who are responsible for installing and
configuring the system hardware, and those users who are maintaining it. This content
includes overview descriptions, installation requirements and procedures, specifications,
pinouts, configuration details, diagrams, and other important information.
Overview
Acom System Overview on page 20
Installation Procedures
CCE Installation Procedures on page 43
Console Installation Procedures on page 49
System Power Up and Reset on page 46
Hardware Reference
Acom System Overview on page 20
Hardware Components on page 73
Acom Card Reference on page 111
Maintenance Procedures
Replacing Acom Cards and Devices on page 277
Forcing a Changeover on page 316
Preventative Maintenance on page 319
Troubleshooting on page 325
19
Introduction
Associated Documents
The following list identifies all of the additional manuals and documents needed to
provide all of the information necessary to fully describe, install, operate, and maintain
this Acom system.
Title
P/N
Acom Software Installation and Configuration
025-9529_M
Acom Console Design
025-9587_E
Acom Console Operation
025-9530_M
System Overview
See As-Built Documentation Package
Product Definition Sheet
Network Diagram
Cabinet Layout
Position Layout
IDF Layout
Jumpering Survey
Power and Grounding
Cable Index
System Requirement Spec
Bill of Materials
Misc. Technical Information
Acom System Overview
Note
A glossary of Acom terms and acronyms is available in Appendix A:

Acom Glossary on page 347.
The Acom system is based on three major hardware groups and one primary software
application, the Integrated Management System (IMS). The primary hardware
components that make up the Acom system are the Console Hardware (hardware
components that make up the operator position), the Acom Console Unit (ACU), and the
Common Control Equipment (CCE), including the DS3 Switches.
System Conceptual Diagrams

Figure 1 is a conceptual diagram showing the overall hardware and the associated
connections for an Acom system; only one cabinet is shown for simplicity.
20
025-9574E
Figure 1: Basic Hardware Arrangement
RS-232
LAN
IMS Maintenance
Terminal
Operator Position
Acom Console Unit
RS-232
LAN
Operator Position
E1
E1
Acom Console Unit
RS-232
LAN
LAN
E1
Operator Position
RS-232
Acom Console Unit
Operator Position
E1
Acom Console Unit
E1 loop to first Acom Console Unit (ACU)
E1
Optical or
DS3 Loop
Optical or
DS3 Switches
Line
Subrack and
Circuit Cards
Line
Subrack and
Circuit Cards
M
C
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
E
M
U
E
I
E
T
I
E
U
I
O
M
S
U
Example of
Populated ALS
Line
Subrack and
Circuit Cards
Power Supply
Power Supply
Common Control
Electronics
Console Hardware
The system console hardware is the hardware located at the operator position, mainly the
computers and the Acom Console Unit (see Figure 1). The console hardware consists of a
PC with monitor that has the necessary software applications to operate the system. The
operator position typically includes speakers and microphone equipment for voice
capability.
The operator positions are connected to each other by the use of a Local Area Network
(LAN). The LAN is used to communicate and distribute management data, application
information, configuration files, and ALI/ANI information.
21
Introduction
Figure 2: Example System Console (typical operator position)
Customer Provided
Network
LAN
IRR Box
(optional)
Data
Connection
(COM)
Speaker 1 Handset
Headset
Jackbox 1
Speaker 2
Jackbox 2
Acom
Console Unit
Foot Switch
(optional)
The Acom Console Unit interfaces the operators position to the DS3 Switch with its main
function being to switch and process audio and data to and from the operators position.
The Acom Console Unit connects to the DS3 Switch by a dual E1 console loop, which
provides console backbone redundancy.
The Acom Console Units are also connected to each other, forming loops that ensure that
no cabling or CCE failure will isolate an operator position. RS-232 circuits run from the
Acom Console Unit to the consoles.
Although the Acom Console Unit is typically installed in the front room with the console
equipment, it can also be located in a closet or in the back room with the CCE.
The following list identifies the circuits used between the different components of the
system console hardware:
Operator Positions
LAN
Acom Console Unit (ACU)
E1 loops
Operator Position and ACU
RS-232
IMS Maintenance Terminal
LAN and RS-232
Console Hardware Requirements

The recommended minimum hardware and software requirements for the System Console
PC are as follows:
Pentium 4 processor, 2 GHz
22
025-9574E
533 MHz FSB

512 MB of RAM
40 GB (or larger) hard drive
CD-ROM 48x
1.44 MB 3.5 FDD
2MB (or more) video card
(minimum resolution of 1024 x 768 required)
1 x RS-232 serial port (or more)
LAN card, 10/100 MB
Flat panel or CRT monitor:
19 inch minimum
1024 x 768 minimum resolution
Touchscreen optional
Note
The only operating systems supported are Windows Vista Business

SP1 and Windows XP Professional SP3.
Electrical Requirements
The power for the system console is 110 or 220 VAC. A selection switch is located
on the back of the PC.
Connectors and pin-outs
DB9 to RJ45 cable to Acom Console Unit. (P/N 709-7615)
RJ-45 connector for LAN
Common Control Equipment (CCE)

The CCE includes the 19-inch, 6-unit equipment racks that contain the Acom Line
Subracks (ALS), Acom Digital Switches (ADS), and their associated circuit cards. The
CCE is networked to operator positions, providing switching for voice and data
communication and dispatch console functions.
Each subrack can hold up to 13 Acom cards. The Acom Line Subracks contain all of the
required interfacing to line services. The equipment rack also contains rate converters,
modems, power supplies, plus all of the necessary cabling, including the DS3 backbone.
The Acom system provides the necessary signaling functions to properly interface to the
line interfaces. The CCE also provides interfaces to the operator console positions through
the use of DS3 Switches and an E1 link. See Figure 1.
The Acom system supports the distribution of console configuration files using a Local
Area Network (LAN). A maintenance computer running the Integrated Maintenance
Software (IMS) provides the system with configuration and diagnostic reporting tools.
23
Introduction
DS3 Switches
The Acom system employs a DS3 bus-based architecture with distributed switching nodes
(see Figure 3).
DS3 Acom systems use a DS3 backbone supported by DS3 switching equipment
consisting of multiple ADSes (Acom DS3 Subracks) connected to Line and Console
interfacing equipment (ALS and ACU respectively). Each ADS consists of DS3 (DCU)
and E1 (MCU) interfacing equipment.
Figure 3: Basic System Hardware Components
Console
E1
CONSOLE LOOP
DS3 Ring
Console
ACU
DS3 Switch
DS3 Switch
ALS
External
Equipment
Radio
Equipment
Self-healing
backbone
ACU
ACU
DS3 Switch
DS3 Switch
COS
ALS
Telephone
Equipment
Digital
Logging
Equipment
Digital I/O
Equipment
VLS
Console
Maintenance
Terminal
Logging
Equipment
The Acom Console Unit (ACU) and the Acom Line Subrack (ALS) interconnect to the
DS3 Switches using time slots on a digital E1 link. Time slots within the E1 protocol are
assigned for both voice-frequency (VF) and data information. Each Acom DS3 Subrack
(ADS) supports up to 6 E1 links, depending upon the number of MCU cards installed
inside the subrack.
The DS3 ring is made up of 21 E1 buses, of which 1 bus is reserved for system messaging.
Of the remaining 20 buses, time slot 0 is reserved for E1 framing, leaving 20 x 31 = 620,
64Kbps time slots available for audio switching.
The DS3 consists of a dual DS3 bus that is self-healing under failure conditions. Failure
in the equipment or in a section of the ring itself will cause the adjacent DS3 ring
equipment to loop back the buses, restoring a ring architecture. The DS3 switching
equipment and associated line and channel interfacing equipment can be fully duplicated
with hot-standby change over capability. This approach allows the Acom system to
employ multiple interfaces per card, while ensuring no single point of failure.
24
025-9574E
Intersite Bearers
An intersite bearer (ISB) is a means of sharing resources among two or more sites that are
connected within the same Acom system but may be miles apart. Using ISB links,
resources at one site can be used by console operators at any connected site. A console
operator at Site A can answer a call being received at Site B and can transmit over a line
that is physically located at Site B. Console operators at remote sites can be included in
conferences, patches, and intercoms just as if they were local. A typical usage is
transmitting from Site A to a radio that is out of range of Site A but within range of Site B.
No difference should be noticed between local and remote lines, except possibly a slightly
slower response time on lines that actually reside at another site. Line and console
numbers are unique among all sites, so theres no danger of confusing, for example,
Console 10 and Radio Line 20 with any other console and line.
Optionally, ISBs can also carry digital I/O for voting monitor and control of remote radio
lines. When this option is enabled, some digital I/O can be configured to pass over ISBs
with other digital I/O remaining local.
ISB connections are implemented between ADSs of separate Acom sites, by way of E1 or
T1 connections on the MCU4 cards. Every ISB has an Incoming and an Outgoing side.
That is, one MCU4 port must be configured as an Incoming bearer, and the mating MCU4
port on the other site must be configured as an Outgoing bearer. Each ADS can support up
to six ISBs, and there can be up to 16 ISB groups in a network. Extended bearers are used
on a point-to-point basis to complement the Main bearer.
Each ISB port is monitored for stability. If a certain number of destabilizing events should
occur within a certain period of time, the port would be temporarily disabled. If port is
configured for redundancy, this would cause a change-over to a Standby ISB group. The
port would remain unavailable until a certain number of stabilizing events occurred within
a certain period of time. The port would then be enabled again, and a change-over of the
bearer group back to the Main group should occur. The event types, time parameters, and
redundancy are specified by way of IMS ADS.
In addition to IMS ADS, some ISB setup may need to be done in IMS ALS and/or IMS
ACU, as well as in Acom Console Designer. For more information on ISBs, and for
configuration procedures, see To set up intersite bearers (ISBs) in Acom Software
Installation and Configuration.
Time Slots
A time slot can be thought of simply as a data transmission unit on the E1 link. (For a
more detailed definition, see time slot and frame in the glossary.)
Backbone Time Slots for Local Resources
Each uniquely identifiable resource (radio lines, phone lines, ringdown lines, intercom
lines and utility audio devices) requires a backbone time slot for communication between
the console and the CCE. Each console also requires a backbone time slot, and each
25
Introduction
system tone generator requires a backbone time slot. Consoles automatically request a
backbone timeslot as soon as the operator is online (logged into ACS software).
Console screens can be designed to have a Backbone Status indicator that monitors the
supply of backbone time slots. If the indicator should turn from green (which indicates
<90% of the backbone time slots are in use) to yellow (which indicates that 90-99% are in
use), the console operator would be expected to review the resources in use by that
console and determine whether any can be released. If the indicator should turn to red
(which indicates that 100% are in use), resource selection is possible, but the audio is not
available until another active resource is released.
Phone/Radio line resources can be allocated backbone time slots either permanently or
dynamically:
Permanent allocation The time slot will be allocated from the time slot pool
when the line first starts up, guaranteeing that the line can always receive and send
audio.
Dynamic allocation The time slot will be allocated from the time slot pool on an
as-needed basis (for example, when an operator selects or monitors the line).
The rationale behind the dynamic allocation design is the same as with all trunking type
designs, such as all public phone networks: all physical circuits are not typically in use at
any given time. As long as the traffic model is understood, it is possible to have many
more potential connections than there are physical circuits.
Acoms dynamic allocation model supports prioritization of the circuits to be switched in
case the backbone time slots are ever full when an attempt to access a circuit is made. If an
accurate traffic model is known and Acom is configured correctly, this situation should not
occur. However, if it does, the following priorities are used (listed with highest priority
first):
1. consoles
2. permanent phone lines
3. permanent radio lines
4. fixed connections
5. system tones
6. utility audio
7. dynamic phone lines
8. dynamic radio lines
Bearer Time Slots for Intersite Resources
Each audio resource usage (such as monitoring a line, selecting a line, or joining a
conference) over an ISB link requires a bearer time slot.
Like backbone time slots, bearer time slots can be made available for resource use across
an intersite bearer either dynamically (as needed) or permanently.
26
025-9574E
Console screens can be designed to have a Bearer Status indicator that monitors the
supply of bearer time slots. If the indicator should turn from green (which indicates <90%
of the bearer time slots are in use) to yellow (which indicates that 90-99% are in use), the
console operator would be expected to review the resources in use by that console over
ISB links and determine whether any can be released. If the indicator should turn to red
(which indicates that 100% are in use), resource selection is possible, but the audio is not
available until another active resource is released.
Capacity
Using dynamic allocation of backbone time slots, an Acom system can support up to 200
consoles and 2,200 lines. The actual maximum number of consoles and lines that can be
active in the system at any given time depends on the extent to which dynamic allocation
is used.
In a multi-site system employing intersite bearers, the maximum number of consoles and
lines that can be active in the system at any given time further depend on how many
consoles and lines are configured for replication, and the extent to which the bearer time
slots are allocated dynamically.
27
Introduction
28
025-9574E
Installation Preparation
This chapter describes the steps necessary to prepare for Acom installation. These
instructions are guidelines and contain sufficient information to help you install the
equipment, however, you will need project-specific information to completely install the
equipment. See Associated Documents on page 20.
The installation procedures in this chapter are:
General Preparation on page 30
Operating Environment on page 30
Safety on page 30
System Architecture on page 31
As-Built Documentation on page 32
Back Room (CCE) Preparations on page 33
Recommended Installer Materials and Equipment on page 33
Testing of New/Existing Circuits on page 34
Install Additional Power on page 35
Install Grounding System on page 36
Install Cable Trays on page 37
Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc Wall on page 38
Lightning Protection on page 38
Check Cabinet Route on page 39
Environment on page 39
Front Room (Console) Preparations on page 40
Console Loop Installation on page 40
Twisted Pair Loops on page 40
Coax Loops on page 41
Patch Panel on page 42
Console Network Installation on page 42
29
General Preparation
Zetron cabinets that house the subracks are staged at the factory and are typically installed
on site by Zetron technical personnel. Any installation is preceded by a site analysis and
preparation to ensure that the equipment is in a proper operating environment. The
following guidelines are considered part of the site preparation; all equipment
specifications must be maintained.
Adequate space must be available for ingress of cabinets and equipment.
Space requirements must allow for proper placement of equipment and safely
accommodate cabling.
Space requirements must allow for safe access to equipment so that personal can
properly service and maintain the equipment.
Support flooring must be able to adequately anchor cabinets according to local
codes and practices.
Adequate ventilation and cooling must be available for proper equipment operation.
Adequate space must be available for cable trays if required.
Operating Environment
The Acom is designed for installation and operation within areas suitable for
telecommunications equipment. Environmental factors such as air temperature and
humidity and presence of electromagnetic interference (including line disturbances) may
affect reliability and reduce system availability.
The requirements for temperature and humidity are listed in the Absolute Maximum
Ratings paragraph listed in the Acom Line Subrack Specifications, page 100. Note that the
specifications are for the ambient air surrounding the subrack. Compliance with the
specifications must also consider measuring the air temperature in the space directly
below the subrack.
Other guidelines relating to the installation environment are as follows:
The installation environment must be free of dust, moisture and vapor. The subrack
is designed for ease of access to cards and for cable entry. It is not protected against
ingress of particles or liquids that may deposit on the surfaces of the circuit cards
and on the metallic surfaces of connectors.
The installation environment must be free of excessive vibration and shock.
Safety
There are two types of circuits that can be connected to an Acom.
Telecom Network Voltage (TNV)
Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV)
30
025-9574E
General Preparation
The TNV circuits are designed to connect to external lines and may carry hazardous
voltages.
Because it is possible to work on the Acom system when the equipment is live and
connected to external circuits, extreme care must be exercised to avoid touching a TNV.
Those areas include the front sections of cards and the subracks lower backplane.
Incoming cabling will also be connected to TNV circuits and may carry hazardous
voltages.
Antistatic Work Practice
All Acom system cards are static sensitive; handling and installation must take place
within antistatic work areas. The recommended guidelines for antistatic work practice are
as follows:
The area should be free of unnecessary paper, plastic, or other static producing
items.
Only conductive or antistatic materials may be used for storage and packaging of
cards.
Workbenches should have an antistatic work surface (such as a conductive mat)
connected to a protective earth.
Personnel should use conductive wrist or ankle straps connected to earth through a
suitable resistance.
The antistatic system should be connected to the same protective earth as the rack.
Care should be exercised to minimize human contact with conductive areas of
circuit cards. Contact at handles and at card edges, not the connectors, is preferred.
There should be no contact with a card and human hair or clothing.
Racking equipment should be constructed with ESD earth-bond points for
convenient connection of wrist straps when installing or removing cards and
subracks.
Before you begin installation, review this manual, the As-Built documentation, and the
manuals listed below. The sections in this manual are prepared in a sequence in which the
system should be installed. If you need further assistance, please call Zetron. The contact
information can be found at http://www.zetron.com. There may be a fee charged for
providing service outside of normal business hours.
System Architecture
Acom consists of Acom Line Subracks (ALS), Acom DS3 Subracks (ADS), Acom
Console Units, Acom Router Console Units, Acom Changeover SubRacks (CSR), 48VDC power supplies, and other associated Acom and third-party hardware. A DS3 ring
is used to connect the switching devices.
31
Figure 4: Acom Architecture

Console
DS3 Ring
E1
CONSOLE LOOP
PABX
PSTN
Console
DS3 Switch
DS3 Switch
COS
Self-healing
backbone
ACU
ACU
DS3 Switch
ALS
DS3 Switch
CSR
ACU
ALS
RADIO
LOGGER
Console
Maintenance
Terminal
As-Built Documentation
A collection of system drawings are referenced by this manual to provide specific details
about the system to be installed. The part number for these drawings are generalized in
this manual, the specific document numbers will vary between systems and contracts.
The backroom equipment is to be installed in 19" EIA shielded cabinets. The layout of the
cabinets is detailed in the Cabinet Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-070). This drawing details
the location of the hardware as well as the inter-cabinet cabling for all connections except
digital links (such as E1 or T1), and the cross connect wiring between demarc blocks. The
Cabinet Layout Drawing shows how the ALSs connect to the Changeover Subracks
(COS) and how the COS connects to the cabinet patch panels or demarc blocks. The
Cabinet Layout Drawing identifies the installed cabinet equipment and the slot locations
for the system cards.
The layout and identification of specific punchdown blocks and patch panel connections
(such as BNC, RJ45, or RJ21) are detailed in the IDF Layout drawing (045-xxxx-072).
This drawings shows specific details on the location of each demarc block and patch panel
connection in the back of the Acom cabinets. This drawing identifies the external
interfaces for the Acom cabinets.
The digital links (E1 and T1) between cabinet components are detailed in the Network
Diagram (041-xxxx-062). In addition to the digital link connections between devices, the
Network Diagram also shows how the Acom Console Units connect together and then to
the back room equipment. The Network Diagram includes address and other information
on each Acom device.
32
025-9574E
Back Room (CCE) Preparations
Power for most devices is provided by a -48VDC supply that derives its output from a
115VAC input source. The power supplies may feed fuse or circuit breaker panels located
in each cabinet to distribute the power. Each device in the cabinet must be grounded to a
copper ground bar located within the Acom cabinet. The ground bars within each cabinet
must be earth grounded by an electrician before power is applied. The specific details on
power and grounding of the Acom cabinets can be found in the Power and Ground
Diagram (045-xxxx-074).
Recommended Installer Materials and Equipment

Helper Instruments LineMan test box, VF meter, or equivalent
Zip ties, various sizes
Velcro, various sizes
Split loom for dressing positions
Multimeter, Fluke DMM, or equivalent
Label maker or other cable labels
Cordless drill w/square bit for 8x3/4 screws
RJ45 crimp tool and connectors
BNC crimp tool and connectors
ESD wrist strap with alligator clip
Assorted tools including screw drivers
Work light
Step ladder
Telephone test set, Butt Set, or equivalent

Prior to system installation the site must be prepared for the Acom system. The specific
details of expected modifications or actions to be performed prior to system installation
are detailed in the Site Interface Requirements document (041-xxxx-yyy). This document
will describe the cabling, power, ground, environmental conditions, circuit interfaces, and
physical and electrical requirements that must be met prior to system installation. It will
describe what to expect during installation to include the physical dimensions of the
equipment, cable lengths to be provided, and equipment to be provided by the customer.
This section is meant to provide only generalizations of how to prepare the site for the
Acom system.
33
Testing of New/Existing Circuits

The installer is responsible for the testing/measurement of all customer circuits prior to
equipment installation. These tests should be done as soon as possible to avoid installation
delays.
To test POTS circuits (exchange, end-end, loop out/ring in):

1. Place a telephone test set or analog desk phone across the Tip and Ring of each
circuit. Take the phone off-hook and verify it returns dial tone.
2. Place an outgoing call and verify the call is connected.
3. Ask the remote party to press and hold the DTMF 5 key on their phone and
measure the level at the customer demarc. Record this level in either Vrms or Dbm.
To test local radio channels (PTT/COR):

1. Measure the receive level from the radio by generating an incoming signal (from
radio) using either a test set or a mobile radio.
a. Radio Service Monitor Method - If using a service monitor, generate a 1000Hz
sine wave at %60 deviation at full quieting (FM) or %90 modulation (AM).
Record the level on the receive pair from the radio.
b. Voice Method - Key up a mobile unit and say a long deep four or another
deep powerful sound and measure the level from the radio in either Vrms or
dBm.
c. DTMF Method - Key up a mobile unit and press the mobiles DTMF 5 key.
Most mobiles generate DTMF at %60 deviation (FM). Measure the level of
receive audio from the radio.
2. Verify that grounding the PTT lead keys the transmitter. Momentarily ground the
PTT line to the transmitter and verify the base station keys. Record your results.
(Some base stations require power to key instead of ground.)
3. Verify the receiver provides a COR signal on carrier presence. Measure the COR
lead from the receiver and generate a signal on the channel to break squelch. Note
the signaling state change.
4. Verify the required Tx audio level to generate %60 deviation (FM) or %90
modulation (AM).
a. Generate a 1000Hz tone using a VF test box such as the Helper Line Master at
-10dBm onto the base station's transmit pair.
b. Activate the transmitter by signaling the PTT line and measure the transmitter's
deviation (FM) or modulation (AM).
c. Record your results.
To test Tone Remote radios:

1. Measure the receive level from the radio by generating an incoming signal (from
radio) using either a test set or a mobile radio.
34
025-9574E
a. Radio Service Monitor Method - If using a service monitor generate a 1000Hz

sine wave at %60 deviation (FM) or %90 modulation (AM) at full quieting.
Record the level on the receive pair from the radio.
b. Voice Method - Key up a mobile unit and say a long deep "four" or another
deep powerful sound and measure the level from the radio in either Vrms or
dBm.
c. DTMF Method - Key up a mobile unit and press the mobile's DTMF 5 key.
Most mobiles generate DTMF at %60 deviation (FM). Measure the level of
receive audio from the radio.
2. Verify the required Tx audio level to generate %60 deviation (FM) or %90
modulation (AM).
a. Generate a key signal (Low Level Guard Tone) using any means available such
as the existing console or a Helper Line Master VF meter.
b. With the channel keyed with the LLGT generate a 1000Hz test tone at -10dBm
to start.
c. Record the level required to obtain the needed tx modulation.
Testing E1/T1 circuits
Use of a T1 tester with the ability to measure the level of the T1 span and verify framing.
The meter should be able to run Bit Error Rate tests and measure the results.
Install Additional Power
120V AC
Power
Source
A
120V AC
Power
Source B
The Acom system is powered from a combination of 48Vdc and 115Vac. The Acom
system will include a 115Vac to 48Vdc power supply. The customer should provide
NEMA L5-15R twist-lock AC power receptacles within 1.8 meters (6 feet) of the
proposed Acom cabinet location. If your system will be redundant, the installer should
supply at least three AC receptacles from circuit breaker A and another three receptacles
from circuit breaker B. Powering the CCE from a UPS source is recommended for fault
tolerance. Refer to the Acom Site Interface Requirements document (041-xxxx-yyy) for
additional details on the power requirements. The Power and Ground Drawing (041-xxxx074) details the internal power and ground connections for the Acom cabinets.
35
Install Grounding System

Each Acom cabinet will come equipped with a copper ground bar mounted within the
cabinet. All of the cabinets components will be grounded to this bar. The cabinets copper
ground bar should be connected to earth ground (cold water pipe) for safety. The
grounding of the Acom cabinets should be done by a qualified electrician to meet
electrical codes. Do not jumper the grounds between Acom cabinets together, each cabinet
should have its own high gauge (6 to 16mm2 (10 to 6 AWG)) stranded copper wire
connected to the equipment rooms ground point.
If the back room does not already have a suitable ground system, one should be installed
that supplies a copper ground plate within 15 meters (50 feet) of the intended cabinet
location. The Power and Ground Drawing (041-xxxx-074) details the internal power and
ground connections for the Acom cabinets.
DANGER! Improper system grounding can cause electric shock to
personnel, damage to equipment, and system malfunctions.
Proper earth grounding is an important electrical
consideration. The earth ground protects the system and
personnel from lightning strikes, provides a path for any
electrostatic discharge (ESD), and provides a solid reference
for the system. Improper grounding of the system could cause
susceptibility to ESD, induced noise from input power wiring,
and reduced effectiveness of lightning protection devices.
Induced noise could cause false signal indications or a variety
of system errors.
A "star" grounding system (a single point ground to which satellite grounds are connected)
is the best grounding system. The central "star" point must be firmly attached to a low
impedance earth ground point, such as a ground rod. If protective punch-down blocks are
used, a large diameter (16 mm2 (6-gauge)) copper conductor (or an equivalent braided
strap/bus bar) must be connected between each block's ground lug and the earth ground or
central "star" ground point. With the protected punch-down blocks, it is best to wire
directly to earth ground if possible. Each piece of equipment should have its chassis
grounded to the central "star" point with a separate ground wire. The size of the wire
depends on the length of the run, 4mm2 (12 gauge) is adequate if the length is less than 4.5
meters (15 feet). The length of the runs should be minimized. Securely connect a
grounding wire to the case of each unit making sure metal connection is made (no paint or
oxidation layer). Most Zetron equipment provides a grounding stud. If the console
includes a computer, connect an individual grounding wire to the computer chassis. Figure
5 shows a central "star" grounding system. All earth grounds in the system should be
isolated from signal lines. It is easy to couple ESD or lightning noise spikes if these lines
run parallel for any distance. The AC power wires (and DC power to a lesser degree)
should also be routed separately. AC lines can have large switching current noise spikes
that could couple into signal lines.
36
025-9574E
Figure 5: Central Star Grounding System

Operator Console Position
Jackbox
CRT
Common
Control
Electronics
PC
Digital Switch
Console
Position
Acom Cabinet1
Ground Wires
2.5mm2 (14 AWG) or Larger
Acom Cabinet2
Protected
Punch-down
Block
Copper or Aluminum
Ground Plates
Radio
A
Radio
B
PBX/CO
Phone
Interface
EARTH GROUND
50mm2 (#0 AWG) or Larger
Caution!
Do not connect signal ground to the central "star" ground. The

conditioning and reference of the signal grounds is controlled
inside the Zetron equipment. The system will be more
susceptible to noise interference.
Install Cable Trays

The power and ground should be run separate from audio signals. A minimum distance of
38cm (12 inches) is required for parallel runs. Most back rooms have a false floor that
allows for the routing of power and ground beneath the cabinet. Zetron recommends
running all audio and signal cables in the overhead cable trays, away from the power and
ground. The cable trays will need to be high enough to allow the Acom cabinets to sit
underneath. Refer to the Site Requirements Document (041-xxx-yyy) for the physical
37
dimensions of the Zetron cabinets. The cable trays should provide a path for voice and
signal cable routing between the Acom cabinets and the demarc wall.
Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc Wall

The telco, radio, and digital I/O interfaces are typically provided via a 25-pair RJ21X
punch-down terminal which has CO/PABX wiring on one side and open terminals on the
other side. RJ21X terminals are wired to a 25-pair connector jack on the side of the
terminal block. A 25-pair connectorized cable interfaces from the terminal block jack to
the CO/PABX equipment. The terminals are punched directly to cabling on both sides,
eliminating the 25-pair cable connectors.
RJ21X Split-Blocks (Zetron Part No. 802-0263 or equivalent) are configured with 4
terminals side to side by 50 terminals top to bottom. From side to side, the two left
terminals in each row are electrically identical, and the two right terminals are electrically
identical. The two left terminals are isolated, however, from the two right terminals.
Normally, bridging clips are installed onto the two center terminals in order to connect
the right-side wiring to the left-side circuits. This provides a means of opening circuits
(by removing bridging clips) or temporarily re-routing lines (by cross-wiring different
circuits) for test purposes. Terminal numbering from top to bottom starts with RJ21 pin26,
then pin1, then 27, then 2 as shown below.
Also, paired bridging clips (convenience) and fused bridging clips (surge protection) are
available from other vendors to facilitate these circuit terminals.
The Acom system will require a dedicated space on the wall for the demarcation of Acom
circuits. A 1200x2400mm sheet of 18mm plywood (4x8x) should be painted white and
bolted to the wall at this location. Mount the split-block type punchdown block to the
demarc wall in preparation for Acom system installation. The Acom 25-pair cables will
come terminated to an RJ21 connector for direct connection to connectorized type 66
blocks. By providing accurate lengths between the proposed cabinet location and the
demarc wall, cables of the necessary length can be provided. The customer may at their
discretion, cut off the RJ21 and terminate the cables by punching down all of the
connections to the exact length. Refer to the Site Requirements Document (041-xxxx-yyy)
for the number and use of the type 66 blocks.
Lightning Protection
Arc arresters right on the telephone demarcation/punch-down blocks can shunt hazardous
voltages at their source. These easily replaceable protection modules protect your
equipment investment. Ask your Zetron sales person how to order punch down blocks
with built in protectors.
Additional protection for the primary power line may be obtained from other vendors, and
should be employed to protect from lightning strikes to power lines.
Proper grounding techniques are critically important to ensure proper lightning
suppression and reliable operation of the Acom Console System.
38
025-9574E
Lightning grounds are typically routed directly from lightning arrestors/suppressors to the
main ground bonding terminal, which in turn is typically soldered or welded directly to the
site grounding network (ground rods, etc.). Each lightning protection device should be
grounded separately with the shortest possible wire length to the bonding junction. To
minimize path resistance and impedance, a large-diameter wire (typically 16mm2 (4
AWG)) green-colored conductor is used, having minimum bend radii of 20cm (8 inches)
to minimize inductive effects. Also, other wires should be separated at least 10cm (4
inches) from these grounds to prevent arc-over during lightning strikes.
Further information is provided in Zetron Technical Bulletin 027-0069: Proper Signal
Grounding Techniques for Radio Sites.
STOP
Warning! Operating the Acom Console System without adequate voltage

suppression devices on the telephone and radio connections
may result in costly damage not covered by warranty.
Protection kits and applications assistance are available from
Zetron.
Check Cabinet Route

Walk the path you expect to use when moving the Zetron cabinets to the CCE and measure
all ceilings, elevators, and doorways for clearance. Check this against the cabinet
dimensions to ensure a smooth installation.
Environment
Ensure that the CCE is cool, dry, and relatively dust free. Air conditioning may be
required to keep the room at a constant temperature. The use of fans by the Acom
equipment is kept to a minimum.
Suggested conditions:
Temperature: below 21.7 C (71 F)
Humidity: below 50% non-condensing
39
Front Room (Console) Preparations

Console Loop Installation
The consoles are connected in a chain to form rings or loops for redundancy. Either 75ohm
coax or 100 ohm twisted pair loops must be installed in preparation for the console
installation. All connections should be labeled as per the Acom Network Diagram (041xxxx-062).
The console loop cables should not run adjacent to power or EMI sources. Ensure that the
cable is a minimum of 30cm (12) from any parallel power cables.
Twisted Pair Loops
If the Acom Console Units are to be connected using 100 UTP (CAT5e/6), it is assumed
that an RJ45 wall plate or patch box has been installed at the position. Use Zetron cable
709-7596 or equivalent to connect the position to the wall plate.
Generic Twisted Pair Loop
CCE
Patch Panel
Wall
Plate
ACU X
Port 1
Port 2
Wall
Plate
ACU X+1
Port 1
Port 2
Wall
Plate
ACUX+2
40
Port 1
Port 2
025-9574E
Front Room (Console) Preparations
The amount of signal loss and noise that can result from this type of installation
significantly reduce the length of runs that are allowed. The fact that these loops often run
from one position to the CCE and back to the next position adds additional loss.
Max Length
Between Devices
Recommended
Cable Type
60 meters (200ft)
CAT5e/CAT6
Coax Loops
If the Acom Console Units are to be connected using 75 coax, it is assumed that a BNC
wall plate or patch box has been installed at the position. Use Zetron cable 709-7611 to
connect the SMB connectors on the Acom Console Unit Dual E1 card to the respective
port on the BNC wall plate.
Generic Coax Loop
CCE
Patch Panel
Wall
Plate
ACU X
Port 1
TX RX
Port 2
TX RX
Wall
Plate
ACU X+1
Port 1
TX RX
Port 2
TX RX
Wall
Plate
ACUX+2
Port 1
TX RX
Port 2
TX RX
41
This physical medium provides the best performance over long runs. The choice of coax
will depend on the length of the run. The Acom system can tolerate 6dB of signal loss at
2Mhz. The follow table provides some guidelines for choosing the right cable.
Max Length Between
Devices
Recommended Cable Type
15 meters (50ft)
RG179u
150 meters (500ft)
RG59
300 meters (1000ft)
RG6
Over 300 meters (1000ft)
Singlemode or multimode fiber
Patch Panel
All connections should terminate in a customer provided patch panel in the back room and
mini patch panels/wall plate at the position. Each console position will require a wall plate
or patch box to be installed to support two E1 links and one RJ45 Ethernet connection.
Figure 6: Position Patch Panel Example
E1 Loop
CAT5/6 UTP
BNC Coax
Ethernet
Zetron will provide the necessary jumper cable to connect the Acom Console Unit to the
position wall plate. The wall plate should be mounted within 2 meters (6 feet) of the
intended Acom Console Unit position.
Console Network Installation

The Acom consoles require a dedicated Local Area Network (LAN) to facilitate
maintenance and the distribution of configurations to all positions. The loss of the network
will not affect console operation.
Run a CAT5e/6 connection between the backroom and each console position to support
the Acom LAN. Terminate each end to a female RJ45 connection. Terminate the CCE end
of the CAT5e/6 cable to either an RJ45 patch panel or type 66 block. The CCE end of
these links will be cross connected to Zetron Ethernet routers during the cabinet
installation. The console end of these links will terminate to a wall plate or position patch
panel. The LAN connection will be cross-connected to the console PC using a short
Ethernet patch cable during the console installation.
Continuing the Installation

Acom installation continues with CCE installation instructions in the following chapter.
42
025-9574E
CCE Installation
CCE Installation Procedures
This chapter describes the steps necessary to install the CCE (back room) and the IMS
terminal. These instructions are guidelines and contain sufficient information to help you
install the equipment, however, you will need project-specific information to completely
install the equipment. See Associated Documents on page 20.
The installation procedures in this chapter are:
CCE Installation on page 43
CCE Installation
Inventory the delivered hardware against the Zetron pack slip to verify all equipment was
included. Many accessories are bundled into the Acom Console Unit box.
Unpack and Position the Cabinets
When the cabinets arrive they will be crated. Four people and a large area of 6x6 meters
(20x20 feet) will be required to unbox the cabinets. An electric screw driver will assist in
the removal of the top and side of the crate. The cabinets will ship with the doors removed
and stored in the crate. With the top and side removed from the shipping crate, slide the
cabinet out of the crate and stand it up on the wheels. Roll the cabinet into the desired
location in the equipment room. To secure the room against vibration from earthquakes
the installer may remove the wheels and bolt the cabinets to the floor.
The doors should remain off until installation and commissioning is complete. They must
be installed to provide FCC part15 compliance for emissions.
43
Remove Zip Ties

The cables that are intended to be permanently installed will be secured with Velcro or
hook/loop tape. The use of Velcro reduces any stress put on the cables. Cables or hardware
secured with Zip-Ties are intended to be temporary for shipping purposes only. Cut all zip
ties to free cables for installation.
Install Rackmount Servers
If the Acom system shipped with a rack mount PC or server, install that now. Refer to the
Cabinet Layout (041-xxxx-070) for the location of the rack mount server. This task will
require two people.
Once installed, the servers will require AC power connections to the Acom rack mounted
power strips and grounding to the copper ground bar within the cabinet. Refer to the
Network Diagram (041-xxxx-062) for the serial connection details.
If any Ethernet routers were shipped with the system, install them now. They may need to
be rack mounted, refer to the Cabinet Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-070) for specific
locations.
Connect Earth Ground
All the equipment within the Acom cabinets has been grounded to a copper bus bar. Have
an electrician connect each Acom cabinets copper ground bar to the buildings earth
ground. A separate connection to the rooms primary ground point should be used for each
cabinet.
Connect Cabinets to Demarc Blocks
Following the Cross Connect Document (041-xxxx-yyy) to connect the Acom equipment
to the demarc wall using 25-pair cables. The signaling cables should be run away from
power sources to prevent noise from coupling. Each cable that leaves the Acom cabinets
will terminate on a patch panel. Radio and telephone circuits may terminate on a RJ21
patch panel on the rear of the Acom cabinets. The installer may plug the 25-pair cables
directly to the connectorized Acom type 66 blocks or cut off the cables end and punch
them down to get an exact length. Avoid running the 25-pair cables over sharp edges or
creating kinks in the cable. Preserve a 25mm (1) min bend radius for the CAT3 25-pair
cables.
Cross-Connect Acom Blocks to Existing/New Circuits
Using solid 24 awg wire, cross connect each circuit to the Acom type 66 blocks. The
Acom demarc details and block pinouts can be found in the Cross Connect Document
(041-xxxx-yyy).
44
025-9574E
CCE Installation
Acom Cabinet- to-Cabinet Connections

Following the Cross Connect Document (041-xxxx-yyy) connect the Acom cabinets
together using coax, 25-pair CAT3, or 4-pair CAT5. All connections out of the cabinet will
terminate on a patch panel in the back of the cabinet. The patch panel jacks have a unique
identifier that can be used to locate specific connections.
Connect Acom Cabinets to Console Loops
Install runs of 75ohm coax or 100ohm UTP cable between the patch panels in the rear of
the Acom cabinets to the backroom termination point for the Acom console loops. The
specific connections can be found in the Cross Connect Document (041-xxxx-yyy).
Install Cards
Ground yourself to the Acom cabinet using an ESD wrist strap prior to installing or
removing Acom cards. The system cards are shipped separate from the cabinets to protect
them during shipment. Use the Cabinet Layout Drawing (0451xxxx-070) to populate the
Acom Line Subracks (ALS), Changeover Sub Racks (CSR), and Acom DS3 Racks (if
applicable) with the Acom system cards and make the needed connections to the front of
each card. Verify the serial number and card type against the provided as-built records.
The cables that connect to the front of each card will be labeled with the designators of the
port at each end.
Apply Power
The cabinets will require 110AC power. Plug in the twist lock connections for the 48VDC
power supplies and any Acom 110AC rack mounted power strips to the customer provided
power receptacles. The redundant power supplies should be plugged into different AC
circuits to prevent a single point of failure.
Apply power to the Acom cabinets by closing the circuit breakers in the 48vdc power
supplies. The equipment connected to each breaker is designated in the Power and Ground
Drawing (041-xxxx-074). Turn on the power switch for the AC power strip to provide
110VAC power to the cabinets. Turn on any ADS by toggling the MSU switch on (down).
Next turn on each of the Acom Line Subracks (ALS) by toggling the MSU switch on
(down). Verify that the MSU LEDs light and the MCU initializes. Refer to the card LED
information in Table 130 on page 206.
Check each cabinets fuse distribution panel for any alarms.
Check the 48v power supply for any alarms.
Check each device for a Run indication.
45
Network
Run jumper cables between all of the network ports for the positions to the Acom LAN
router. The router may be rack mounted in one of the Acom cabinets or may just sit on a
shelf. Generally speaking it does not matter what port each console is connected to,
however, use caution when connecting a device to the last port of the router as it may be
switched for use as an uplink expansion port. Each LAN port on the router will have an
LED to indicate a connectivity and activity.
Maintenance Terminal
The maintenance terminal is a PC that is dedicated to monitoring the system and is used
for maintenance and diagnostics. Install the maintenance PC in the CCE within 50 feet of
the Acom cabinets. The recommended location would be in an adjacent rack (on a shelf)
or on a nearby table.
For DS3 switches, connect serial cable 709-7615 between COM1 of the maintenance PC
and on J8 port 1 (right port) on the front of the DS3 card near the bottom. Connect the
Ethernet port on the front of each DS3 card to a free port on the Ethernet LAN router.
Connect the Ethernet port of the Maintenance terminal to a free port on the LAN router.
Make the appropriate PC connections and turn them on. Reboot the maintenance terminal
PC. Start the IMS Terminal (Net_Mgr) application on the Maintenance terminal PC and
verify all CCE devices show communications. No communication with the Acom Console
Units and some urgent system alarms will be normal at this time because the console loops
have not been connected.
System Power Up and Reset

System Power Up Sequence
The power up procedure in this section is to be used on an Acom system that is known to
be configured and functional.
46
025-9574E
System Power Up and Reset
Power Up Sequence
Note
Verify that all Acom equipment is powered down/off before starting

the power up sequence. This includes all Acom Console Units, DS3
Switches, ADSs, and ALSs in the system. Also verify that Acom
Console Software is not running. If Acom Console Software is
running, select the Configure button and select Exit to
Windows.
To power up an Acom system:

1. Power up all DS3 Switches.
2. Wait two minutes after all DS3 Switches have been powered on before proceeding
to next step.
3. Power up side A of the Acom system ALSs. These would normally be all ALSs
with the names of ALS1A or an A in the name after the word ALS. These ALSs
are sometimes referred to as the Main ALSs.
4. Wait one minute after all ALSs on the A side have been powered on before
proceeding to the next step.
5. Power up side B of the Acom system ALSs. These would normally be all ALSs
with the names of ALS1B or a B in the name after the word ALS. These ALSs
are sometimes referred to as the Standby ALSs.
6. Wait one minute before proceeding to the next step.
7. The system should be active on the A side of the Acom Equipment. This can be
verified by looking at the Information Alarm LED on the ALSs. This is the Green
LED located on the MSU card right below the power switch next to the Yellow and
Red LEDs. All ALSs on the A side should have the Information Alarm LED on
and the B side ALSs should have the Information Alarm LED off.
8. If IMS Terminal/Net_Mgr is available, verify that all ALSs are now reporting to
the software.
9. Power up all Acom Console Units in the system.
10. Wait at least one minute after the last Acom Console Unit in the system has been
powered on for all Acom Console Units to come online.
11. If IMS Terminal/Net_Mgr is available, verify that all Acom Console Units are now
reporting to the software.
12. Start Acom Console Software at each position and logon to a screen.
13. The Acom system should now be up and ready for operation.
Restart
The redundant and self-healing nature of the system design implies that only an unusual
event (like a total power failure) would require restarting the entire system. In such an
event, the procedure is no different than it was for the initial startup.
47
In the case of system components that were switched off for repair or replacement, they
may be started again at any time. Once they have cleared reset and finished their self-tests,
the IMS application is used to finish any configuration required and returns them to
service.
Manual Reset
The individual Acom hardware components may be reset in various ways:
Reset the Acom Console Unit by sending a command from the IMS terminal or by
physically cycling the AC power switch on the rear of the unit.
Reboot the console PC.
Reset the DS3 Switches, in any, by manually cycling the power switch on the MSU
cards.
Reset the ALS cards by using the reset button on the front of the primary MCU3
card (the MCU card in slot #0). You can also reset the ALS by cycling the power
supply.
All of the equipment in the system retains its individual programming when reset. Alarms
are not saved during reset and will not return when the unit comes out of reset unless the
alarm condition still exists.
Continuing the Installation

Acom installation continues with console front room instructions in the following
chapter.
48
025-9574E
Acom Console Unit Installation
Console Installation Procedures
The following procedures are continued from the CCE installation procedures in the
previous chapter. The installation procedures in this chapter are:
Acom Console Unit Installation on page 49
Headset Jackbox on page 51
Headset Jackbox with Volume Control on page 52
Telephone Radio Headset Interface on page 53
Zetron Speakers on page 54
Deskmic Option on page 57
Integrator IRR on page 58
Model 3030 PSAP TDD on page 64
Other Interfaces on page 65
Operator Active Lamp on page 65
Foot Switch on page 69
E1 Digital Interfaces on page 71
Console Quick Checkout Instructions on page 71

The following section describes the steps involved in the installation of a single operator
position. Since every Acom system is unique, some of these steps will not apply.
49
Figure 7: Generic Operator Position Layout
Nu
Esc
F1
~
`
!
1
Tab
F2
@
2
Q
F3
#
3
F4
$
4
F5
%
5
R
^
T
F6
&
7
6
Y
F7
*
8
F8
(
9
F9
)
0
F10
_
-
+
=
Sh i
S
Z
D
X
f t
Ct
r l
Atl
F
C
G
V
H
B
J
N
:
;
F11
F12
|
\
Dee
l
"
Pr i
n tc r
S
e en
I ns
e r t
Cap s
L oc k
t e
'
?
<
,
Sh i
>
.
Alt
f t
Sc r
L o l
c k
Ho
m
En
d
Pa u
g e
D
o w
n
7
m
Ho
e
/
8
Sc r ol
L o c
L o cs
Nu
L o
m
c k
Pa
g e
U
p
Pa
Ca p
L o
mc
s e
En
d
Ct
9
Pg U
p
n
s
3
PgD
n
r l
En
t e
r
De l
Acom Console PC
75 OHM
BNC -> BNC
IOIOIA
CAT5
Ethernet
VGA
Wall Plate
(BNC Demarc to
Digital Switch Loop &
Ethernet)
Active
Conversation
Lamp
75 OHM
SMB -> BNC
In Out
Monitor1
Speaker
GAME
PORT
AUDIO
OUT
Monitor2
Speaker
INPUT 1 INPUT 2
(PHONE) (RADIO)
RECORD
CONTROL
IRRInterface

HEADSET
JACKBOX
Footswitch
Deskmic
Amplifier
HEADSET
JACKBOX
DeskMicrophone
Each console position is made up of the following generic components:

Acom Console PC
Audio Interfaces (speakers, handsets, desk mic)
Other Interfaces (footswitch, active conversation lamp)
Acom Console Unit Overview

The Acom Console Unit provides the data and voice interface for each console position.
The Acom Console PC running the Acom GUI speaks serially to the COM1 data port on
the Acom Console Unit. The audio interfaces are connected to plug in modules in the
Acom Console Unit to support speakers, handsets, desk mics, and other interfaces.
50
025-9574E
Installation
Install the Acom Console Unit under desk option 950-0520. The installer may use 0240328 Mounting Template to gauge the size of the Acom Console Unit and the mounting
holes required. Position the Acom Console Unit under the work surface and secure using
self-taping screws. You may have to face the Acom Console Unit with the connections
toward the operator to facilitate maintenance and troubleshooting.
Connect the PC COM1 to the Acom Console Unit COM1 data port using cable 709-7615.
Ringing and other tones from the Console PC are mixed into the monitor speakers by the
Acom Console Unit. Often the PC Tones are brought in using Zetron OAM to Speaker
Audio Cable 709-9617. The 2.5mm male connector installs in the PC sound card output
(green connection on most PCs). The RJ45 end of this cable installs in the Audio port of
the OAM to bring in PC Tones on OAM channel 5 Rx.
Refer to ACU Under Desktop Mounting Instructions (P/N 011-0637) for additional details
on mounting the Acom Console Unit under the work surface.
For technical information, see Acom Console Unit (ACU) on page 73.
Headset Jackbox
These can include a headset, handset, select speaker, monitor speaker, IRR, desk
microphone, audio interface, or headset/handset jackbox.
Figure 8: Audio Jackbox
The Headset Jackbox (P/N 950-0474) is the standard jackbox for an Acom system. This
simple device provides a dual prong PJ-7 Style connection for a single handset or headset.
The unit is designed to mount under the work surface using the provided self taping
screws. To install, remove the top cover by removing the 2 flat head retaining screws
shown in the drawing above. With the cover off the two mounting holes are exposed. Use
the provided screws to secure the jackbox to the under side of the work surface. Once
secured, reattach the cover and run the cable to the HS1 or HS2 port of the Acom Console
Units OAM card. This jackbox includes a shielded cable that grounds the jackbox to the
OAM.
51
Headset Jackbox with Volume Control
The Headset Jackbox with volume control (P/N 950-0580) provides a standard PJ-7 style
jack for a single handset or headset. The rear of the unit offers an expansion port where a
second jackbox can be attached. Secure the jackbox to the underside of the work surface
using self-tapping screws. The top cover can be removed to facilitate mounting. Connect
the jackbox to the HS1/HS2 port of the ACUs OAM using cable 709-7682. The cable
provided with this jackbox may provide grounding for the jackbox. If not a ground stud is
available on the back of the jackbox. Refer to Dual-Prong Headset Jack Installation
Instructions (P/N 011-0670) for installation details for this jackbox.
Stereo Headset Jackbox without Volume Control

This jackbox (P/N 950-0984) allows Monitor Speaker 1 audio to be redirected to one side
of a stereo headset. If the headset is unplugged or if Speaker Enable is selected on the
console, the audio returns to MS1. It is a variation of P/N 950-0580 above and looks just
like it except that it has no volume control. It requires connection cable P/N 709-7919.
Refer to Dual-Prong Headset Jack Installation Instructions (P/N 011-0670) for
installation details for this jackbox.
Note
52
This jackbox might not be shipped preconfigured for stereo

headsets. If you do not get stereo through the headset, check the
jackbox to make sure the jumper settings are as follows:
JP1 (PTT Common Ground) = A
JP2 (Mouth Common Ground) = A
JP3 (Volume Bypass) = B
JP4 (Jack Sense) = A
JP5 (Mouth Bypass) = A
JP6 (PTT) = B
025-9574E
Telephone Radio Headset Interface
The Telephone Radio Headset Interface (TRHI) (P/N 950-9439) is an optional jackbox for
integrating 3rd party phone systems with the Acom console. It provides a dual prong PJ-7
connector to support a single headset/handset. The TRHI has a physical volume control
for the radio side (Acom) and the telephone side. The operators microphone is routed
between the phone and radio by the TRHI using the PTT signal and Off-Hook signals.
Mount the TRHI to the underside of the work surface using self-tapping screws. The cover
may be removed to facilitate its mounting. Connect Zetron cable 709-7629 between the
DB9 connector on the rear of the TRHI and the HS1 or HS2 connector on the Acom
Console Unit OAM. Connect the "PTT" wire to a Acom Console Unit digital output
configured to activate on console PTT (see the Position Layout Diagram). Connect the
"Hset" wire to a Acom Console Unit digital input configured as a "Headset Interface" that
moves audio to the speaker when the phone is off-hook (see the Position Layout Diagram).
Connect the wall bug power source and install a handset or headset. A ground connection
should be made from the rear ground post of the TRHI to earth ground for ESD protection.
Refer to the Telephone Radio Headset Interface Product Manual (P/N 025-9553) for more
information on the TRHI.
53
Zetron Speakers
Acom does not have a standardized speaker bundle. Figure 9 identifies the typical parts
used to connect up to four Zetron speakers to an Acom console. Refer to your Position
Layout Drawing (041-xxxx-071) for the specific connections.
Figure 9: Connecting Zetron Speakers to Acom
950-0884
Select
To ACU OAM
Audio Port
To PC Sound Card
MIC Audio In
(Green)
709-7887
Monitor 1
Select Speaker
PC Tones
Optional extension
709-0124
709-7875
950-0884
709-0160
Power Supply
802-0692
Monitor 1 Speaker
416-0012
To AC
Receptacle
To ACU 4W
E&M Port 1
950-0884
709-7888
Monitor 2
Monitor 2 Speaker
709-7875
To ACU 4W
E&M Port 2
709-7888
Monitor 3
950-0884
Monitor 3 Speaker
54
025-9574E
Configuring the Select and Monitor 1 Speakers for Acom
To configure OAM/Acom definitions

1. In IMS ACU, right-click on the Operators Audio module and select Acom
Definitions. If there is more than one Operators Audio module, use the one
connected to the speakers.
2. Click L/S 05 Right to open the channel 5 definition window.
3. Set Connection Type to Console PC Tones.
4. Assign Console Number (position) of the ACU.
5. Set Interface to ACS (in) + HS Speaker (out).
6. Set Tones To to Monitor Speaker 1.
7. Adjust Speaker Volume Settings if needed.
8. Click Save.
9. Click L/S 06 Right to open the channel 6 definition window.
10. Set Connection Type to Console Monitor.
12. Set Monitor Speaker ID to 1.
13. Set Primary Interface to Normal.
14. Adjust Speaker Volume Settings if needed.
15. Click Save, then Exit.
Consult the configuration guide or Project Engineer if you have any questions.
To configure OAM/Gain settings

1. In IMS ACU, right-click the Operators Audio module and select Gain Setting.
If there is more than one Operators Audio module, use the one connected to the
speakers.
2. Based on testing and using a nominal -10dBm input, the following levels in the
ACU will attain that approximate input level to the speaker. They may vary per
system and will also depend on other system gain settings. To continue our
example using channels 5 and 6:
a. Set Channel 5 Gain TX to 7.0
b. Set Channel 6 Gain TX to 7.0
3. Click Save.
To configure OAM/AGC settings

1. In IMS ACU, right-click on the Operators Audio module and select AGC
setting. If there is more than one Operators Audio module, use the one connected
to the speakers.
55
2. Ensure that both the Select and Monitor channels do not use AGC by clearing their
respective Tx Mode Enabled check boxes. To continue our example, channels 5
and 6 should have the Tx Mode Enabled check boxes cleared.
3. Click Save.
Consult the Project Engineer if specific Gain and AGC settings are required for
specific headset or speakers.
Configuring Monitor 2 and 3 Speakers for Acom
Dual 4W E&M/Acom Definitions

1. In IMS ACU, right-click on the Dual 4W E&M module and select Acom
Definitions. If there is more than one Dual 4W E&M module, use the one
connected to the speakers.
2. Click Port 01 and assign the Connection Type as Console Monitor.
5. Click Save.
6. Click Port 02 and assign the Connection Type as Console Monitor.
9. Click Save.
Dual 4w Card-Gain Settings

1. In IMS ACU, right click on the Dual 4W E&M module and select Gain Setting.
If there is more than one Dual 4W E&M module, use the one connected to the
speakers.
2. Set Gain RX to 0 and Gain TX to -1 for both channels on the Dual 4w card.
3. Click Save.
Dual 4w AGC Settings

1. The AGC Settings can be accessed by right clicking on the Dual 4W E&M
module and selecting AGC Setting. If there is more than one Dual 4W E&M
module, use the one connected to the speakers.
2. Ensure that both channels do not use AGC by clearing the Tx Mode Enabled
check boxes.
3. Click Save.
Consult the Project Engineer if specific AGC settings are required for specific
speakers.
56
025-9574E
Deskmic Option
Zetron Desktop Microphone
The Zetron Desktop Microphone (901-9660 and 901-9661, pictured below) is provided
with its own installation manual. For more information, see Zetron Desktop Microphone
Manual (P/N 025-9589).
Legacy Desktop Microphone

The desk mic option (950-0646 and 802-0154 w/ PDN 214) includes an in-line AGC
amplifier for use with a dual 4-Wire E&M Module. This option provides the required
amplification for the deskmic 802-0154 to operate with the 4-Wire E&M Module.
To install the legacy deskmic option:

1. Screw down the leads from the desk mic to the Desk Mic Amplifier J1 terminals.
Pin1 Ground
Pin2 Mic
57
Pin3 PTT
Pin4 Not Used
2. Connect the RJ45 from the desk mic amplifier to the RJ45 receptacle on the Acom
Console Unit (ACU) Dual 4-Wire E&M Module using cable 709-7692.
3. Connect red wire to ACU Dual 4-Wire E&M Module VREF plug pin 1. This is
12Vdc to power the amp.
4. Connect black wire to ACU Dual 4-Wire E&M Module VREF plug pin 2. This
is the ground reference.
Caution!
If the desk mic and IntegratorIRR are to be installed on the

same 4-Wire E&M Module, the IntIRR must not use contact
closure to start/stop recording.
5. Set the following internal jumpers in the ACU Dual 4-wire E&M Module:
X9 = 2-3
X10 = 2-3
Pins 2-3 on X9 and X10 are closer to the rear of ACU or closer to the Dual 4w
RJ45 connectors.
6. Install ONE of the following jumpers to select a channel:
X5 (for channel 1)
or
X7 (for channel 2)
7. In IMS, select the signalling inversion option for the 4-Wire E&M Module and
mark the E1 checkbox. This allows for correct operation in IMS, but note that the
associated LED for E1 is inverted (lit when PTT is inactive and dark when PTT is
active).
For more information about configuring IMS, see Acom Software Installation and
Configuration (P/N 025-9529).
8. Place the desk mic within easy reach of the operator.
Integrator IRR
58
025-9574E
This section only contains the information about Integrator IRR that is related to Acom.
For more complete information about Integrator IRR, refer to the manual Integrator IRR
Product Manual (P/N 025-9496).
The Integrator IRR is a software-based instant recall recorder used to save and playback
position audio by the operator. When used with an Acom system it can record phone calls
and radio transmissions to the PC hard drive.
Requirements
Integrator IRR (includes IRR module, Game port cable, PC audio cable, IRR
Manual 025-9496, and IRR software, Soundblaster Live sound card)
Acom Console Unit equipped with E&M 4-Wire E&M Module
Acom Console Unit to IRR cable 709-7639
Zetron User Management Software (UMS)
One free, full-height PCI slot in the console PC (suitable for a SoundBlaster Live
sound card)
Theory of Operation
The IRR will record transmit and receive audio from the Acom console. The IRR will
record under any of the following conditions:
A phone line is selected.
A selected radio channel (radio base) has CD or VOX activity.
A radio channel is keyed by the operator.
The IRR can use contact closure, software control, or VOX to trigger the start/stop of a
recording. Only one application can command the IntIRR with software control at a time,
so we recommend using software control unless you are installing the Acom console in
conjunction with a Zetron M3200 phone.
Software Control
The Console PC will use software commands to control the IRR application when
activated with the following setting in the AcomConsole.ini file:
[IMS Terminal]
EnableIRR=True
Contact Closure
The M1 lead from the Dual 4-wire E&M Module goes active to signal the PC to begin
recording. The IRR box provides a ground reference to the M1 lead of the E&M card.
Under idle conditions this ground is passed out the +VREF (pin 1-left) of the center
orange connector X2 on the E&M card. When recording should begin, the ground is
removed from the +VREF lead which signals the PC to begin recording.
59
VOX Recording
The IRR has the ability to record based on the presence of audio alone. This option should
be used as a last resort as it does not provide the finite control of recording that the other
two options do.
SoundBlaster Installation
IntegratorIRR requires a SoundBlaster Live card.
To install the SoundBlaster card and drivers:

1. Shut down the computer.
2. Insert the "SoundBlaster Live! Value" card into an empty slot in the computer.
3. Restart the computer.
4. The Found New Hardware wizard screen should appear. Do not insert the
SoundBlaster CD at this time.
Caution!
It is very important that you use the Windows Add New

Hardware feature to install the driver for this sound card. Do
not use the installation program that comes on the
SoundBlaster CD.
5. Follow the wizard's instructions to search for a suitable driver for the new device.
Set the search locations parameter to the CD drive.
6. Insert the Creative SoundBlaster Installation CD into the CD drive. When the
SoundBlaster installation program starts, click Cancel.
7. Follow the rest of the Add New Hardware wizard instructions to finish installing
the driver found on the CD.
8. When the wizard is finished, go to the Windows Start menu and select Settings,
Control Panel, Sounds and Multimedia.
9. Click on the Audio tab.
10. From the item lists, select the item corresponding to Creative SB Live! (or Emul
10Kx Audio[E000]) for both Sound Playback and Sound Recording.
11. Mark the Use only preferred devices checkbox.
12. Click OK.
13. Restart the computer.
SoundBlaster Configuration
To configure the sound card:

1. Click START, Settings, Control Panel to open the Windows Control Panel.
2. Open Sounds and Multimedia in the Control Panel. Select the Audio tab and set
Playback and Recording to use the SoundBlaster Live card.
60
025-9574E
3. Select Use preferred devices only.

4. Click OK on the Sounds and Multimedia panel to save your changes.
5. From the Windows Control Panel, open Gaming Options. Add a new controller of
type 2-axis 2-button joystick. This is required for contact closure operation to
start recording.
6. Click OK to save your changes.
Hardware Installation
To install IntegratorIRR:
1. Install cable 709-7728 "Software/VOX Control Cable" or 709-7639 "Contact
Control Cable" between one of the dual 4-wire ports on the Acom Console Unit
and "Input 2 (Radio)" on the IRR module.
2. Connect the 2.5mm audio cable provided with the IRR between the IRR Hardware
Module jack and the Line Input (Black port) of the Soundblaster Live soundcard.
3. If using contact closure to trigger the start and stop of recording, connect the game
port cable provided with the IRR between the IRR module DB15 connector and the
Soundblaster Live game port.
4. Use the provided Velcro to secure the IRR module to the side or top of the Console
PC.
5. Connect the IRR Hardware Module "Input 1 (Phone)" to the 3rd party phone
system if applicable.
STOP
Warning! If the desk mic and IntegratorIRR are to be installed on the

same 4-Wire E&M Module, the IntegratorIRR must not use
contact closure to start/stop recording.
E&M 4-Wire Module Installation

If the Acom Console Unit did not come with the required E&M Module pre-installed,
install the 4-Wire E&M Module now. See Dual 4W E&M Module on page 89.
Note
Use of Integrator IRR contact closure recording is incompatible

with the Acom Deskmic if used on the same Dual 4 wire module.
The Deskmic may be used with software or VOX controlled IRR.
Configuring Acom for Integrator IRR
To configure Acom for Integrator IRR:

1. Connect to the Acom Console Unit using IMS ACU.
2. Right-click on the 4-Wire E&M Module and choose Acom Definitions.
3. Click Channel 1 and configure it for Voice Logger/IRR.
4. Set the console number to match the position number and click Save.
61
You may configure only one Voice Logger and one IRR per console number.
5. Right-click on the 4-Wire E&M Module and choose Signalling Inversion. Invert
the M1 signal for Channel 1 only and click Save.
The M1 lead is used to trigger the recording of Acom audio.
6. Right-click on the 4-Wire E&M Module and choose Gain. Set the transmit gain to
+6dB for Channel 1.
7. From the IMS menu click File, Update to NVRam to save your changes to flash.
8. Reset to console from the Tools, Reset menu in IMS.
9. Close IMS ACU.
Integrator Software Installation
To install Integrator software:

1. Insert the Integrator IRR Install CD into the PC CD-ROM drive.
2. The installer should automatically start; if it does not, click START, Run, and type
D:\Setup where D is the drive letter of your CD-ROM.
3. Install UMS Client on the local machine. This will require a reboot. Leave the CD
in during the reboot and the second phase of the installation will begin
automatically when Windows restarts.
The User Management System (UMS) controls access to Zetron applications.
Note
If desired, the IRR may be installed without the UMS requirement.

There is a registry patch on the installation CD that will allow it to
be run without requiring a UMS logon. Without this patch, the
operator will be required to log into UMS prior to running Integrator
IRR.
4. Install IntegratorIRR from the CD. Follow the installers prompts to complete the
installation of Integrator IRR.
5. After installation, copy the .LIC file provided by Zetron into the C:\Program
Files\Zetron\Integrator IRR\ folder. If you dont have a license file (*.LIC) yet,
contact Zetron tech support.
6. Run the UMS shortcut from either the start menu or desktop; it will start in OffLine mode.
7. Log into UMS using the name z_admin and no password (blank).
8. Run ZAM and activate On-Line mode to connect with the UMS Server.
Configure your users with the permission to execute Integrator IRR. For additional
information, see the UMS manual (P/N 025-9516).
Configuring Integrator IRR
To configure Integrator IRR:

1. Double click on the IRR icon to start the program.
62
025-9574E
2. Once the program has started, click Edit, Options.

Note
The options menu is controlled by the users UMS permissions.
3. In the Options box of the Audio Settings tab, click Input 2, Sources Alias, and
type Acom. Saved recordings will be labeled with their source.
4. Click the Record Control tab, then Input 2.
5. Set Input Gain to +6 dB.
6. Select AGC Enabled.
7. Select the type of recording control you wish (software control is recommended).
8. Click Apply, then OK.
9. Select the Storage tab.
10. Set Disk Allocation to a reasonable size (500MB).
11. Set Warning Threshold to 10%.
12. Click Browse and navigate to C:\Program Files\Zetron\Integrator IRR
13. Add \Recordings to the end of the path and accept the popup that will appear.
Verify that Storage Location reflects C:\Program Files\Zetron\Integrator
IRR\Messages
14. Click OK to save the changes.
Note
If you have not licensed the software, you may get a warning
window that this demo will expire in 10 days. If the warning
window appears, contact Zetron tech support. The first time the
program runs it will warn you to configure your storage settings,
click OK to proceed.
Configure Acom Console to use IRR
To configure the AcomConsole.ini file for Integrator IRR:

1. Browse to the folder for the Acom console software. This may be
C:\Program Files\Zetron\ACS or C:\Program Files\ACS.
2. Open AcomConsole.ini using Notepad or other text editor.
3. Search for the section called [ACS].
4. Add/modify the following values in the [ACS] section to launch IntIRR on login
and use software control to control recording:
EnableIRR=True
EnableIRRSoftwareControl=True
IRRChannelAlias=Acom
5. If you will be using UMS to control permissions for IntIRR, add/modify the
following value in the [ACS] section:
EnableUMS=True
6. Save the file and start the console software from the Windows Start menu.
63
Model 3030 PSAP TDD

The Model 3030 PSAP TDD is compatible with the Acom system, but the operator will
hear TDD tones. The following items are required to install the Model 3030 with Acom:
Model 3030 PSAP TDD (P/N 901-9254) and manual (P/N 025-9193)
Model 3030 Handset Interface Box (P/N 950-9299) and manual (P/N 011-0108)
If connecting the Model 3030 to an ACU OAM:
RJ45 network cable
RJ11 4-wire handset jack and suitable crimper
If connecting the Model 3030 to a Headset Jackbox or TRHI:
RJ11 4-wire handset cable
6-wire dual-prong PJ connector
To connect the Model 3030 to Acom

1. Follow the Model 3030 installation instructions (P/N 025-9193).
2. Configure the Model 3030 and the Handset Interface as described in the handset
interface instructions (P/N 011-0108), except for the audio level setting which is
described in the following step.
3. Set the handset interface TX Gain = +5.85 dB and RX Gain = +12 dB. This
provides the best dynamic range if the operator's audio is set to typical levels.
4. A cable must be built to interface between the 3030 handset interface box and
Acom. The 3030 handset box uses a 4-wire handset type connector. On the Acom
side, you must wire either a 6-wire RJ45 to connect to the OAM, or a 6-wire dualprong PJ-type connector to connect to a headset jackbox or TRHI. The following
table and figure provide the required wiring information.
Table 1: Model 3030 Acom Connections
Acom Connection
(Pick One)
3030 Connection
4-wire Handset
Connector (RJ11)
6-wire Dual-Prong
Connector for Headset
Jackbox or TRHI
Pin 1 Yellow
TDD Audio Out
Pin 1
TIP
Pin 2 Green
TDD Audio In
Pin 5
SLEEVE
Pin 3 Red
TDD Audio In
Pin 6
SLEEVE
Pin 4 Black
TDD Audio Out
Pin 2
TIP
Pins 3, 4, 7, and 8
RING
No connection
64
Headset/Handset
Connector for
Acom OAM (RJ45)
025-9574E
Other Interfaces
Figure 10: Model 3030 Acom Connection Pins

1
RJ11
4
Tip
1
RJ45
Ring
Sleeve
Other Interfaces
Operator Active Lamp
Overview
The operator active conversation lamp is a visual indicator for the Acom console position.
Colored lamps illuminate to indicate position activity and status. This lamp is optional
equipment.
Acom Console Unit digital outputs are configurable at each operator position for the
following console states:
Telephone Call Pending
Line Selected (Console Busy)
Telephone Line Selected
Operator PTTing
Emergency Telephone Call Pending
Emergency Telephone Line Selected
In addition to the outputs reacting to operator state, the cadence of the lamp is
configurable from solid (always lit) to a periodic rate on/off (0.1 to 100 seconds).
Required Materials
045-0254-076 Power Cable (1 per position)
804-0078 24 VDC transformer (1 per position)
045-0254-075 Lamp Cable (1 per lamp)
804-0077 Lamp Bulb (qty = # of lamps)
804-0076 Dual Beehive Lamp or 804-0075 Single Beehive Lamp (1 per position)
65
Assembling the Operator Active Lamp
To assemble the Operator Active Lamp:

1. Screw the spade lugs of power cable 045-0254-076 into the AC transformer 8040078. Black wire to the (negative) terminal and red to the + (positive).
2. Screw the flying leads of lamp cable 045-0254-075 into the orange Acom Console
Unit digital output connector as shown in Figure 11.
It is assumed that the red lamp will be the primary non-urgent call lamp and the
white will be for emergency calls.
3. Remove the top cover of the beehive lamp (single or dual).
4. Screw the spade lugs of Lamp Cable 045-0254-075 to the corresponding screws
down terminal of each lamp. The white wire goes to the white bulb, the red wire to
the red bulb. The black/green wire connects to the bulb common (same electrical
point for both bulbs). If you have only a single beehive lamp (only one color)
screw both the red and white lugs to one terminal and the black/green to the other.
Table 2: Cable Wiring for Operator Active Lamp
66
Pin
Signal
Color
Equipment
OP1+
Red
Operator Red Lamp
OP1-
Black
Operator Red Lamp
OP2+
White
Operator White Lamp
OP2-
Black
Operator White Lamp
OP3+
OP3-
OP4+
OP4-
OP5+
10
OP5-
11
OP6+
12
OP6-
025-9574E
Other Interfaces
Position Installation
Figure 11: Lamp Position
2 pin
Molex
24VDC XFMR
804-0078
ACU
Digital Out
INDICATOR
LAMP
804-0076
Cable
045-0254-076
Cable
045-0254-075
To install the lamp at the console position:

1. Mount the operator active lamp at the position using double sided Velcro or selftapping screws.
A non-slip pad is provided with the lamp for temporary installations.
2. Plug the orange Acom Console Unit digital I/O connector into the Digital Output
jack of the Acom Console Unit (if it was previously disconnected).
3. Plug the Lamp Cable 045-0254-075 into one of the 2 pin Molex plugs of the Lamp
Power Cable 045-0254-076. The other 2 pin Molex would be used if the position
needed additional lamps.
4. Plug the transformer 804-0078 into the positions AC power strip.
Acom Console Unit Modification
The Acom Console Unit internal jumpers must be changed to remove the common ground
reference from the digital outputs to be used with the Active Conversation Lamp. If
installing just one or two lamps then remove jumpers X2 and X3. When removed, the
24vdc transformer will be used to bias the output when active.
To change the Acom Console Unit jumpers, remove power. Then remove the screws from
the top cover and set it aside. The jumpers are located near the digital output connector on
the rear of the Acom Console Unit.
STOP
Warning! Failure to isolate the digital output will result in an electrical

short to ground
Table 3: Acom Console Unit Internal Jumpers

Jumper
Fitted
Not Fitted (Default)
X2
Enable common reference for Output 1
No common reference for Output 1
X3

67
Jumper
Fitted
Not Fitted (Default)
X4
X5
X6
X7
IMS ACU Configuration

The first two digital outputs must be configured for IMS ACU to operate with the Active
Conversation Lamps.
Figure 12: IMS ACU Configuration
To configure the digital outputs:

1. Open IMS ACU and connect to the desired Acom Console Unit.
2. From the Configure menu of IMS ACU, choose Digital I/O.
3. Click the Digital Output tab and change the Function Type of the first output to
ACU I/O Function 1 and set the Function Data field to the Acom console
number of the position.
4. Change the Function Type of I/O 2 to ACU I/O Function 2 and set the Function
Data field to the same Acom console number.
When the Acom Console Unit requests that ACU output 1 be asserted the Acom
Console Unit will use this screen to identify what digital circuits are Acom
Console Unit output 1 and 2.
In the AcomConsole.ini file we will define the behavior of ACU output 1 and 2.
AcomConsole.ini File Modification
Add/modify the following section of the AcomConsole.ini file to configure the behavior
of the Active Conversation Lamp. This is an example, the installer could vary the cadence,
criteria and priority of the outputs using this setting.
68
025-9574E
Other Interfaces
[Digital Outputs]
; Non-Urgent calls flash 1st light when ringing, solid when
answered, and solid for PTT
LocalGPDigitalOutput1 = (NonUrgentPriorityPhoneCallPending, 1,
Flashing, (1000,1000)) and (NonUrgentPriorityPhoneLineSelected, 2)
and (PTTActive)
; Urgent/Emergency calls flash 2nd light when ringing, solid when
answered
LocalGPDigitalOutput2 = (UrgentPriorityPhoneCallPending, 1,
Flashing, (1000,500)) and (UrgentPriorityPhoneLineSelected, 2)
;
;The LocalGPDigitalOutput# setting has the following parameters:
;LocalGPDigitalOutput<DigitalOutputAddress> = (<ConsoleStateID>[,
<Priority>, <IndicationMode> [, (<OnPeriod>, <OffPeriod>)]]) [and
<ConsoleStateIndicationData>]
Foot Switch
Several methods of connecting a foot switch (P/N 950-9102) are possible.

Refer to the Position Layout (041-xxxx-071) for the intended method for the installed
system.
Using TRHI:
Footswitch installation requires opening of the TRHI to access connector TB2.
Connect the leads from the foot switch to the connectors labeled "TB2" and PTT inside
the TRHI. (The polarity of these leads does not matter.)
69
Using Digital PTT input:

Connect one of the leads of the foot switch to desired Acom Console Unit digital input
using the pin out information in the table below. The Position Layout Drawing (041-xxxx071) will show the intended input to use. The digital input connector X56B is the top
orange connector located on the rear of the Acom Console Unit beside the data ports. The
input pins are designated 1-12 from left to right when viewing the rear of the Acom
Console Unit.
Table 4: Acom Console Unit Digital Input Connector X56B
Signal
X56B Pin
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
10
Input 6
12
Connect the other lead of the foot switch to a ground reference. The Position Layout
Drawing (041-xxxx-071) will have the intended connection. It is possible to use the Acom
Console Unit digital output connector X56A for this ground reference.
STOP
Warning! Checking the Acom Console Unit jumpers requires opening the
cover of the Acom Console Unit. To prevent injuries,
disconnect power from the Acom Console Unit before
removing the cover.
Configure the Acom Console Unit internal jumpers using Table 5. These jumpers control
the DC bias of the digital inputs and outputs. The settings required for foot switch
operation are the same as shipped from the factory.
Table 5: Acom Console Unit Jumpers
70
Input
Jumper
Position
All
(Applicable for
any input)
X50
X51
X2
2-3 (toward power supply)

2-3 (toward power supply)
Installed (shorted)
X8
X37
Installed (shorted)
1-2 (toward front of Acom Console Unit)
X9
X38
Installed (shorted)
X10
X39
Installed (shorted)
X11
X40
Installed (shorted)
025-9574E
Console Quick Checkout Instructions
Input
Jumper
Position
X12
X41
Installed (shorted)
X13
X42
Installed (shorted)
E1 Digital Interfaces
See Console Loop Installation on page 40.
Console Quick Checkout Instructions

This section describes a quick checkout of an operator position to be done after the
replacement/installation of any hardware. The purpose is to ensure the console audio
interfaces are properly connected and functional.
To check a console:
1. Start the Acom Console Software and log on.
a. Verify the Acom Console Software starts up without errors. If it does not
communicate, the serial port may not be installed correctly.
b. Verify the console number is correct as per the Network Diagram (041-xxxx062).
c. Verify that all radio, phone, and digital IO buttons appear active (not grayed
out).
2. Install a handset into the left Zetron jackbox.
a. Verify that Acom Console Software Mode: shows H-Set. If it does not,
check that its connected to an HS port.
3. Move the handset to the right Zetron jackbox.
a. Verify that the Acom Console Software Mode: shows H-Set. If it does not,
check that its connected to an HS port.
4. Test the various PTT sources.
a. Use the Handset/Headset inline PTT to key a radio channel, verify the PTT
button changes color and the line text turns yellow. Repeat for the second
jackbox.
b. Use the footswitch (if installed) to key a radio channel, verify the PTT button
changes color and the line text turns yellow.
c. Use the desk mic (if installed) to key a radio channel, verify the PTT button
changes color and the line text turns yellow.
5. Select a phone line.
71
a. Verify you can hear a dialtone and that you can dial.
b. Verify that Integrator IRR (if installed) has recorded the phone call.
6. Place an active radio channel into monitor speaker 1. If there is no activity,
generate a test tone for that line as an audio source.
a. Verify that the test tone can be heard in the left speaker of this position. If it
appears in the right the connections are swapped at the rear of the PC.
7. Place an active radio channel into monitor speaker 2.
a. Verify the test tone can be heard in the right speaker.
8. Select an active radio channel.
a. Verify the audio can be heard in the handset/headset.
b. Verify that Integrator IRR (if installed) has recorded the phone call.
9. Clear all selected lines and monitors from the console and log off the Acom
Console Software.
This concludes the installation procedures for the front room (console) equipment. The
remainder of this document provides detailed reference information for console
equipment.
72
025-9574E
Hardware Components
This chapter provides reference material for various hardware components:

Acom Console Unit (ACU) on page 73
Acom Line Subracks on page 92
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack on page 102
Changeover Subrack on page 105
For cards, see Acom Card Reference on page 111.

This section describes the Acom Console Unit (ACU) and how to connect the Acom
Console Units to the other interfacing hardware. After the Acom Console Unit is
connected, it is configured using the IMS ACU software. See Acom Software Installation
and Configuration (P/N 025-9529) for more information.)
Note
The Acom Console Unit was formerly named Operator Console Unit
(OCU) and Digital Switch.
General
The ACU provides the data and voice interface for each console position. The Acom
Console PC running the Acom Console Software communicates serially to the COM1 data
port on the ACU. The audio interfaces are connected to plug in modules in the ACU to
support speakers, handsets, desk mics, and other interfaces.
The ACU is a 1U component that provides audio and data interfaces between the operator
position and the CCE using an E1 cable. It provides a serial data interface for the System
Console. In addition, it also provides speaker, handset, and microphone interfaces for the
operator position.
73
Hardware Components
The ACU can be rack mounted or desk mounted, depending on the site requirements. This
unit is CE approved, and has the following dimensions:
Width:
432 mm (17 inches)
Height:
1U (45 mm) (1.8 inches)
Depth:
250 mm (9.84 inches)
Figure 13: ACU Front Panel
All the connections for the ACU are located on the rear panel as shown in Figure 14.
Figure 14: ACU Rear Panel examples
ACU Specifications
Class
Communication
Interfaces
Digital Inputs
74
Item
Range
Number of Interfaces
Connector Type, COM1
USB or RJ45
Connector Type, COM2-4
RJ45
Maximum Baud Rate
115.2Kbps (asynchronous)
Data Format
8 data bits, no parity, 1 stop
Electrical Interface
RS232 or RS422/RS485
Number of Inputs
Connection Type
Plug-in screw terminal
Input Range
3V to 60V
Input Current Range
1mA to 10mA
Internal Reference Voltage
5V
Isolation Between Inputs and SELV
1.5kV
025-9574E
Class
Digital Outputs
Environment
Item
Range
Number of Outputs
Connection Type
Plug-in screw terminal
Maximum Switched Voltage
60Vdc
Maximum Output Current
100mA
Internal Reference Voltage
0V (ground)
Isolation Between Outputs and SELV
1.5kV
Operating Temperature
0 to 60 degrees C
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 degrees C
Humidity
95% RH at 40 degrees C
Power from AC Mains
85 to 260 Vac
47 to 63 Hz
96 VA
Maximum +5V power consumption
1A
Maximum +12V power consumption
1.2A
Electrical
ACU Power Requirements
Input Voltage Range

Max Input Current
Input Power
Frequency
AC Unit
12/24VDC Unit
48VDC Unit
85 to 260 Vrms
9 to 36 V
18 to 60 V
0.4 A (240V), 0.6 A (115V)
2.1 A
1.1 A
35 W
50 W
50 W
47 to 63 Hz
75
Hardware Components
ACU Internal Layout

The ACU has a basic internal hardware layout as shown. It has four expansion slots
numbered zero to three. These slots accept different circuit boards, which varies the
functionality of the ACU.
Main Board
Power
Supply
Expansion
Slot
3
Power
Connector
and Switch
Expansion
Slot
2
Expansion
Slot
1
Expansion
Slot
0
Mainboard Interface
Connections and LEDs
ACU Main Board Functions

The Main Board provides the processing power to operate its own interfaces and all of the
expansion slots. The Main Board provides the following:
Data Interfaces
Digital I/O Connections
LEDs for alarms and status information
DSP audio processing, capability of eight full duplex audio lines
Digital cross-point switch/conferencing
Real Time Clock
ACU Hardware Connections

The ACU is located between the DS3 Switch and the System Console with its main
function being to switch and process audio and data to and from the operators position.
The ACUs connection to the DS3 Switch is by a dual E1 Console Loop, which provides
for Console interface redundancy. In the event of a single point of failure, i.e., if a ACU
76
025-9574E
becomes inoperable or the Console Loop fails, the other Consoles in the chain still
maintain a connection path to the DS3 Switch.
System Console
System Console
Acom
Console Unit
(n)
P1
P2
Acom
Console Unit
(1)
P1
P2
Voice
E1
Links
Port A
E1
Links
n = 2 to 8
Acom DS3
Switch
(ADS)
Voice
Acom DS3
Switch
(ADS)
Port A
DS3 Loop
Port B
Port B
ACU External Interfaces

The following illustration shows the ACUs external interfaces, however, the physical
locations for the connectors are all on the ACUs rear panel.
Handset
H/S1
H/S2
Speaker
(Left)
Operator
Audio
Module
AUDIO
Acom Console
Unit (ACU)
Dual
E1
Module
PC Tones
Speaker
(Right)
COM 1
Next ACU
G703
G703
DS3 Switch
DATA
Acom Console PC
PC
Sound
Card
77
Hardware Components
ACU Main Board Connections

The following illustration shows the ACU rear panel connections.
6 x Bi-color LEDs
4 x Tri-color LEDs
6 x Digital Inputs
Green LED
COM Ports 1-4
Orange LED
6 x Digital Outputs
Table 6: ACU Rear Panel LED Indicators

LED
Indicates
When Red
When Green
When Orange
Port 0 - Slot 0 DS3

Switch Link
Link Bad
Active E1 Link
Communications established, link

in standby mode
Port 1 - Slot 0 DS3

Switch Link
Link Bad
Active E1 Link
Communications established, link

in standby mode
Configuration
Bad NVRAM
Configuration
Configuration OK
Invalid combination of plug-in

modules
Run Indication
Flashing = Booting Flashing = Normal Flashing = Waiting for Console to

Operation
be created by DS3 Switch
1-6
Activity for the

Corresponding
corresponding I/O port output is active
Corresponding
input is active
Corresponding input and output

are both active
Main Board COM Ports 1-4

The ACU has three configurable interface ports, COM1, COM2, and COM3. The primary
purposes for these three ports is communication with the System Console. Any one of
these ports may be used for communicating with the PC of the console position; however,
the COM1 port is one most commonly used for that purpose. COM1 is either USB or
RJ45.
COM4 is used as a maintenance port. It is used with IMS ACU software or debugging
with a dumb terminal.
Electrical Interface (RJ-45)
RS-232 or RS-485 (software selectable*)
CTS/RTS handshaking signals for RS-232, no handshaking signals for RS-485
78
025-9574E
Full duplex operation

Data format (software selectable)
Maximum baud rate of 115.2 Kbps (asynchronous only)
External interface through an RJ-45 connector
Loopback capability for self-test functionality
LED indicates data is being sent and received
Note
Not all versions of the ACU have activity LEDs on the COM ports.
* RS-485 termination at the ACU requires jumpers to be set.

Recommended communication settings are 19,200 or 38,400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1
stop bit, no flow control.
Pinout (RJ-45)
Use Zetron cable 709-7615 with these ports. Does not apply to COM1 USB ports.
Table 7: ACU COM Port 1-3 Pinout
Pin(s)
Function
1 to 3
No connection
Signal ground
5
6
7
8
Direction
Output
RS232 Mode
Receive Data
Input
RS485 Mode
Receive Data -
Input
RS232 Mode
Transmit Data
Output
RS485 Mode
Transmit Data -
Output
RS232 Mode
Clear to Send
Input
RS485 Mode
Receive Data +
Input
RS232 Mode
Request to Send
Output
RS485 Mode
Transmit Data +
Output
Table 8: ACU COM Port 4 Pinout

Pin
1
Function
Direction
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
No Connection
No Connection
Transmit Data +
Output
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
No Connection
No Connection
Transmit Data -
Output
79
Hardware Components
Pin
Function
Direction
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
No Connection
No Connection
Receive Data +
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
Signal Ground
Signal Ground
No Connection
Output
Output
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
Receive Data
Receive Data No Connection
Input
Input
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
Transmit Data
Transmit Data Receive Data -
Output
Output
Input
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
Clear to Send
Receive Data +
No Connection
Input
Input
RS-232 Mode
RS-422 Mode
LAN Mode
Request to Send
Transmit Data +
No Connection
Output
Output
Input
RS-485 Termination
RS-485 requires termination on the first and last device in the RS-485 chain. The jumpers
used to enable or disable termination are located inside the ACU chassis next to the power
supply.
Figure 15: RS-485 Termination Jumpers
X23
X24
X22
X21
X27
X28
X26
X25
X31
X32
X30
X29
X35
X36
X34
X33
Jumper
Legend
80
2 1
025-9574E
If the ACU is the first or last device on the RS-485 chain, you must enable termination for
the appropriate COM port as shown in the following table. For all other RS-485 devices
and all RS-232 devices, leave the termination off.
Table 9: RS-485 Termination Jumpers
COM Port
Jumpers
Termination On
(RS-485 first and
last device only)
Termination Off
(RS-232, other RS-485)
(Default)
X21 and X24
Position 2-3
Position 1-2
X25 and X28
Position 2-3
Position 1-2
X29 and X32
Position 2-3
Position 1-2
X33 and X36
Position 2-3
Position 1-2
Digital Input Interface

The digital input interface provides a connection point for any miscellaneous input
required at the ACU. Six digital inputs are provided. The inputs can be referenced to an
internal 5 Vdc supply on each of the six digital inputs (jumper selectable).
Electrical Specifications
Input isolation barrier of at least 1.5 kV between the inputs
Inputs are debounced by firmware (0 and 15 ms)
Input voltage range from 3 to 60 V
Reverse and over-voltage protection
Maximum input current is 10 mA
Minimum input current to trigger the input is 1 mA
Screw terminal type external connector
Table 10: Digital Input Connector Pinout
Pina
10
11
12
Signal
IP1+
IP1-
IP2+
IP2-
IP3+
IP3-
IP4+
IP4-
IP5+
IP5-
IP6+
IP6-
a. Pin 1 is the leftmost pin on the connector.
81
Hardware Components
Table 11: Digital Input Jumpers

Jumper
Fitted
X8
Enable common reference for Input 1
No common reference for Input 1 (default)
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
Jumper
Link Pins 2 and 3

(jumper to left)
X51
Jumper
Internal 5V reference enabled for

Digital Inputs
Not Fitted
Link Pins 1 and 2

(jumper to right)
No internal reference for Digital Inputs
(default)
Link Pins 2 and 3

(jumper to top)
Link Pins 1 and 2

(jumper to bottom)
X37
12-60V input range for Input 1
3-12V input range for Input 1 (default)
X38
X39
X40
X41
X42
Jumper
Fitted
Not Fitted
X2
Enable common reference for Output 1 No common reference for Output 1 (default)
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
Jumper
X50
Link Pins 2 and 3

(jumper to left)
Internal ground reference enabled for
Digital Outputs
Link Pins 1 and 2

(jumper to right)
No internal reference for Digital Outputs
(default)
Digital Output Interface

The digital output interface provides a connection point for any miscellaneous outputs
required at the ACU. Six digital outputs are provided.
Electrical Specifications
Outputs referenced to internal ground or external reference (jumper selectable)
Inputs isolation barrier of at least 1.5 kV
82
025-9574E
Maximum voltage drop across the output during an on condition must be less than 2
volts
Switched voltage must be less than 65 VDC
Reverse and over-voltage protection provided
Maximum output current allowed is 100 mA
Screw terminal type external connector
Table 12: Digital Output Connector Pinout
Pina
10
11
12
Signal
OP1+
OP1-
OP2+
OP2-
OP3+
OP3-
OP4+
OP4-
OP5+
OP5-
OP6+
OP6-
a. Pin 1 is the leftmost pin on the connector.
Table 13: Digital Output Jumpers

Jumper
Description
Position 1-2 or IN
Position 2-3 or OUT
X50
GND REF Common Enable
1-2= + lead isolated
2-3 = + lead pulled to GND (0 V)
X2
OP1 Common Enable
IN = isolated
OUT = GND on OP+
X3
OP1 Common Enable
IN = isolated
OUT = GND on OP+
X4
OP1 Common Enable
IN = isolated
OUT = GND on OP+
X5
OP1 Common Enable
IN = isolated
OUT = GND on OP+
X6
OP1 Common Enable
IN = isolated
OUT = GND on OP+
X7
OP1 Common Enable
IN = isolated
OUT = GND on OP+
DSP Functions
Two Digital Signal Processors are provided on the ACU Main Board. Each DSP can
handle multiple audio sources. Functions that can be performed on the audio include the
following:
Receive / Transmit Gain adjustments
u-law / A-law Compression
Side-tone generation
AGC / Level Compression
Voice operated switching (VOX)
Tone Generation (PTT, Ring)
ACU Expansion Slots

The ACU has four expansion slots, slots 0 through 3. These slots accept various plug-in
modules, which can vary the capability of the ACU. There are no restrictions on the
83
Hardware Components
placement of plug-in modules, except that an E1 module must reside in Slot 0. Figure 16
shows an example of a ACU and the plug-in modules positioned for the expansion slots.
Figure 16: Modules Applied to Expansion Slots (example)
Plug-In Modules
STOP
Warning! The plug-in modules are NOT hot pluggable.
The ACU main board allows for the insertion of plug-in interface modules. The following
interface modules are available:
Operators Audio Module
Dual E1 Module (Twisted Pair)
Dual E1 Module (Coax G703/704)
Dual E1 Module (Fiber)
Dual 4W E&M Module
Dual Telephone Module (not used with Acom consoles)
Dual Exchange Module (not used with Acom consoles)
Tetra Interface Module (not used with Acom consoles)
To remove a module:
1. Disconnect the power to the ACU.
2. You will need access to the top and back of the ACU. Remove the ACU from the
rack if necessary.
3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover.
4. Remove the modules cover plate using a hex-head wrench.
5. Remove the screws that secure the module daughter card in the ACU chassis.
84
025-9574E
6. Pull the daughter board toward the rear of the unit, then up and over the metal
posts.
To install a module:
1. Disconnect the power to the ACU.
2. You will need access to the top and back of the ACU. Remove the ACU from the
rack if necessary.
3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover.
4. Remove an empty cover plate using a hex-head wrench.
5. Align the module to the internal connector.
6. Push the module in until it is flush with the case.
7. Secure the module daughter card in the ACU chassis with screws.
8. Secure the modules cover plate using a hex-head wrench.
9. Replace the ACU cover and secure using the screws.
Physical sizes of each expansion board:
Width
60 mm (2.4 inch)
Depth
130 mm (5.1 inch)
Maximum component height
25 mm (1.0 inch)

The Operators Audio Module (OAM) provides an interface to the consoles audio
equipment, such as the headset jackbox, Audio Interface, or audio foot switch. The
maximum cable distance from this module to the operator audio equipment is three meters
(9.8 feet). This module is CE approved.
The Operators Audio Module provides the following functions:
Two independent stereo headset ports with microphone input
Provision of a single volume control or PTT input
Headset plugged-in detection
Provision for two independent external loudspeakers
Input channel for use with boom microphone, or PC Tone source
Eight status LEDs for port activity
Control port for use with a Zetron audio interface
Operators Audio Module RJ45 Jacks
Figure 17 shows the connectors for the Operator Audio Module:
85
Hardware Components
Figure 17: Operators Audio Module Connectors
Note
Older versions of the Operators Audio Module may have jacks with
LEDs. The LEDs indicate connectivity and activity for that jack.
Table 14 shows the pin-outs for the Operator Audio Module:

Table 14: Operators Audio Module Connectors Pin-outs
PIN No.
HS1 and
HS2
CNTL
Audio
GND
(Mic)
(Mic)
GND
(Mic)
(Mic)
LED Latch
Right earpiece
Right earpiece
Shift/Load
GND
GND
Serial In
Left earpiece
Left earpiece
Serial Out
GND
GND
CLK INHIB
Volume/PTT
+12 volt
CLK
GND
+12 volt
Dual E1 Interface Module

The Dual E1 Interface module routes up to 30 E1 voice time slots between ACUs, using
two twisted pair cables or four coaxial cables (two E1s). Two cables are required for each
loop direction, one for transmit signals and the other for receive signals. Two sets are used
to ensure self-healing within a loop configuration.
One E1 Interface Module is required per ACU, regardless of whether it is being used to
connect to other switches. This module must be present in slot 0.
The physical distance between ACUs is limited by a maximum of 6 dB signal loss. When
RG-179 coax is used, the typical distance limit is 24 meters (78.7 feet). If coax to CAT5
cable baluns are used, the distance can typically be extended to 166 meters (544.3 feet). A
suitable balun is the Atota Networks model 460MC. (You can use RG-59 or RG-6 coaxial
cable.)
Two E1 (G.703) interfaces are provided:
Bit rate: 2048 kbps
Digital interfaces: 2 x CCITT G703/G704/G732
Connector type: Twisted Pair or SMB
86
025-9574E
Twisted Pair Impedance: 120

SMB Impedance: 75 (unbalanced)
Configurable options for E1 ports
30 cable time slots (TS16 used for signaling)
Optional CRC-4 error checking
Master/Slave clocking (slot 0 only)
Loop through capability
Loop back testing
A maximum of four Dual E1 Modules can be fitted into a single ACU
At least one E1 module must reside in slot 0
Dual E1 Interface Module LEDs
Two bicolor LEDs (Red / Green) are provided for each E1 interface.
Top LED
Bottom LED
Green
Valid E1 Signal
Red
No E1 Signal
Green
No Alarm
Red
Alarm
Cable Types
Table 15: Cable Methods and Estimated Loss
Cable Type
Maximum Distance
(6Db loss)
RG-179 coax
24 meters (78.7 feet)
Cat5e UTP*
166 meters (544.3 feet)
RG59u coax
365 meters (1200 feet)
RG6 coax
457 meters (1500 feet)
* Cat5e UTP is also used on the coax module using baluns.
87
Hardware Components
Pinout (UTP Version)
The pinout for the UTP version is identical to the MCU E1 ports.
Pins for Balanced
Receive Pair
Pins for Balanced

Transmit pair
Port 1
1, 2
4, 5
Port 2
1, 2
4, 5
Function
Dual E1 Fiber Module

The Dual E1 Fiber Module is a trunk line interface card that is primarily used to connect
all of the ACUs in an Acom system together. When it is used to connect the ACUs, it can
be installed only in Slot 0 of the ACU.
This module provides two E1 (G703) ports. The configurable options for the E1 ports
include:
30 or 31 allocatable time slots (CAS in TS16)
Optional CRC-4 error checking
Master/Slave clocking (slot 0 only)
Loop back testing Specification
The Dual E1 Module can be used as the interface for a logging recorder for the Acom
system. When used in this way, it can be installed in any of slots 1 through 4 of the ACU.
Specifications
Parameter
88
Single Mode
Multi Mode
Data Rate
2048 kbps +/- 50 ppm
2048 kbps +/- 50 ppm
Digital Interfaces
CCIT G703/G704
CCIT G703/G704
Frame Format
Double Frame or
CRC Multiframe
Double Frame or
CRC Multiframe
Physical Connector
MT-RJ
MT-RJ
Line Code
NRZ
NRZ
Optical Source
1300 nm laser
1300 nm LED
Fiber Diameter
9 m
62.5 m / 125 m
Transmit Power
-14 to -20 dBm
-14 to -19 dBm
Transmit Center Wavelength
1261 to 1360 nm
1270 to 1380 nm
Receive Sensitivity
-31 dBm
-31 dBm
Receiver Saturation
-8 dBm
-14 dBm
Average Transmission Distance
15 Km
2 Km
0 to 50 degrees C
0 to 50 degrees C
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 degrees C
-10 to 70 degrees C
025-9574E
Parameter
Single Mode
Multi Mode
Humidity
45% RH at 45 degrees C 45% RH at 45 degrees C
Maximum Power Consumption +5V
300mA
300mA
Maximum Power Consumption +12V 0mA
0mA
LEDs
There are two LEDs adjacent to each E1 port on the module. They indicate the status of
the ports.
Table 16: Dual E1 Fiber Module LED Functions
LED Position
Description
Top LED left of Port 1
Port 1 Signal Status
Bottom LED left of Port 1
Port 1 Alarm Status
Top LED right of Port 2
Port 2 Signal Status
Bottom LED right of Port 2
Port 2 Alarm Status
Color
Red
Green
Red
Green
Red
Green
Red
Green
Function
Loss of Signal
Valid Signal
RRA Alarm active
RRA Alarm inactive
Loss of Signal
Valid Signal
RRA Alarm active
RRA Alarm inactive
Dual 4W E&M Module

The Dual 4W E&M module provides an interface to two analog, 4-wire, 600 ohm, E&M
circuits, connecting fixed channel radios or 4-wire E&M telephone circuits, loggers or
other 600 ohm circuits. Each circuit contains two sets of E&M signals. One set of E&M
signals can be used for radio COR/PTT, using appropriate external interface circuitry. The
function of the other set is programmable. Provisions exist for using either an internal 12
V, non-isolated reference voltage, or external, isolated reference voltages for the E&M
leads of the ACU. The physical connection for each circuit is an 8-conductor, 8-position
RJ-45 connector. This module may be present in slots one through three. This module is
CE approved.
Each channel provides the following:
A balanced 2-wire 600 ohm transformer isolated audio Input.

A balanced 2-wire 600 ohm transformer isolated audio Output.
Two opto-isolated inputs (E leads).
Two opto-isolated outputs (M leads).
Two voltage reference leads are provided for the E and M leads.
An LED indication for each E&M lead.
89
Hardware Components
An RJ-45 connector provides the audio and E&M connections.

Note
A jumper option is provided to allow internal voltage references

(+12V and ground) to be used when external equipment cannot
supply the reference voltages.
Dual 4W E&M Module LEDs
E1/M1 Status
Port 1
E2/M2 Status
Port 1
E1/M1 Status
Port 2
E2/M2 Status
Port 2
Table 17: E&M Status LED Functions

LED
Position
Far left of
Port 1
Left of
Port1
Right of
Port2
Description
E1 and M1 status for Port1
Far right of E2 and M2 status for Port2

Port2
90
Color
Function
Red
M1 active
Green
E1 active
Yellow
M1 and E1 active
Red
M2 active
Green
E2 active
Yellow
M2 and E2 active
Red
M1 active
Green
E1 active
Yellow
M1 and E1 active
Red
M2 active
Green
E2 active
Yellow
M2 and E2 active
025-9574E
E&M Pinouts
Table 18: Dual E&M Module RJ45 Pinouts
RJ45 Pin
Direction
Port 1 Signal
Port 2 Signal
Input
E1-1
E1-2
Input
E2-1
E2-2
Output
TX1A
TX2A
Output
TX1B
TX2B
Input
RX1A
RX2A
Input
RX1B
RX2B
Output
M1-1
M1-2
Output
M2-1
M2-2
12345678
Table 19: Dual E&M Module VREF Pinouts

VREF Pin
Signal
+12 VDC
Ground
E&M Jumpers
To minimize cabling required to the E and M leads, common referencing is used. Each E
lead input has only a single wire on the external connector. The other wire is shared with
all the other E leads and is terminated on a separate connector. The reference voltage can
also be sourced from an internal voltage. Note that using this internal voltage voids the
isolation on the E and M leads. The following tables describe E&M jumper positioning:
Table 20: E&M Lead Referencing Jumpers
LINK PINS 2 AND 3

(jumper to bottom)
LINK PINS 1
AND 2
(jumper to top)
[default setting]
X9
Internal +12V reference

enabled for M lead outputs
No internal reference
for M lead outputs
X10
Internal GND reference

enabled for E lead inputs
No internal reference
for E lead inputs
Jumper
Table 21: E Lead Input Range Selection Jumpers

Jumper
Fitted
Not Fitted [default setting]
X5
5-12V input range for Port1 E1
X6
91
Hardware Components
X7
X8
Verify the following jumpers on the 4-Wire E&M Module if using contact closure
operation (not required for software or VOX):
X5=Installed
X6=Installed
X7=Installed
X8=Installed
X9=Shorting pins 1-2 (closest position to RJ45 ports)
X10=Shorting pins 1-2 (closest position to RJ45 ports)
Acom Line Subracks

An Acom Line Subrack (ALS) is an enclosure that houses circuit cards for doing specific
functions. The circuit cards control the functionality of the Acom system. Each type of
circuit card is specific to a type of function, and by installing different card combinations,
gives the system new capability for performing different applications. Also, because the
cards are easy to install and combine, system redundancy and robustness are easy to
create.
Figure 18: Cabinet Configurations
Acom DS3 or
Optical Switches
C
C
C
C
O
V
V
C
O
V
V
C
O
V
V
C
O
V
V
C
O
V
T
Example of Populated
Changeover Rack
Acom DS3 or
Optical Switches
Line Subrack
Main
Line Subrack
and
Circuit Cards
Changeover Rack
Line Subrack
and
Circuit Cards
Line Subrack
Standby
Line Subrack
and
Circuit Cards
M
C
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
E
M
U
E
I
E
T
I
E
U
I
O
M
S
U
Example of Populated
Changeover Rack
Power Supply
Power Supply
Basic Redundancy Configuration
Power Supply
Basic Cabinet Configuration
Installation of the Acom Line Subracks may involve the following activities described in
this section:
92
025-9574E
Acom Line Subracks
Adequate and reliable power must be available to the subracks in accordance with
isolation and safety requirements described in applicable standards, local statutes,
and codes of practice.
All power connectors must be compatible with subracks.
Proper grounding must be available for the subracks.
ALSs are typically housed in 45 RU cabinets. 1 Rack Unit (RU) equals 1.75 in (4.45 cm).
You can combine ALSs that have different card population types to create different
functionality. A good example of this is the Changeover Subrack, which is used to create
system redundancy.
In a redundancy configuration, if an ALS goes offline for any reason, the Changeover
Subrack automatically switches operation to another ALS so that no functionality is lost.
The standby ALS becomes the main ALS. (See Figure 18, Basic Redundancy
Configuration.)
Subrack Mounting
The subrack is a 6-RU high, 19-inch card frame with dimensions as listed in the Acom
Line Subrack specifications. The Acom subrack has side mounting flanges with 7 mm
diameter holes spaced as shown in Figure 19. Recommendations for mounting a subrack
are as follows:
A space of one RU minimum should be provided at the top and bottom of the
subrack to provide adequate ventilation. The space at the bottom of the subrack also
provides space for cable entry to line cards.
A minimum clearance of 50 mm must be provided at the rear of the subrack for
electrical clearance.
Connection of standard cable assemblies must be in accordance Zetron standards.
Installation of required primary surge protection devices (e.g., gas discharge
arresters) must be in accordance with Zetron standards.
Figure 19: Subrack Mounting Hole Arrangement
190 mm
93
Hardware Components
General Circuit Card Installation

An Acom Line Subrack (ALS) has positions for 13 plug-in cards. The positions are
numbered 0 to 12 from left to right across the subrack as shown in Figure 20.
The following lists the circuit cards that are typical to a system installation:
Card
CCC
COV-T
COV-V or COV-R
Description
Changeover Control Card
3-Way Coaxial Switch
48/96 Way Switch
DIU1-2
Data Interface Unit, RS-232, 6-channel
DIU1-4
Data Interface Unit, RS-422, 6-channel
EIE
EMU
Logger Card
Exchange Interface Unit

4-Wire E&M Interface Unit
Logger Card
MCU
Main Control Unit
MSU
Main Supply Unit
RGU
Ring Generator Unit
RIU
Radio Interface Unit
SMU
Signalling Management Unit
TIE
Telephone Interface Unit
UIO
Universal Input Unit
All system cards use DIN41612 style connectors to connect to the subrack backplane.
Cards should be inserted carefully to ensure that the card edges are in the guide slots
before firmly mating the rear connector with the backplane.
Figure 20: Fully Populated ALS
94
025-9574E
Acom Line Subracks
Some cards may require setting jumper links and DIP switches prior to installation in the
subrack. This information is provided in the installation description for each card. The
rules for installing cards at a system level are as follows and listed in Table 22
An ALS must have an MCU card in slot 0; this card becomes the Primary MCU.
An ALS must have an MSU card in slot 12.
An additional MSU card may be fitted in Slot 11; in this slot the MSU works as a
redundant/backup power supply. When there is no second MSU this slot becomes
available to line cards.
Slot 1 can only be used for MCU, SMU, RGU, or UIO cards.
If fourteen G.703 interfaces are present (i.e., seven MCU duals), all cards must be
installed before power-up. In this configuration the cards are no longer hot
pluggable.
Figure 21: Acom ALS Layout
M
C
10
11
12
Table 22: Acom Line Subrack Card Installation

Slot Number
0
MCU
(Single or Dual)
10
11
12
DIU1-2
DIU1-4
EMU
TIE
RGU
See RGU Card Placement on page 221.
RIU
RVA
EIE
SMU
95
Hardware Components
Slot Number
UIO
MSU
Legend:
M - (Mandatory) every subrack must have an MCU (single or dual) in slot 0 and an MSU in slot 12.
- A card of this type may be fitted to this slot if required.
- A card of this type must not be fitted to this slot.
Electrical Isolation
The Acom system is designed to connect and operate with other information technology
and telecommunications equipment. An important aspect of this requirement is to provide
isolation for the interfaces and power connections.
In general, the Acom system circuits connected to external lines or to Telecommunications
Network Voltage (TNV) circuits have the facility to be isolated from the backplane
supplies. The channels for the EIE, TIE, EMU, and MSU cards are intended for external
line connection and can be isolated. The main interfaces of the MCU are designed for
G.703 compliance, and the signal lines are isolated with the metallic outer conductors
grounded.
The Acom backplane is also designed to provide electrical isolation and is divided into an
upper board and a lower board. The upper board carries the Safety Extra Low Voltage
(SELV) circuits such as TTL and CMOS signals between cards. The lower board carries
TNV circuits such as the ring voltage, battery voltage. (These may carry hazardous
voltages from external transmission lines.)
Table 23: Acom SELV and TNV Circuits
SELV TNV
MCU G.703 Interfaces
MSU G.712 Interface
MSU Input Supply
MSU VBAT and VV Supplies
TIE interfaces
EIE interfaces
EMU connected to SELV source
EMU connected to TNV source 1
EMU using backplane source 1
Ringer Output
96
025-9574E
Acom Line Subracks
SELV TNV
Ringer External Input
Upper Backplane
Lower Backplane
External connections to subrack
Additional isolation considerations are as follows:

Any cables bundled with external TNV cables are themselves considered to be
TNV, even if the lines are local (e.g., to telephones in the same building).
The EMU has the option of being either TNV or SELV, depending on the jumper
settings of channels. If the jumpers are changed so that reference voltage is taken
from the front connector, the EMU is isolated from both TNV and SELV and can be
used for either application.
As a special case, if the only TNV connection to the system is through the coaxial
G.703 interfaces, the whole subrack is considered SELV. In this case a SELV
approved power supply is required. The jumpers on the EMU could then be used to
provide battery voltage to the E&M leads from the backplane without violating
isolation.
Acom Line Subrack Grounding
Building Earth Conductors
There are two types of earth connections required for an Acom installation: protective
earth (PE) and telecom earth (TRC). PE is the normal building earth used to connect mains
voltage. TRC is provided for connecting circuits to a clean earth and is not intended for
safety purposes.
Typically, there should be one connection between PE and TRC in the building (subject to
installation requirements and local regulations). The connection point should be as close
to the incoming earth point (earth stake or earth grid connection point) as possible.
Acom Earth Connections
The Acom system provides a number of earth connections at the rear of the subrack. The
connections provided are shown in Figure 22.
A description for each connection is described in the following table.
97
Hardware Components
Table 24: Acom Earth Connection

Connection
Description
J15: 1 and 2
Subrack chassis connection
J14: 2 and 3
SELV system earth
J18: 1 to 4
SELV electrostatic discharge

protection
J20: 1
+VBAT (DC power positive

supply)
J17: 2 to 4
TNV electrostatic discharge

protection
PE
TRC
SELV
TNV
Figure 22: Acom Subrack Earth Connections

J14
-BAT
GND
GND
RING
J13
J15
J18
Upper Backplane
J13
PROTECTIVE
EARTH
(PE)
J20
TELECOM
EARTH
(TRC)
98
J17
TNV
ESD
GND
Lower Backplane
025-9574E
Acom Line Subracks
Signal Cable Connections

Standard Cable Assemblies
The recommended method of signal cable connection is to use standard cable assemblies,
which are available in a range of lengths. The assemblies are fitted with ferrite cores when
required for compliance to EMC standards. Available types are listed in the Table 25.
Tip
If the cable assembly description includes a length, that length

denotes the standard length of the cable.
The -xxx part of the cable number is optional. If it is present on the
cable, the number denotes the length of the finished cable. An
additional -M or -F indicates meters or feet.
For example, cable 709-7699-10-F D indicates a 10 foot long
cable, revision D (fourth revision of the cable with this number).
Table 25: Acom Cable Assemblies

Part Numbers
Cable Assembly
408-0045-xxx
RJ-21, 25-Pair Plenum cable, 80 feet (24.4m)
709-0059-xxx
PC-PC Null Modem Cable
709-0060-xxx
Intercabinet Patch Panel
709-0062-xxx
Multi-mode fiber, 7 meters (23 feet)
709-0063-xxx
Multi-mode fiber, 12 inches (30.5cm)
709-0065-xxx
Cat5e, black, 6 feet (1.8m)
709-7345-xxx
Straight-through RS-232 9-pin M/F test cable
709-7592-xxx
SMU Diagnostic cable
709-7601-xxx
COV 12 pair to tail
709-7602-xxx
COV 25 pair to tail
709-7604-xxx
EIE to COV
709-7605-xxx
UIO to COV upper cable, 1 foot (30.5cm)
709-7606-xxx
MCU(T1) to COV
709-7611-xxx
BNC to SMB
709-7612-xxx
SMB to SMB
709-7613-xxx
BNC to BNC
709-7615-xxx
PC to Acom Console Unit (RS-232 Data)
709-7616-xxx
Acom Console Unit to Modem
709-7617-xxx
Acom Console Unit to generic speakers (audio cable)
709-7618-xxx
Power Supply L5-15P cable
709-7630-xxx
EMU to COV
709-7637-xxx
Operator position wiring, AFT control cable
709-7638-xxx
Operator position wiring, speaker cable
99
Hardware Components
Part Numbers
709-7639-xxx
Cable Assembly
Operator position wiring, ACU to IRR cable
709-7641-xxx
Operator position wiring, TRHI to 3240 cable
709-7887-xxx
Acom Console Unit to Zetron speakers (audio cable)
950-0509-xxx
Power cable
950-0544-xxx
EMU to Krone
950-0545-xxx
EIE to Krone
950-0546-xxx
UIO to Krone
950-0547-xxx
MSU to tail (Krone)
950-0549-xxx
CCC to Krone
950-0550-xxx
RJ-21 male to Krone
950-0551-xxx
RJ-21 female to Krone
Connection of Cable Shields

Shielding for the G.703 cables must be properly connected during installation to guarantee
proper system operation. The metallic bodies of the G.703 SMB connectors used on the
75-ohm version of the MCU may be connected to ground as required by G.703. Jumper
links are provided on the MCU card to connect the shields for receive and transmit lines as
required.
Surge Suppression and Protection
The TIE, EIE, and EMU cards have surge suppression circuits. To work effectively the
subrack must to be grounded in accordance with the preceding section.
The protection provided by the Acom is considered secondary protection only. If the lines
connected to the Acom can be exposed to direct or near miss lightning strikes, the surges
generated can far exceed the rated capacity of the surge suppression circuits. External
protection systems must be installed to ensure that the circuits do not carry the full surge
current.
Note
Warranty claims for card damage as a result of indirect or induced

lightning strikes will not be accepted.
Acom Line Subrack Specifications

Power Connection
The input power to the subrack can be anywhere from 20 to 60 Vdc supply. Power is
connected to the subrack in the following ways:
To the MSU in slot 12, which converts the incoming supply to +5, +12 and 12
volts and regulates the incoming supply for +VBAT and VBAT voltages. The
100
025-9574E
Acom Line Subracks
outputs from the MSU are connected to the backplane that powers other cards in the
subrack.
To an optional MSU in slot 11. When two MSU cards are installed, the output
current load is shared between the cards. One card will take up the load if the other
card fails or is switched off.
To signaling circuits on the EMU and MSU. This may be required to isolate
signaling circuits from the subrack. Alternately, the signaling circuits may be fed
from the backplane supply using jumper links on the card.
For further details on the card specifications and associated interfaces, refer to the specific
cards described in this manual.
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Table 26: Absolute Maximum Ratings
Parameter
Conditions
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158oF)
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Operating Humidity
45% RH (non-condensing) @ 45 C (113 F)
Note
Absolute maximum ratings for individual cards and associated

interfaces are described in the card sections.
Physical Characteristics 19 in. Subrack

Table 27: Physical Characteristics
Parameter
Typical
Units
Overall Width
482 (19)
mm
Overall Depth
346
mm
Overall Height
265 (6 RU)
mm
Weight of empty subrack
3.5
Kg
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Compliant to FCC Part 15, Class A.
VoIP Acom Line Subrack

Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) is used to transmit voice conversations over data
networks using Internet Protocol. A typical Acom Line Subrack can be configured to
handle VoIP signaling requirements, allowing voice packet processing. The VoIP ALS
101
Hardware Components
contains three types of cards, MCUs, SMUs, and a single MSU. An example of a VoIP
Acom Line Subrack is shown in Figure 23.
Figure 23: VoIP Acom Line Subrack Example
VoIP LSR
Cntl
M
C
U
Hdlc
Cntl
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
Voice
S
M
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
S
M
U
brdg
M
C
U
Empty
slot
M
S
U
Each VoIP ALS can handle up to ten SMU cards; one control and up to nine voice. One
MCU card is used as the main control unit for the entire subrack and is connected to the
DS3 Switch by an E1 link. The other MCU is used as the HDLC bridge to the SMU. The
main purpose of the HDLC bridge is to transfer HDLC messages to keep the main SMUs
and standby SMUs in synchronization. The MSU provides +5 and 12 Vdc power to all
the cards in the subrack.
Each SMU card is equipped with one 10Base-T Ethernet controller for connecting to the
Ethernet LAN. Except for the dedicated control SMU, which processes control messages,
all the SMU cards in the VoIP rack, process voice packets and are referred to as Voice
SMUs. Each voice SMU can handle up to 6 talkpaths of voice traffic (incoming and
outgoing calls). There is only one control SMU in the main system and one in the standby
system.
When processing voice packets, the SMU card converts PCM data (circuit switch based
voice data) into voice packets (packet switch-based voice data) for the outgoing calls, and
converts voice packets into PCM data for the incoming calls.
Cloning an Acom ALS

See Cloning an ALS on page 316.
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack

The ADS is a combination of a hardware subrack and software components, which
together provide connectivity to control and maintain a DS3 data backbone for Acom. The
installation of the ADS is nearly identical to that of the Acom Line Subrack (ALS).
Power requirements, mounting, environmental requirements, and physical characteristics
are similar for the ADS and the ALS. This section will focus on the differences.
102
025-9574E
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack
Table 28: Capacity of DS3 switches

Resource
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS)
Time slots available for audio
620
Lines
2200*
Consoles
128*
Utility audio
10*
System tones
8*
Fixed connections
128*
Max # of cross-connects per E1
256
DS3 to E1
* The ADS uses the available time slots dynamically. See Time Slots
on page 25.
Basic ADS Rack

The primary physical difference between the ADS and the ALS is that each ADS has two
6-slot backplanes (called a split backplane) whereas each ALS has one 13-slot
backplane. A metal divider vertically splits the ADS rack and there are no connections
between the two sides of the split backplane. Figure 24 illustrates the basic ADS rack
layout and slot numbering.
Figure 24: Basic ADS Rack Layout
1L
2L
6L
1R
2R
3L
4L
5L
3R
4R
5R
6R
Rack Configuration
Due to the split backplane, two ADSs can be installed in an ADS rack.
The typical ADS configuration consists of a DS3 Control Unit (DCU), 1-3 Main Control
Units (MCU), and 1-2 Main Supply Units (MSU).
103
Hardware Components
General Circuit Card Installation

Unlike the ALS, every slot in the ADS is compatible with only one type of card. The Table
29 and Table 30 explain ADS slot compatibility:
Table 29: DS3 Subrack Card Installation
Slot Number
1L
DCU
2L
3L
4L
5L
6L
1R
2R
3R
4R
5R
6R
MCU4*
MSU
Legend:
M - (Mandatory) every subrack must have a DCU in slot 0 and an MSU in slot 6.
* - If there are less than three MCU4 cards, the slots should be populated from the left first (slot 2, then 3), leaving empty
slots to the right. (Left to right within each half of the subrack, not across the entire subrack.)
Caution!
Certain older MCU cards will not operate in an ADS subrack.

See the following table for MCU compatibility with the ADS
subrack.
Table 30: MCU Part Numbers and Subrack Compatibility

Zetron Part Number Subrack Compatibility
950-0485
ALS only
950-0561
ALS only
950-0652
ALS only
950-0486
ALS only
950-0697
ALS/ADS
950-0771
ALS/ADS
950-0698
ALS/ADS
If using a redundant ADS configuration, each redundant pair of ADSs should be equipped
and configured identically with all of same resources so that a switch over is seamless.
The split backplane completely separates the left and right ADS, so it is acceptable to
configure a left/right ADS pair to be a redundant ADS pair.
All ADS cards use DIN41612 style connectors to connect to the split backplane. Cards
should be inserted carefully to ensure that the card edges are in the guide slots before
firmly mating the rear connector with the backplane.
Some cards may require setting jumper links and DIP switches prior to installation in the
subrack. This information is provided in the installation description for each card.
104
025-9574E
Changeover Subrack
Jumper Settings
Jumpers on the rear of the ADS rack are used to identify each half of the rack as being on
the left or the right. IMS ADS uses this information to graphically display an ADS on the
correct side. These jumpers are set at the factory.
Figure 25: ADS Jumper Settings
Configure as Left
Position A
JP2 JP1
Position B
ADS Jumper Locations (rear of rack)
Configure as Right
Position A
Position A
JP2 JP1
Combine Mode
In an ADS, MCU4 cards have two E1 ports each. The ports are identified as port 1 and
port 2. If there are multiple MCU4 cards, each card acts as a separate device with two
ports each.
However, if there is an MCU4 card in both slots 2 and 3, then they can act together in
combine mode as one device with four E1 ports instead of two devices with two ports
each. For more information about combine mode and configuring this mode, see
Configuring ADS Parameters in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N
025-9529.
Changeover Subrack
This section provides the description for using the Changeover subrack to switch radio or
telephone resources between redundant line cards. (Also refer to Main Supply Unit (MSU)
on page 202.)
Use of a main and standby subrack is supported to maximize Mean Time Between
Failures (MTBF). A failure in one rack does not result in a lost resource, because a
duplicate resource is available in the standby subrack. If the currently selected ALS
105
Hardware Components
triggers an alarm because of a major fault, the other ALS will take control from the
Changeover subrack. This happens only if the ALS has no major alarms of its own.
Changeover Hardware
The Acom changeover control system is primarily composed of a Main, Standby, and
Changeover subrack. Each rack is equipped with cards to support the hot standby
application.
For more information about changeover, see Changeover Control on page 309.
Changeover Subrack
A Changeover Subrack consists of a Changeover Control Card (CCC), a subrack assembly
without the lower backplane, and one or more COV-V, COV-R, or COV-T cards. The
lower back plane is removed to allow connection of IDF cables to the back of each
changeover card. Unlike an Acom Line Subrack, the Changeover Subrack does not require
an MCU or MSU card to function.
Table 31: Changeover Subrack Card Installation
Slot Number
0
CCC
CCC-E
10
11
12
M
or
M
COV-V
COV-R
COV-T
Legend:
M - (Mandatory) every Changeover Subrack must have a CCC or CCC-E in slot 0.

The CCC card accepts dual 48 volt power, and it does not lose power if one supply fails.
Signaling leads from each MSU power supply connects to the CCC DB9 ports on the front
edge of the card. The CCC signals the changeover-racks COV-V/COV-R voice circuit
cards or COV-T coaxial circuit cards to switch between the A and B system. The CCC
card has a removal lever at the front of the card.
COV-V Card
A COV-V card switches 24 pairs of copper between an A and B system through a bank of
relays. LEDs on the front of the COV-V card indicate the switched state of the cards
106
025-9574E
Changeover Subrack
relays. An LED on the front of the COV-V card indicates if it is receiving power from the
CCC card.
If a relay on the COV-V card fails, it will probably fail in either the A or B state. If both
subracks are operating, the failure may go unnoticed. Each of the six LEDs on the front of
the card reflects the switched state for two of the 12 relays on the COV-V card.
Inputs from the A ALS are connected to the top connector P2 of the COV-V card. Inputs
from the B ALS are connected to the bottom connector P3 of the COV-V card. The
common outputs of the COV-V card are connected to the back connector P1 and are
terminated at an IDF for connection to a resource.
The COV-V card is not equipped with a removal lever at the top of the card.
COV-R Card
The COV-R card is functionally identical to the COV-V card. The primary difference is
that the COV-R card uses RJ-21 connectors for A system, B system, and the common
connector at the rear. Due to its smaller connectors, the COV-R card has a removal lever
on the front of the card.
COV-T Card
A COV-T card switches three sets of coaxial links between an A and B system. This card
is typically used to switch E1 or ISDN links from the CO between the A and B rack. It is
not used to switch E1 links between subracks and DS3 Switch, nor a Acom Console Unit
and DS3 Switch. These connections are already redundant and do not need to pass through
a changeover card.
The common pair of coaxial lines connects to the top connector on each of the three
connection sets. The first set of connections is on the top front of the COV-T card. The top
pair is the common; the second pair is the A side, and the third pair is the B side. Just
below these coaxial connections are the second set with a similar order. The third set of
coaxial links is connected to the rear of the COV-T card. Unlike the COV-V and COV-R
cards, the common connections on a COV-T are not made through the back; instead there
are two common sets of connections on the front of the card, and one on the back.
The COV-T card is not equipped with a removal lever at the top of the card.
Card placement
The CCC card must be located in slot 0 of the changeover cabinet. The COV-V, COV-R,
and COV-T cards should be located in slots 1 through 12 of the Changeover Subrack.
Additional Hardware
The common connections secure to the back of the rack and changeover cards using screw
terminal connections. Care should be taken to verify the card seats completely into the
back cable. Use of spacers may be required to get a secure connection.
107
Hardware Components
Changeover Troubleshooting
You can force a change over to an ALS by momentarily grounding the SELSYSA
or SELSYSB inputs of the CCC card. (Alternatively, you can disconnect the cable
from the MSU card and force control to the associated standby rack.)
Incorrect wiring of the changeover signaling between the CCC and MSU may cause
the subracks to switch continuously between the A and B system.
If the ALS never switches to the other subrack even though a Watchdog failure has
been triggered, the subrack may be automatically acknowledging the alarms. Check
the mapping for the Alarms Ackd output alarm.
If the ALS will not switch to the other subrack, even though it has no alarms, and
the watchdog has triggered on the current rack, it may be caused by a problem with
the CCC card SYSSEL output being pulled low by an unpowered DS3 Switch
alarm I/O. It may also be caused by the Watchdog alarm not being seen at the other
subrack; the Watchdog input should normally be active. The OK alarm should
normally be inactive.
Additional Changeover Subracks

Figure 26: Additional sub-rack connection
J3
J4
CCC
COV-V and COV-T cards
J3
J4
CCC-E
J3
J4
CCC-E
108
025-9574E
Changeover Subrack
Where more than one subrack is required to house all the COV cards involved in the
change over, they are connected to the first subrack by a jumper cable between the two
common connectors J3 and J4 as shown in Figure 26.
109
Hardware Components
110
025-9574E
Acom Card Reference
This chapter describes the system circuit cards that are current with the Acom system,
including their capabilities, electrical characteristics, installation requirements, pin-outs,
and replacement procedures.
Note
There are system circuit cards that are part of Acoms legacy
equipment that are not described in this manual. These include the
following cards: DIU3, DIU4, EIE V10, EMU V10, MCU 3I, MCU 3T,
MCUG, MCUD, MSU-V0, ODCA-2, ODCA-4, ODS-2, ODS-4, SSR,
TIE-V0, TIE-V10, TSR, and VDC. Contact Zetron, Inc. for
information and technical support for this equipment.
Changeover Control Card (CCC) on page 112

Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T) on page 118
Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R) on page 123
DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card) on page 131
Data Interface Unit (DIU1-2) on page 142
Data Interface Unit (DIU1-4) on page 151
Exchange Interface Unit Card (EIE) on page 159
E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU) on page 168
Main Control Unit (MCU) on page 180
Main Supply Unit (MSU) on page 202
Ring Generator Unit (RGU) on page 215
Radio Interface Unit (RIU) on page 224
Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) Card on page 235
Signaling Management Unit (SMU) on page 240
Telephone Interface Unit (TIE) on page 252
Universal Input/Output (UIO) on page 260
111
Acom Card Reference
Changeover Control Card (CCC)

P/N 950-0492
The Changeover Control Card (CCC) is mounted in a separate sub-rack than the standard
Acom system cards and controls the switching between a primary and standby Acom
system. All of the primary Acom switching facilities can be duplicated in adjoining subracks.
The card monitors the status of two Acom systems by a connection to the Main Supply
Unit (MSU) for the system. In the event that the Primary system fails, the MSU signals the
CCC to change from the primary to the standby system. The CCC then drives the
changeover performed by the Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V or COV-R)
and Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch (COV-T) cards. These cards change the
external signal lines before the lines reach any line cards of the Acom switch.
The CCC has the following features:
Initiates changeover of COV cards on command from the primary or standby Acom
system.
Supports voice, data, or 2 Mb/s interfaces using COV cards.
The relationships between the Acom, the CCC, COV, and the standby line cards are
shown in Figure 27
Figure 27: Standby Acom Configuration
Acom
Terminal or
operator
equipment
Terminal or
operator
equipment
CCC
COV
Acom
COV
The CCC is connected to the MSU alarm input and outputs on each Acom system. When
one of the Acom systems has gained control, it provides an earth pulse of 20 ms or greater
on the appropriate alarm output. This energizes a relay in the CCC and switches the
externally supplied relay voltages through to the COV cards. The changeover relay is
magnetically latched, and the selected state remains until changed by another alarm
output. The currently selected system is fed back to each MSU through the alarm-input
lines and is indicated on the CCC LEDs.
Note
In many applications the primary system and the standby systems

are referred to respectively as System A and System B.
The CCC is used to switch between two functionally identical systems. These systems are
referred to as the primary system and the standby system. Although there is no difference
112
025-9574E
between these systems from the point of the CCC, when the standby system is connected,
all of the relays in the COV cards are energized. Therefore, the default system is the
Primary system.
CCC Block Diagram

Figure 28 shows the functional block diagram for a CCC.
Figure 28: CCC Functional Block Diagram
CCC
Select other system

System A
Primary
Acom
MSU
Currently selected system
Change over
selection
System B
Standby
Acom MSU
To backplane for
COV cards
Currently selected system
Select other system
Primary
0V
Standby
0V
Primary
-48V
To backplane for
COV cards
Standby
-48V
Description of Major Functional Blocks

The CCC is comprised of the following major functional block:
113
Acom Card Reference
Table 32: Description of CCC Functional Block

Section
Change over
selection
Description
A relay and support circuitry enables either of two systems to select its own
system for switching use. The logic determines which system is calling for
control and signals to the COV cards which direction to switch.
CCC Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
The front edge layout of the CCC card is illustrated in the Figure 29.
Figure 29: CCC Front Edge Layout
Extraction
lever
A B LED Indicators
System A has power

System A is active
SYSA -48 V
SYSA 0 V
SYSB -48 V
SYSB 0 V
2
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
COM -48 V
COM 0 V
2
3
4
J4
Common voltage and
selection Connector to
additional sub-racks
1 Yellow
2 Green
3 Green
1
2
Relay power available

System B has power
System B is active
J1
System A
Primary system
Relay voltages
J2
System B
Standby system
Relay voltages
J3
common
relay
voltages
3
4
SELECTSYS
COM -48 V
J5
Primary (system A)
changeover controls
J6
Standby (system B)
changeover controls
114
025-9574E
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
Standard backplane interface only.
LED Indicators
See Figure 29.
Reset
There is no mechanism for reset.
Settings
There are no jumpers, straps, pots, or switches to be set when installing.
Connector Details
The changeover control ports J5 and J6 are both female DB9 connectors. Pinout details are
shown in Table 33
Table 33: Pinout Details for Changeover Control Ports
Pin
J5 Name
J6 Name
Function
Direction
SELSYSA
SELSYSB
Select system A/B
Input into the card
SELSYSB
SELSYSA
Select system A/B
Input into the card
SELECTSYS
SELECTSYS
System selected
Output from the card
SYSASEL
SYSASEL
Primary system
(System A) selected
SYSBSEL
SYSBSEL
Standby system
(System B) selected
No connection
No connection
No connection
No connection
These pins are located on the connector as shown in Figure 30
115
Acom Card Reference
Figure 30: Pin Numbering on DB-9

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CCC Installation
Card placement
The CCC card must be placed in slot 0 of a changeover subrack that is either empty or
contains only COV cards (COV-V, COV-R, or COV-T). A changeover subrack is similar
to an Acom Line Subrack, but fitted with an upper backplane only.
Caution!
The subrack containing the CCC card must not contain any
standard Acom cards (such as the MCU, MSU, RGU, or TIE),
because the backplane is used for relay voltages and may
damage the standard cards.
Proper connection between the MSU and the CCC requires that specific hardware be
correctly installed. Once this is accomplished, the IMS configuration portion will work
properly. The following list describes the information necessary to properly install the
hardware:
Pinout/Cabling for Control Ports (Table 33)
Connections to MSU
Connection cable
MSU to CCC interconnections
Note
116
Also see Table 131 DIP Switch Functions, page 207 for additional
MSU information.
025-9574E
Connections to MSU
When fitted to an Acom sub-rack, the CCC changeover control ports are wired to the
alarm lines on each MSU 64-pin connector (P4) according to the following:
Signal Name
MSU Alarm Connection

System
(example only)
Function
SELSYSA
Select system A/B
AO 11
SELSYSB
Select system A/B
AO 11
SELECTSYS
System selected
Not used
SYSASEL
System A selected
AI 11
SYSBSEL
System B selected
AI 11
Note
The MSU must have its J1-J6 and J10-J12 jumpers set to take
reference voltage from the backplane (pins 2, 3 shorted) when
used with a CCC.
Connections to ADS
Signal Name
Function
Connection
System
SYSXSEL
System A selected
MSU
SYSXSEL
System A selected
Master E1 input of ADS
SYSXSEL
System B selected
MSU
SYSXSEL
System B selected
Master E1 input of ADS
See the pinout information for the DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card) on page 131.
CCC Technical Specifications

Parameter
Specification
Input voltage range (-48 Volt only)
-48 VDC +/- 20%
Maximum power consumption
+5 V
+12 V
-12 V
-48 V < 50 mA (average)
Minimum pulse width
20 ms
Table 35: Environmental Specifications

Parameter
Specification
Operational Temperature
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
117
Acom Card Reference
Table 36: Physical Specifications

Parameter
Specification
Height
233 mm
Width
220 mm
Weight
231 g
Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T)

P/N 950-0489
The COV-T card operates under the control of the CCC to simultaneously switch six
external coaxial lines between the primary and standby Acom systems.
The COV-T has the following features:
Six coaxial lines (3 x full duplex 2 Mbps links) switched.
Visual indication if standby system is in circuit.
Low power consumption in idle state.
Multiple relays reduce single point failure.
When energized from the CCC through the backplane, the change over relays switch the
coaxial signal lines. The relays are grouped into banks, and an LED indicates the operation
for each relay bank.
COV-T Block Diagram

Figure 31 shows the functional block diagram for a COV-T.
118
025-9574E
Figure 31: COV-T Functional Block Diagram

COV-T
P11/A
P10/A
Primary conections
External
equipment
P11/B
P10/B
P12/A
Standby conections
P12/B
P21/A
P21/B
P20/A
P20/B
P22/A
P22/B
P31/A
P31/B
P30/A
P30/B
P32/A
P32/B
Relay control from the

CCC via the backplane

The COV-T is comprised of the following major functional block:
Table 37: COV-T Functional Block
Section
Relay switch
Description
A two input / four output coaxial switching relay
COV-T Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
The front edge layout of the COV-T is shown in Figure 32.
119
Acom Card Reference
Figure 32: COV-T Front Edge Layout

LED Indicators
Primary (System A) active
Standby (System B) active
Group 1 active
Group 2 active
Group 3 active
G.703 2Mbps
Group 1
External equipment
(SMB Connectors)
G.703 2Mbps
Group 1
Primary (System A)
(SMB Connectors)
G.703 2Mbps
Group 1
Standby (System B)
(SMB Connectors)
G.703 2Mbps
Group 2
External equipment
(SMB Connectors)
G.703 2Mbps
Group 2
Primary (System A)
(SMB Connectors)
G.703 2Mbps
Group 2
Standby (System B)
(SMB Connectors)
Extraction
lever
Green
Yellow
Green
Green
Green
P10/A
P10/B
P11/A
P11/B
P12/A
P12/B
P20/A
P20/B
P21/A
P21/B
P22/A
P22/B
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
The rear edge layout of the COV-T is shown in Figure 33.
120
025-9574E
Figure 33: COV-T Rear Edge Layout
C A
1
P1
Backplane
connections
32
P30/A
P30/B
P31/A
P31/B
P32/A
P32/B
G.703 2Mbps
Group 3
External equipment
(SMB Connectors)
G.703 2Mbps
Group 3
Primary (System A)
(SMB Connectors)
G.703 2Mbps
Group 3
Standby (System B)
(SMB Connectors)
LED Indicators
The following LED indicators are provided on the front of the card (see Figure 32).
Table 38: COV-T LED Indications
LED
Color
Function
Operation
SYS:A
Green
Primary system
On if the Primary Acom system is connected
SYS:B
Yellow
Standby system
On if the Standby Acom system is connected
LD1
Green
Relay active indication
On if coaxial pair in group 1 are switched to Standby
LD2
Green
LD3
Green
Switches
There are no switches on the front of the COV-T.
Settings
There are no card jumpers, straps, or switches to be set when installing.
121
Acom Card Reference
Connector Detail
Standard backplane and SMB interfaces only.
COV-T Installation
Card Placement
The COV-T card may be placed in slots 1 - 12 of a changeover subrack that contains a
CCC card in slot 0. The subrack may only contain the CCC card and other COV cards.
Changeover subracks are fitted with an upper backplane only.
COV-T Alarm Generation

None.
COV-T Technical Specifications

Table 39: General
Parameter
Specification
Number of circuits available to change
6 coaxial lines (3 pairs)
Relay change over time
10ms
Table 40: Power Supply

Parameter
Power Consumption
Primary System Connected
Specification
+5 V
+12 V
-48 V 10 mA
Power Consumption
Alternate System Connected
+5 V
+12 V
-48 V 125 mA
Table 41: Environmental

Parameter
122
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
025-9574E
Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V and COV-R)
Table 42: Physical

Parameter
Specification
Height
233 mm
Width
220 mm
Weight
278 g

P/N COV-V 950-0488
P/N COV-R 950-0837
The COV-V and COV-R cards operate under the control of the CCC to simultaneously
switch 48 external signal lines (24 pairs) between a primary and standby Acom system.
The COV-V and COV-R have the following features:
48 signal lines switched (24 signal pairs). These may be used for switching standard
VF, data, or contact closures.
Visual indication if standby system is in circuit.
Low power consumption in idle state.
Multiple relays reduce single point failure.
Energized from the CCC through the backplane, the changeover relays switch the 2 x 2
wire signal lines. The relays are grouped into banks, and each bank of energized relays is
indicated by an LED. To switch back to the original system, the relays are de-energized.
COV-V and COV-R Block Diagram

Figure 34 shows the functional block diagram for a COV-V or COV-R.
123
Acom Card Reference
Figure 34: COV-V and COV-R Functional Block Diagram

COV-V / COV-R
Primary connections
CCT 1-1
P4 (COV-V)
P2 (COV-R)
To external
equipment or
operator
equipment
P2 (COV-V)
J1 (COV-R)
CCT 1-2
To primary
Acom system
CCT 1-3
CCT 1-4
Secondary connections
P3 (COV-V)
J2 (COV-R)
To standby
Acom system
CCT1-5 to CCT 1-8

CCT2-1 to CCT 2-4
CCT2-5 to CCT 2-8
CCT3-1 to CCT 3-4
CCT3-5 to CCT 3-8
CCT4-1 to CCT 4-4
CCT4-5 to CCT 4-8
CCT5-1 to CCT5-4
CCT5-5 to CCT5-8
CCT6-1 to CCT6-4
CCT6-5 to CCT6-8
Relay control from CCC through backplane

The COV-V / COV-R is comprised of the following major functional block:
Table 43: Description of COV-V / COV-R Functional Block
Section
Relay switch
124
Description
A four input eight output switching relay.
025-9574E
COV-V and COV-R Interfaces

Front Edge Layout
Figure 35 shows the COV-R and COV-V front edge layout.
Figure 35: COV-R and COV-V Front Edge Layout
COV-R
COV-V
A C
32
50 25
Normally closed
bi-directional Primary
Circuit 1-1 to 6-8
J1
COV-V and COV-R are

functionally equivalent.
Only the connectors and
pinout are different.
P2
LED Indicators
Relay 1 active
Relay 3 active
Relay 5 active
Primary system active
LED Indicators
26 1
(green) A1
(green) A2
(green) A3
(green) A4
B1 (green) Relay 2 active

B4 (yellow) Standby system active
32
50 25
P3
Normally open
bi-directional Standby
Circuit 1-1 to 6-8
J2
1
26 1
A C
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
Figure 36 shows the COV-R and COV-V rear edge layout.
125
Acom Card Reference
Figure 36: COV-R and COV-V Rear Edge Layout

COV-R
COV-V
C A
C A
1
Backplane Connections
P1
P1
32
32
COV-V and COV-R are
functionally equivalent.
Only the connectors and
pinout are different.
C A
1
25
50
P2
P4
Bi-directional Primary
Circuit 1-1 to 6-8
32
26
LED Indicators
The following LED indicators are provided on the front of the card (see Figure 35).
Table 44: LED Indicators
126
LED
Color
Function
Operation
A1
Green
Relay active indication On if circuit 1-1 to 1-8 are switched to standby
B1
Green
A2
Green
B2
Green
A3
Green
B3
Green
A4
Green
Primary system
On if the primary Acom system is connected
B4
Yellow
Standby system
On if the standby Acom system is connected
025-9574E
Settings
When installing a COV-V / COV-R card there are no settings, jumpers, pots, straps, or
switches to be set.
COV-V Connector Detail
(For COV-R card pinout, see Table 46 on page 129.)
Table 45 shows the pinout cable connections for P4, P2 and P3 on the COV-V card.
Cabling is done so that the cable terminating into connector P4 can be plugged directly
into either of the cables terminating into P2 or P3, removing the COV-V card from the
circuit. Mounting P4 upside down relative to either P2 or P3 means that pin 1a of P4 will
connect to pin 32a of P2 or P3 if the two cables were connected directly.
127
128
CCT 1
CCT2
CCT 3
CCT 4
CCT 5
CCT6
Cct
6-2
27b
5-2
4-8
21b
20b
4-2
3-8
16b
15b
3-2
2-8
11b
10b
2-2
1-8
6b
5b
1-4
1-2
2b
1b
3b
4b
26c
2-4
7b
32c
31c
30c
29c
28c
27c
25c
24c
23c
8b
9b
21c
3-4
12b
22c
20c
19c
18c
13b
14b
16c
4-4
17b
17c
15c
14c
13c
18b
19b
11c
5-4
22b
12c
10c
23b
9c
8c
25b
24b
7c
26b
5-8
5c
6-4
28b
6c
4c
29b
3c
2c
30b
1c
6-8
31b
Pin
P4
32a
31a
30a
29a
28a
27a
26a
25a
24a
23a
22a
21a
20a
19a
18a
17a
16a
15a
14a
13a
12a
11a
10a
9a
8a
7a
6a
5a
4a
3a
2a
1a
Pin
Func
Core
Cct
Core
1-1
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-7
2-1
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
3-1
3-3
3-5
3-6
3-7
4-1
4-3
4-5
4-6
4-7
5-1
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-7
6-1
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-7
1a
2a
3a
4a
5a
6a
7a
8a
9a
10a
11a
12a
13a
14a
15a
16a
17a
18a
19a
20a
21a
22a
23a
24a
25a
26a
27a
28a
29a
30a
31a
32a
CCT 1
CCT 2
CCT 3
CCT 4
CCT 5
CCT 6
1a
2a
3a
4a
5a
6a
7a
8a
9a
10a
11a
12a
13a
14a
15a
16a
17a
18a
19a
20a
21a
22a
23a
24a
25a
26a
27a
28a
29a
30a
31a
32a
1-1
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-7
2-1
2-3
2-5
2-6
2-7
3-1
3-3
3-5
3-6
3-7
4-1
4-3
4-5
4-6
4-7
5-1
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-7
6-1
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-7
Func
1a
2a
3a
4a
5a
6a
7a
8a
9a
10a
11a
12a
13a
14a
15a
16a
17a
18a
19a
20a
21a
22a
23a
24a
25a
26a
27a
28a
29a
30a
31a
32a
Pin
P2 and P3
1c
2c
3c
4c
5c
6c
7c
8c
9c
10c
11c
12c
13c
14c
15c
16c
17c
18c
19c
20c
21c
22c
23c
24c
25c
26c
27c
28c
29c
30c
31c
32c
Pin
1-2
1-4
1-8
2-2
2-4
2-8
3-2
3-4
3-8
4-2
4-4
4-8
5-2
5-4
5-8
6-2
6-4
6-8
Func
Pin Allocation P2 and P3
Func
Pin Allocation P4
32b
Core
COV-V Changeover Card for Voice and Data Signals
COV-V Changeover Card for Voice and Data Signals
1b
2b
3b
4b
5b
6b
7b
8b
9b
10b
11b
12b
13b
14b
15b
16b
17b
18b
19b
20b
21b
22b
23b
24b
25b
26b
27b
28b
29b
30b
31b
32b
Core
CCT 1
CCT2
CCT 3
CCT 4
CCT 5
CCT6
Cct
Acom Card Reference
Table 45: COV-V Voice and Data Signals, P4, P2 and P3
025-9574E
COV-R Connector Detail

(For COV-V card pinout, see Table 45 on page 128.)
Table 46 shows the pinout cable connections for P2, J1, and J2 on the COV-R card.
Cabling is done so that the cable terminating into connector P2 can be plugged directly
into either of the cables terminating into J1 or J2, removing the COV-R card from the
circuit.
Table 46: COV-R Voice and Data Signals, P2, J1, and J2
Connector P2
(Common)
Connector J1
(Normally Closed)
Connector J2
(Normally Open)
Pin
Relay Signal
Name
Pin
Relay Signal
Name
Pin
Relay Signal
Name
26
RLY1-COM1
26
RLY1-NC1
26
RLY1-NO1
27
RLY1-COM3
27
RLY1-NC3
27
RLY1-NO3
28
RLY2-COM1
28
RLY2-NC1
28
RLY2-NO1
29
RLY2-COM3
29
RLY2-NC3
29
RLY2-NO3
30
RLY3-COM1
30
RLY3-NC1
30
RLY3-NO1
31
RLY3-COM3
31
RLY3-NC3
31
RLY3-NO3
32
RLY4-COM1
32
RLY4-NC1
32
RLY4-NO1
33
RLY4-COM3
33
RLY4-NC3
33
RLY4-NO3
34
RLY5-COM1
34
RLY5-NC1
34
RLY5-NO1
35
RLY5-COM3
35
RLY5-NC3
35
RLY5-NO3
36
RLY6-COM1
36
RLY6-NC1
36
RLY6-NO1
38
RLY6-COM3
38
RLY6-NC3
38
RLY6-NO3
38
RLY7-COM1
38
RLY7-NC1
38
RLY7-NO1
39
RLY7-COM3
39
RLY7-NC3
39
RLY7-NO3
40
RLY8-COM1
40
RLY8-NC1
40
RLY8-NO1
41
RLY8-COM3
41
RLY8-NC3
41
RLY8-NO3
42
RLY9-COM1
42
RLY9-NC1
42
RLY9-NO1
43
RLY9-COM3
43
RLY9-NC3
43
RLY9-NO3
44
RLY10-COM1
44
RLY10-NC1
44
RLY10-NO1
45
RLY10-COM3
45
RLY10-NC3
45
RLY10-NO3
46
RLY11-COM1
46
RLY11-NC1
46
RLY11-NO1
47
RLY11-COM3
47
RLY11-NC3
47
RLY11-NO3
48
RLY12-COM1
48
RLY12-NC1
48
RLY12-NO1
49
RLY12-COM3
49
RLY12-NC3
49
RLY12-NO3
129
Acom Card Reference
Connector P2
(Common)
Connector J1
(Normally Closed)
Connector J2
(Normally Open)
Pin
Relay Signal
Name
Pin
Relay Signal
Name
Pin
Relay Signal
Name
RLY1-COM2
RLY1-NC2
RLY1-NO2
RLY1-COM4
RLY1-NC4
RLY1-NO4
RLY2-COM2
RLY2-NC2
RLY2-NO2
RLY2-COM4
RLY2-NC4
RLY2-NO4
RLY3-COM2
RLY3-NC2
RLY3-NO2
RLY3-COM4
RLY3-NC4
RLY3-NO4
RLY4-COM2
RLY4-NC2
RLY4-NO2
RLY4-COM4
RLY4-NC4
RLY4-NO4
RLY5-COM2
RLY5-NC2
RLY5-NO2
10
RLY5-COM4
10
RLY5-NC4
10
RLY5-NO4
11
RLY6-COM2
11
RLY6-NC2
11
RLY6-NO2
12
RLY6-COM4
12
RLY6-NC4
12
RLY6-NO4
13
RLY7-COM2
13
RLY7-NC2
13
RLY7-NO2
14
RLY7-COM4
14
RLY7-NC4
14
RLY7-NO4
15
RLY8-COM2
15
RLY8-NC2
15
RLY8-NO2
16
RLY8-COM4
16
RLY8-NC4
16
RLY8-NO4
17
RLY9-COM2
17
RLY9-NC2
17
RLY9-NO2
18
RLY9-COM4
18
RLY9-NC4
18
RLY9-NO4
19
RLY10-COM2
19
RLY10-NC2
19
RLY10-NO2
20
RLY10-COM4
20
RLY10-NC4
20
RLY10-NO4
21
RLY11-COM2
21
RLY11-NC2
21
RLY11-NO2
22
RLY11-COM4
22
RLY11-NC4
22
RLY11-NO4
23
RLY12-COM2
23
RLY12-NC2
23
RLY12-NO2
24
RLY12-COM4
24
RLY12-NC4
24
RLY12-NO4
COV-V / COV-R Installation

Card Placement
The COV-V and COV-R cards may be placed in slots 1 through 12 of a changeover
subrack that contains a CCC card in slot 0. The subrack may only contain the CCC card
and other COV cards. Changeover subracks are fitted with an upper backplane only.
COV-V / COV-R Alarm Generation

None.
130
025-9574E
DS3 Control Unit (DCU Card)
COV-V / COV-R Technical Specifications

Table 47: General
Parameter
Specification
Number of circuits available to change
48 lines

Parameter
Specification
Power Consumption
Primary System Connected
+5 V
+12 V
-48 V 10 mA
Power Consumption
Alternate System Connected
+5 V
+12 V
-48 V 250 mA

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Table 50: Physical

Parameter
Specification
Height
233 mm
Width
220 mm
Weight
347 g

P/N 950-0692
The DCU card performs audio and data switching for two DS3 (T3) links, holds the
configuration for the ADS subrack, controls all ADS rack messaging, provides an
interface for ADS redundancy, and provides Real Time Clock (RTC) data.
131
Acom Card Reference
Real Time Clock (RTC)

The RTC is used to facilitate the Acom RTC system. This is an advanced configurable
system that has support for DST, GMT offsets, NTP sources, multi-site redundant RTC
sources, and multi-site operation over different time zones. For more information about
the Acom RTC system, see the IMS ADS chapter in Acom Software Configuration
(P/N 025-9529).
DCU Block Diagram

Figure 37 shows the functional block diagram for an Acom DCU card.
Figure 37: DCU Card Functional Block Diagram
2M Clock
Input
75 SMB
connector &
isolation
transformer
44.736Mhz
Reference
clock
75 BNC
connectors &
isolation
transformer
DS3
Clock Control
DS3 Link 1
Line Interface
Unit + Framer 21 x E1
+
DS3 <-> E1
mux
21 x E1
42 x E1
Framers
75 BNC
connectors &
isolation
transformer
DS3
DS3 Link 2
Line Interface
Unit + Framer
+
DS3 <-> E1
mux
Cross Point
Switch
2xE1
21 x E1
14 x E1
21 x E1
Backplane
Interface
2xE1
2xE1
FPGA
Real-Time
Clock
HDLC
Status LEDs
Digital I/O
Serial Coms
Controllers
Flash + RAM
+ Config
Prom + Glue
Logic
CPU
Serial Port +
LAN/Serial
Port
Serial
Coms
controller
HDLC Bus
Serial
Coms
controller
LAN Transceiver
132
025-9574E
DCU Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
Figure 38: DCU Front Edge Layout
SW1 - Reset
LED
Indicators
J1
J2
J3
RX1
J4
TX1
J5
RX2
J6
TX2
J7
J8
Serial Port 1
133
Acom Card Reference
Physical Layout
Figure 39: DCU Connectors, Switches, and Jumpers
SW1
LED
Indicators
JP1
P2
J1
JP2
J2
RX1
J3
P1
JP3
JP5
JP4
TX1
J4
RX2
J5
JP6
JP7
J6
TX2
JP8
J9
J7
JP9 JP10
J8
JP11 JP12
Rear Edge Layout

LED Indicators
The DCU card status indicators show operational state, link states, wrap states, and status.
They also identify the cycle master. The LEDs in Figure 40 are located at the top edge of
the card. This LED indicator layout is for DCU firmware revisions 2.01 or later.
134
025-9574E
Figure 40: DCU Status Indicators Layout and Functions
Card Operational State

Blinking Green - Running
Solid Red - In reset
Cycle Master
Blinking Green - This card is cycle master.
Off - This card is not cycle master.
Port 1 DS3 Link State

Solid Green - No errors
Solid Red - Loss of signal
Solid Yellow - Loss of frame

Solid Green - No errors
Solid Red - Loss of signal
Solid Yellow - Loss of frame
Port 1 Wrap State

Solid Green - Not wrapped
Solid Red - Wrapped
Port 2 Wrap State

Solid Green - Not wrapped
Solid Red - Wrapped
Status of ADS
Solid Red - Configuration alarm
Information Alarm LED

Programmable alarm
Cycle Master - When power is first applied to ADS racks, a bidding cycle occurs among
the DS3 cards to determine which card should be in control of the DS3 ring. The card in
charge is the Cycle Master.
Link State - Link state indicates the status of a physical DS3 link.
Wrap State (Wrapped) - One of the DS3 links is not usable, so a loopback is being
applied internally. All messages/voice to be sent on this port are being sent past the break
point using the spare DS3 link. The technician should troubleshoot the unusable link.
Reset
The reset button performs a reset for the entire ADS. Resetting one ADS does not also
reset the ADS in the other half of the rack.
If the DCU firmware was updated prior to the soft reset, the DCU card will reboot using
the new firmware.
Settings
Jumpers
Jumpers JP1, JP5, and JP6 are used for production purposes only. The remaining jumpers
are user-configurable. The following table describes jumper settings for configurable
jumpers:
135
Acom Card Reference
Table 51: DCU Card Jumper Settings

Jumper
Position A (Pins 1-2)
Position B (Pins 2-3)
JP2
Run card self-test during bootup.

(Default)
Bypass card self-test during bootup.
JP4
Execute full version of code at

startup. (Default)
Execute failsafe version of code at startup.
JP9
No resistive termination on serial

port 1 receive pair. (Default)
120 ohm termination placed across serial

port 1 receive pair.
JP10

port 1 transmit pair. (Default)

port 1 transmit pair.
JP11

port 2 transmit pair. (Default)

port 2 transmit pair.
JP12

port 2 receive pair. (Default)

port 2 receive pair.
Jumper
Installed (Pins 1-2)
Not Installed
JP3
Grounds the shield of the DS3

receive port J3.
Leaves the shield of the DS3 receive port

J3 not grounded. (Default)
JP7
Grounds the shield of the DS3

receive port J5.
Leaves the shield of the DS3 receive port

J5 not grounded. (Default)
JP8
Allow the bootloader and failsafe

codes to be overwritten.
Bootloader and failsafe code are writeprotected. (Default)
Connector Detail
Connector J1 - Ethernet LAN Port
Pin 6: RXPin 3: RX+
Pin 2: TXPin 1: TX+
Connector J2 - External Clock Port

Center: 2Mbps clock
input signal
Outer conductor:
Ground for clock
input signal
Note
136
The external serial clock, if implemented, is connected to serial port

2 (J8).
025-9574E
Connectors J3, J4, J5, J6

DS3 Signal
Ground
Connector
Purpose
J3
DS3 port A receive
J4
DS3 port A transmit
J5
DS3 port B receive
J6
DS3 port B transmit
Connector J7 - Changeover Control Port

The changeover control port, a micro-DB25 port, requires a custom cable from Zetron
(P/N 709-7750-xxx).
Table 52: DCU Changeover Control Cable 709-7750-xxx

Pair
Signal
Wire Color
1A
IN 0
BROWN
1B
IN 1
RED/WHITE
2A
IN 2
RED
2B
IN 3
ORANGE/WHITE
3A
IN 4
ORANGE
3B
IN 5
GREEN/WHITE
4A
IN 6
YELLOW
4B
IN 7
BLUE/WHITE
5A
(-)VV
BLACK
5B
NC
NC
6A
OUT 0
ORANGE/BLACK
6B
OUT 1
GREY
7A
OUT 2
YELLOW/BLACK
7B
OUT 3
WHITE
137
Acom Card Reference
Pair
Signal
Wire Color
8A
OUT 4
GREEN/BLACK
8B
OUT 5
PINK
9A
OUT 6
GREY/BLACK
9B
OUT 7
LIGHT GREEN
10A
GND
PINK/BLACK
10B
NC
NC
Connector J8 - Serial Ports

The serial ports are 38400 baud, RS-232 ports with an RJ45 interface. Use an RJ45-toDB9 cable to connect the DCU with an IMS console computer.
Serial port 1 is used for connecting from the IMS PC to the ADS, using IMS ADS. Port 2
is used for external serial clock, factory configuration, firmware updates, and testing.
Pin 1
Serial Port 2
(debug port)
Serial Port 1
(IMS ADS)
Pin 1
DCU Installation
Removal of the DCU will render the ADS inoperable. Turn off power to the MSU card(s)
prior to removing or installing a DCU.
The DCU may be fitted in slot 1L or 1R only. (The left-most slot of either section of a split
backplane.)
To install a DCU card:

1. If an MSU is already present, turn it off.
2. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap connected to the rack.
3. Remove the new card from the ESD bag.
4. Configure jumpers if needed. (The jumpers should already be configured from the
factory.) See Table 51 for jumper settings.
5. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot and slide the
card into the subrack.
6. Press the card into the rear connector using both hands on the front of the card.
7. Connect cables to the front of the card. Some connections are optional, but you will
typically need to connect LAN (J1), ADS loop TX and RX (J3-J6), Changeover
(J7), and serial port 1 on J8 (the left serial port). (TX/RX might not be attached
when used for ISB implementation.)
138
025-9574E
8. Turn on the MSU and verify LED activity.
DCU Technical Specifications

Table 53: Power Consumption
Parameter
Typical
+5 Volt Power Consumption
1000
-12 Volt Power Consumption 100
Max.
Units
1100
mA
100
mA

Parameter
Min
Max.
Storage Temperature
-10oC (14 F)
60oC (140 F)
0oC (32 F)
50oC (122 F)
45% relative humidity at 45 oC
Operating Humidity
Table 55: Physical

Parameter
Typical
Overall Length (top to bottom)
232mm
Overall Depth (front to back)
220mm
Overall Height
30mm
Weight
400 grams
DS3 Interface
Physical Connector:
Suitable Cable:
Line Impedance:
Line Code:
Pulse shape:
BNC socket
Coax 734 or 735
75 ohms (Unbalanced)
B3ZS3
Complies with G.703
Multiplexing principles:
DS3 <-> 7xDS2:
DS2 <-> 3xE1:
Complies with G.752

Complies with G.747
DS3 format:
Number of Channels:
C-Bit parity
2
139
Acom Card Reference
Table 56: DS3 Interface Specifications

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max.
Units
Bit Rate
44.735105 44.736
44.736895
Mbps
Output Pulse amplitude
700
900
mVpk
Unframed all-ones power level At 33.368Mhz
-1.8
+5.7
dBm
0.05
UIp-p
1000
mVpk
800
Intrinsic Jitter generation
0.02
Input Pulse Amplitude

Input Loss of signal level
Relative to 0.8Vpk
-23
dB
Maximum Cable length
Using 735 cable
68
Using 734 cable
135
LAN Interface
Physical Connector:
Suitable Cable:
Data Format:
RJ45 socket
Cat-5 twisted pair
10Base-T or 100Base-T
Table 57: LAN Interface Specifications

Parameter
Peak Differential Output Voltage
Min.
2.2
Typical
2.5
Receive Input impedance

Differential Squelch Threshold
300
420
Max.
Units
2.8
22
K ohm
585
mV
External Clock Interface

Physical Connector:
Suitable Cable:
Line Impedance:
Line Code:
Coaxial SMB
RG179
75 ohms (Unbalanced)
NRZ
Table 58: External Clock Interface Specifications

Parameter
Min.
Typical
Max.
Units
Clock In Port Frequency
2.047345
2.048
2.048655
Mbps
Clock Signal Peak Voltage
750
1000
1500
mVpk
Clock Signal Nominal Pulse Width
244
ns
Changeover Control Port Interface

Physical Connector:
Physical Interface:
Number of Channels:
140
Micro DB25 socket

Optocoupler
8 input/8 output
025-9574E
Table 59: Changeover Control Port Interface

Parameter
Min.
Typical
Max.
Input voltage required for active condition
Input voltage required for inactive condition 12
Maximum Input voltage
60
Vdc
Output impedance in active condition
15
ohms
Output impedance in inactive condition
500
18
Units
Vdc
Vdc
Mohms
Maximum switched current
140
mA
Maximum switched Voltage
200
Vdc or
Vac
Isolation
1.5
kV
Serial Interfaces
Physical Connector:
Physical Interface:
IMS Port (left) baud rate:
Debug Port (right) baud rate:
Line Settings
Number of Channels:
RJ45
Selectable between RS232 and RS422/RS485
Selectable between 19200 and 38400
38400
8 data bits, No Parity, 1 stop bit
2
Table 60: Serial Interfaces

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max.
Units
RS232 mode
Output positive voltage swing Rl=3k
6.5
Output negative voltage swing Rl=3k
-5
-6.5
Output short circuit current
Input threshold input low
Input threshold input high
Receiver input resistance
0.8
3
+/-60
mA
V
2.4
250
mA
0.2
RS422/485 mode
Output voltage
Unloaded
Output voltage
Rl=50k
Output short circuit current
Differential input threshold
-0.2
Receiver input resistance
12
23
141
Acom Card Reference
Data Interface Unit (DIU1-2)

The DIU1-2 (P/N 950-0517) has six channels that allow RS-232/V.24 devices to be
connected to the card. These DIU1-2 channels may be connected to time slots or to other
data channels in the communications system. In a typical application, the DIU1-2 cards
would be used to connect two RS-232/V.24 devices at either end of a link. The DIU1-2
card has the following features:
Six channels, each providing an RS-232/V.24 interface to external data equipment.
Channels may be set for either asynchronous or synchronous communication.
In synchronous mode, a clock output signal is provided for synchronization of
external equipment.
Each channel can support data transfer rates from 600 bps to 64 kbp/s.
The DIU1-2 may adapt data to a full time slot or part of a time slot (subrate
connection). This enables several low speed streams to share a single time slot.
The DIU1-2 can perform a data omnibus function. (Note that it is not possible to use
subrate and omnibus connections simultaneously on the same channel.)
The data from each of the channels may be assigned to time slots within G.703 streams or
to other channels of data cards.
DIU1-2 Functional Block Diagram

Figure 41: DIU1-2 Functional Block Diagram
Backplane
Connector
+5v
Power Circuit
Filtering &
Soft Start
Line Drivers
P4
Rx D
CTS
DSR
PCD
RI
CLK
Data Rate
Converter
DCE
Interface
Loopback Switch
Line Receivers
Baud Clock
Tx D
RTS
DTR
Note: Only one of the six channels shown

Sync
Microprocessor
Bus
PLL
Tx D
J5
CTS
HDLC
Controller
Rx D
RTS
Debug
Ports
Tx D
J6
CTS
Microprocessor
System
System Reset
Rx D
RTS
142
025-9574E

The major functional blocks for the DIU1-2 are described in Table 61.
Table 61: Description of DIU1-2 Functional Blocks
Block
Descriptions
Line Drivers and

Receivers
Standard RS-232/V.24 line drivers and receivers are used to provide the
electrical interface between the DIU1-2 circuitry and connector P4.
DCE Interface
The Data Communications Equipment (DCE) interface provides the

data, clock, and handshake signals required by the RS-232/V.24
interface.
Loopback Switch
The loopback switch makes an internal connection between the

incoming and outgoing data paths. The paths from the DCE interface to
the backplane are broken, and there is no connection to the data rate
converter.
Data Rate Converter
This unit converts the DCE interface signals to/from the 64 kbp/s
backplane data rate. It also manages the subrate multiplexing of channels
by dividing the 64 kbp/s backplane data rate into the required sizes. The
Data Rate Converter is capable of framing the 64 kbp/s data to the
backplane for both Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) and inband
signaling.
PLL
The Phase Locked Loop uses a crystal oscillator and timing signals from
the MCU to generate the required baud rate for the DCE Interface.
Debug Port (J5)
This RS-232 serial port is intended for communication with the

microprocessor system to perform factory testing.
Port (J6)
This port performs no function on the DIU1-2.
Microprocessor System
The microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer,

and reset circuitry to provide overall management of the DIU1-2 and to
facilitate factory testing using debug Port J5. It also manages the
signaling (handshaking) for all six DCE interfaces.
LED
An indicator that is driven from an output pin of the microprocessor to

indicate that the DIU1-2 is running.
HDLC Controller
An HDLC controller is used to communicate with the Primary MCU.
Power Circuit
Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the Vcc rail and a soft
start circuit to limit the inrush current during power up.
Backplane Connector
A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power,

communications, card detection and timing.
DIU1-2 Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
Figure 42 shows the DIU1-2 front edge layout.
143
Acom Card Reference
Figure 42: DIU1-2 Front Edge Layout

Extraction
lever
J5
Debug Port
(DB9 Female)
Run LED
J6
Port
(DB9 Female)
c
32
P4
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
LED Indicators
The DUI1-2 has a Run LED indicator that flashes approximately once a second
while the DIU1-2 is operating.
Reset
The DIU1-2 includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system on power-up or when
the subrack is reset (initiated by the Primary MCU). The DIU1-2 microprocessor will also
reset if the watchdog timer is activated. The reset sequence takes approximately three
seconds during which time the Run LED will stop flashing; no data passed through the
card.
144
025-9574E
Settings
Jumpers
Jumper links JP3 to JP18 exist for test purposes only and should not be used. The card is
shipped with these jumper links removed.
Connector Detail
Debug Port Connectors (J5, J6)
The debug ports J5 and J6 are both female DB-9 connectors, with pinouts as shown in
Table 62. Note that these ports are not connected to any of the six RS-232 data channels
provided by the DIU1-2 card. J5 and J6 are intended for factory purposes only.
Table 62: Debug Port Connectors (J5, J6) Pinouts (factory use only)
Pin
J5 Name
J6 Name
Function
Direction
TXA+
TXB+
Transmit Data
Output from DIU1-2
RXA+
RXB+
Receive Data
Input to DIU1-2
GND
GND
Ground
CTSA+
CTSB+
Clear to Send
Output from DIU1-2
RTSA+
RTSB+
Request to Send
Input to DIU1-2
User Data Interface Connector (P4)

Pinouts for the user data interface connector P4 are shown in Table 63. Note that pin 32 is
at the top of the connector, and Pin 1 is at the bottom, as shown in Figure 42.
145
Acom Card Reference
Table 63: User Data Interface Connector (P4) Pinout

Direction
Function
Pin
Channel
Pin
Function
Direction
IN
TXD1
32a
32c
RXD1
OUT
IN
RTS1
31a
31c
CTS1
OUT
IN
DTR1
30a
30c
DCD1
OUT
OUT
RI1
29a
29c
DSR1
OUT
28a
28c
CLK1
OUT
IN
TXD2
27a
27c
RXD2
OUT
IN
RTS2
26a
26c
CTS2
OUT
IN
RTS2
25a
25c
DCD2
OUT
OUT
RI2
24a
24c
DSR2
OUT
23a
23c
CLK2
OUT
IN
TXD3
22a
22c
RXD3
OUT
IN
RTS3
21a
21c
CTS3
OUT
IN
DTR3
20a
20c
DCD3
OUT
OUT
RI3
19a
19c
DSR3
OUT
18a
18c
CLK3
OUT
IN
TXD4
17a
17c
RXD4
OUT
IN
RTS4
16a
16c
CTS4
OUT
IN
DTR4
15a
15c
DCD4
OUT
OUT
RI3
14a
14c
DSR4
OUT
13a
13c
IN
TXD5
12a
12c
RXD5
OUT
IN
RTS5
11a
11c
CTS5
OUT
IN
DTR5
10a
10c
DCD5
OUT
OUT
RI5
9a
9c
DSR5
OUT
8a
8c
CLK5
OUT
IN
TXD6
7a
7c
RXD6
OUT
IN
RTS6
6a
6c
CTS6
OUT
IN
DTR6
5a
5c
DCD6
OUT
OUT
RI6
4a
4c
DSR6
OUT
3a
3c
CLK6
OUT
Sig Gnd
2a
2c
Sig Gnd
Sig Gnd
1a
1c
Sig Gnd
RS-232 / V.24 Channels

Each channel of the DIU1-2 consists of nine signals for data transfer (TXD and RXD),
handshaking (RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD), clock out (CLK), and modem Ring Indicator
146
025-9574E
(RI). The channels are configured as Data Communications Equipment (DCE), therefore
TXD is input into the DIU1-2 and RXD is an output.
Note
TXD is an input into the DIU and RXD is an output from the DIU.
There are no clock input lines to the DIU1-2; it is therefore impossible to synchronize the
DIU1-2 to an external RS-232 clock signal. The clock out line (CLK) is an RS-232 level
signal that enables external equipment to be synchronized to the DIU1-2 when used in
synchronous mode. The clock out signal (CLK) from a DIU1-2 channel is not active when
that channel is configured for asynchronous operation.
A 25-pin plug is usually specified for RS-232, although a 9-pin plug is often used. For
reference, Table 64 shows the corresponding RS-232 and V.24 pinouts and function of the
circuits defined.
Table 64: RS-232/V.24 Interface Signals
Circuit
RS-232
Pin
V.24
DB25
DB9
Name
Function
Special Use
Shield
Shield or chassis
ground
AB
102
Ground
Signal ground or
common
BA
103
TXD
Transmit data line
BB
104
RXD
Receive data line
CA
105
RTS
Request to send
signal
CB
106
CTS
Clear to send signal
CC
107
DSR
Data set ready signal
CF
109
DCD
Data receive signal

detect
CD
108
20
DTR
Data terminal ready

signal
Modem interface
CE
125
22
RI
Ring indicator signal
Modem interface
DB
114
15
DB
Transmit clock time
Synchronization
DD
115
17
DD
Receive clock line
Synchronization
DA
113
24
DA
Terminal clock line
Synchronization
Signaling
The signaling lines for each DIU1-2 channel provide handshaking between two remote
devices. The signaling lines are swapped to their complimentary pair when two DIU1-2
channels are connected through a time slot. For example, an input such as RTS on one
DIU1-2 channels appears as CTS on the other. This is the same for DTR and DTS. Each
147
Acom Card Reference
channel can be set (using the system software) so that the output signaling lines are low,
high, or follow the incoming signal lines.
The clock signal outputs are generated from the PLL within the DIU1-2 and are not
transmitted within the time slot.
DIU1-2 Installation
Rules for installation of a DIU1-2 in a subrack are as follows:
The DIU1-2 card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is
applied to the subrack.
A DIU1-2 card cannot be used in slot 0, slot 1 or slot 12.
A maximum of ten DIU1-2 cards may be fitted in one subrack.
DIU1-2 Alarm Generation

Table 65: DIU1-2 Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
DIU1-2 Card Failure
CE (Configuration Error)
Urgent
DIU1-2 Card Removal
Urgent
Note
The DIU1-2 card does not generate any other system alarms.
DIU1-2 Technical Specifications

Parameter
Specification
Voltage at any Input Pin (on J5 and P4)
30 V

Parameter
148
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity
45% Relative Humidity @ 45 C (113 F)
025-9574E
Table 68: Physical

Parameter
Specification
Overall length (front to back)
220 mm
Overall Depth (between card guides) 223 mm

Overall height
16 mm
Thickness of printed board
1.6 mm
Weight
231 g
Main Interface - 6 Channel RS-232/V.24

Physical Connector:
Physical Interface:
Line Settings:
DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male

RS-232 / V.24
Selectable, refer to DIU1-2 Operation
Table 69: Electrical Characteristics of Main Interface

Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
Line Output Voltage Swing
11
Line Output Resistance
300
Line Output Short Circuit Current
10
mA
Line Input Voltage Range
-30
+30
Line Input Low Threshold
0.5
1.9
Line Input High Threshold
1.3
2.7
Line Input Hysteresis
1.0
Line Input Current
Vin = 25 V
8.3
mA
Line Input Current
Vin = 3 V
1.0
mA
Table 70: Timing Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
Line Output Slew Rate
30
V/s
Line Output Rise Time
Vout = 11 V
2.3
Line Output Fall Time
Vout = 11 V
2.0
1.0
Width of input pulse discriminated

as noise
Debug Port Interface

Physical Connection: DB9 Female
Physical Interface:
RS-232 / V.24
Line Settings:
9600, N, 8, 1
149
Acom Card Reference
Table 71: Electrical Characteristics of the Debug Port

Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
11
300
Line Output Short Circuit
10
mA
-30
+30
0.5
1.9
1.3
2.7
1.0

Line Input Current
Vin = 25 V
8.3
mA
Line Input Current
Vin = 3 V
1.0
mA
Subrack Backplane Interface

Physical Connector
Table 72: Electrical Characteristics of the Backplane

Parameter
Typical
340 mA
210 mA
-12 Volt Power Consumption
100 mA
Operational Timing
Table 73: Operational Timing Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
500
1200
2000
ms
Run LED flash rate
Not in reset
Hz
Period between LED updates
Not in reset
sec
Watchdog time-out to internal
reseta
a. The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not cause the subrack to reset.
Compliant to AS3548 Class A
150
025-9574E

P/N 950-0516
The DIU1-4 has six channels that allow RS-422/V.11 devices to be connected to time slots
or to other line cards. The DIU1-4 is typically used to connect two RS-422/v.11 devices to
either end of a communications network.
The DIU1-4 card has the following features:
Six independent channels, each providing an RS-422/V.11 interface to external data
equipment.
Channels may be individually set up as either asynchronous or synchronous.
In the synchronous mode, clock output signals are provided for synchronization of
external equipment.
Each channel can support data transfer rates from 600 bp/s to 64 kbp/s.
The DIU1-4 may adapt data to a full time slot or part of a time slot (subrate
connection). This enables several low speed streams to share a single time slot.
The DIU1-4 can perform a data omnibus function. (Note that it is not possible to
use subrate and omnibus connections simultaneously on the same channel.)
The data from each of the channels may be assigned to time slots within G.703
streams or to channels of other line cards.
DIU1-4 Block Diagram

Figure 43 shows the functional block diagram for an DIU1-4.
151
Acom Card Reference
Figure 43: DIU1-4 Functional Block Diagram

Backplane
Connector
+5V
Power Circuit
Filtering &
Soft Start
Line Drivers
Rx D
Data Rate
Converter
DSR
P4
DCE
Interface
CLK
Loopback Switch
Line Receivers
Baud Clock
Tx D
DTR
Note: One Channel only Shown

Run LED
Debug
Port
Sync
PLL
Microprocessor
Bus
Tx D
CTS
J5
HDLC
Controller
Rx D
RTS
Microprocessor
System
Tx D
System Reset
CTS
J6
Rx D
RTS

The major functional blocks for the DIU1-4 are described in Table 74.
Table 74: Description of DIU1-4 Functional Blocks
Block
152
Descriptions
Line Drivers and

Receivers
Standard RS-422/V.11 line drivers and receivers are used to provide the
electrical interface between the DIU1-4 circuitry and connector P4.
DCE Interface
The Data Communications Equipment (DCE) interface provides the data,

clock and handshake signals required by an RS-422/V.11 interface.
Loopback Switch
This unit converts the DCE interface signals to/from the 64 kbp/s backplane
time slot data rate. It also manages the subrate multiplexing of channels by
dividing the 64 kbp/s time slot data rate into smaller subrates. The Data
Rate Converter also controls the CAS and inband signalling. For Inband
mode the signalling bits are added to the data channel time slot while in
CAS mode they are added to time slot 16.
Data Rate Converter
This unit converts the DCE interface signals to/from the 64 kbp/s backplane
data rate. It also manages the subrate multiplexing of channels by dividing
the 64 kbp/s backplane data rate into the required sizes. The Data Rate
Converter is capable of framing the 64 kbp/s data to the backplane for both
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) and inband signaling.
PLL
The Phase Locked Loop uses a crystal oscillator and timing signals from
the MCU to generate the required baud rate for the DCE Interface.
025-9574E
Block
Descriptions
Debug Port (J5)
This RS-232 serial port is intended for communication with the

microprocessor system to perform factory testing.
The Microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer and

reset circuitry to provide overall management of the DIU1-4 and to
facilitate factory testing via debug Port J5. It also manages the signaling
(handshaking) for all six DCE interfaces.
Port (J6)
This port performs no function on the DIU1-4.
LED
This LED is driven by the microprocessor and indicates that the DIU1-4 is
running.
HDLC Controller
An HDLC controller is used to communicate with the Primary MCU.
Power Circuit
Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the power rails and a soft
start circuit to limit the inrush current at power up.
Backplane Connector
A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power,

communications, card detection and timing.
DIU1-4 Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
Figure 42 shows the DIU1-4 front edge layout.
Figure 44: DIU1-2 Front Edge Layout
Extraction
lever
RS-232 Debug
Port 1 (DB9 Female)
J5
Run LED
Unused Serial
Communications
Port 2 (DB9 Female)
J6
a c
32
P4
153
Acom Card Reference
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
LED Indicators
The DUI1-4 has a Run LED indicator that flashes approximately once a second while the
DIU1-4 is operating.
Reset
The DIU1-4 includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system on power-up or when
the subrack is reset (initiated by the Primary MCU). The DIU1-4 microprocessor will also
reset if the watchdog timer is activated. The reset sequence takes approximately three
seconds during which time the Run LED will stop flashing and no data will pass through
the card.
Settings
Jumpers
Jumper links JP3 to JP18 exist for test purposes only and should not be used. The card is
shipped with these jumper links removed.
Connector Detail
Debug Port J5/J6 (RS-422/V.11)
Note that these ports are not connected to any of the six RS-422/V.11 data channels
provided by the DIU1-4 card. These ports are designed for factory configuration, upgrading and testing; they are not intended for use by the user. However, if needed, a
connection can be established by using a terminal emulation program with line settings as
per Table 75 and Debug Port Interface on page 158. The debug program is entered by
pressing the Escape key three times. Once connected the basic debug commands can
printed to the screen by typing help.
Table 75: Debug Port Connectors (J5, J6) Pinouts (factory use only)
154
Pin
J5 Name
J6 Name
Function
Direction
TXA+
TXB+
Transmit Data
Output form DIU1-4
RXA+
RXB+
Receive Data
Input to DIU1-4
025-9574E
Pin
J5 Name
J6 Name
Function
Direction
GND
GND
Ground
CTSA+
CTSB+
Clear to Send
Output from DIU1-4
RTSA+
RTSB+
Request to Send
Input to DIU1-4
User Data Interface Connector (P4)

Pinouts for the user data interface connector P4 are shown in Table 76. Note that pin 32 is
at the top of the connector, and Pin 1 is at the bottom, as shown in Figure 44.
Table 76: User Data Interface Connector (P4) Pinout
Direction
Function
Pin
Channel
Pin
Function
Direction
IN
TX1+
32a
32c
RX1+
OUT
IN
TX1-
31a
31c
RX1-
OUT
IN
DTR1+
30a
30c
DSR1+
OUT
IN
DTR1-
29a
29c
DSR1-
OUT
OUT
CLK1-
28a
28c
CLK1+
OUT
IN
TX2+
27a
27c
RX2+
OUT
IN
TX2-
26a
26c
RX2-
OUT
IN
DTR2+
25a
25c
DSR2+
OUT
IN
DTR2-
24a
24c
DSR2-
OUT
OUT
CLK2-
23a
23c
CLK2+
OUT
IN
TX3+
22a
22c
RX3+
OUT
IN
TX3-
21a
21c
RX3-
OUT
IN
DTR3+
20a
20c
DSR3+
OUT
IN
DTR3-
19a
19c
DSR3-
OUT
OUT
CLK3-
18a
18c
CLK3+
OUT
IN
TX4+
17a
17c
RX4+
OUT
IN
TX4-
16a
16c
RX4-
OUT
IN
DTR4+
15a
15c
DSR4+
OUT
IN
DTR4-
14a
14c
DSR4-
OUT
OUT
CLK4-
13a
13c
CLK4+
OUT
IN
TX5+
12a
12c
RX5+
OUT
IN
TX5-
11a
11c
RX5-
OUT
IN
DTR5+
10a
10c
DSR5+
OUT
IN
DTR5-
9a
9c
DSR5-
OUT
OUT
CLK5-
8a
8c
CLK5+
OUT
IN
TX6+
7a
7c
RX6+
OUT
155
Acom Card Reference
Direction
Function
Pin
IN
TX6-
IN
Channel
Pin
Function
Direction
6a
6c
RX6-
OUT
DTR6+
5a
5c
DSR6+
OUT
IN
DTR6-
4a
4c
DSR6-
OUT
OUT
CLK6-
3a
3c
CLK6+
OUT
Sig Gnd
2a
2c
Sig Gnd
Sig Gnd
1a
1c
Sig Gnd
RS-422/V.11 Channels
Each channel of the DIU1-4 consists of five signals for data transfer (TX and RXD);
handshaking (DTR, DSR), and clock out (CLK). They are configured as Data
Communications Equipment (DCE), therefore TXD is input into the DIU1-4 and RXD
is an output.
Note
TXD is an input into the DIU and RXD is an output from the DIU.
There are no clock input lines to the DIU1-4; it is therefore impossible to synchronize the
DIU1-4 to an external RS-422 clock signal. The clock-out line (CLK) is an RS-422/V.11
level signal that enables external equipment to be synchronized to the DIU1-4 when used
in synchronous mode. (Refer to Figure 45 for clock and data timing). The clock out signals
(CLK) from a DIU1-4 channel is not active when that channel is configured for
asynchronous operation.
There is no connector format specified by the RS-422 standard, however a variety of
connectors such as DB9, DB25, and DB37 are used in practice.
Figure 45: DIUI4 Clock and Data Timing
CLK +
RX +
Data
ov
ov
Signaling
The signaling lines for each DIU1-4 channel provide handshaking between two remote
devices. The signalling lines are swapped to their complimentary pair when two DIU1-4
channels are connected through a time slot. For example, an input such as DTR on one
DIU1-4 channels appears as DTS on the other. Each channel can be set (using the system
software) so that the output signaling lines are low, high, or follow the incoming signal
lines.
156
025-9574E
The clock signal outputs are generated from the PLL within the DIU1-4 and are not
transmitted within the time slot.
DIU1-4 Installation
Rules for installation of a DIU1-4 in a subrack are as follows:
The DIU1-4 card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is
applied to the subrack.
A DIU1-4 card cannot be used in slot 0, slot 1 or slot 12.
A maximum of ten DIU1-4 cards may be fitted in one subrack.
DIU1-4 Alarm Generation

Table 77: DIU1-4 Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
DIU1-4 Card Failure
Urgent
DIU1-4 Card Removal
Urgent
Note
The DIU1-4 card does not generate any other system alarms.
DIU1-4 Technical Specifications

Parameter
Specification
Voltage at any Input Pin (on J5 and P4)
14 V
Table 79: Environmental Characteristics

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity
157
Acom Card Reference

Parameter
Typical
Overall Length (front to back)
220 mm
Overall Depth (between card guides)
223 mm
Overall Height
16 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
360 g
Main Interface - 6 Channel RS-422V.11

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male
Physical Interface: RS-422 / V.11
Line Settings:
Selectable, refer to DIU1-4 Operation
Table 81: Electrical Characteristics of Main Interface
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
Line Output Differential Voltage
No Load
Line Output Differential Voltage
100 Load
2.0
3.1
Line Output Common Mode Voltage
100 Load
1.8
3.0
Line Output Short Circuit Current
-30
150
mA
Line Differential Input Voltage Range
0.2
14
Line Common Mode Input Voltage
14
60
mV
Line Input Resistance
5.8
6.8
10
Debug Port Interface

Physical Connection: DB9 Female (DCE)
Physical Interface:
RS-232 / V.24 (factory default) or RS-422/V.11
(after modification)
Line Settings:
9600, N, 8, 1
Table 82: Electrical Characteristics of the Debug Port
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
11
300
Line Output Short Circuit
10
mA
-30
+30
0.5
1.9
1.3
2.7
158
025-9574E
Exchange Interface Unit Card (EIE)
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
1.0
Line Input Current
Vin = 25 V
8.3
mA
Line Input Current
Vin = 3 V
1.0
mA

Physical Connector
DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male.
Table 83: Electrical Characteristics of the Backplane

Parameter
Typical
Units
630
mA
Operational Timing
Table 84: Operational Timing Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
500
1200
2000
ms
Run LED flash rate
Not in reset
Hz
Not in reset
sec
Watchdog time-out to internal reseta
a. The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not cause the subrack to reset.
Compliant to AS3548 Class A.

P/N 950-0522 (64-pin)
P/N 950-0637 (RJ45)
The EIE is a line card that provides six 2-wire interfaces for connection to PSTN or PABX
lines.
The six interfaces on the EIE are independent and have the following features:
2 to 4 wire conversion
Selection of 16 line termination settings
Ring detection
159
Acom Card Reference
Loop seizure
Allows CLI to be passed transparently
300 to 3400 Hz channel bandwidth
Line isolation
Ring detection via second pair
EIE Block Diagram

Figure 46 shows the functional block diagram for an EIE.
Figure 46: EIE Functional Block Diagram
+3.3
+1.5
Line
Protection
Backplane
Connector
+5
DAA
Power Filters &

Regulation
FPGA
Ring Detector
DSP
Note: For clarity, only one of six channels is shown.
LEDs
HDLC
Controller

The major functional blocks for the EIE are described in Table 85.
Table 85: Description of EIE Functional Blocks
Block
160
Description
Line Protection
A surge suppression circuit using sidactors.
Ring Detection
Isolated circuitry is used to detect the ring signal if the ring is provided
on a separate pair of wires.
DAA
Integrated chipset that performs the hybrid, line impedance matching,

line looping, and ring detection. Also includes the analog-to-digital /
digital-to-analog conversion of the audio signal.
LEDs
Provides a run indication and also the line/loop status of each channel.
Power circuit
Includes filtering, over voltage protection, and soft state circuit to limit
the inrush current at power-up.
025-9574E
FPGA
Provides an interface between the backplane signals and the DSP.
DSP
Implements digital filters and control the operation of the DAAs.
HDLC Controller
Decodes the backplane messaging channel that is used to setup the EIE
card operating parameters.
Backplane
Connector
A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, data, timing,
and card detection.
EIE Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
Figure 47 shows the EIE front edge layout.
Figure 47: EIE Front Edge Layout
Extraction
lever
Status LEDs:
Solid green = line looped
Blinking red = ring in active
Run LED
CH 2 status
CH 4 status
CH 6 status
CH 1 status
CH 3 status
CH 5 status
(RJ45 Version)
a c
32
J1
J2
P4
J3
J4
J5
Note
J6
Pin 1
Older EIE cards do not have LED indicators.
161
Acom Card Reference
Physical Layout
Figure 48: EIE Card Jumpers
JP1
NORM
ALT
JP3
NORM
ALT
JP4
NORM
ALT
JP5
NORM
ALT
JP7
NORM
ALT
JP10
NORM
ALT
Single backplane
JP2
Dual backplane
Short to reset
JP6
JP8
JP9
Rear Edge Layout

LED Indicators
The Exchange Interface Card (EIE) has one LED to indicate it is running and six LEDs to
indicate channel status (see Figure 47). Each LED represents one channel. Older EIE cards
do not have LED indicators.
Reset
The EIE includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system on power-up or during
the subrack reset (initiated by the primary MCU in the ALS). It will also reset when the
Watchdog timer function is activated. During reset the EIE will not pass audio signals.
Settings
Jumpers
EIE boards with part numbers 950-0522 and 950-0637 have the following jumpers:
162
025-9574E
JP1: Located below connector P1, this jumper is provided to allow resetting of the card.
These pins are supplied with no jumper fitted. Momentarily shorting the pins of JP1 will
RESET the card (for test purposes only).
JP6, JP8, and JP9: Located near the bottom right-hand corner of the PCB, these are used
where the EIE card is to be fitted into a subrack containing either an upper backplane only
(SINGLE) or both upper and lower backplanes (DUAL). Default position is for DUAL,
where both backplanes exist in the subrack.
Note
All three jumpers (JP6, JP8, and JP9) MUST be set together (i.e. all
to DUAL or SINGLE position).
JP2, JP3, JP4, JP5, JP7, and JP10: Located towards the bottom center of the PCB, these
are used to select the ring detect source of the 6 EIE channels respectively. Ring detection
can be from the EIE line circuits (NORMal) or the ALT RING detectors to the left of the
jumpers (ALTernate). Default position of these jumpers is NORM.
Connector Detail
Each EIE has six 2-wire interfaces; each can be connected to a telephone exchange (PSTN
or PABX). The status of the lines is detected and their associated signaling such as ring
detection and line looping are generated.
DAAs perform amplification and analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signals, which
allows the gain of each channel to be programmed (using the system software package).
Transmit and receive signals in excess of the maximum instantaneous input levels may be
subject to clipping. When the transmit and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the insertion loss
on both the transmit and receive paths is 0 dB.
All external signal connections are made at the front edge of the card through connector
P4. The connector pinout is shown in Table 86. The connector pinout for the RJ45 version
is shown in Table 87.
163
Acom Card Reference
Table 86: Interface Connector P4 Pinout

Direction
IN/OUT
IN
IN/OUT
IN
IN/OUT
IN
IN/OUT
IN
IN/OUT
IN
IN/OUT
IN
164
Function
Pin
32a
LA1
31a
Channel
Pin
Function
Direction
32c
31c
LB1
30a
30c
Alt ring A1
29a
29c
Alt Ring B1 IN
28a
28c
27a
27c
LA2
26a
26c
LB2
25a
25c
Alt Ring A2 24a
24c
Alt Ring B2 IN
23a
23c
22a
22c
LA3
21a
21c
LB3
20a
20c
Alt Ring A3 19a
19c
Alt Ring B3 IN
18a
18c
17a
17c
LA4
16a
16c
LB4
15a
15c
Alt Ring A4 14a
14c
Alt Ring B4 IN
13a
13c
12a
12c
LA5
11a
11c
LB5
10a
10c
Alt Ring A5 9a
9c
Alt Ring B5 IN
8a
8c
7a
7c
6a
6c
LA6
5a
5c
LB6
4a
4c
Alt Ring A6 3a
3c
Alt Ring B6 IN
2a
2c
1a
1c
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
025-9574E
Table 87: Interface Connector J1 Through J6 Pinout (RJ45 version)

Connector
Channel
Pin
Function
J1
Alt Ring A1
J1
LA1
J1
LB1
J1
Alt Ring B1
J2
Alt Ring A2
J2
LA2
J2
LB2
J2
Alt Ring B2
J3
Alt Ring A3
J3
LA3
J3
LB3
J3
Alt Ring B3
J4
Alt Ring A4
J4
LA4
J4
LB4
J4
Alt Ring B4
J5
Alt Ring A5
J5
LA5
J5
LB5
J5
Alt Ring B5
J6
Alt Ring A6
J6
LA6
J6
LB6
J6
Alt Ring B6
Figure 49: Line Protection Circuit Schematic

LA
sidactor
LB
680pF
Line Relay
680pF
TNV
Ground
EIE Installation
Card Placement
Rules for installing an EIE in a subrack are as follows:
165
Acom Card Reference
The EIE card is hot-plug capable and may be removed or inserted with power
applied to the rack.
The EIE may be fitted to any slot in the subrack except slots 0, 1, and 12.
Line Impedance
The line impedance can be configured for each line through the system software. A 2-wire
telephone line connected with a short cable has an impedance of 600 ohm (resistive). As
the length of the line increases, the resistance and capacitance increase and the impedance
becomes complex (i.e., combination of resistance / capacitance and/or inductive
impedance). The EIE includes a switchable network that is intended to help the EIE match
the impedance of longer lines. The EIE can select one of 16 options to help it match the
impedance of longer lines.
Signaling
There are three signaling lines used to control and monitor the status of the EIE interfaces:
Ring detect
Loop out
When a ring voltage is detected, the line remains on-hook and mutes the audio paths.
The loop out circuit connects a load, which appears resistive at DC and is seen as high
impedance AC. The loop circuit is used for decadic (pulse) dialing.
EIE Alarm Generation

The removal of a configured EIE, or the failure of a CODEC, will generate a
Configuration Error (CE) alarm.
Table 88: EIE Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
EIE Card Failure

EIE Card Removal
No
0
0
Alarm Type
Urgent
Urgent
EIE Technical Specifications

Parameter
Line Interface DC Voltage
Ring Voltage
166
Max Rating
60 V
100 VRMS
025-9574E

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Parameter
Typical
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height
23 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
330 g
Table 92: Operation Timing

Parameter
Min
Max
Ring signal inactive to line looping
128 ms
Ring signal detect time
190 ms
Line break detect time
300 ms
Line looping to audio connection relay
300 ms
Main Interface
The following are the main interface characteristics. Table 93 shows all of the interface
characteristics.
Physical Connector
DIN41612 Type C 64-pin male / RJ
Physical Interface
2-wire 600
Number of Channels
Sampling
A Law PCM (8 kHz)
167
Acom Card Reference
Table 93: Interface Characteristics

Parameter
Input Isolation
External circuit ring voltage range
External ring frequency range
Ring equivalence number
External circuit line voltage range
Line looping current limit, maximum
Receive gain range (configurable)
Transmit gain range (configurable)
Maximum instantaneous input level
Maximum instantaneous output level
Frequency response
Transhybrid balance
Variation of gain with level
Signal to total distortion
Return loss
Channel to channel crosstalk
Conditions
Rx gain=0 dB
Tx gain=0 dB
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
Input level > -50dBm
1020 Hz
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
-
Min.
1.5
15
15
19
-10
-16.5
-16.5
300
20
-0.5
33
25
-
Typical
20
-
Max.
100
55
0.5
80
120
+13.5
+13.5
+3.2
+3.2
3400
+0.5
-66
Units
kV
VRMS
Hz
V
mA
dB
dB
dBm
dBm
Hz
dB
dB
dB
dB
dB

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C, 64-pin male
Table 94: Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
Max
Units
150
mA
Compliant to FCC Part 15, Class A and FCC, Part 68.
E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU)

P/N 950-0484 (24v-48v)
P/N 950-0841 (5v-12v)
The EMU provides a data path from the VF (voice frequency) and E&M channels on the
front of the card to the MCU card through the backplane data-bus. The E&M interfaces
consist of dual E and M wires per channel.
The EMU card has the following features:
Six independent 4-wire VF channels
300 to 3400 Hz VF channel bandwidth
168
025-9574E
600 balanced (transformer coupled) VF inputs

Dual E and M leads per channel
EMU Block Diagram

Figure 50 shows the functional block diagram for an EMU.
Figure 50: EMU Functional Block Diagram
Backplane
Connector
+5 +12
Tx
A
Tx
B
-5 -12
Audio
Receive
Circuit
Rx
A
Rx
B
So 1
So 2
Supply
Filters &
Regulation
Audio
Transmit
Circuit
Signalling Out
Circuits
So 1
So 2
SI 1
SI 2
Led
Driver
DIP
Switches
LED
Enable
CODEC
1/2
Debounce
SI 1
SI 2
Signalling
Circuit
In
Note: For clarity, only one of six channels is shown.
Reset
Circuit

The EMU is comprised of the major blocks described in Table 95.
Table 95: Description of EMU Functional Blocks
Block
Description
Audio Interface
The audio interfaces consists of a two-wire transformer isolated 600

receive and transmit circuits.
Signaling Circuits
The signaling in and signaling out circuits consist of optically coupled

transistors and over-voltage protection.
Debounce
A debounce circuit is used for noise discrimination on the signaling

input lines. A pulse of less than 0.5 milliseconds duration on the
signaling input lines will be rejected by the debounce circuit. (Debounce
is also available using IMS software.)
169
Acom Card Reference
DIP switches
One miniature switch is provided for each signaling output line to invert
the output action. Signaling inversion may also be set using the IMS
software as described in 025-9530 Acom Console Software Operation.
CODEC
The CODEC performs the analog-to-digital conversion of the audio

signal. The digitized audio and the signaling bits are transmitted to and
received from the MCU by the backplane.
Each EMU channel uses one half of a CODEC, giving a total of three
CODECs per EMU card.
LEDs
LEDs are used on the EMU to show the status of the signaling input and
output lines. There are a total of 24 LEDs that correspond to the 12
signaling in and 12 signaling out lines. The LED operation can be
enabled or disabled using the IMS software.
Reset Circuit
The backplane-reset line is connected to circuitry that resets the EMU

when the subrack is reset.
Power Circuit
Includes filtering, over voltage protection, and soft start circuits to limit
the inrush current at power up.
Backplane
Connector
A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, data, timing
and card detection.
Audio Channels
The audio interfaces comprise of a two-wire transmit circuit (output from the EMU) and a
two-wire receive circuit (input to the EMU). The CODEC performs amplification and
analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signals and allows the gain of each channel to be
programmed (using the IMS software application).
Transmit and receive signals in excess of the maximum instantaneous input levels may be
subject to clipping. When transmit and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the insertion loss on
both the transmit and receive paths is 0 dB. Schematic representations of the audio input
and output are shown in Figure 53 and Figure 54.
Signaling Channels
Within the Zetron equipment manuals, all references to signaling are called signaling in
(SI) and signaling out (SO). SI is an input to an EMU, and SO is an output from an EMU.
In general multiplexer applications, SI corresponds to an E input, and SO refers to an
M output.
The signaling input circuits are designed to detect the presence of a ground and signaling
outputs to generate a ground.
When a signaling channel is passed over a G.703 link, and the link fails due to a loss of
signal, frame alignment, or multiframe alignment, the signaling passed to any line card
will not change until 20 seconds have passed. After 20 seconds the signaling will return to
its idle state. (The idle state can be assigned using the system software package.)
The DIP switches allow the outputs to be set to a particular state (either off or on) during a
link failure.
170
025-9574E
Jumper links on the EMU card allow the signaling reference voltages to be connected to
the backplane power supply or to pins on the external connector P4. The external
connection allows isolation of the input and output circuits from the subrack power
supply. Schematic representations of the signaling input and output are shown in Figure 55
and Figure 56.
Console Use of E&M Signaling
M1 Lead (SO1)
M2 Lead (SO2)
E1 Lead (SI1)
E2 Lead (SI2)
Line selected or monitored

Push-to-talk (line keyed)
Not used
Carrier detect
EMU Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
Table 51 shows the EMU front edge layout.
Figure 51: EMU Front Edge Layout
Extraction
lever
a c
32
P4
171
Acom Card Reference
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
LED Indicators
The status LEDs are connected to the signaling in and signaling out circuits to provide a
useful indication of the status of the signaling lines. The LEDs functions are shown in
Figure 52 and are described in Table 96.
Figure 52: Status Indicators EMU
A B
Note
SI1-1
SI2-1
SI1-2
SI2-2
GREEN
YELLOW
GREEN
YELLOW
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
GREEN
YELLOW
GREEN
YELLOW
SO1-1
SO2-1
SO1-2
SO2-2
Active
Active
Active
Active
SI1-3
SI2-3
SI1-4
SI2-4
GREEN
YELLOW
GREEN
YELLOW
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
GREEN
YELLOW
GREEN
YELLOW
SO1-3
SO2-3
SO1-4
SO2-4
Active
Active
Active
Active
SI1-5
SI2-5
SI1-6
SI2-6
GREEN
YELLOW
GREEN
YELLOW
9
10
11
12
9
10
11
12
GREEN
YELLOW
GREEN
YELLOW
SO1-5
SO2-5
SO1-6
SO2-6
Active
Active
Active
Active
The operation of the LEDs can be enabled or disabled using the

IMS software package.
Table 96: EMU Status Indicator Functions

Position
172
Color
Signal
Position
Color
Signal
SI1-1
Green
NA - E1
SO1-1
Green
M1 - Selected
SI2-1
Yellow
CD/COR - E2
SO2-1
Yellow
M2 - PTT
SI1-2
Green
NA - E1
SO1-2
Green
M1 - Selected
SI2-2
Yellow
CD/COR - E2
SO2-2
Yellow
M2 - PTT
SI1-3
Green
NA - E1
SO1-3
Green
M1 - Selected
SI2-3
Yellow
CD/COR - E2
SO2-3
Yellow
M2 - PTT
SI1-4
Green
NA - E1
SO1-4
Green
M1 - Selected
SI2-4
Yellow
CD/COR - E2
SO2-4
Yellow
M2 - PTT
SI1-5
Green
NA - E1
SO1-5
Green
M1 - Selected
SI2-5
Yellow
CD/COR - E2
SO2-5
Yellow
M2 - PTT
SI1-6
Green
NA - E1
SO1-6
Green
M1 - Selected
SI2-6
Yellow
CD/COR - E2
SO2-6
Yellow
M2 - PTT
025-9574E
Signaling In LEDs
Once enabled using IMS, the signaling-in LED becomes active (illuminated) when current
flowing into the input lead is for a period of 0.5 milliseconds or greater.
Signaling Out LEDs
Once enabled using IMS, a signaling-out LED shows the status of the output line and is
active whenever the SO lead output is passing current. This operation can be inverted by
setting the board DIP switches. (See DIP Switch Settings on page 174.) Figure 53, Figure
54, Figure 55, and Figure 56 show simplified circuit diagrams for the audio and signaling
ports.
Reset
The EMU includes circuitry that resets the three CODEC chips when the subrack is reset.
Pressing the reset button on the Primary MCU or applying power to the subrack
causes the subrack to reset.
During reset the EMU will not pass audio, and the LEDs may not show the status of
the signaling lines correctly. After reset, the Primary MCU enables or disables the
status LEDs according to the configuration settings in the MCU Config Flash
memory.
Settings
Jumper Link Settings
The input and output signaling lead circuits operate from a reference voltage supply that
may be connected in two different ways. Jumper links are provided on the EMU to allow
the reference voltage to be connected from either the backplane power supply or from
interface connector P4. If the backplane supply is used, then the signaling circuits are not
isolated from the subrack.
By connecting an external supply to the reference voltage pins on P4, the signaling-in and
out lines can be isolated from the subrack.
Jumpers J1 to J12 are provided to connect the +VV and VV supply lines to the six
channels. For example, J1 connects +VV, and J2 connects VV to the signaling-in and
signaling-out circuits for Channel 1.
Configuration
Use battery voltage from backplane. This is the factory default setting
for the 24v-48v version of the EMU card (P/N 950-0484).
Never use this position for the 5v-12v version of the EMU card (P/N
950-0841). Doing so will damage the card.
Use voltage from front connector P4.
Jumper
173
Acom Card Reference
Caution!
Note
For isolation reasons, all jumper links must be set in the same
position.
Pin 1 is the square pad at the right hand side of the jumper outline.
DIP Switch Settings

Switches SW1 to SW3 can be used to invert the polarity of the signaling output (SO)
leads. Table 97 lists the DIP switch number for each signaling-out line. The polarity can
also be inverted using the system software package. By using the switches and IMS
together, the polarity and the fail-state of the signaling out leads can be set.
When the M Lead is not inverted using the software, and the DIP switch is OFF, then the
output follows the signaling-in line for the connected channel. Changing the DIP switch to
ON causes the output signal to invert the status of the connected channels SI line.
When the M lead is inverted using the software, and the DIP switch is ON, then the output
follows the signaling-in line for the connected channel. Changing the DIP switch to OFF
causes the output signal to be inverted from the connected channels SI line.
Table 97: DIP Switch Functions
DIP
Switch
EMU Channel
Switch
Switch Polarity
SW1
SO1-1
SO2-1
SO1-2
SO2-2
SO1-3
SO2-3
SO1-4
SO2-4
SO1-5
SO2-5
SO1-6
SO2-6
2
SW2
3
4
SW3
5
6
Connector Detail
All external user signal connections are made at the front edge of the card through
connector P4. The connector pinout is shown in Table 98.
174
025-9574E
Table 98: User Interface Connector (P4) Pinout

Direction
Function
Pin
Channel
Pin
Function
Direction
OUT
TX1A
32a
32c
TX1B
OUT
IN
RX1A
31a
31c
RX1B
IN
OUT
SO1-1
30a
30c
Ch1 +VV
IN
SI1-1
29a
29c
Ch1 VV
OUT
SO2-1
28a
28c
SI2-1
IN
OUT
TX2A
27a
27c
TX2B
OUT
IN
RX2A
26a
26c
RX2B
IN
OUT
SO1-2
25a
25c
Ch2 +VV
IN
SI1-2
24a
24c
Ch2 VV
OUT
SO2-2
23a
23c
SI2-2
IN
OUT
TX3A
22a
22c
TX3B
OUT
IN
RX3A
21a
21c
RX3B
IN
OUT
SO1-3
20a
20c
Ch3 +VV
IN
SI1-3
19a
19c
Ch3 VV
OUT
SO2-3
18a
18c
SI2-3
IN
OUT
TX4A
17a
17c
TX4B
OUT
IN
RX4A
16a
16c
RX4B
IN
OUT
SO1-4
15a
15c
Ch4 +VV
IN
SI1-4
14a
14c
Ch4 VV
OUT
SO2-4
13a
13c
SI2-4
IN
OUT
TX5A
12a
12c
TX5B
OUT
IN
RX5A
11a
11c
RX5B
IN
OUT
SO1-5
10a
10c
Ch5 +VV
IN
SI1-5
9a
9c
Ch5 VV
OUT
SO2-5
8a
8c
SI2-5
Spare
7a
7c
Spare
OUT
TX6A
6a
6c
TX6B
OUT
IN
RX6A
5a
5c
RX6B
IN
OUT
SO1-6
4a
4c
Ch6 +VV
IN
SI1-6
3a
3c
Ch6 VV
OUT
SO2-6
2a
2c
SI2-6
Spare
1a
1c
Spare
IN
IN
175
Acom Card Reference
Audio Connections
Figure 53: Audio Receive (Input) Circuit Schematic
Codec
Rx A
600
Rx B
Figure 54: Audio Transmit (Output) Circuit Schematic

600
+12
Codec
Tx A
-12
Tx B
Signaling Connections
Figure 55: Signaling Output Circuit Schematic
Jumper LInk
Internal +V Supply
+VV
70
SO
Figure 56: Signaling Input Circuit Schematic

Jumper Link
(J1, J3, J5)
+VV
Internal +V Supply
SI
Internal -V Supply
-VV
Jumper Link
Note
(J2, J4, J6)
Signaling is required to activate the inputs and outputs:

If internal reference is used, +VV is strapped to 0Vdc. The M lead
must be pulled to a voltage lower that 0Vdc and be prepared to
sense current as a result of closure to ground. A positive reference
voltage will not cause current to flow when the M lead is active.
If internal reference is used, -VV is strapped to -48Vdc. The E lead
must be pulled to -0Vdc to activate the E lead input.
176
025-9574E
EMU Installation
Card Placement
Rules for installation of an EMU in a subrack are as follows:
The EMU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is
The EMU may be fitted to any slot in the subrack except slots 0, 1, and 12.
Listen-in Line Support
Listen-in Line Support is a custom option when using Acom with a 3200 system. With
Listen-in Line Support, Acom can listen (receive only) to positions connected to the 3200
system.
Listen-in Line Support is installed by connecting Acom EMU cards to the position logger
outputs on the 3200 (the RJ21 logger ports on station card shelves). A Krone block is used
for phone isolation, which isolates M3200 Logger output from Acom EMU 600ohm input
as shown in the following diagram:
K R ON E
1
1a - Tip IN
1b - Ring IN
2a - Tip OUT
2b - NC
3a - Ring OUT
Installation of Listen-in Line Support is custom. Refer to the following documents:

E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit (EMU) on page 168 of this manual
S3200 Installation Manual (P/N 025-9419)
3200 Listen-in Wiring Diagram (P/N 045-0278-077-03)
EMU Alarm Generation

The failure of a CODEC, the interface from the CODEC to the backplane, or the removal
of the EMU from the rack, will generate a configuration alarm. The EMU generates no
other alarms.
Table 99: EMU Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No
Alarm Type
EMU Card Failure
Urgent
EMU Card Removal
Urgent
CODEC Failure
Urgent
Failure of interface between

CODEC and backplane
Urgent
177
Acom Card Reference
EMU Technical Specifications

Parameter
Conditions
Max
Units
Peak maximum
150
mA
+VV + 0.2
Signaling reference voltage +VV to -VV Peak maximum
70
DC bias across audio inputs or outputs
Signaling Out Line Current (M Lead)

Voltage applied to Signaling Lines

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Parameter
Typical
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height
16 mm
Weight
460 g
Audio Interface
The following are the main audio interface characteristics:
Physical Connector
DIN41612 Type C 64-pin male
Physical Interface
4-wire 600 balanced
Number of Channels
Sampling
A Law PCM (8 kHz)
Table 103: Audio Interface Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max.
Units
Input Isolation
1.5
kV
-7.4
+18.6
dB
-20.1
+5.8
dB
Combined receive and transmit gain range
-27.5
+24.4
dB
Rx gain=0 dB
+3
dBm
Rx gain=-6dB
+9
dBm
Tx gain=0 dB
dBm
178
025-9574E
Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max.
Units
Tx gain=6 dB
+9
dBm
Frequency response
300
3400
Hz
0.3 - 2.4 kHz
-0.5
+0.5
dB
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
-0.5
+1.8
dB
1020 Hz
33
dB
Return loss
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
20
dB
Signaling Interface
Physical Interface:
NPN transistor
Number of Channels:Six channels with two inputs and two outputs per channel
Table 104: Signaling Interface Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max.
Units
Voltage at unconnected input
-VV+2
Input pulse width assumed to be noise
0.5
ms
Input current with input connected to +VV -
mA
Output voltage when output is active
+VV-1.2
+VV
Maximum continuous output current
60
mA
Signaling rate
250
Hz

Parameter
Min.
Max.
Units
60
200
mA
10
mA
35
60
mA
Compliant to AS3548, Class B and FCC Part 15, Class A.
179
Acom Card Reference
Main Control Unit (MCU)

Part Numbers: see Table 106
The MCU (Main Control Unit) has a microprocessor with communications and interface
circuits. It is used in either an Acom Line Subrack (ALS) or an Acom DS3 Switch (ADS).
When used in an Acom ALS, the MCU forms the core of the Zetron Acom subrack digital
multiplexer system. When used in an ADS, the MCU acts as an E1 line interface card
which performs audio conferencing.
An MCU cannot be simply swapped between an ALS and an ADS. Older MCU cards are
only compatible with the ALS role. MCU cards that are compatible in either role require
specific firmware (either ALS or ADS firmware) to operate in specific roles. The
following table identifies MCU part numbers, their firmware compatibility, and their
front-edge physical interfaces.
Table 106: MCU Part Numbers and Compatibility
Zetron
Part Numbers
Firmware
Compatibility
950-0485 (MCU3)
ALS only
75, E1, SMB coaxial (unbalanced)
950-0561 (MCU3)
ALS only
120, E1 RJ-45 (balanced)
950-0652 (MCU3)
ALS only
Type ST single mode 0.62 m fiber optic
950-0486 (MCU3)
ALS only
100, T1, RJ-45 (balanced)
950-0697 (MCU4)
ALS/ADS
75, E1, SMB coaxial (unbalanced)
950-0771 (MCU4)
ALS/ADS
120, E1, SMB coaxial (balanced)
950-0698 (MCU4)
ALS/ADS
100, T1/ISDN, RJ-45 (balanced)
G.703 Physical Interface
MCU Functionality in ALS

Note
MCU3 cards are compatible with the ALS. MCU4 cards with ALS
firmware are also compatible with the ALS.
In an ALS, the main functions of the MCU are to communicate with system software
running on a PC, to control and monitor the status of other cards in the subrack, and to
configure time slot connections between voice, data, and signaling channels.
The MCU communication circuits include the main G.703 interfaces for connecting the
subrack to other subracks or to components such as microwave and fiber-optic
transceivers. It contains the ports for connection to external supervisory interfaces, such as
IMS and Network Management Systems. (See MCU Options in the Acom Software
Installation and Configuration manual, P/N 025-9529.)
The MCU interface circuits include PCM, IOM-2, and HDLC control buses, which are
used to communicate with other cards in the subrack. These buses are connected between
cards by the backplane.
180
025-9574E
When the MCU is installed in slot 0 of the subrack, it becomes the primary MCU that
functions as a system master and provides configuration set-up parameters for other
MCUs installed in the subrack. A primary MCU must be present for the rack to function.
If an MCU card is installed in slots 1 to 11, it will function as a secondary MCU and only
the G.703 interfaces, system clocking, and data switching functions for the card are active.
A primary and secondary MCU perform the following functions:
Interconnection of data between MCU and line cards to G.703 channels
Optional CRC error checking of the G.703 data channels
G.703 clock recovery and external clock interfacing
Programmable framing formats:
Doubleframe or CRC Multiframe (E1)
12 Frame Multiframe or Extended Superframe (T1)
Implementation of Channel Associated Signaling (CAS) (E1)
One or two G.703 interfaces
Optional fiber optic interface for each G.703 channel
The following functions are performed by a primary MCU only:
Controls bus connections to line cards in the same subrack
Controls and monitors the status of other cards in the subrack
Controls and monitors alarms generated by other cards in the subrack
Provides a master G.703 clock source
Handles signaling for the subrack
Monitors the alarms and quality of all G.703 links
Controls all voice and data branching and omnibus time slot connections
Provides ports for connection to external systems, such as IMS and NMS (Network
Management System) for configuration and access of alarm and status information
Provides nonvolatile storage of system configuration (including time slot
connections) and NMS node address
Configuration and operation of Ringers (RGU cards)
Provides HDLC communications for NMS applications through time slot 0
MCU Functionality in ADS
Note
MCU3 cards are not compatible with the ADS. MCU4 cards with
ADS firmware are compatible with the ADS.
The role of an MCU4 in an ADS is much simpler. The MCU4 acts as an interface between
the DCU, ALS, and Acom Console Units. An MCU4 can also interface multiple Acom
sites using Dynamic Intersite Bearer.
181
Acom Card Reference
In an ADS, external supervisory interfaces such as IMS are handled by the DCU card.
MCU Block Diagram

Figure 57 shows the major functional blocks of the MCU. Table 107 describes each of
these blocks in detail.
Some older MCU cards do not have a second G.703 port. With the exception of the
missing port, these single-port MCU cards function exactly the same as the more
common dual-port MCU cards.
Figure 57: Functional Block Diagram MCU
VCC
External Clock
In Port
External
Clock
Interface
External Clock
Out Port
Backplane
Connector
Filter &
Soft Start
System
Clock
Selection Circuit
6V8
-12
System Clock
EPIC
Master Clock
Link 1 Receive
Port (In)
Framer 1
Link 1 Transmit
Flex
Signalling
Controller
Port (Out)
Link 2 Receive
Port (In)
Framer 2
Link 2 Transmit
Port (Out)
Reset
Button
Reset
Logic
MUSAC
1
CPU
Bus
MUSAC
2
Leds
Serial Port 1
Serial Port 2
CPU
Memory
HDLC Controller
Config. Flash
Real Time
Clock
Microprocessor
System
182
025-9574E

Table 107: Description of MCU Major Functional Blocks
BLOCK
DESCRIPTION
MUSAC
The MUSAC is a cross-point switch responsible for the time slot connections
and conferencing of channels on all internal G.703 buses up-to a maximum
of 14 streams (512 time slots).
Framers
The Framers process the frame in accordance with G.704 and provide
electrical interfaces for the G.703 signals. There is one framer per each
G.703 link. The Framer circuit performs clock recovery, AIS injection, CAS
signaling, remote alarm generation, CRC error handling, transmit line
monitoring, local loopback connection, error monitoring and alarm
simulation.
Line Transformers Provide electrical isolation between the Framers and the external line
connections and diodes for over-voltage protection.
Microprocessor
System
The microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer and

reset circuitry to provide overall management of the MCU. Configuration
settings are stored in the Config Flash memory. The MCU includes software
routines to check the program memory checksum and to check for the
presence of the Config Flash memory. The microprocessor system includes
reset circuitry, which is controlled by the reset push button and the CPU.
Config Flash
Memory
Memory used to store two sets of configuration parameters such as time slot
connections, address, clocking sources, etc., and to store fault logs.
LEDs
Sixteen Status indicators for monitoring the status of links, ringers, alarms
and MCU operation.
Serial Port 1 (X17) Serial port 1 is an RS-232 port typically used for communication with the
Microprocessor System. Configuration of software parameters can be
achieved by connecting a personal computer with the IMS software package
to this port. The serial port itself can be configured (see the section Serial
Port in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529)
Serial Port 2 (X18) Serial port 2 is normally supplied configured as RS-485 full duplex with no
collision detection. The default setting for this port is no operation. This port
is typically used to feed an external clock signal into the MCU/system. The
serial port can be configured (see the section Serial Port in Acom Software
Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529)
Real Time Clock
A 24-hour clock and calendar with leap year correction.
Flex Signaling
Controller
Processes all signaling for the MCU and provides signaling inversion when
configured using system software. Provides a time slot connection path from
the backplane to the MUSAC, EPIC and Framers.
EPIC
The EPIC allows the MCU to detect, configure and interface to CODEC
based line cards.
Master Clock
The Master Clock is a free running crystal oscillator.
External Clock
Interface
Supplies an ITU G.703 standard (clause 10), external G.703 synchronization

clock input and output.
183
Acom Card Reference
BLOCK
184
DESCRIPTION
System Clock
Selection Circuit
Selects the system clock synchronization source form the external G.703
clock, one of the 2 framers, a G.703 clock source from another card by the
back-plane, or to free run as a system master.
HDLC to
Backplane
An HDLC controller is used to communicate with other HDLC capable line

cards in the subrack.
Power Circuit
Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the Vcc rail and a soft-start
circuit to limit the inrush current at power up.
Backplane
Connector
A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, communications,

card detection and ringer monitoring.
025-9574E
MCU Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
The front edge of the MCU (shown in Figure 58) has status LED indicators, a reset button,
and connectors for external interfaces.
Figure 58: MCU - Front Edge Layout
Extraction
lever
Extraction
lever
A B LED
Indicators
1 Green
2 Green
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Yellow
6 Yellow
7 Red
8 Red
A B LED
Indicators
1 Green
2 Green
3 Green
4 Yellow
5 Yellow
6 Yellow
7 Red
8 Red
Reset
Switch
Clock
Tx/
Rx
X33
Clock
Tx/
Rx
Reset
Switch
X16 (Rx)
X15 ( Tx)
X13 (Rx)
Port used for E1,

T1, ISDN, and
HDLC signaling.
2Mbps Port 1
Port used for E1,

T1, ISDN, and
HDLC signaling.
2Mbps Port 2
X32
2Mbps Port 1
X14 ( Tx)
X31
Not Fitted on
MCU3 Single
2Mbps Port 2
X11 (Rx)
X12 ( Tx)
Not Fitted on
MCU3 Single
Port used for E1,

ISDN, and HDLC
signaling.
Port used for E1,
ISDN, and HDLC
signaling.
RS-232 Serial
Communications
Port 1 ( DB9 Female)
RS-232 Serial
Communications
RS-485/422 Serial
Communications
RS-485/422 Serial
Communications
X17
X17
X18
X18
E1 120 and T1 100
E1 75
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
185
Acom Card Reference
Status LED Indicators

The MCU card status indicators are connected to the microprocessor system, which
updates the LEDs every second, indicating the basic status of the MCU. The functions of
the LEDs are shown in Figure 59 and Figure 60. These functions are also described in
further detail in Table 108 and Table 109.
The left column of LEDs (A) indicate status for the top port of the MCU. The right column
of LEDs (B) indicate status for the bottom port of the MCU.
LED Indicators (MCU3/4 ALS)
Figure 59: MCU3/4 Status Indicators (When Used in ALS)
A B
Spare / Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 Service Alarm
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
RUN Indicator (Flashing)

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Table 108: MCU3/4 Status Indicator Functions (When Used in ALS)

LED
Color
Status Indicated When On or Flashing
A1 Spare or
Master State
Green
For OpenSky only, this indicates if the rack is the master. Otherwise it is a
spare.
B1 RUN
Green
MCU is running and operational, flashes once every 2 seconds.
2 Spare
Green
N/A
3 Ringer OK
Green
Ringer is OK and fuse on RGU card (Ring Generator Unit) is OK. The Ringer
2 LED gives the status of either the secondary ringer on the RGU card (if
fitted) or an external ringer source when connected. The MCU checks that the
ringer is operational and indicates an error (LED off) if a ringer is faulty or
not present.
4 Service alarm
Yellow
Service alarm is active. This is a summary alarm in accordance with CCITT

recommendation G.732. One or more of the following conditions will activate
the link service alarm:
5 LMFA
186
Yellow
An error ratio of 10E-3 or greater on the frame alignment signal.

Loss of incoming G.703 signal at the G.703 port (NOS).
Loss of frame alignment (LOS).
Loss of multiframe alignment (LMFA).
Receipt of an alarm indication signal.
Loss of multiframe alignment. Indicates a failure to receive a correct

sequence of frames in the G.704 Channel Associated Signalling (CAS)
multiframe format. The LMFA alarm becomes active if a multiframe
alignment word is not detected within a six millisecond period.
025-9574E
LED
Color
6 NOS
Yellow
Status Indicated When On or Flashing

Indicates a loss of the incoming signal, such as a physical break in the link.
An alarm is generated if the incoming data stream has no pulses (no
transitions or logic zero) for 64 pulse periods (single pulse period = 244ns).
The NOS alarm also activates if the incoming pulses are below a set voltage
threshold.
The NOS alarm clears after the signal has been present for 5 pulse periods.
A7 System Reset
Red
MCU is in a reset state. The ALS will not transmit data on any port while the
primary MCU is in reset.
B7 Programmable
Alarm
Red
This programmable alarm LED is programmable Output Alarm B7 LED in

IMS Output Alarm programming.
8 LOS
Red
Loss of sync (signal is present but cannot lock onto the TS0). Indicates that
the frame alignment is not being received correctly. This alarm is set after
three incorrect frame alignment words are received consecutively. The alarm
is cleared after receiving a valid frame alignment word in frame n, a valid
service word in frame n+1 and a valid frame alignment word in frame n+2.
LED Indicators (MCU4 ADS)

Figure 60: MCU4 Status Indicators (When Used in an ADS)
A B
Spare
LCB 1 or ISB Port
Spare or ISB Group
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2 or ISB Port
Spare or ISB Group
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Spare
Link 2 LOS
187
Acom Card Reference
Table 109: MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS, not as an Intersite
Bearer)
LED
A1 Spare
Status Indicated
When On or Flashing
Color
Green
Spare.
B1 Run Indicator Green
Flashes every second.
2 LCB
Status of the LCB link:
Green
Steady on = LCB present and active

Slow flash (1Hz) = LCB present and in standby mode
Fast flash (5Hz) = LCB present and in standby mode but is still getting
system information from the active LCB
3 Spare
Green
Spare.
4 Bad/RRA
Yellow
Some fault condition such as LOS, NOS, or AIS. If LOS and NOS LEDs are off,
this indicates an RRA (received remote alarm).
5 LMFA
Yellow
Loss of multiframe alignment. Indicates a failure to receive a correct sequence of

frames in the G.704 Channel Associated Signalling (CAS) multiframe format.
The LMFA alarm becomes active if a multiframe alignment word is not detected
within a six millisecond period.
6 NOS
Yellow
No incoming signal detected. Indicates a loss of the incoming signal, such as a

physical break in the link. An alarm is generated if the incoming data stream has
no pulses (no transitions or logic zero) for 64 pulse periods (single pulse period =
244ns). The NOS alarm also activates if the incoming pulses are below a set
voltage threshold.
The NOS alarm clears after the signal has been present for five pulse periods.
A7 System Reset Red
MCU is in a reset state. The ALS will not transmit data on any port while the
primary MCU is in reset.
B7 Spare
Red
Spare.
8 LOS
Red
Loss of sync (signal is present but cannot lock onto the TS0). Indicates that the
frame alignment is not being received correctly. This alarm is set after three
incorrect frame alignment words are received consecutively. The alarm is cleared
after receiving a valid frame alignment word in frame n, a valid service word in
frame n+1 and a valid frame alignment word in frame n+2.
188
025-9574E
When an MCU4 is used for an Intersite Bearer, LEDs 2 and 3 function in a different
manner. Furthermore, LED 2 indications mean different things depending on the LED 3
indications. The following table describes MCU4 LED indications when used as an
Intersite Bearer. It should be read left-to-right; determine the status of LED 3 first, then
LED 2.
Table 110: MCU4 Status Indicator Functions (When used in an ADS as an Intersite Bearer)
LED
3
(ISB Group)
ISB Status Indicated

2
(ISB Port)
Main/Standby
Main/Backup
Fast flashing
(5Hz)
Fast flashing (5Hz)
Offline, not ready, or errored
Offline, not ready, errored, or

configured as inactive standby
Slow flashing (1Hz)
Standby ready
Slow flashing
(1Hz)
Fast flashing (5Hz)
Standby ready
Offline, not ready, errored, or

configured as inactive standby
Slow flashing (1Hz)
Standby ready
Standby ready
Fast flashing (5Hz)

(*main/backup ports)
In use (Main)
In use (Main)
Online backup
In use (Main)
Online active
In use (Main)
Offline or errored
In use (Main)
Online
Slow flashing (1Hz)

Steady on
Steady on
Fast flashing (5Hz)
(**extender ports)
Steady off
(**extender ports)
* Includes ports configured as Main, Main Backup, Standby and Standby Backup ports.
** Includes ports configured as Extender and Standby Extender ports.
Note
ISB port LEDs are individual and can have different indications. ISB
port LEDs help determine if a main/backup changeover is
allowable.
Note
ISB group LEDs are grouped; all ports in the Main group should all
have the same indication, and all ports in the Standby group should
have the same indication. ISB group LEDs help determine if a
main/standby changeover is allowable.
189
Acom Card Reference
Reset
The reset button on the front edge of the MCU is connected to circuitry that activates the
System Reset LED (A7) and sends a reset signal to the microprocessor. When the reset
button is pressed on a primary MCU in an ALS, all other cards in the subrack are reset.
When the reset button is pressed on an MCU in an ADS or a secondary MCU in an ALS,
only that MCU is reset; all other cards continue to operate.
During the reset sequence, the microprocessor performs a series of checks and tests,
including a power on self-test (if enabled). A number of LEDs are activated for around ten
seconds for a primary MCU (ALS) and three seconds for a secondary MCU (ALS) or an
MCU in an ADS. Correct operation is indicated in the following procedure.
To reset an MCU card:

1. LED A7 (System Reset) comes on when the Reset Button is held down.
2. LED A7 turns off and B1 (Run) turns on when the Reset button is released.
3. A number of LEDs (nine or ten) turn on for a period and then turn off.
4. LED B1 (Run) starts flashing.
Note
LED numbers are indicated in Figure 58.
In an ALS, the primary MCU has a longer start-up time than secondary cards, because
during its power-up sequence it detects and tests all other cards in the subrack. Secondary
MCUs do not perform these functions and have a shorter reset/power-up sequence.
Note
For MCUs installed in an ADS, there is no primary/secondary

distinction because there is no primary MCU. In an ADS subrack,
the DCU holds the configuration for the subrack and controls ADS
subrack messaging. To reset all cards in an ADS subrack, press the
DCU reset button.
A reset may also be initiated by the microprocessor system by the Reset Subrack
command in the system software. During this type of reset the System Reset LED will not
be active.
Settings
Jumper Settings
G.703 Cable Shield
Jumper links are provided for the local grounding of the G.703 ports as required by G.703
standard. They should be removed when the remote equipment requires TNV isolation or
is not classified as SELV.
190
025-9574E
Figure 61: Jumper Setting to Ground Transmit Shields

Tx Ports
Jumpers X46, X43, X45

1
With this jumper configuration the shield is grounded
Note
The default factory setting has transmit shields grounded.
Jumper links are also provided to connect transmit shields to receive shields. It is
recommended not to connect these shields in order to prevent the flow of current through
the shield between the two systems. However, if the link is greater than 30 meters, the
connection shield at both ends (Rx and Tx) may reduce the standing waves present on the
cable. These links should only be fitted if problems are encountered.
Figure 62: Jumper Settings for Rx to Tx Shield Connections
X38, X23, X22

1
Setting for Rx not connected to Tx
Note
Default factory setting has receive shields not connected to Tx.
Serial Port 2
Jumpers may be used to select the mode (RS-422 or 485), duplex (2-wire or 4-wire) and
line termination.
191
Acom Card Reference
Figure 63: Jumper Setting for RS-485 Mode, 4-Wire, Unterminated
x27
x24
x28
X25
X30
x20
x21
x29
x37
X26
X36
Note
Default factory setting.
Figure 64: Jumper Setting for RS-485 2-Wire, Unterminated
x27
x24
x28
X25
X30
x20
x21
x29
x37
X26
X36
Note
Other jumpers can be set as shown in Figure 63 and Figure 64 to

select 4 or 2-wire operation.
Figure 65: Jumper Setting for RS485 Line Termination
Note
192
x24
x28
x20
x21
x29
x37
Other jumpers can be set to select 2 or 4-wire operation.
025-9574E
Figure 66: Jumper Setting for RS422 Mode

x27
x24
x28
X25
X30
x20
x21
x29
x37
X26
X36
Note
RS-422 mode requires that component D46 is fitted (factory

modification).
Connector Detail
External Clock-In
The External Clock-In port allows the MCU to be synchronized to an external 2048 kHz
G.703 clock signal. The MCU will only use an external clock source when it is the highest
priority valid clock source. A valid clock source is one that is within the correct frequency
range for a minimum of four seconds.
External Clock-Out
The External Clock-Out port is connected to the system clock. This allows external
devices to be synchronized to the subrack.
G.703 Link
G.703 ports are the main interface for the MCUs. The G.703 ports allow 2048Kb/s
synchronous transmission and reception of CRC4 and Double frame data (E1), or
1544Kb/s 12 frame Multiframe and Extended Superframe (T1).
Serial Communications Port 1 (RS-232)
This port provides an RS-232 interface between the MCU and a local maintenance
terminal, such as a personal computer running IMS software. The MCU pin-out is
configured as a DCE, which requires a straight through cable to connect to a PC (DTE).
Communication settings are: 38,400 baud, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no flow
control.
Serial Communications Port 2 (RS-422/485)
Serial Port 2 is identical to Serial Port 1 but uses the RS-485 or RS-422 protocol. These
protocols allow for transmission distances of up to 1200 meters. When using the RS-485
protocol, multiple subracks can be connected to a multi-drop cable, which is then
controlled by a single PC running IMS. The IMS software allows access (through a
193
Acom Card Reference
network address) to any of the subracks connected to the cable. This port is also used for
NMS (Network Management System) applications.
Termination resistors are provided on the MCU card and may be enabled or disabled using
jumper links. The terminators should be enabled when Port 2 is used in RS-422 mode.
They should also be enabled for the MCU card at the end of a network when in RS-485
mode.
The default factory configuration of Serial Port 2 is four-wire RS-485 with no line
termination. RTS functionality can be provided for special applications but requires a
factory modification to fit component D46.
Real Time Clock (RTC)
The RTC is used to facilitate the Acom RTC system. This is an advanced configurable
system that has support for DST, GMT offsets, NTP sources, multi-site redundant RTC
sources, and multi-site operation over different time zones. For more information about
the Acom RTC system, see the IMS ADS chapter in Acom Software Configuration
(P/N 025-9529).
Serial Ports
Serial Port 1 is used for local IMS programming and firmware updates. Serial Port 2 can
be used to connect all Acom subracks to the NMS computer by RS-485. This is normally
not required in an Acom system, because time slot 16 can perform the same function when
the NMS is connected to a DS3.
Note
The program cable is a straight through cable, connecting Port 1

with the PC (pins 2 to 2, 3 to 3, and 5 to 5).
Table 111: Serial Port 1 (X17) DB9 Female Detail

Pin
Name
Function
Signal Direction
NC
TXA +
Transmit data
Output from MCU
RXA +
Receive data
Input to MCU
GND
Ground
CTSA +
Clear To Send
Input to MCU
RTSA +
Request To Send
Output from MCU
4
5
6
194
025-9574E
Table 112: Serial Port 2 (X18) DB9 Female Detail

Pin
Name
Function
Signal Direction
TXB -
Transmit data
Output from MCU
TXB +
Transmit data
Output from MCU
RXB +
Receive data
Input to MCU
RXB -
Receive data
Input to MCU
GND
Ground
CTSB -
Clear To Send
Input to MCU
CTSB +
Clear To Send
Input to MCU
RTSB +
Request To Send
Output from MCU
RTSB -
Request To Send
Output from MCU
Table 113: Serial Port 2 (X19) IDC10 Socket Detail

Pin
Name
Function
Signal Direction
GND
Ground
RXB -
Receive data
Input to MCU
TXB -
Transmit data
Output from MCU
CTSB -
Clear To Send
Input to MCU
RXB +
Receive data
Input to MCU
CTSB +
Clear To Send
Input to MCU
TXB +
Transmit data
Output from MCU
2
3
4
10
G.703 Interface
The G.703 is the port used to interface to E1, T1, ISDN, and HDLC signaling. The E1 rate
is 2.048 Mbps and the T1 rate is 1.544 Mbps. ISDN and HDLC are signaling protocols
used for various applications.
Table 114: G.703 Connectors E1 75 Build
Connector
Function
Signal Direction
X13
Link 1 receive port
Input to MCU
X14
Link 1 transmit port
Output from MCU
X11
Link 2 receive port
Input to MCU
X12
Link 2 transmit port
Output from MCU
X16
External clock in port
Input to MCU
X15
External clock out port
Output from MCU
195
Acom Card Reference
Table 115: G.703 Connectors E1 120 Build and T1 100 Build

Connector
Function
Pins for Balanced

Receive Pair
Pins for Balanced

Transmit pair
X32
Link 1 port
1, 2
4, 5
X31
Link 2 port
1, 2
4, 5
X33
External clock port
1, 2
4, 5
MCU Installation
Note
ALS slots are numbered starting with 0.
MCU Installation in ALS

The rules for installing an MCU in an ALS are as follows:
The MCU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is
applied to the rack, except for the primary MCU. There are also special conditions
for hot plugging an MCU when there are fourteen G.703 links installed in one
subrack (see the following bullet items).
An MCU card may be fitted in any slot except slot 12.
MCU cards may be fitted to provide thirteen G.703 links in one subrack.
A fourteenth G.703 link can be used with the provision that all the MCU cards are
installed at power-up. Hot plugging an MCU in a subrack with fourteen links causes
the Primary MCU to re-allocate backplane resources to the MSU or to another card
installed in the subrack. This will result in the fourteenth link becoming
unavailable.
A MCU card must be fitted in slot 0 to function as the Primary MCU for the
subrack. This card is not hot pluggable.
MCU Installation in ADS
Note
ADS slots are numbered starting with 1. ADS slots may also be
identified with an L or R for those situations where it is
important to know which DS3 switch in the subrack is being
discussed (left or right). For example, slot 1L is the first slot on
the left side and slot 3R would be the third slot on the right side.
The rules for installing an MCU in an ADS are as follows:

The MCU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is
An MCU card may be fitted in slots 2, 3, and 4.
Install MCU cards from left to right, so a DS3 switch with...
...one MCU card should reside in slot 2.
196
025-9574E
...two MCU cards should reside in slots 2 and 3.

...three MCU cards should reside in slots 2, 3, and 4.
MCU Alarm Generation

See Appendix C: Alarms on page 371.
MCU Technical Specifications

Parameter
Max
Differential Voltage at any G.703 Port
5 mA
Differential Voltage at Clock Input Port
5V
Common Mode Voltage at G.703 Ports
0V
Common Mode Voltage at Clock In Port
0V

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Parameter
Typical
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height
16 mm
1.6 mm
Table 119: Operational Timing

Parameter
Conditions
Typical
Max.
Units
35
800
ms
Run LED flash rate
Not in reset
sec
Not in reset
sec
Period of RTC update to secondary MCU
0.5
hour
Time to detect loss of signal (LOS)
15.6
Error free seconds before clock source can be used as a

valid system clock 2
Time to detect another card in subrack

Watchdog time-out to internal reset
197
Acom Card Reference
Parameter
Error free seconds before Link alarms are deactivated.
Conditions
Typical
Max.
Units
1.The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not cause the MCU Reset LED to operate.
2.Clock sources may include recovered or external clocks.
1544 Kbps Data Processing

Main Interface Data Rate:
Frame Format: Selectable
Frame Rate:
Frames per Multi-frame:
Time slots per Frame:
Bits per Time Slot:
Multiplex Principle:
1544 kbps 50 ppm

12 Frame Multi-Frame or Extended
SuperFrame
8000 frames/second
12 or 24
24
8
Time Slot Interleaving
2048 Kbps Data Processing

Main Interface Data Rate:
Frame Format: Selectable
Frame Rate:
Frames per Multi-frame:
Time Slots per Frame:
Bits per Time Slot:
Multiplex Principle:
2048 kbps 50 ppm

Double-Frame or CRC Multi-frame
8000 frames/second
16
32
8
Time Slot Interleaving
2048 kbps Digital Interface 75 G.703/G.823

Physical Connection:
Line Code:
Line Impedance:
Coaxial, type SMB (RG179 Coax)

HDB3
75 (unbalanced)
Table 120: 75 Digital Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Bit Rate
2047897
2048000
2048102
Hz
Peak voltage of a mark (pulse)
2.13
2.37
2.61
Peak voltage of a space (no pulse)
-0.237
0.237
Nominal pulse width
244
ns
0.015
UI p-p
1.04
18
dB
dB
Intrinsic Jitter
Receiver Differential Input Threshold
20 1E5 Hz
-
Return Loss
102-2048 Hz
Input Signal Attenuation
No equalizing.
198
025-9574E
1544 Kbps Digital Interface 100 G.703

Line Code:
Line Impedance:
Symmetrical pair, type RJ-45 (UTP Cable)

B8ZS
100 (balanced)
Table 121: 100 Digital Interface Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Bit Rate
1543923
1544000
1544077
Hz
2.3
3.0
3.7
-0.3
0.3
Nominal pulse width
323
ns
200
mV
Intrinsic Jitter
20 1E5 Hz
0.015
UI p-p
Return Loss
102-2048 Hz
18
dB
dB
2048 kbps Digital Interface 120 G.703/G.823

Line Code:
Line Impedance:

HDB3
120 (balanced)
Table 122: 120 Digital Interface Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Bit Rate
2047897
2048000
2048102
Hz
2.70
3.00
3.30
-0.3
0.3
Nominal pulse width
244
ns
200
mV
Intrinsic Jitter
20 1E5 Hz
0.015
UI p-p
Return Loss
102-2048 Hz
18
dB
dB
External Clock Interface 75 G.703/G.823

Line Code:
Line Impedance:
Coaxial, type SMB (RG179 Coax)

NRZ
75 (unbalanced)
199
Acom Card Reference
Table 123: 75 Clock Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Clock Out Port Frequency
2047897
2048000
2048102
Hz
Clock In Port Frequency
2047693
2048000
2048307
Hz
Clock Signal Peak Voltage
0.75
1.0
1.5
Clock Signal Nominal Pulse Width
244
ns
External Clock Interface 100 G.703

Line Code:
Line Impedance:

NRZ
100 (balanced)
Table 124: 100 Clock Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Bit Rate
1543923
1544000
1544077
Hz
Peak Voltage
1.0
1.5
1.9
Nominal Pulse Width
323
ns
External Clock Interface 120 G.703/G.823

Line Code:
Line Impedance:

NRZ
120 (balanced)
Table 125: 120 Clock Interface Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Bit Rate
2047897
2048000
2048102
Hz
Peak Voltage
1.0
1.5
1.9
Nominal Pulse Width
244
ns
Maintenance Terminal Interface RS-232

Physical Interface:
Line Settings:
DB9 Female
RS-232C / V24
38400, N, 8, 1
Table 126: Maintenance Terminal Interface Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Data Rate
Transmitter Output Voltage Swing
200
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
38400
bps
3 k Load
025-9574E
Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Receiver Voltage Range
-30
+30
Receiver Input Low Threshold
1.2
Receiver Input High Threshold
1.7
Receiver Input Hysteresis
0.5
Receiver Input Resistance
Transmitter Output Resistance
300
Transmitter Output Short Circuit Current
10
mA
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
NMS Interface RS-422 / RS-485

Physical Interface:
Line Settings:
DB9 Female
RS-422 / RS-485
9600, N, 8, 1
Table 127: NMS Interface Electrical Interface

Parameter
Conditions
Data Rate
9600
bps
Transmitter Differential Output Swing
No Load
50 Load
2.7
27 Load
1.5
Output High
250
mA
Output Low
250
mA
70
mV
12
-0.2
0.2

Physical Connector:
Table 128: Backplane Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Typical
Units
1.35
50
mA
Real Time Clock

Time Format:
Date Format:
Data Backup:
24 hour, 1 second resolution

365-day calendar with leap year correction
Backup capacitor stored voltage
201
Acom Card Reference
Backup Duration
The card can hold time without power for up to three days.
Compliant to AS3548, Class A and FCC Part 15, Class A.
Main Supply Unit (MSU)

P/N 950-0487
The MSU provides DC-DC conversion that powers the Acom subrack or ADS rack from a
battery or rectifier station supply. The input voltage must be in the -20 to -60 VDC
range. The MSU generates the +5, +12, and 12 volt power rails required by the plug-in
cards as well as an isolated 12 volt supply used for TNV circuitry. The MSU also handles
system alarms and provides a general purpose 4-wire audio interface. (See MSU Options
in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)
The MSU card has the following features:
DC-DC conversion
Redundant / Load sharing operation
Automatic shutdown on failure
LEDs and relays for three G.732 composite general system alarms
Six general-purpose alarm inputs
Six alarm outputs, one fixed and five programmable general-purpose
A general-purpose 4-wire audio interface intended for use as an engineering order
wire (EOW) system, voice recorder output, or as a test port
Tone generation
MSU Block Diagram

Figure 67 shows the major functional blocks in the MSU. Table 129 describes these
functional blocks in detail.
202
025-9574E
Figure 67: MSU Functional Block Diagram

MSU3
POWER
ON/OFF
Battery
VoltageStation
Supply
RF Filter
LPF
Over Voltage
Protection
Regulation
58V Max
Reverse Voltage
Protection
Slow Turn
On
SWITCH MODE
POWER
SUPPLY
TNV -12V
V BAT
TNV Side
TNV or User Equip
Rx
RXA
PSU
600R
RXB
Tx
TXA
600R
TXB
ISOLATED
SWITCH MODE
POWER
SUPPLY
+6dB
Audio Interface
+ve Batt
Alarm Interface
+VV
AO21
AI11
AI21
AI21
-ve Batt
-12V
Sense
WATCHDOG
Watchdog
Monitor
Input
-VV
+ve Batt
+12V
Watchdog
Alarm
AO21
AI11
SELV Side
+5V
Bus
Voltages to
Subrack
Backplane
Current Share
AO11
AO11
TNV Side
Alarm I/O 1 & 2

Alarm Interface
+VV
CODEC 1
AO12
AO12
AO22
AO22
AI12
AI12
AI22
AI22
Tone
Gen 1
-VV
-ve Batt
+ve Batt
Alarm I/O 3 & 4

Alarm Interface
+VV
CODEC 2
AO13
AO13
AO23
AO23
AI13
AI13
AI23
AI23
Tone
Gen 2
Tone
Gen 3
-VV
-ve Batt
NO Relay
Contacts
IOM-2
BUS TO
BACK
PLANE
Alarm I/O 5 & 6
G.732 ALARMS
URGENT, NON-URGENT,
SYSTEM OK
RELAYS + LEDs
Table 129: Description of MSU Functional Blocks

Block
Description
RF filter
This is a passive RF filter used to clean external DC power.
Over voltage
protection
Transient over voltage protection is provided by passive components. The module

also contains components that prevent damage if the station supply is connected in
reverse polarity.
203
Acom Card Reference
Block
Description
Regulation
Regulates the voltage supply to the MSU card and to the backplane to a maximum of
60V (input voltage). The regulator also monitors the incoming supply and will shut
down the entire subrack if an over voltage condition occurs larger than -64 3 volts.
Transient increases in the supply rail larger than -60 volts can be tolerated. The
module also provides a slow turn-on facility to prevent large in-rush currents at
power-on.
Isolated switched
mode power supply
The main DC to DC voltage conversion. There is 1.5 kV isolation between the input
and output. A separate TNV -12 volt supply is also generated. Each voltage rail lights
a front-panel LED to indicate that voltage is present. Regulation of the power supply
is controlled by a 5V remote sense lead from the backplane. Current sharing between
two MSUs is controlled by a connection on the backplane between the two units.
Audio Interface
The audio interface and general alarm inputs and outputs are almost identical to the
audio interface and the E&M inputs and outputs on the EMU (6R90524). The
CODECs interface to the MCU by the IOM-2 buses on the backplane. Each CODEC
can provide two audio channels, and signaling bits for the alarm leads and card
maintenance.
The transmit audio is amplified by a 7 dB opamp to compensate for the loss through
the feed resistor and the insertion loss of the transformer.
Audio in both directions is 600 ohm impedance and transformer isolated. The audio
channel is intended for system level functions such as driving a voice recorder,
providing an omnibus or order wire, or providing a test port. When used in this mode,
two of the alarm inputs (AI11/2) and outputs (AO11/2) become un-available.
Alarm Interface
The general alarm inputs and outputs are provided by optocouplers. The lines are
grouped into pairs that use the same reference voltages. DIP switches and gates on
board allow the polarity of the alarm outputs to be inverted. The output leads have
secondary protection against over voltage, but are not protected against short circuit.
Watchdog
Monitors the operation of the primary MCU processor on an ongoing basis and raises
an alarm if a problem is detected.
CODEC
The CODEC performs the analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signal, detects
the signaling information from the alarm interfaces, and makes the data available to
the MCU through the internal IOM-2 bus.
Tone generator
The CODECs are used to generate tones used by cards in the subrack.
G.732 alarms
This module provides the required alarms for a CCITT G.732 system. This requires
that communication equipment should generate a composite general alarm for any
condition that would create an alarm. These are grouped into three broad categoriesUrgent, Non-Urgent and System OK. Three on-board LEDs are provided, Red,
Yellow and Green. Each alarm condition also has an on-board relay with the relay
contacts that are available on the front DIN connector.
MSU Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
The front edge of the MSU (Figure 68) has status LED indicators, battery supply
connection, power-on switch, and a connector for external interfaces.
204
025-9574E
Figure 68: MSU Front Edge Layout

Extraction
lever
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
Green
Green
1 Green
2 Green
TNV -12V
+5V
Watchdog Alarm
Red
Input supply present Green
3 Red
4 Green
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
+12V
-12V
Power Switch
OFF
ON
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
1
2
3
4
Green Information
Yellow Non-Urgent Alarm
Red
Urgent Alarm
A C
32
P4
Audio and
Alarm
Interface
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
LED Indicators
LED status indicators are provided on the front of the card, as shown in Figure 68; their
functions are listed in Table 130.
205
Acom Card Reference
Table 130: Status Indicator Functions

Position
Color
Function
Operation
First row left
Green
+12V
Active under normal operating conditions
First row right
Green
TNV -12V
Second row left
Green
-12V
Second row right
Green
+5V
Third row left
Red
Watchdog alarm
Active under an alarm condition
Third row right
Red
Over voltage alarm
Active under an alarm condition
Fourth row left
Green
Battery present
Active when supply connected
Fourth row right
Green
Battery turned on
Active when switch turned on
Position
Color
Function
Operation
Left in tri-level
Green
G.732 System OK
Active under System OK alarm
Middle in tri-level
Yellow
G.732 Non-Urgent
Active under Non-Urgent alarm
Right in tri-level
Red
G.732 Urgent
Active under Urgent alarm
Reset / Shutdown
The MSU includes circuitry that resets the two CODEC chips when the subrack is reset.
Pressing the reset button on the Primary MCU or applying power to the subrack causes the
subrack to be reset.
During reset the MSU does not pass audio, and the alarm inputs and outputs will not be
functioning. Power supply voltage generation is not affected.
Automatic Shutdown
The MSU will shutdown in an attempt to protect the Acom equipment when exposed to
extreme voltage conditions. (See Table 137 for the exact specifications.)
An MSU will shutdown and remain off if one of the following events occur:
Over voltage on the +5, +12 or 12 volt power rails
Over current draw on the +5, +12 or 12 volt power rails
An MSU will shutdown but may recover if any of the following events occur:
Over voltage on the input battery feed. Removal of the over voltage condition (3V
hysteresis) turns the supply back on.
Under voltage of the input battery feed. Removal of the under voltage condition
turns the power supply back on.
206
025-9574E
Settings
DIP Switch Settings
Switch X3 can be used to invert the polarity of the alarm output (AO) leads. Table 131
lists the DIP-switch number for each alarm out line.
A switch is in the On position when the link is moved towards the backplane edge of the
card. A switch is in the Off position when the link is moved towards the front of the card.
Table 131: DIP Switch Functions
DIP
Switch
MSU
Alarm
Switch
Switch setting for AO lead Fail and Idle State
Switch
Pole
AO Fail in Idle State

IMS Normal Output
Earth-off-idle
X3
Earth-on-idle
AO Fail in Active State

IMS Inverted Output
Earth-off-idle
Earth-on-idle
AO11
Off
On
On
Off
AO21
Off
On
On
Off
AO12
Off
On
On
Off
AO22
Off
On
On
Off
5 wdog 5
AO13
Off
Off
Off
Off
AO23
Off
On
On
Off
N.C.
N.C.
1. Also see the paragraph Changeover Hardware and the MSU.
Jumper Link Settings

Reference Voltage Strapping
The input and output alarm circuits operate from a reference voltage supply, which may be
connected in two different ways.
Jumper links are provided on the MSU that allow the reference voltage to be
connected from either the backplane power supply or from interface connector P4.
If the backplane supply is used, then the alarm circuits are not isolated from the
subrack.
By connecting an external supply to the reference voltage pins on P4, the alarm in
and out lines can be isolated from the subrack.
Jumpers J1 to J6 are provided to connect the +VV and VV supply lines to the six alarm
circuits. For example, J1 connects +VV, and J2 connects VV to the alarm in and alarm
out circuits for Channel 1 (Figure 71 and Figure 72).
For isolation reasons, all jumper links must be set in the same position.
207
Acom Card Reference
Jumpers J10 to J12 are provided to connect the three G.732 normally open relay contacts
from either the backplane power supply or from the interface connector P4.
Table 132: Reference Voltage Jumper Settings
Configuration
Jumper
Use voltage from front connector (factory default):

1
(J1-J6, J10-J12)
Use battery voltage from backplane:
(J1-J6, J10-J12)
Note that pin 1 is the square pad at the left-hand side of the jumper outline.
Strapping for Single Backplane Systems

Jumpers J7 to J9 are provided to fit the MSU into a single backplane subrack. If an MSU is
linked for a single backplane subrack, but is installed into a dual backplane subrack, no
physical damage will occur, but the isolation between TNV and SELV equipment is
compromised.
STOP
Warning! When the MSU is configured for single backplane, and the
reference voltage is sourced from the backplane, the TNV to
SELV barrier is negated. In this configuration, the equipment
connected to the alarm circuits must have an SELV rating in
order to preserve the SELV rating of the backplane - hence the
entire subrack.
Table 133: Configuration Jumpers for the Lower Backplane

Configuration
Use MSU in a dual backplane subrack
(factory default):
Jumper
1
(J7-J9)
Use MSU in a single backplane subrack:
(J7-J9)
Note
208
Note that pin 1 is the square pad at the top side of the jumper
outline.
025-9574E
Connector Detail
All external user signal connections are made at the front edge of the card through
connector P4 (pin 1 at the bottom of the card). The connector pin out is shown Table 134.
Table 134: User Interface Connector (P4) pin out
Direction
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
Function
TX1A
RX1A
AO11
AI11
AO21
Spare
Spare
AO12
AI12
AO22
Spare
Spare
AO13
AI13
AO23
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
G.732 OK COM
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
G.732 Non-Urgent
COM
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
G.732 Urgent Com
Spare
Pin
32a
31a
30a
29a
28a
27a
26a
25a
24a
23a
22a
21a
20a
19a
18a
17a
16a
15a
14a
13a
12a
11a
10a
9a
8a
Pin
32c
31c
30c
29c
28c
27c
26c
25c
24c
23c
22c
21c
20c
19c
18c
17c
16c
15c
14c
13c
12c
11c
10c
9c
8c
7a
6a
5a
4a
3a
2a
1a
7c
6c
5c
4c
3c
2c
1c
Function
TX1B
RX1B
Ch1 +VV
Ch1 VV
AI21
Spare
Spare
Ch2 +VV
Ch2 VV
AI22
Spare
Spare
Ch3 +VV
Ch3 VV
AI23
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
G.732 OK NO
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
G.732 Non-Urgent
NO
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
G.732 Urgent NO
Spare
Direction
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
External battery supply connections are made at the front edge of the card through
connector X1 (pin 1 at the top of the card). The connector pin out is shown in Table 135.
Table 135: Battery Supply Connector (X1) Pinout
Pin
Function
1 and 3
2 and 4
Negative battery
Positive ground
209
Acom Card Reference
Audio Channel
The audio interface is a 4-wire audio (two Tx and two Rx). The channel is usually used as
an order wire, allowing installers to communicate with each other during the install or
during system testing. The interface is identical to that on an EMU. When the audio port
time slot is connected (using the system software), alarm inputs and outputs 1 and 2
become unusable. The inputs and outputs cannot be used as E&M type leads, because the
signaling is not passed through the system.
The transmit and receive gains can be set using the system software. When the transmit
and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the insertion loss on both the transmit and receive paths
is 0 dB.
Audio Connections
Figure 69 through Figure 72 show simplified circuit diagrams for the audio and alarm
ports.
Figure 69: Audio Receive (Input) Circuit Schematic
Codec
Rx A
600
Rx B
Figure 70: Audio Transmit (Output) Circuit Schematic

600
+12
Codec
Tx A
-12
Tx B
Alarm Connections
Figure 71: Alarm Output Circuit Schematic
Jumper Link (J1, J3, J5)
+VV
Internal +V Supply
AO
210
025-9574E
Figure 72: Signaling Input Circuit Schematic

Jumper Link
(J1, J3, J5)
+VV
Internal +V Supply
AI
Internal -V Supply
-VV
Jumper Link
(J2, J4, J6)
MSU Installation in Racks

Load Sharing and Redundancy
Two MSUs can be installed into slots 11 and 12 of a subrack. With this configuration, the
MSUs share the load of the subrack. If one MSU fails (or its battery feed is interrupted),
the remaining MSU takes over and powers the entire rack with no interruption to the
operation of the rack.
Note
If the failure is at a subrack level, such as a power rail being

shorted to ground, both power supplies are shut down.
Rules for installing an MSU in an Acom Line Subrack (ALS) are as follows:
A MSU must be fitted to slot 12 in the ALS.
A second MSU may be inserted into slot 11 in the ALS.
A second MSU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power
is applied to the first MSU, providing the above two points are noted.
Rules for installing an MSU in an ADS Subrack are as follows:
A MSU must be fitted to slot 6 of the subrack.
A second MSU may be inserted into slot 5 of the subrack.
A second MSU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power
is applied to the first MSU, providing the above two points are noted.
STOP
Warning! Do not apply power and/or turn on the power switch to an

MSU that is not fully inserted in the subrack.
Do not remove an MSU from a subrack with the power switch
for that MSU turned on.
Suggested installation method:

1. Insert MSU into subrack.
211
Acom Card Reference
2. Connect power up to MSU.

3. Turn power switch on.
Suggested removal method:
1. Turn power switch off.
2. Remove power connection.
3. Remove MSU from subrack.
MSU Alarm Generation

The failure of a CODEC, the failure of interface from the CODEC to the backplane, or the
removal of the MSU from the rack, will generate a configuration alarm. The MSU can also
generate alarms through six alarm inputs.
Table 136: MSU Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
User Input Alarm
Programmable
Programmable
MSU Card Failure
Urgent
MSU Card Removal
Urgent
CODEC Failure
Urgent
Failure of interface between CODEC and backplane CE (Configuration Error)
Urgent
MSU Input Alarm 1
Programmable
27
Programmable
MSU Input Alarm 2
Programmable
28
Programmable
MSU Input Alarm 3
Programmable
29
Programmable
MSU Input Alarm 4
Programmable
30
Programmable
MSU Input Alarm 5
Programmable
31
Programmable
MSU Input Alarm 6
Programmable
32
Programmable
Alarm Outputs
The MSU has six opto-isolated alarm outputs and three alarm relays for Urgent, NonUrgent, and Informational alarms. (See Table 134 for pin outs.) One of the six alarm
outputs is fixed as a watchdog alarm and the other five are fully configurable using the
system software. Detailed alarm output information is provided in Appendix C: Alarms on
page 371. Each of the three output relays coincides with an LED on the front of the MCU
(red, yellow, and green).
You can map any alarm generated by any of the cards contained within the subrack to any
alarm output on the MSU. More than one alarm may be mapped to an alarm output on the
MSU; the alarms are logically ORed by the MSU. The exact operation of the relay (i.e.,
212
025-9574E
normally open or normally closed) can be set by using jumpers on the MSU board. The
operation of the alarms can also be inverted by using the system software.
Note
The alarm outputs for each unit are identical when two MSUs are
installed.
Watchdog Alarm
The watchdog alarm (AO13) of the MSU is a fixed alarm. If the primary MCU stops
responding, the watchdog alarm is activated. This mapping is fixed and cannot be
removed, however other system alarms can be mapped to the watchdog alarm output.
While the Watchdog is fixed to alarm on loss of primary MCU or power, other alarms may
be mapped to the output in addition to the fixed conditions.
Note
In the case of a power failure, the watchdog alarm (AO13)

becomes active, however the watchdog LED does not illuminate.
Programmable Alarms
The other five alarms on the MSU are fully configurable. You can map any card alarms to
any MSU alarm output.
Alarm Inputs
The MSU has six alarm inputs that can be used to generate alarms within the MSU. (See
Table 134 for pinouts.) These inputs can be used to trigger output alarms, or perform
functions such as acknowledge all alarms. This mapping is done using the system
software.
The alarm input circuits are designed to detect the presence of a ground on their input
and alarm outputs or to generate a ground (+VV = Gnd, -VV = -20 to -70V). Jumper
links on the MSU card allow the alarm reference voltages (VV) to be connected to the
backplane power supply or to pins on the external connector P4. The external connection
allows isolation of the input and output circuits from the subrack power supply.
MSU Technical Specifications

Parameter
Conditions
Max
Operating Input Voltage (DC)
-60 V
Signaling Out Line Current (M Lead)
Peak maximum
150 mA
Voltage applied to Alarm Lines
+VV + 0.2 V
Alarm reference voltage +VV to -VV
Peak maximum
70 V
DC bias across audio inputs or outputs -
0V
213
Acom Card Reference

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Parameter
Typical
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height
35 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
800 g
Table 140: Power Supply Characteristics

Parameter
Input voltage range
Over-voltage shutdown
Under-voltage shutdown
Regulated backplane battery voltage
Output Currents
+5V
+12V
-12V
TNV-12V
Maximum output power
Maximum Input
Input voltage = 20V
Current
Input voltage = 48V
Input voltage = 60V
Power Supply Efficiency
Min.
-20
-61
1
0.05
0.05
-
Max
-61
-67
-20
-58
12
1
1
0.6
94
6
2.5
2.1
75
70
Units
V
V
V
V
A
A
A
A
W
A
A
A
%
Audio Interface
Physical Connector:
Physical Interface:
Number of Channels:
Sampling:
DIN41612 Type C, 64-pin male

4-wire 600 balanced
1
A Law PCM (8 kHz)

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Unit
Input Isolation
1.5
kV
-7.4
+18.6
dB
-20.1
+5.8
dB
-27.5
+24.4
dB
Rx gain = 0 dB
+3
214
dBm
025-9574E
Ring Generator Unit (RGU)
Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Unit
Rx gain=-6dB
+9
dBm
Tx gain = 0 dB
dBm
Tx gain = 6 dB
+9
dBm
Frequency response
300
3400
Hz
0.3 - 2.4 kHz
-0.5
+0.5
dB
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
-0.5
+1.8
dB
1020 Hz
33
dB
Return loss
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
20
dB
Alarm Interface
Physical Connector:
DIN41612 Type C, 64-pin male
Physical Interface:
NPN Transistor
Number of Inputs/Outputs: 6 inputs and 6 outputs
Table 142: Alarm Interface Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Unit
Reference Voltage +VV to -VV
-18
-48
-60
Voltage at unconnected input
-VV+2
Input pulse width assumed to be noise
0.5
ms
Input current with input connected to +VV
mA
Output voltage when output is active
+VV-1.2
+VV
Maximum continuous output current
60
mA
G.732 Alarm relay contact rating
0.5
Compliant to AS3548, Class A and FCC Part 15, Class A.

P/N 950-0518 (24V)
P/N 950-0519 (48V)
The RGU card provides a ring voltage source required to ring telephones. When an RGU
card is installed in a subrack, the ring voltage can be connected to outputs of TIE line
cards via the backplane.
The RGU contains one ringer module that provides a 20 hertz ring voltage source. It can
also accept an external ring source voltage.
215
Acom Card Reference
The RGU can be configured to use either the internal ringer or the external ringer input. It
can also use both in a Primary/Standby (when there is more than one ringer source) mode
where the ringer source is switched if one ringer source fails.
The external ringer source input is also useful in applications where the number of
telephones to be supplied exceeds the output rating of the internal ringer module.
The ring voltage output from the RGU is connected to the subrack backplane. TIE cards in
the subrack take the ring voltage from the backplane and use a relay to connect the ring
voltage to the TIE two-wire interfaces when a ring tone is required.
The RGU has the following functionality and features:
LED indication of the ringer voltage status (healthy or fail).
Automatic selection of a healthy ringer source when the Primary/Standby mode is
used.
Output short circuit protection of the internal ringer source.
RGU Description
Block Diagram
A functional block diagram of the RGU is illustrated in Figure 73. Table 143 describes
each of these blocks in detail.
Figure 73: Functional Block Diagram
Backplane
Connector
+5
FSI
Power Fitter &

Soft Start
- Bat
Internal
Ringer
OK
Ringer Source
Selector
Ringer Source
Selector
Active Ringer Source
Ringer
Module
Relays
J1
External
Source Input
External
Ringer
OK
J2
216
Ringer Source
Detector
Ringer
Source
Detector
Ringer Source
Selector
Balancing
Transformer Input
025-9574E
Table 143: Description of RGU Functional Blocks

Block
Description
Ringer Module
Generates a 20 Hz sine wave, which is used as the internal ringer source. The
Ringer Module is internally powered from the Backplane BAT supply.
Relays
These perform switching of the ringer source voltages and are controlled by the
ringer source selection circuit. The output of the relays is called the active
ringer source.
Ringer Source
Detector
Monitors the voltage and frequency of the internal ringer voltage, the external
ringer voltage and the active ringer sources. The signals are used to drive the
status LEDs and are sent to the MCU card for monitoring. The detectors
include amplitude discrimination circuits so that the outputs will only be active
when the ringer source is greater than a specified minimum voltage.
Ringer Source
Selector
Provides signals for switching of the relays and includes a circuit that turns the
relays on at a zero crossing of the ringer voltage.
The MCU continuously monitors the signals from the ringer detection circuits
and decides which source should be selected as the active ringer source. This
decision is communicated to the MSU card which sends a signal to the Ringer
Source Selector. Because only one signal is used, there are only two possible
states: internal ringer or external ringer.
LEDs
Two status indicators are provided for monitoring the status of the ringer
voltages. The LEDs are driven from the ringer source detector circuits for the
internal ringer and the external ring source.
An LED will be active (on) when the ringer source voltage is negative and off
when positive. Normal operation is indicated by a flickering of the LED at a
rate of around 20 Hz.
External Source The external source input includes a MOV based over-voltage protection
Input
circuit and a fuse. Refer to RGU Installation on page 221 for more detail.
Power Circuit
Includes filtering of the BAT and +5 voltages supplied from the backplane and
soft start circuits to limit the inrush current at power up.
Backplane
Connector
Two DIN41612 type connectors are used to carry signals for power, ringer
detection and ringer selection. The active ringer voltage is also carried by the
backplane to TIE cards in the subrack.
RGU Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
The front edge layout of the RGU card is illustrated below.
217
Acom Card Reference
Figure 74: Card Front Edge Layout: Types 11-12R90523

Extraction
lever
LED Indicators
A B LED Indicators
Internal Ringer Ok
Green
Green External Ringer OK
External
Ring
Source
connector
1
2
3
4
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
Connectors:
Table 144: Backplane Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max
Units
10
mA
BAT Supply Voltage Range
11R90523
24
48
59
V DC
BAT Supply Voltage Range
12R90523
18
24
36
V DC
a. A supply of less than the specified typical voltage will result in a reduction in the rated output
voltage and power of the internal ringer source.
218
025-9574E
LED Indicators
The status LED indicators are connected to the Ringer Source Detection circuits and
operate independently of other cards in the subrack.
The Ringer Source Detection circuits will turn a LED on when the ringer source voltage is
in the negative half cycle of the waveform and greater than a minimum RMS voltage.
When the ringer source voltage is in the positive half cycle or less than the minimum
required amplitude then the Ringer Source Detection circuit will turn the LED off. Normal
operation is indicated by a flickering of the LED at a rate of around 20 Hz.
Because the LED indicators are hard-wired to circuits within the RGU card, they operate
independently of the MCU and the TIE cards and will function correctly when there is no
MCU or TIE in the subrack.
Figure 75: RGU Status Indicators
Extraction
lever
LED Indicators
Internal Ringer Ok
A B LED Indicators
Green
Green External Ringer OK
Table 145: RGU Status Leds

LED
Color
Status Indicated when LED is

Pulsing (LED will Flicker at 20 Hz)
Internal Ringer OK
Green
Indicates that the internal ringer module is

active.
External Ringer OK
Green
Indicates that the external ringer source is

active.
Reset
Pressing the reset button on the MCU may result in a temporary change of the relay
positions. Both relays will move to the off position (thus connecting the internal ringer
source as the active ringer) while the button is pressed.
A system reset has no other effect on the RGU and the status indicators will continue to
operate.
Settings
219
Acom Card Reference
Connector Detail
External Ring Input Connector J1
Details and rules for connection of an external ring voltage at connector J1 are included in
sections RGU Technical Specifications on page 222 and RGU Installation on page 221.
Ring Voltage Output - Connector J2
Connector J2 is not normally fitted to the RGU and is used for special applications where
the ring voltage is to be connected from external equipment. The main intention of
providing J2 is to allow users to generate a balanced ring signal using an externally
connected transformer and series capacitor as shown in Figure 76.
Figure 76: External Balancing Transformer Connection
RGU
J2
- Bat
Ring
6.8 F
External Ring
Transformer
1
2
Balanced Ring
In
3
4
Connector J1 is provided for connection of an external ringer source. The pinout detail of
J1 is as follows. There are connection on the RGU printed wiring board between pins 1
and 2 and between pins 3 and 4.
Table 146: RGU Power Connector
Pin
220
Function
External Source +
External Source +
External Source -
External Source -
025-9574E
Figure 77: External Ring Signal Connection
Ring Signal
(No DC)
J1
RGU Installation
Card Placement
Rules for installation of an RGU in a subrack are as follows:

The RGU card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is applied to the rack.
The RGU should normally be installed in slot 11 of the subrack.
If ten line cards are required in the subrack then the RGU should be fitted in slot 1
and the line cards in slots 2 to 11.
Card Detection
The MCU cannot detect which slot the RGU is in. It detects the presence of the
RGU by monitoring the outputs from the ringer source detectors. Rather than showing a card located in the subrack, the status of ringers is shown as a text message on
the IMS Main Window.
External Ringer Source
The rules for connecting an external ringer source are as follows:

Voltage and current limitations are detailed in RGU Technical Specifications on
page 222.
The external source must have no DC component.
The external circuit must be floating (i.e. both ends of the circuit should not be
connected to any other point in the system).
The input circuity for the external ringer source input is shown in Figure 78.
221
Acom Card Reference
Figure 78: External Ringer Source Input Circuit

Connector J1
FS3
To Relay and Ringer
Source Detector
1
FS2
2
3
4
MoV
Transient
Supressors
10
+V Bat
-V Bat
User Serviceable Items
Fuse FS1: 3AG Glass Slow Blow, 1.5A 250V

Connector J1: Weidmuller Part No. BL412593.6
Connector J2: Weidmuller Part No. 1124.6
RGU Alarm Generation
Table 147: RGU Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
RGU Card Failure
RFA (Ring Fail Alarm)
23
Urgent
RGU Card Removal
RFA (Ring Fail Alarm)
23
Urgent
RGU Technical Specifications

Parameter
Conditions
Max
Units
Standard line length
24
REN
External Ringer Input Voltage
100
VRMS
External Ringer Input Current
1.5
ARMS
Volts
Maximum Ringer Load
DC Component of External Ring

Voltage

Parameter
222
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity
025-9574E

Parameter
Typical
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height
22 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
630 g
Internal Ringer Source

Table 151: Electrical Characteristics: 11R90523
Parameter
Conditions
Typical
Max
Units
Rated Output Voltage
BAT = 48 V
86
VRMS
BAT = 48 V
20
WRMS
Minimum Load Impedance
BAT = 48 V
250
Ohms
Rated Frequency
20
Hz
Load Regulation
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
7.5
Rated Output Power
a. Rating specified for intermittent duty and not continuous operation.
Table 152: Electrical Characteristics: 12R90523

Parameter
Conditions
Typical
Max
Units
Rated Output Voltage
BAT = 24 V
86
VRMS
BAT = 24 V
15
WRMS
Minimum Load Impedance
BAT = 24 V
300
Ohms
Rated Frequency
20
Hz
Load Regulation
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
7.5
Rated Output Power
a. Rating specified for intermittent duty and not continuous operation.
External Ringer Input

Table 153: Ringer Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
External Ringer Input Voltage
Min.
a
Typical
Max.
Units
50
86
100
VRMS
1.0
ARMS
DC Component of External Ring Voltage -
External Ringer Input Current
223
Acom Card Reference
a. A voltage below the specified minimum will not be properly detected by the RGU status
monitoring circuits.
Compliant to AS3548 Class B.
Radio Interface Unit (RIU)

P/N 950-0838
The RIU is a card for the Acom Line Subrack (ALS) that provides interfaces for up to six
conventional radio channels via local or tone remote control. The six channels can be
configured to serve as an interface to a 2-wire or 4-wire tone remote base station, a local
radio, or an E&M circuit*. Voice logger outputs are available for all six channels and all
configurations.
The RIU card has LEDs that provide visible indication of COR (E) and PTT (M) status for
each channel. Configuration and audio level adjustments are performed via the Integrated
Management System (IMS).
Note
224
* The RIU does not have -48v capability on E&M lines.
025-9574E
RIU Description
Block Diagram
The following figure illustrates a system block diagram of the RIU.
Figure 79: RIU System Block Diagram
Radio
RIU
Type 66 Radio
Punchdown
Acom Line Subrack

(ALS)
Radio
Radio
(2) RJ-21's
Radio
Type 66 Logger
Punchdown
Voice logger
audio and
aux I/O
Radio
Radio
The following figure illustrates a hardware block diagram of the RIU.

Figure 80: RIU Hardware Block Diagram
Audio interface:
Acom backplane
interface and DSP
Tx audio
y
y
y
2-wire / 4-wire / local

Selectable termination
Selectable gain control
M-lead / PTT relay contact
Rx audio
E-lead Opto / COR comparator
M / PTT
E / COR
Tx / Rx summing
I/O
Aux I/O and Busy I/O
Radio (1 of 6)
Tx +
Tx Rx +
Rx M+ / PTT
M - / PTT
E+ / COR +
E - / COR Logger (1 of 6)
TxRxSum +
TxRxSum Aux Input
Aux Output
Busy I/O
Gnd
225
Acom Card Reference
RIU Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
The front edge layout of the RIU card is illustrated below.
Figure 81: RIU Front Edge Layout
Run LED
Channel Activity LEDs
PTT (M) for Channels 1-3 (left to right)
COR (E) for Channels 1-3 (left to right)
PTT (M) for Channels 4-6 (left to right)
COR (E) for Channels 4-6 (left to right)
50 25
J1 Voice Logger Interface Connector
26 1
50 25
J2 Radio Interface Connector
26 1
226
025-9574E
Rear Edge Layout

The rear edge layout of the RIU card is illustrated below.
C A
1
P1
32
C A
1
P2
32
227
Acom Card Reference
Figure 82: RIU Interface and Jumper Locations
DS1
ACOM Radio Interface Unit
DS2
DS3
P3
DS4
DS5
Factory
Use Only
J1
Voice Logger
Interface
JP1
JP2
JP6
JP7
J2
Radio
Interface
JP3
JP4
JP5
JP8
JP9
JP10
JP11
JP12
JP13
JP14
JP15
JP16
JP17
JP18
JP19
JP20
JP21
JP22
JP23
JP24
JP25
JP26
JP27
JP28
JP29
JP30
JP31
JP32
JP33
JP34
P1
Backplane
Interfaces
P2
JP35
This figure shows approximate locations of certain components. It is not to scale.
LED Indicators
See Front Edge Layout on page 226.
Reset
Pressing the reset button on the MCU results in a reset state for the RIU card. No output is
generated during reset.
Settings
Most of the RIU configuration is performed in IMS (see Acom Software Installation and
Configuration, P/N 025-9529). Jumpers are used to configure channels for local or remote
control. For jumper locations, see Figure 82. The following table provides jumper
configuration information.
228
025-9574E
Table 154: RIU Jumpers

Function
Local Radio
Interface
COR and
PTT
Dry
(no VBAT)
E&M
Channel
1
Channel
2
Channel
3
Channel
4
Channel
5
Channel
6
JP29=B
JP30=A
JP31=IN
JP32=B
JP33=B
JP24=B
JP25=A
JP26=IN
JP27=B
JP28=B
JP19=B
JP20=A
JP21=IN
JP22=B
JP23=B
JP14=B
JP15=A
JP16=IN
JP17=B
JP18=B
JP9=B
JP10=A
JP11=IN
JP12=B
JP13=B
JP2=B
JP3=A
JP4=IN
JP5=B
JP8=B
JP29=OUT
JP30=A
JP31=OUT
JP32=A
JP33=B
JP24=OUT
JP25=A
JP26=OUT
JP27=A
JP28=B
JP19=OUT
JP20=A
JP21=OUT
JP22=A
JP23=B
JP14=OUT
JP15=A
JP16=OUT
JP17=A
JP18=B
JP9=OUT
JP10=A
JP11=OUT
JP12=A
JP13=B
JP2=OUT
JP3=A
JP4=OUT
JP5=A
JP8=B
If any mixture of these Functions is used, set JP1=IN. (The only caveat is that you will
not be able to connect telco lines to the card. This should not present any problem.)
Factory defaults JP34=OUT and JP35=A should never be changed.
Connector Detail
For connector locations, see Figure 82.
Voice Logger Connector (J1)
The RIUs voice logger is just a line logger for the specific RIU channel it is attached to. The voice
logger interface is a 50-pin RJ-21 connector with the following pinout:
Pin
1
Description
CH1 Voice Logger +
Type
Audio Output
Notes
Paired with Voice Logger
Transformer coupled
RO = 600 ohm +/- 10 %
Shall be capable of driving +5 dBm into 600 ohm
Shall withstand > 50 VDC through 1k ohm
26
CH1 Voice Logger -
Audio Output
See Voice Logger +
CH1 Busy I/O +
Open
Collector I/O
Paired with signal ground
Ground
Signal ground
28
CH1 Busy I/O -
Open collector input/output with hysteresis on the

input
10k ohm pull up to +12 VDC nominal
RACTIVE < 50 ohms, RINACTIVE > 10k ohm
229
Acom Card Reference
Pin
2
Description
CH1 Aux In
Type
Input
Notes
Paired with Aux In common
Input with hysteresis
Intended for a closure to ground, logic level or +12
VDC drive.
VACTIVE < 2 VDC, VINACTIVE > 4.75VDC
27
CH1 Aux In Common
Input
Signal ground
CH1 Aux Out
Output
Paired with Aux Out Common

Open drain output
RACTIVE < 10 ohms, RINACTIVE > 10k ohm
Shall withstands > 50 VDC through 1k ohm
29
CH1 Aux Out Common
Output
CH2 Voice Logger +
Audio Output
30
CH2 Voice Logger -
Audio Output
CH2 Busy I/O +
Open
Collector I/O
32
CH2 Busy I/O -
Busy return
CH2 Aux In
Input
31
CH2 Aux In Common
Input
CH2 Aux Out
Output
33
CH2 Aux Out Common
Output
CH3 Voice Logger +
Audio Output
34
CH3 Voice Logger -
Audio Output
11
CH3 Busy I/O +
Open
Collector I/O
36
CH3 Busy I/O -
Busy return
10
CH3 Aux In
Input
35
CH3 Aux In Common
Input
12
CH3 Aux Out
Output
37
CH3 Aux Out Common
Output
13
CH4 Voice Logger +
Audio Output
38
CH4 Voice Logger -
Audio Output
15
CH4 Busy I/O +
Open
Collector I/O
40
CH4 Busy I/O -
Busy return
14
CH4 Aux In
Input
39
CH4 Aux In Common
Input
16
CH4 Aux Out
Output
41
CH4 Aux Out Common
Output
230
Signal ground
025-9574E
Pin
Description
Type
17
CH5 Voice Logger +
Audio Output
42
CH5 Voice Logger -
Audio Output
19
CH5 Busy I/O +
Open
Collector I/O
44
CH5 Busy I/O -
Busy return
18
CH5 Aux In
Input
43
CH5 Aux In Common
Input
20
CH5 Aux Out
Output
45
CH5 Aux Out Common
Output
21
CH6 Voice Logger +
Audio Output
46
CH6 Voice Logger -
Audio Output
23
CH6 Busy I/O +
Open
Collector I/O
48
CH6 Busy I/O -
Busy return
22
CH6 Aux In
Input
47
CH6 Aux In Common
Input
24
CH6 Aux Out
Output
49
CH6 Aux Out Common
Output
Notes
Radio Interface Connector (J2)

The radio interface is a 50-pin RJ-21 connector with the following pinout.
Pin
Description
Type
Notes
CH1 Transmit audio +
Audio Output
Paired with Transmit Audio Transformer coupled

ROUT = 600 ohm +/- 10% while driving the line,
ROUT > 200k ohm while not driving the line
ROUT shall not vary from its 1 kHz value by more than
+/-10% over the range 300 Hz - 3 kHz
Capable of driving +10 dBm into a 600 ohm load
Also receive + for two wire application, must accept +10
dBm from the line without clipping
26
CH1 Transmit audio -
Audio Output
See Transmit Audio +
CH1 Receive audio +
Audio Input
Paired with Receive Audio Transformer coupled

RIN = 600 ohm +/- 10% or RIN > 50k ohm, selectable
Must accept +10 dBm from the line without clipping
AC coupling installer selectable
27
CH1 Receive audio -
Audio Input
See Receive Audio +
231
Acom Card Reference
Pin
Description
Type
Notes
28
CH1 E+ or COR+
Input
Paired with E Configured as "E":

Capable of withstanding +/- 56.5 VDC
Opto-isolated, non-polar voltage detector
VIL = +/- .6 VDC, VIH = +/- 18 VDC
Configured as "COR":
Digital input with hysteresis
RIN > 9k ohm
VT ~ 2.5 VDC
CH1 E- or COR-
Input
See E +
29
CH1 M+ or PTT
Output
Paired with M Isolated relay contact capable of carrying 100 mA

RACTIVE < 4 ohms (VO < .2 V @ 50 mA), RINACTIVE >
500k ohms
CH1 M- or PTT
Output
See M +
Audio Output
30
Audio Output
CH2 Receive audio +
Audio Input
31
CH2 Receive audio -
Audio Input
32
CH2 E+ or COR+
Input
CH2 E- or COR-
Input
33
CH2 M+ or PTT
Output
CH2 M- or PTT
Output
Audio Output
34
Audio Output
10
CH3 Receive audio +
Audio Input
35
CH3 Receive audio -
Audio Input
36
CH3 E+ or COR+
Input
11
CH3 E- or COR-
Input
37
CH3 M+ or PTT
Output
12
CH3 M- or PTT
Output
13
Audio Output
38
Audio Output
14
CH4 Receive audio +
Audio Input
39
CH4 Receive audio -
Audio Input
40
CH4 E+ or COR+
Input
15
CH4 E- or COR-
Input
41
CH4 M+ or PTT
Output
16
CH4 M- or PTT
Output
17
Audio Output
232
025-9574E
Pin
Description
Type
42
Audio Output
18
CH5 Receive audio +
Audio Input
43
CH5 Receive audio -
Audio Input
44
CH5 E+ or COR+
Input
19
CH5 E- or COR-
Input
45
CH5 M+ or PTT
Output
20
CH5 M- or PTT
Output
21
Audio Output
46
Audio Output
22
CH6 Receive audio +
Audio Input
47
CH6 Receive audio -
Audio Input
48
CH6 E+ or COR+
Input
23
CH6 E- or COR-
Input
49
CH6 M+ or PTT
Output
24
CH6 M- or PTT
Output
25
Ground
Ground
50
Ground
Ground
Notes
RIU Installation
Card Placement
The RIU card can be installed in slots 2-11 of the Acom Line Subrack (ALS).
Channel TX and RX Wiring
The RIUs radio interface connector (J2) uses 4-wires for TX and RX. This interface
supports three radio wiring schemes: 4-wire, 2-wire simplex, and local radios. The
following table provides the necessary wiring information.
Table 155: RIU TX and RX Wiring
RIU J2
4-Wire
2-Wire
Simplex
Local
TX +
TX +
TX/RX +
TX
TX
TX
TX/RX
N/C
RX +
RX +
N/C
RX
RX
RX
N/C
N/C
Ground
(Pin 25 or 50)
N/C
N/C
Ground
233
Acom Card Reference
RIU Alarm Generation

Table 156: RIU Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
RIU Card Failure
Configuration Error (CE) 0
Urgent
RIU Card Removal
Configuration Error (CE) 0
Urgent
RIU Technical Specifications

Table 157: Audio Levels
Parameter
Input Gain
Output Gain
Min
Max
Step
Units
22.5
1.5
dB
-46.5
1.5
dB
Gain adjustments can be made through IMS ALS, even while a line is active. See the
Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual.
Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Parameter
234
Typical
Overall Length (front to back)
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height
22 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
630 g
025-9574E
Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) Card

P/N 950-0650
The Recorded Voice Announcement (RVA) card provides playback of recorded
announcements. Multiple announcements may be recorded and stored in non-volatile
memory. The playing back of the announcement is controlled by pre-determined events
set up within the system.
The announcements stored in the RVA are downloaded into the cards non-volatile
memory via Zetron maintenance terminal software. The RVA accepts 8kHz, 8-bit mono
.wav files. If required, announcements can be recorded directly into the RVA via a handset
that plugs into the RJ12 socket on the front of the card.
The RVA has the following functionality and features:
RVA playback uses the A-law PCM format
Announcements are stored in non-volatile memory (i.e. retained during power
down)
516 seconds of total record time
Longest single announcement length of 30 seconds
Maximum of 30 separate recordings
Maximum of 30 simultaneous playbacks of one or more recordings
Able to playback an announcement while recording a new announcement
A dual purpose reset / heartbeat LED indicator.
Date / time stamp and name (up to 30 characters) for each announcement stored in
the non-volatile memory
RJ12 socket for recording and playback of announcement messages (invoked via
debug mode only)
RVA Block Diagram

A functional block diagram of the RVA is illustrated in Figure 83. Table 160 describes
each of these blocks in detail.
235
Acom Card Reference
3.3V
Debug Port
(RS232)
5V
Regulator/PSU Filtering
Host Processor
Flash and RAM
B
a
c
k
Sync
Clk
Host Processor
(68MH360)
2M (1TS)
2M (30 TS)
Backplane
Drivers
(PCM bus)
Bus/Timeslot
selection
PCM
P
l
a
n
e
HDLC
2x
4Mb x 8 Flash
Headset Interface
CODEC
Table 160: Description of RVA Functional Blocks

BLOCK
236
DESCRIPTION
Regulator/PSU Filtering
Includes filtering, over voltage protection and soft start circuits to

limit the inrush current at power up.
Debug port
Debug port for factory use only
Host Processor Flash and

Ram
Holds configuration data for the processor and memory for operation
Host Processor
Controls all function of the board and audio processing
Bus time slot selector
Selects back plane buses to transmit audio data
Back plane drivers
Discreet drivers that interface back plane signals to the RVA board
4Mb Flash
Non-volatile memory used to store the recorded announcements
Headset Interface
RJ12 interface used to record voice announcements
CODEC
Coder-decoder used to encode the audio from the Headset interface
025-9574E
RVA Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
The front edge layout of the RVA cards is illustrated below.
Figure 84: Card Front Edge Layout and Headset Pinout
Extraction
lever
Run / Reset LED
Audio Connector
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
LED Indicators
The status LED indicator shows the state of the RVA card. The status LED has three
different modes, red, steady green and flashing green. Table 9 outlines LED stated and the
associated RVA card status.
Table 161: RVA Status LEDs
LED Color
Red
Steady Green
Flashing Green
Status Indicated
Indicates the RVA is in a reset state
Indicates that the RVA is in power-up initialization mode
Indicates that the RVA is operational
237
Acom Card Reference
Reset
Settings
Connector Detail
Headset Interface
Table 162: Headset Interface Pin Description
Pin
Description
Direction
Mic
Input
Spkr +
Output
Spkr -
Output
GND
RVA Installation
Card Placement
The RVA can be installed in slots from 1 to 11. It may not be installed in Slot 0 as this is
reserved for the primary MCU. It may not be installed in Slot 12 as this is reserved for the
MSU.
The RVA card is hot-pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is applied to
the rack. The recorded announcements are stored in a non-volatile memory and are not
lost when the card is removed from the subrack.
RVA Alarm Generation

Table 163: RVA Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
RVA Card Failure
Config Alarm
23
Urgent
RVA Card Removal
Config Alarm
23
Urgent
RVA Technical Specifications

Parameter
238
Specification
025-9574E
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Parameter
Typical
Overall Depth (front to back)
220 mm
Overall Height (between card guides)
233 mm
Overall Width
22 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
380 g

Physical Connector: DIN41612 Type C 64 pin male.
Table 166: Electrical Characteristics of the Back Plane
Parameter
Typical
130 mA
Audio Interface
Recording standard: A-law PCM (8 kHz)
Playback via back plane: A-law PCM (8 kHz)
Parameter
Conditions
Max.
Total recording time
Standard RVA
516 seconds
Maximum length of a single recording
Standard RVA
30 seconds
Maximum number of separate recordings
Standard RVA
30 seconds
Maximum number of simultaneous playbacks Standard RVA
30
Operational Timing
Table 168: Operational Timing characteristics
Parameter
Run LED flash rate (green)
Run LED
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max.
Units
500
1200
2000
ms
Not in reset
Hz
In reset
Solid red
239
Acom Card Reference
a. The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not cause the subrack to
reset.
Signaling Management Unit (SMU)

P/N 950-0512
The Signaling Management Unit (SMU) contains a microprocessor and up to three Digital
Signal Processors (DSP), providing a general purpose signal processing resource for
Acom systems. It also contains an IEEE 802.3 Ethernet port (10 Base-T) and a diagnostic
serial port. With the optional SMU Adapter board (R93634), up to two of the Operators
Console Unit analog-daughter boards can be mounted to the SMU board for additional I/O
capability.
The microprocessors main functions are to communicate with the MCU card in slot 0 of
the subrack and to manage the on-board signal processing and I/O resources. This includes
translating resource allocation commands from the MCU and reporting operational status.
The SMU communicates with the MCU over an HDLC circuit on the subrack. It also has
an RS-232 serial debugging port and status LED on the front of the card. The Ethernet port
also has two diagnostic LEDs near the front of the card.
The SMU board supports up to three Digital Signal Processors to process the digitized
audio information contained in the subrack PCM buses. These DSPs are connected
through the FPGA to the PCM busses on the backplane and to the I/O connector to any
daughter boards. A wide range of additional signal processing or specialized I/O
capabilities are possible by designing daughter boards that mount on the SMU board and
interface through the 100-pin I/O connector.
SMU interface circuits include the PCM and HDLC control buses, which are used to
communicate with other cards in the subrack. These control buses are connected between
cards by the backplane.
Multiple SMU cards can be installed in slots 1 through 11 of a subrack.
The DSP processing capabilities on the SMU provides the following functions:
Selective Calling (SELCAL) encoding and decoding
DTMF encoding and decoding
Complex tone generation with programmable tone type, frequency amplitude, and
duration
Voice detection (VOX)
Voice compression
240
025-9574E
SMU Block Diagram

Figure 85 shows the major functional blocks of the SMU and Table describes each of these
blocks in detail.
Backplane
Connectors
Ethernet
Port
Ethernet
DSP#1
Controller
Soft Start &

Regulators
DSP#2
FPGA Logic &

Interface Circuits
DSP#3
RS-232
Port
HDLC Controller
CPU
I/O Connector
Memory
Isolated Power Supplies
Special Function Daughter Board Interface
SMU Description of Major Functional Blocks

Table 169: Description of SMU Major Functional Blocks
Block
Description
Microprocessor
System
The microprocessor system combines a CPU with internal HDLC communications

controller, memory, watchdog timer and reset circuitry to provide overall
management of the SMU DSP resources. The microprocessor system controls the
DSP resources and the PCM signal paths located in the FPGA and any daughter
boards that are plugged into the I/O connector.
Digital Signal
Processors
There are three independent DSP resources located on the SMU card. Each DSP can
be connected to one of the backplane PCM busses and to daughter boards through the
I/O connector.
Ethernet Controller
The Ethernet controller is coupled directly to DSP #1 on the SMU card. It translates
the internal digital data into the correct voltage and current levels to meet the IEEE
802.3 specification.
Ethernet Port
IEEE 802.3 (10Base-T) port for data or audio.
FPGA Logic and

Interface Circuits
All of the SMU board logic and most of the PCM signal interconnections are located
in a large FPGA device. There are interface buffers between the FPGA and the
backplane connector to translate the voltage levels and provide the drive currents
required by the backplane.
241
Acom Card Reference
Block
Description
HDLC to Backplane
An HDLC controller located inside the microprocessor is used to communicate with

master MCU located in slot 0 of the subrack.
RS-232 Port
The RS-232 serial port allows direct communication to the SMU microprocessor by
service personnel.
I/O Connector
This 100-pin connector carries microprocessor and FPGA signals to the daughter
cards. It also carries the three isolated 150-volt power connections.
Daughter Board(s)
One custom SMU daughter board, or the SMU Adapter board, and one or two Acom
Console Unit analog daughter cards can be installed on the SMU board.
Power Circuits
Includes filtering and over voltage protection on the three input voltage rails, and softstart circuits, to limit the inrush current at power up. There are three voltage
regulators to create 3.3 VDC, 2.5 VDC, and 1.8 VDC supplies that are used on the
card.
Upper Backplane
Connector
A DIN41612 type 64-pin connector that carries signals for power, the internal PCM
busses, slot identification and HDLC communications with the MCU card in slot 0.
Lower Backplane
Connector
A DIN41612 type 32-pin connector that carries the 48 VDC input for the three
isolated 150 VDC power supplies. This connector is not normally installed.
242
025-9574E
SMU Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
Figure 86: SMU - Front Edge Layout
EXTRACTION
LEVER
X5
ETHERNET
PORT
V6
RUN LED
X14
RS-232 PORT
The front edge of the SMU in Figure 86 has an Ethernet connector, a Run LED, and the
Diagnostic RS-232 connector.
Physical Layout
The SMU layout of major components is shown in Table 87. For a detailed layout of all
components, see the SMU Component Overlay drawing (Zetron No. 410-0072).
243
Acom Card Reference
Figure 87: Location of major Components - SMU

CPLD
D1
Ethernet
Port
X5
Ethernet
Control
D5
DSP
1
D2
DSP
2
D3
DSP
3
D4
Voltage
Regulator
VR1
Run LED
VR2
JTAG Connector
SRAM
D14
Serial
Port
X14
Motorola
MC68360
Microprocessor
D13
FLASH
D22
SRAM
D15
FLASH
D23
Gate
Array
(FPGA)
D17
Upper Backplane
Connector
X4
Voltage
Regulator
VR3
Daughter Board
Adaptor Connector
X18
Lower Backplane
Connector
X19
(optional)
Isolated
Power Supply
PS1
(Optional)
Isolated
Power Supply
PS2
(Optional)
Isolated
Power
Supply
PS3
(Optional)
Rear Edge Layout

LED Indicators
The Run LED indicator blinks with a 2-second period, indicating normal operation of the
SMU board (see Figure 86).
The Ethernet interface consists of the RJ-45 connector and two-surface mounted LED
indicators. The top LED indicates a valid connection exists and the lower LED indicates
data packet activity in either direction.
244
025-9574E
Reset
Power-Up Self Test
The power-up self-test is a sequence of checks performed by the SMU microprocessor
system. The tests are used to verify to the fullest possible extent that the SMU card is
operational without requiring external equipment or connections. The SMU may be selftested in any slot of the subrack.
Settings
Reset Jumper
The two pins located at X11 can be shorted together to force the SMU board into reset
without effecting the other cards in the subrack(s). The reset switch on the front of the
MCU board in slot 0 is normally used to reset the whole subrack.
Uninstalled Jumpers
There are several uninstalled 2-pin, 10-pin, 14-pin and 20-pin through hole pad sets on the
SMU boards that are intended only for development purposes.
Connector Detail
Ethernet Port
Table 170: Ethernet Connector (X5) 8-pin male Detail
Pin
Name
Function
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX+
TXRX+
Transmit data
Transmit data
Receive data
RX-
Receive data
Signal Direction
Output from SMU
Output from SMU
Input to SMU
No Connect
No Connect
Input to SMU
No Connect
No Connect
Diagnostic Serial Port

Serial cable:
Line Settings:
PN: 709-7592
38,400, 8, N, 1
245
Acom Card Reference
Table 171: Diagnostic Serial Port (X14) 5-pin male Detail

Pin
1
2
3
4
5
Name
RTS
TXD
RXD
CTS
GND
Function
Request to send (not being used)
Transmit data
Receive data
Clear to send (not being used)
Ground
Signal Direction
Output from SMU
Output from SMU
Input to SMU
Input to SMU
JTAG Connector
The 6-pin JTAG connector is located at X12. This connector is used during the production
process to program the CPLD port located at D1. The signal details are shown in Table
172.
Table 172: JTAG Connector (X12) 6-pin male Detail
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
Name
TMS
TDO
TDI
TCLK
+3.3V
GND
Function
Test Mode Select
Test Data Out
Test Data In
Test Clock
+3.3 Volts dc
Ground
Signal Direction
Input from SMU
Output from SMU
Input to SMU
Input to SMU
Output from SMU
BDM Connector
The 10-pin Background Debug Mode (BDM) connector is located at X13. This connector
is only used for development purposes and is not normally installed. The signal details are
shown in Table 173.
Table 173: BDM Connector (X13) 10-pin male Detail
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
246
Name
/DS
/BERR
GND
DSCLK
GND
FREEZE
/RESET
DSIN
+3.3V
DSOUT
Function
Data Strobe
Buss Error
Ground
Development Serial Clock
Ground
Breakpoint Acknowledge
Reset
Development Serial Data In
+3.3 Volts dc
Development Serial Data Out
Signal Direction
Output from SMU
Bi-directional
Input to SMU
Output from SMU
Bi-directional
Input to SMU
Output from SMU
Output from SMU
025-9574E
Time Slot Connections

The SMU can be used to connect one or more time slots within the subrack. A description
of time slot connection types can be found in the IMS chapter of the Acom Software
Installation and Configuration manual (P/N 025-9529).
The time slot connections made on the SMU card are application dependent and are
directed by the MCU located in slot 0.
Ethernet Interface
The Ethernet interface consists of the RJ-45 connector (X5), transformer (T1), controller
(D5), nonvolatile memory (D6), and two surface mounted LED indicators. The top LED
(V2) indicates a valid connection exists; the lower LED (V3) indicates data packet activity
in either direction. DSP1 (D2) controls the Ethernet Controller through the CPLD (D1).
The CPLD is used to expand the number of I/O addresses needed to control the Ethernet
Controller and match the signal timing between the two ICs. DSP1 doubles the 39.00104
MHz clock input it receives from PLL (D8) to 78.00208 MHz for the internal timing in the
CPLD IC. The Ethernet MAC address is stored in the nonvolatile memory (D6). The
Ethernet interface is optimized for 100 ohm cables.
FPGA and Interface Circuits
The FPGA (D17) contains most of the logic on the SMU board. It is SRAM based and is
programmed at start-up by the microprocessor. It contains several registers that are
programmed by the microprocessor to control the routing of the serial signals between the
three DSPs and the 14 PCM buses on the backplane. Other FPGA registers control
connections between the second DSP serial ports and any daughter boards mounted to the
SMU board.
The backplane signals all connect through 74LVT type buffers (D9, D10, D18 and D19)
and receivers (D11, D20 and D24), which match the 5-volt, 74ABT logic levels on the
other cards in the subrack. The exceptions are the 4.096 MHz clock and 8 KHz sync
signals that have 100 ohm series resistors. This is to minimize RF emissions from the
board.
Diagnostic RS-232 Interface
This port provides an RS-232 interface between the SMU and a local maintenance
terminal. (This port is not intended for general use and should only be use for firmware
upgrades or as instructed by Zetron maintenance personnel.)
The 6-pin connector (X14) provides an RS-232 interface between the SMU and a local
maintenance terminal, such as a personal computer running a terminal capable of serial
communication. The serial port controller is inside the microprocessor (D13). The 3.3-volt
logic signals are translated to RS-232 levels (+/- 9-volts) by D21 before they are
connected to the 5-pin diagnostic port connector (X22). This port runs at 38,400 Baud
with 8 data bits and no parity. The 2 hardware control signals (RTS and CTS) are
connected to the connector but are not used by the software to control the flow of data.
247
Acom Card Reference
DSP Interfaces
The Digital Signal Processors on the SMU are Analog Devices ADSP-218x parts that use
an Internal Direct Memory Access (IDMA) port for connection with the microprocessor.
The DSP software is loaded through this interface at startup. The FPGA provides
additional logic to enable the microprocessor to access memory within the DSPs. The DSP
output signal /IACK-DSPn is monitored by both the MC68360 and the FPGA. The
MC68360 must wait for /IACK-DSPn to be true (low) prior to sending an address to the
DSP or prior to any data access to the DSP. The FPGA provides the MC68360 bus transfer
termination signal (/DSACK1) for all DSP bus cycles. The MC68360 internally
terminates all other bus transfers based on the access times of the devices being accessed.
Each DSP has 2 independent serial interfaces. One operates at a 2 Mbps data rate and a
sync rate of 8 kHz. This port is connected to one of the backplane PCM busses by logic in
the FPGA. The other is connected through the FPGA to the I/O connector on the board.
The Acom Console Unit daughter boards operate at a data rate of 1 Mbps and sync rate of
8 kHz, but the DSPs and FPGA allow operation up to 4 Mbps and sync rates up to 64 kHz
on future daughter boards.
DSP1 has an additional interface to the Ethernet Controller (D5). The timing differences
between the fast DSP and the slower CS8900 (D5) are handled by the CPLD (D1). This
part is programmed through the JTAG connector (X12) during production test. The four
connections between the CPLD and the FPGA are not used. If only one DSP is populated
on a future version of the board, it must be DSP1.
I/O Connector and SMU Daughter Boards
The 100-pin I/O connector and 12 mounting holes provides a general interface for several
types of SMU daughter boards. The SMU Adapter Board (702-0073) provides 3.3 V to 5
V level translators so it can be used to interface one or two Acom Console Unit analog
daughter boards. The SMU board also has provision for three isolated DC to DC 150-volt
power supplies to facilitate a future DC Remote Daughter Board.
The microprocessor address and data buses are isolated by D25, D26, and D27 prior to
being connected to the I/O connector. Other I/O signals go directly to the connector for the
greatest flexibility. The I/O connector signals are summarized in Table 174.
Table 174: Summary of I/O Connector Signals
Signal Source
Signals
Notes
Power Supplies
+12V, +5V, +3.3V, -12V, GND
There are 20 ground pins.
Microprocessor
A0 A11, D24 D31, R/W, /CS, /IRQ-DB1,

/IRQ-DB2, RESET-DB, /PCB-IN
A12 is used by the FPGA to create

/CS-DB1 and /CS-DB2.
MC68360 I/O
10 general purpose I/O signals
Use determined by the I/O board.
FPGA I/O
2 clock inputs and 8 general purpose I/O signals DSP or PCM signals possible.
Isolated Power
3 isolated DC Power Supplies (150V)
Unconnected pins
11 unconnected pins used to provide isolation
248
Future DC Remote Daughter Board.
025-9574E
SMU Installation
Card Placement
Rules for installing an SMU in a subrack are as follows:
The SMU card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is
An SMU card may be fitted in any slot except slot 0 or slot 12.
Alarm Generation
Table 175: SMU Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
SMU Card Failure
Urgent
SMU Card Removal
Urgent
Any of the three DSPs have a fault

(watchdog, self test)
SMU
58
Urgent
DSP IDMA read/write failure
SMU
58
Urgent
FPGA failed to load
SMU
58
Urgent
DSP signal processing loop has too many modules

enabled, exceeding the maximum number of DSP
instruction cycles allowed
SMU
58
Urgent
SMU host processor believes DSP is running at

the wrong speed
SMU
58
Urgent
EEPROM cannot be read
SMU
58
Urgent
EEPROM read error (checksum bad)
SMU
58
Urgent
(corrupt EEPROM can cause this)
SMU Alarm Generation

See Appendix C: Alarms on page 371.
SMU Technical Specifications

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity
249
Acom Card Reference

Parameter
Typical
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height (does not include I/O cards)
21 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
360 g
Table 178: Operational Timing

Parameter
Run LED flash rate
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max.
Units
Not in reset
Hz
500
1200
2000
msec
The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes an internal reset only and does not affect other cards in the subrack.
Ethernet Interface
Interface specification:IEEE 802.3
Physical Interface: 10 Base-T
Physical Connection: RJ-45 female
Table 179: Ethernet Interface Electrical Characteristics
Parameter
Conditions
Min
Typical
Max.
Units
Transmitter Differential Output Voltage
Peak
2.2
2.8
Receiver Normal Squelch Level
Peak
300
525
mV
Receiver Low Squelch Level
Peak
125
290
mV
100
Cable Impedance
Maintenance Terminal Interface RS-232

Recommended cable:
Physical Interface:
Line Settings:
5-pin male
Zetron 709-7592
RS-232C / V24
38400, N, 8, 1
Table 180: Maintenance Terminal Interface Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
38400
bps
3 k load
Receiver Voltage Range
-30
+30
Receiver Input Low Threshold
1.2
Data Rate
Transmitter Output Voltage Swing
250
025-9574E
Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
Receiver Input High Threshold
1.7
0.5
Transmitter Output Resistance
300
ohm
10
mA
PCM Bus Interface

Interface Data Rate:
Frame Rate:
Time Slots per Frame:
Bits per Time Slot:
Companding:
Number of buses:
2048 kbps 50 ppm

8000 frames/second
32
8
A-law or Mu-law (configurable)
14
HDLC Interface
Interface Data Rate:
2048 kbps 50 ppm
Implemented Functions: Rx, Tx and Collision Detect
Number of backplane pins: 2
Backplane Control Signals
Implemented Signals:
SCLK, SYPQ, RESET and 4 SLOT ID

Physical Connector:
Table 181: Backplane Interface - Electrical Characteristics

Parameter
Typical
Units
0.60
mA
251
Acom Card Reference
Telephone Interface Unit (TIE)

P/N 950-0483 (Australia)
P/N 950-0591 (USA)
The TIE is a line card that provides a data path from the six 2-wire audio interfaces on the
front of the card to other cards through the backplane data bus. It provides an interface
between external subscriber telephone equipment and a communications system that can
handle all ringing and telephone line-state detection such as ring out/loop in signaling.
The TIE has six independent 2-wire telephone channels. Each channel has the following
features:
600 or complex line termination
Battery voltage feed
Loop detection
Decadic dialing detection
Ring signal output (requires an RGU card in the subrack)
Earth Recall Signal detection
Line Break detection
Allows CLI to be passed transparently
300 to 3400 Hz channel bandwidth
Line isolation
The channel gain can be set using the IMS software package.
TIE Block Diagram

Figure 88 shows the major functional blocks of the TIE. Table 182 describes each of these
blocks in detail.
252
025-9574E
Figure 88: TIE Functional Block Diagram

Backplane
Connector
+12
+5
Power Filters
& Regulation
Line Relay
-12
LA
LB
Line
Protection
Hybrid
Codec 1/2
Ring Voltage
+ VBat
Ring
Trip
Detect
Line Break
Switch
Battery
Feed
Loop
Detect
Note: For clarity, only one of six channels is shown

Microprocessor Bus
Factory
Test
Interface
Reset
Circuit
Description of TIE Functional Blocks

Table 182: Description of TIE Functional Blocks
Block
Description
Line Protection
A surge suppression circuit comprising MOVs and inductors.
Line Relay
When the MCU activates a signaling bit to the TIE, the TIE uses a relay to
disconnect the line from the audio circuits and connect it to the ring voltage. A
signaling bit from the Primary MCU controls the relay.
Line Break Switch
The line break switch is controlled by a signaling bit from the Primary MCU
and opens the lines so that no ring voltage or audio is connected.
Battery Feed
Provides a DC battery voltage from the TIE to the line and appears as a high
impedance AC.
Loop Detect
Consists of detection circuits for positive and negative flow of battery voltage
into the line. If either LA or LB is connected to ground, then the Loop Detect
circuit allows the TIE to detect an Earth Recall Signal. Signaling bits indicating
the status of the loop (i.e., loop detect and Earth Recall) are sent to the Primary
MCU.
Hybrid
A transformer and electronic circuit are used to provide line impedance of

either 600 or Complex.
Ring Trip
Detection
This circuit is used to detect a phone going off-hook when the TIE is ringing
out. When activated, the Microprocessor disconnects the ring voltage by
deactivating the Line Relay.
253
Acom Card Reference
Block
CODEC
Description
The CODEC performs the analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signal. The
digitized audio and the signaling bits are transmitted to and received from the
MCU through the backplane.
Each TIE channel uses one half of a CODEC, and there is a total of three
CODECs on the TIE.
Microprocessor
System
The Microprocessor system combines a CPU, memory, watchdog timer and

reset circuitry to provide overall management of the TIE. A factory test
interface is provided at connector J15.
Reset Circuit
The backplane reset line is connected to circuitry that resets the TIE when the
subrack is reset or when the TIE is powered up.
Power Circuit
Includes filtering, over voltage protection and soft start circuits to limit the
inrush current at power up.
Backplane
Connector
A DIN41612 type connector that carries signals for power, data, timing and
card detection.
TIE Interfaces
The TIE card interfaces can be connected to analog telephone line or to an EIE card
interface. These interfaces are used to pass audio and ring voltage. The status of the lines
is detected and the associated signaling such as ringing and loop detection are generated.
CODECs perform amplification and analog-to-digital conversion of the audio signals,
which allows the gain of each channel to be programmed (using the IMS software
package). Transmit and receive signals in excess of the maximum instantaneous input
levels may be subject to clipping. When the transmit and receive gains are set to 0 dB, the
insertion loss on both the transmit and receive paths is 0 dB.
When the TIE is installed in a subrack with an RGU card, the ring voltage generated by
the RGU is used as the TIE ring signal. A TIE will function in a subrack without an RGU
card, but there will be no ring voltage available at the TIE interface during ringing.
Signaling
The four types of signals used to control and monitor the status of the TIE interfaces are
the following:
Ring
Line break
Loop detect
Earth recall
Front Edge Layout
Figure 89 shows the front edge layout of the TIE card.
254
025-9574E
Figure 89: TIE Front Edge Layout

Extraction
lever
a c
32
P4
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
LED Indicators
The TIE card has no LED indicators.
Reset
The TIE includes circuitry that resets the Microprocessor system at TIE power-up or when
the subrack is reset (initiated by the primary MCU). It will also reset when the Watchdog
timer function is activated. During reset the TIE does not pass audio, and the ringer
voltage will not be present on the 2-wire interfaces.
255
Acom Card Reference
Self Test
The TIE card is tested on power-up and after reset. The test sends packets of information
between the CODEC circuits and the Primary MCU. The received data is then checked by
the MCU to confirm the correct operation of the CODECs on the TIE card.
The IMS self-test window shows the results of the self-test and does not perform a new
test; there is no disruption to operation.
Settings
Gain Setting and Impedance
Changing the gain setting using the IMS software causes the TIE card to adjust the gain
for the transmit or receive amplifiers within a CODEC circuit.
The receive gain adjustment allows signals to be amplified before analog-to-digital
conversion. Increasing the receive gain may improve the signal to noise ratio for weakly
received signals.
The transmit gain allows signals received from the far end of a link to be adjusted to a
level that suits the local user. Changing the transmit gain may be required when the
handset volume is too loud or too soft.
The line impedance can be configured for each line. A two-wire telephone line connected
using a short cable can have an impedance of 600 ohm (resistive). As the length of the line
increases, the resistance and capacitance increase and the impedance becomes complex
(i.e., combination of resistive / capacitive and/or inductive impedance). The TIE includes
a switchable network that is intended to help the TIE card match the impedance of longer
lines. This network comprises 220 ohm resistive in series with a parallel network of 820
and 120 nF.
Ring Cadence and Ring Tone
These are set through the Special Settings menu as described in the IMS chapter of the
Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual (P/N 025-9529).
Connector Detail
There are six channels of the TIE, which may be connected to any channel of other line
cards (e.g., TIE, EMU or EIE) or to time slots of an MCU card. The signaling from the
TIE card is processed by the MCU and passed in time slot 16 when CAS mode has been
enabled. Signaling is not passed to a remote device on a G.703 link if CAS mode is not
enabled for that link.
Loopback
When the IMS software is used to enable a loop back connection, a connection is made
within the MCU crosspoint-switch to loop the data and signaling back to the same TIE
channel. The loop back connection is not performed within the TIE, and the connection to
256
025-9574E
the channel is interrupted while the loop back is enabled. Disabling the loop back restores
prior connections to the TIE channels.
P2
All external user signal connections are made at the front edge of the card by connector
P2. The connector pinouts are shown in Table 183 on the following page.
Table 183: User Interface Connector (P2) Pinouts
Direction
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
Function
Pin
32a
LA1
31a
30a
Channel
Pin
Function
32c
31c
LB1
30c
29a
29c
28a
28c
27a
27c
LA2
26a
26c
LB2
25a
25c
24a
24c
23a
23c
22a
22c
LA3
21a
21c
LB3
20a
20c
19a
19c
18a
18c
17a
17c
LA4
16a
16c
LB4
15a
15c
14a
14c
13a
13c
12a
12c
LA5
11a
11c
LB5
10a
10c
9a
9c
8a
8c
7a
7c
6a
6c
LA6
5a
5c
LB6
4a
4c
3a
3c
2a
2c
1a
1c
Direction
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
IN/OUT
257
Acom Card Reference
Line Protection Circuit

Figure 90: Line Protection Circuit Schematic
LA
.
LB
Line Relay
180V
.
180V
180V
TNV
Ground
TIE Installation
Card Placement
Rules for installing the TIE card into a subrack are as follows:
The TIE card is hot pluggable and may be removed or inserted while power is
The TIE may be fitted to any slot in the subrack except slots 0, 1, and 12.
TIE Alarm Generation

The removal of a configured TIE card, or the failure of a CODEC, will generate a
Configuration Error (CE) alarm.
Table 184: TIE Card Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No
Alarm Type
TIE Card Failure
CE (Configuration Error) 0
Urgent
TIE Card Removal
Urgent
CODEC Failure
Urgent
Failure of interface between CODEC and

backplane.
Urgent
TIE Technical Specifications

Parameter
258
Conditions
Min.
Max.
Units
Line Interface DC Voltage
60
Ring Voltage
100
VRMS
025-9574E

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Parameter
Typical
220 mm
233 mm
Overall Height
23 mm
1.6 mm
Weight
620 g
Table 188: Operation Timing

Parameter
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
500
1200
2000
ms
Note
The operation of the Watchdog Timer causes a TIE reset only; it

does not cause the subrack to reset.
Main Interface
Physical Connector:
Physical Interface:
Number of Channels:
Sampling:

2-wire 600
6
A-law PCM (8 kHz)
Table 189: Interface Characteristics

Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
1.5
kV
48V supply
1800
-6.2
+19.7
dB
-19.8
+6.2
dB
-26.0
+25.9
dB
Rx gain=0 dB
+3
dBm
Rx gain=-6dB
+9
dBm
Tx gain=0 dB
dBm
Tx gain=6 dB
+9
dBm
Input Isolation
External Line Loop Resistance
259
Acom Card Reference
Parameter
Conditions
Min.
Typical
Max
Units
300
3400
Hz
0.3 - 2.4 kHz
-0.5
+0.5
dB
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
-0.5
+1.8
dB
1020 Hz
33
dB
0.3 - 3.4 kHz
20
dB
-66
dB
Frequency response

Return loss
Channel to channel cross talk

Physical Connector:

Parameter
Max
Units
-12 Volt TNV Power Consumption
71
mA
120
mA
mA
59
mA
Compliant to AS3548 Class A and FCC Part 15, Class A.
Universal Input/Output (UIO)

P/N 950-0490
The Universal Input/Output (UIO) system card provides connections from the channel
interfaces to the primary MCU by the backplane data bus. The card provides an interface
between external equipment requiring discrete contact closure signals and a
communications system.
260
025-9574E
UIO Block Diagram

INPUT CIRCUIT CH1
INC1
JMP3
INA1
INPUT COMMON
BUS
P5
PINS 1&3
INPUT
BUFFERS
U10,U11
JMP2
30
Microprocessor (U1)
ROM (U2)
RAM (U3)
Decoding (U4,U5)
WatchDog (U6)
RESET
15
INPUT CIRCUITS CH2-CH16
HDLC U7
DCLK
CH A
FSC
DU1
DD1
SCLK
CH B
OUTPUT CIRCUIT CH1

OUTC1
SYPQ
CTX
CRX
JMP19
RLY1
OUTA1
OUTPUT
BUFFERS
U8,U9
OUTPUT COMMON
BUS
P5
PINS 2&4
JMP1A..F
30
15
OUTPUT CIRCUITS CH2-CH16
TNV
EXT
SELV
TNV_-12V
DC-DC
CONVERTER
F3
-VE_BAT
F2
+VE_BAT
LEGEND:
1.5KV Isolation Barrier

Processor Bus:Data,Address,Control
Misc. signal
Note: Fuses F2 and F3 are installed only if the TNV battery voltage is
required on inputs or outputs. This voids the isolation between TNV
and the external circuits.
The card has the following features:

Sixteen independent DC signaling inputs
Sixteen independent DC/AC signaling outputs
Configurable debounce time on inputs
1.5 kV isolation on inputs and outputs
Debug interface to card with selftest capabilities
Hot-plugging capability
261
Acom Card Reference

The following describes the major functional blocks illustrated in the above diagram.
Input Interface
The input interface is comprised of 16 identical circuits providing polarity and
independent conversion of DC signaling inputs to opto isolated logic inputs. The rectified
output from the bridge is then conditioned by the circuitry comprised of Q1, R1, R2, D1,
and D2. This circuit configuration provides a constant current drive for the opto-coupler
diode of nominally 1.5 mA over most of the input voltage range. Capacitor C1 across the
rectifier input is for RF suppression, and varistor V1 is for transient over voltage
protection. The isolated opto coupler logic output from device U12 is buffered from the
system data bus by an octal latch, U10.
Output Interface
The output interface is comprised of 16 identical circuits providing opto-isolated discrete
contact closure outputs.
The opto-isolated logic control device U16 performs the contact changeover, switching
the TNV-12V to the relay coil. Diode D33 provides back EMF protection of the phototransistor. No on-board protection against over current or short circuit is provided.
Microcontroller Section
The microcontroller section employs a 647180 microprocessor and 128K each of flash
ROM and static RAM.
HDLC Section
The HDLC controller U7 handles backplane communications to and from the primary
MCU. All signals to and from the backplane are buffered by ABT devices for hot
plugging.
DC-DC Converter
Deriving its output from the isolated TNV battery voltage, this circuit provides a nominal
12 VDC output for the relay coils. The circuit is based around the LT1172HVCT device
U27 and is capable of operating over a supply range of -20 to -63 VDC.
UIO Interfaces
Front Edge Layout
262
025-9574E
Figure 91: Front Layout for UIO card

Extraction
lever
DEBUG PORT
Run LED
P5
P2
(INA1)A32
(OUTA16)A32
C32 (INC1)
C32 (OUTC16)
Physical Layout
No interfaces.
Rear Edge Layout
LED Indicators
A single green LED is provided on the front edge of the card (see Figure 91). This is the
'RUN' LED, and it flashes approximately once per second indicating normal operation.
Reset
263
Acom Card Reference
Settings
Jumpers
The following descriptions are intended as a guide for interfacing external equipment to
the UIO card using the various jumper options. Figure 92 is a simplified block diagram to
illustrate the Input and Output circuits as well as the common bus.
The basic descriptions explain the ways of adjusting the various jumpers to do the
following:
Independent connections for input or output circuits
Using the jumpers to connect to a common bus
Using the jumpers to connect to a specific voltage source
The descriptions should also be referenced with Table 191 and Table 192.
Figure 92: Simplified UIO Block Diagram
JMP1A - F
PINS 2 & 4
+VE_BAT
P5
JMP2
PINS 1 & 3
-VE_BAT
OUTPUT 1
OUTC1
OUTA1
INPUT 1
JMP19
INC1
INA1
JMP3
OUTPUT 2-16
OUTC2 - 16
OUTA2 - 16
INPUT 2-16
INC2 - 16
INA2 - 16
OUTPUT COMMON
BUS
INPUT COMMON
BUS
Note
264
The reference to jumpers JMP1 A, B, C, D, E, and F are made as a

single jumper, JMP1.
025-9574E
The default settings for the jumpers on the UIO have all the inputs and outputs
floating; i.e., all channel connections are independent of one another. Under these
conditions, use of the card requires that all input and output channels be wired out
from connector P2 as individual pairs.
Any one or more of the input and output channels may be assigned to a common
input and output bus respectively. This is handled by the jumper associated with the
particular channel(s) located immediately behind the front-plane connector P2. This
may be a desirable option where independence of channels is not a concern since
the wiring requirements for P2 can be reduced.
The options regarding the use of the common input and output busses depend on the
jumpers JMP2 and JMP1 respectively. Each common bus may be extended out onto
connector P5 or referenced to the TNV supply (Figure 92): TNV_-VE_BAT in the
case of the common input bus, and TNV_+VE_BAT in the case of the common
output bus.
Under some circumstances it may be desirable to reference both common busses to
the same voltage, most likely user ground. No provision exists on the UIO for the
two common busses to be tied together. This must be done externally.
STOP
Warning! If the full 2 amp rating of all outputs is a requirement, the

individual outputs must be used (default). Otherwise, use of
the common output bus is limited to the total current drawn to
12 amp if connected through P5, or 4 amp if referenced to the
TNV supply by the F2.
Since no protection against over current or short circuit
conditions is provided on the UIO outputs, it is the
responsibility of the user to ensure that adequate protection is
provided within the external interface.
Jumpers JMP35 and JMP36 are zero ohm links. They are used ONLY in the event
of the card being used in a subrack having a single upper backplane. Such an
installation will void the SELV-TNV isolation.
Jumpers JMP37 and JMP38 are not used.
Jumpers JMP3 to JMP18 are associated with the 16 input channels. They allow one
input leg to be extended out onto the front-plane connector P2. This is done by
either strapping between pins 2-3 or by strapping between pins 1-2 connected to the
common input bus (INCOM).
Jumpers JMP19 to JMP34 are associated with the 16 output channels. They allow
one output to be extended out onto the front-plane connector P2. This is done by
either strapping between pins 2-3 or by strapping between 1-2 connected to the
common output bus (OUTCOM).
Jumper JMP2 extends the common input bus (INCOM) to either pin 1 or 3 on the
front-plane connector P5 by strapping pins 1-2, or referencing JMP2 to -VE_BAT
by strapping pins 2-3.
Jumpers JMP1 A, B, C, D, E, and F extend the common output bus (OUTCOM) to
either pins 2 and 4 on front-plane connector P5 by strapping pins 1-2, or references
265
Acom Card Reference
it to +VE_BAT by strapping pins 2-3. These jumpers are individually rated at 2

amp, and six are fitted to provide a 12-amp current rating when connector P5 is
used as the output common connection. These jumpers should be considered
collectively as one jumper; therefore, strapping should be identical on all six. Note
that if the common output bus is being referenced to +VE_BAT, a current limit of
four amps applies.
Figure 191 and Figure 192 summarize the various jumper options for input and output
strapping respectively.
Table 191: Input Channel Jumper Options
OPTION
JUMPER
JMP3
JMP4
JMP5
JMP6
JMP7
JMP8
JMP9
JMP10
JMP11
JMP12
JMP13
JMP14
JMP15
JMP16
JMP17
JMP18
JMP2
266
FUNCTION
Ch 1 Input
Ch 2 Input
Ch 3 Input
Ch 4 Input
Ch 5 Input
Ch 6 Input
Ch 7 Input
Ch 8 Input
Ch 9 Input
Ch 10 Input
Ch 11 Input
Ch 12 Input
Ch 13 Input
Ch 14 Input
Ch 15 Input
Ch 16 Input
Common Input Bus
(INCOM)
Independent
Inputs (Default)
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
2-3
1-2
Connection to Common Input Bus (INCOM)

To Pins 1and3 of P5
To -VE_BAT
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
2-3
025-9574E
Table 192: Output Channel Jumper Options

OPTION
JUMPER
FUNCTION
Independent
Outputs (Default)
Connection to Common Output Bus

(OUTCOM)
To Pins 2and4 of
P5
To +VE_BAT
JMP19
Ch 1 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP20
Ch 2 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP21
Ch 3 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP22
Ch 4 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP23
Ch 5 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP24
Ch 6 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP25
Ch 7 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP26
Ch 8 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP27
Ch 9 Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP28
Ch10Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP29
Ch11Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP30
Ch12Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP31
Ch13Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP32
Ch14Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP33
Ch15Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP34
Ch16Output
2-3
1-2
1-2
JMP1A
Common
1-2
1-2
2-3
JMP1B
Output
1-2
1-2
2-3
JMP1C
Bus
1-2
1-2
2-3
JMP1D
(OUTCOM)
1-2
1-2
2-3
JMP1E
1-2
1-2
2-3
JMP1F
1-2
1-2
2-3
Connector Detail
The UIO has two backplane connectors. P1 is the upper connector and carries all of the
data signals and SELV power rails. P3 is the lower connector and provides the isolated
TNV battery voltage.
Upper Backplane Connector P1
Power Rails
IOM-2 Bus
:GND, +5V
:DU1'
:Data Up (to MCU)
:DD1'
:Data Down (from MCU)
:DCLK'
:Data Clock
:FSC'
:Frame Sync Clock
267
Acom Card Reference
HDLC Bus
:CTX'
:CRX'
:SCLK'
:SYPQ'
Slot Decoding :SLOT 0'
:SLOT 1'
:SLOT 2'
:SLOT 3'
System Control :RESET'
:HDLC Link
:HDLC Link
:Data Clock for 2Mbps and HDLC Bus
:Frame Sync for 2Mbps and HDLC Bus
Lower Backplane Connector P3

+VE_BAT
-VE_BAT
TNV Battery Voltage
Connector P2
268
Channel
Dir
FunctioN
Pin
Pin
Function
Dir
Channel
IN
INA1
32a
32c
INC1
IN
IN
INA2
31a
31c
INC2
IN
IN
INA3
30a
30c
INC3
IN
IN
INA4
29a
29c
INC4
IN
IN
INA5
28a
28c
INC5
IN
IN
INA6
27a
27c
INC6
IN
IN
INA7
26a
26c
INC7
IN
IN
INA8
25a
25c
INC8
IN
IN
INA9
24a
24c
INC9
IN
10
IN
INA10
23a
23c
INC10
IN
10
11
IN
INA11
22a
22c
INC11
IN
11
12
IN
INA12
21a
21c
INC12
IN
12
13
IN
INA13
20a
20c
INC13
IN
13
14
IN
INA14
19a
19c
INC14
IN
14
15
IN
INA15
18a
18c
INC15
IN
15
16
IN
INA16
17a
17c
INC16
IN
16
OUT
OUTA1
16a
16c
OUTC1
OUT
OUT
OUTA2
15a
15c
OUTC2
OUT
OUT
OUTA3
14a
14c
OUTC3
OUT
OUT
OUTA4
13a
13c
OUTC4
OUT
OUT
OUTA5
12a
12c
OUTC5
OUT
OUT
OUTA6
11a
11c
OUTC6
OUT
OUT
OUTA7
10a
10c
OUTC7
OUT
OUT
OUTA8
9a
9c
OUTC8
OUT
8
025-9574E
Channel
Dir
FunctioN
Pin
Pin
Function
Dir
Channel
OUT
OUTA9
8a
8c
OUTC9
OUT
10
OUT
OUTA10
7a
7c
OUTC10
OUT
10
11
OUT
OUTA11
6a
6c
OUTC11
OUT
11
12
OUT
OUTA12
5a
5c
OUTC12
OUT
12
13
OUT
OUTA13
4a
4c
OUTC13
OUT
13
14
OUT
OUTA14
3a
3c
OUTC14
OUT
14
15
OUT
OUTA15
2a
2c
OUTC15
OUT
15
16
OUT
OUTA16
1a
1c
OUTC16
OUT
16
Connector P5
1
INCOM
OUTCOM
INCOM
OUTCOM
UIO Installation
Card Placement
The UIO may be installed in Slots 1 through 11 of the Acom subrack. The card may be
inserted or removed while the subrack is in operation.
269
Acom Card Reference
UIO Example Configurations

Figure 93: Simplified Overview of UIO Input/Output Circuits
JMP1A - F
Pins 2 & 4
P5
JMP2
+VE_BAT
Pins 1 & 3
-VE_BAT
Input x - 16
INC1
INA1
JMP3 - 18
Common Input Bus

to JMP2
Output x - 16
OUTC1
OUTA1
3
JMP19 - 34
Common Output Bus

to JMP1A - F
UIO Inputs
The UIO input is triggered active when the Opto-isolator input diode on the UIO can draw
at least 1mA of current.
There are two sets of jumpers on the UIO card for the input. One will determine the
reference voltage for the input and the other jumpers will determine if each Opto-isolator
input is independent from the reference voltage.
270
025-9574E
The reference jumper is JMP2. In the default setting, it will use external reference, which
will be fed using pin 1 or 3 on P5 located on the front of the card. When JMP2 is in the
default setting, the jumper will be set toward the front of the card.
JMP3 though 18 determine if the input circuits will use the reference voltage or is an
independent circuit. The default setting is independent inputs (Setup A).
The table below shows the jumper settings and required input to activate the UIO input in
the four most common ways.
Table 193: Example UIO Input Configuration
Setup
A
B
C
D
Required Input
JMP2
JMP3 - 18
P5 Bias
At least +3Vdc/1mA
across INC1 / INA1
Dont care
Jumped 2-3 (Toward

front of card)
Dont care
Ground on INC1
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

front of card)
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

back of card)
At least
+3Vdc/1mA
At least +3Vdc/1mA on
INC1
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

front of card)
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

back of card)
Ground
Ground on INC1
Jumped 2-3 (Toward

rear of card)
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

back of card)
Dont care
*See Note 1
*JMP3 18 jumped across pins 2-3 uses no internal or external reference.

*JMP2 jumped across 1-2 uses P5 connector. Jumped 2-3 uses internal 48Vdc reference.
Note
This input can not be a positive voltage in the idle state. Since the
back plane voltage (-VE) is 48Vdc, any potential higher than 0V/
ground will activate the diode. The idle state should be 48Vdc
when using this jumper configuration and ground when active.
The UIO Input has an option to invert the logic if needed. This
would cause the UIO Input on Acom Console Software to display
inactive when the input is active and active when the input is
inactive. This software option could be enabled if the input
interface provides the UIO reverse logic. *See IMS Digital I/O
settings in Acom Software Installation and Configuration (P/N
025-9529).
Make sure that when an external voltage source is connected to P5
that its limited to 60VDC or less. This is the maximum voltage limit
for the Input circuit. The current draw also should not exceed
10mA. The minimum DC requirement for P5 is 3VDC at 1mA.
271
Acom Card Reference
Active input state for each setup:

Setup A:
INC1
+
_
INC1
Or
_
+
INA1
Setup B or D:
INA1
Setup C:
INC1
INC1
+
_
Don't care
INA1
Don't care
INA1
UIO Outputs
The UIO Outputs are relay contact closures that are normally open when inactive. The
output can be programmed to toggle or for momentary closure when the button is pressed
on the Acom Console Software screen. The output relays are also ganged DPDT relay
closures for redundancy to assure contact closure if a single relay contact closure should
fail.
There are two sets of jumpers on the UIO card for the output. One will determine the
reference voltage for the output and the other jumpers will determine if each output relay
is independent from the reference voltage.
The reference jumper are JMP1A F. In the default setting, the output will use external
reference, which will be fed using pin 2 or 4 on P5 located on the front of the card. When
JMP1A - F is in the default setting, the jumper will be set toward the front of the card.
JMP19 though 34 determine if the output circuits will use the reference voltage or is an
independent circuit just using the relay contacts. The default setting is independent outputs
(Setup A).
The table below shows the jumper settings and output state when active for the four most
common setups.
272
025-9574E
Table 194: Example UIO Output Configurations

Setup
Active Output
Dry relay contact
closure of
JMP1A - F
JMP19 - 34
P5 Bias
Dont care
Jumped 2-3 (Toward

front of card)
Dont care
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

front of card)
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

back of card)
Connect
desired
voltage
OUTC1 / OUTA1
P5 voltage on OUTC1
*See Note1
P5 ground on OUTC1
+48VDC on OUTC1
*See Note2
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

front of card)
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

back of card)
Ground/0v
Jumped 2-3 (Toward

rear of card)
Jumped 1-2 (Toward

back of card)
Dont care
*See Note1
*JMP19 34 jumped across pins 2-3 uses no internal or external reference.

*JMP1A - F jumped across 1-2 uses P5 connector. Jumped 2-3 uses internal +48Vdc reference.
Note
The P5 connector is rated to handle a maximum of 220 VDC / 250

VAC at 16 Amps when all 16 outputs are active or 1 amp per
output.
When using +VE_BAT (Pin 2 or 4 of MSU X1 front connector) for a
supply reference to the relay contact, the maximum current draw
can not exceed 4Amps when all 16 outputs are active or 250mA per
output. A negative voltage will be required on OUTC1 to flow any
current when using +VE_BAT.
The UIO Output has an option to invert the logic if needed. This
would cause the UIO Output relay to be active (closed) when the
output is idle and inactive (open) when the output is active. This
software option could be used if the output interface requires the
UIO output logic to be reversed. *See IMS Digital I/O settings in
Acom Software Installation and Configuration (P/N 025-9529).
Active output state for each setup:

Setup A:
OUTC1
OUTA1
273
Acom Card Reference
Setup B:
OUTC1
P5 Voltage
P5
Connect
desired
voltage
Don't care
OUTA1
Setup C:
OUTC1
P5
Don't care
OUTA1
Setup D:
OUTC1
+VE_BAT
+VE_BAT
(backplane)
(MSU X1 Pin 2 and 4 )
Don't care
OUTA1
UIO Alarm Generation

The failure or removal of a UIO card will generate a system configuration error. A
configuration alarm will activate.
Table 195: UIO Alarms
Event
Alarm Generated
No.
Alarm Type
UIO Card Failure
Urgent
UIO Card Removal
Urgent
Note
274
The UIO card does not generate any other system alarms.
025-9574E
UIO Technical Specifications

Table 196: Signaling Characteristics
Parameter
Specification
Channels Per Card Number of Inputs and Outputs
16 inputs / 16 outputs
Signaling In
Leads per Channel
Nominal input impedance
6 K
Minimum input voltage
3 VDC
Minimum input current
1mA
Maximum input voltage
60 VDC
Maximum input current
10 mA
Leads per channel
Maximum voltage
220 VDC / 125 VAC
Maximum current
2A
Signaling Out
Maximum switching power (resistive) 60 W

Parameter
Specification
0 to 60 C (32 to 140 F)
Storage Temperature
-10 to 70 C (14 to 158 F)
Humidity

Power Consumption
Idle
Specification
+5 V: 105 mA
- VE_BAT: 6 mA
Maximum
+5 V 180 mA
- VE_BAT:65 mA

Parameter
Specification
Height
233 mm
Width
220 mm
275
Acom Card Reference
276
025-9574E
Replacing Acom Cards and Devices
This chapter provides procedures for replacing failed Acom cards and devices. Generally,
you should only replace devices on the advice of Zetron technical support at http://
www.zetron.com.
Replacing Acom CCC Cards on page 278
Replacing COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards on page 279
Replacing DCU Cards on page 280
Replacing Acom Console Units on page 287
Replacing Acom Console Unit Daughter Cards on page 290
Replacing EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards on page 291
Replacing Jackbox 950-0474 on page 292
Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293
Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS on page 297
Replacing MSU Cards on page 301
Replacing RVA Cards on page 302
Replacing SMU Cards on page 303
Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI) on page 305
Replacing UIO Cards on page 306
277
Replacing Acom CCC Cards
STOP
Warning! Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions

when handling all cards.
The Changeover Control Card (CCC) signals the COV-V, COV-R, and COV-T relay cards
to switch from main to standby.
Note
These cards are HOT SWAPPABLE but removing the CCC will
remove power from the ChangeOver Subrack rack backplane and
the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V cards will default to the primary/main
(A) side of the system. Although these cards are hot swappable, it
is preferable to turn off the power when swapping out any cards in
the system.
Subrack programming is not required when replacing these cards.
Equipment Required
Small flat head screwdriver
To remove the CCC card:

1. When removing a CCC card, change the system over to the primary/main (A) side
of the system. This will assure that audio/data from the ALS to the demark will
remain active and available. From the primary/main ALS force control over to the
other ALS:
a. Launch IMS Terminal, and login.
b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, select Change Over, select the
Manual option and select the ALS NOT in control.
c. Verify that the icon in IMS turns blue for the other ALS.
d. Select the Automatic option and exit the Change Over menu.
2. Use a grounding wrist strap to prevent ESD damage to the equipment.
3. If you are replacing a CCC card, removing all connectors from the front of the
card. Make sure the cables are labeled. If they are not labeled, label them now so
they can be properly connected to the replacement card.
4. The DB9 connectors can be removed using the small flat head screwdriver. The
orange weidmuller plug can be pulled out if there are wires connected to them. The
power plugs can be removed by squeezing the locking latch on the right side of the
plug. It may be easier to pull the CCC card out partially to get a good grasp on the
connector/latch to remove the plugs.
5. Flip the top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane. Slide card out
slowly and carefully.
6. Once all connectors have been removed, remove the CCC card.
278
025-9574E
Replacing COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards
7. Place the old card in the ESB bag.
To install the replacement CCC card:

3. Align the card with the card guides at the top, then bottom of the slot.
4. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the rack.
5. Press the card into the rear connector using two hands on the front of the card.
6. Connect the cables to the connectors on the front of the card.
7. The LEDs on the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V card should indicate that they are
active on the primary/main (A) side.
8. Change the system over to the backup/standby (B) ALS and verify that audio/data
is passed and the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V indicate they are switched over to
backup/standby (B).
9. After you are satisfied that the Backup/Standby (B) rack is functional, change
system back over to the Primary/Main (A) rack for normal operation.
Replacing COV-T, COV-R, and COV-V Cards
STOP

The COV-T card is fitted with relays that can switch 6 coaxial SMB connections between
the main and standby subracks. This card is hot-swappable.
The COV-V and COV-R cards is fitted with relays that can switch 50 conductors (25 pairs)
between the main and standby subracks. There is a common connector on the rear of the
card for the line interfaces and 2 connections on the front for the main and standby
subracks. This card is hot-swappable.
Note
Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable to turn off

the power when swapping out any cards in the system.
To remove the COV-T, COV-R, or COV-V card:

1. When removing a COV-T/COV-R/COV-V card, any line resources using the card
will not be able to get audio/data to the outside world/demark. The ALSs will be
transparent to this and will not know but the operators should be aware not to use
279
the line resources associated to the card because they will not be available when
the card is removed.
3. Ensure the connectors are labeled so they can be reconnected in the correct order.
4. Carefully disconnect the connectors six SMB coax connectors (COV-T) or two
EURO96 connectors (COV-V) from the front of the card by squeezing at the top
and bottom of the connector while pulling straight out. For COV-R cards, you may
have to loosen a screw at the top of the two RJ-21 connectors first.
5. Flip top lever on card upward to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide
card out slowly and carefully.
6. Place card in ESD bag.
To install the replacement COV card:

4. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the rack.
6. Connect the six SMB coax connectors (COV-T), two EURO96 connectors (COVV), or two RJ-45 connectors (COV-R) to the front of the card.
7. The LEDs on the COV card should indicate that the card is active.
8. Perform some tests on the primary/main (A) side and backup/standby (B) side to
make sure both sides are functional.
Replacing DCU Cards
STOP

The DCU card performs audio and data switching for two DS3 (T3) links. This card holds
the configuration for the ADS subrack and controls all rack messaging.
Note
The DCU card is NOT hot-swappable.
Equipment Required
Zetron PC to Acom Console Unit cable: 709-7615-xxx (xxx = cable length)
PC/Laptop equipped with Windows, a terminal program capable of serial
communication, and a DB9 RS232 Serial Com Port
280
025-9574E
Replacing DCU Cards
IMS ADS software (installation setup for this software is located on the Acom
Install CD)
WinZIP or other file compression utility (this may be required if the firmware file is
not in .ZIP format)
The network address of the ADS housing the DCU to be replaced
Replacing a DCU card
To save the DCU configuration:

1. If this is a standalone ADS, skip to Step 2. If this ADS is part of a redundant setup
with two or more ADSs, then continue with the following sub-steps:
a. In order to successfully remove a DCU card with little disturbance to the
system, ensure that there are no E1 links resources active between the ADS
and an ALS. This can be verified by viewing the second row of green LEDs on
each MCU4 card in the ADS (LEDs A2 and B2 in Figure 94).
Figure 94: LED Indicators on an MCU4 Card
A B
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Spare
Link 2 LOS
b. If these LEDs are NOT solid green, there is no active E1 link on this ADS and
you can skip to Step 2.
c. If either of these two LEDs ARE lit solid green, there is a link from this ADS
to either a Acom Console Unit (ACU) or an ALS. To determine which, consult
your systems network diagram or follow the cables.
If the link is to a Acom Console Unit (ACU), you can skip to Step 2.
If the link is to an ALS, you must first ensure all ALS E1 links are switched
active to another ADS. See Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293
for instructions describing how to safely switch an ALS to its redundant

clone.
2. Connect the 709-7615-xxx cable from the PC to the left RJ45 connector on the
bottom of the DCU card.
3. Start the IMS ADS program.
If you do not have IMS ADS loaded on your PC, install it from the Acom Install
CD.
4. Select the Communications menu, click Settings, and verify that the baud rate is
38400 and the Com Port matches the one being used on the PC. Click OK to save
settings.
281
5. Select the Communications menu and click Connect. When prompted for the
Network address, enter the ADS Network address and click OK.
(The network address is typically on a sticker on the ADS and also can be
found in the As-Built documents for your particular system).
Note
Make note of the Network address because it will be needed when

installing the replacement card.
6. When prompted with the password dialog, click the Default button and it should
allow access to the ADS.
7. Access the File menu and select Save to Disk. When prompted for the
configuration file name, use a descriptive file name. For example: ADS<network
address>.bin
Note
A Progress Meter window will appear when saving the file to disk. It
may take up to 30 seconds to save the file. When the file save is
complete, the Progress Meter window will disappear.
8. Once the file has been saved, select the Communications menu and select
Disconnect.
Note
The DCU card holds the configuration for the ADS.
9. Close the IMS ADS program.
To record the firmware version:

1. Open a terminal program capable of serial communication.
2. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the DCU. The COM
port should be configured for the following settings:
Bits per second = 38400 (default for an DCU)
Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = None
3. Press Esc on your keyboard until you see a Password: prompt. It should only
take three presses. If you do not get the Password: prompt, check the COM port
and its settings.
4. When the Password prompt appears, type 8564888 and press Enter.
5. A menu should appear with some selections. Press 1, then Enter.
6. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter. Record the results for Release and
Library.
7. To exit debug mode, press Esc, then X.
282
025-9574E
Replacing DCU Cards
To remove the failed DCU:

STOP
Warning! The DCU card is NOT hot-swappable. Power down the ADS
before removing the DCU card.
1. Turn off power to the ADS by switching the MSU power switch off (up).
2. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the ADS rack.
Tip
If the cables are not labeled, label them now so you know where to
connect them on the replacement card.
3. Disconnect the RJ45, BNC coax, and other connections from the front of the card.
4. Use the card removal handle at the top of the card to slide the card forward.
5. Remove the card and place it in an ESD bag.
To install and update the new DCU:

STOP
Warning! The new DCU must be the same revision as the one you are
replacing.
Note
This procedure requires a terminal program capable of serial

communication and file transfers using the 1K xmodem protocol. If
this is not available, see Updating the DCU firmware (FTP
alternative method): on page 285.
1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the rack.

4. Slide the card into the subrack and press the card into the rear connector using both
hands on the front of the card.
5. Apply power to the subrack by turning on (down) the MSU card and verify LED
activity.
6. It is necessary to make sure the DCU card installed has the same version of
the DCU card removed. Verify firmware version:
a. Determine the firmware version of the new card (see To record the firmware
version: on page 282) and compare with the version of the old card.
b. If the DCU firmware is the same, skip to To restore ADS configuration on page
286. If the firmware versions are different, continue:
7. Before you proceed with updating the firmware, make sure you have a copy of the
Ds3<version>.zip firmware file. If you do not have this file, call Zetron (see http://
www.zetron.com).
8. Open the terminal program in Windows.
283
9. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the DCU. The COM
Bits per second = 38400 (default for a DCU)
Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = None
and its settings.
11. When the Password prompt appears, enter 8564888 and press Enter.
12. A menu should appear with some selections. Press 1, then Enter.
13. At the LR> prompt, type download. This causes the DCU to expect and wait for a
file transfer.
14. Using your terminal program, send the zipped firmware file using the 1K xmodem
protocol.
STOP
Warning! Choosing the incorrect file or file transfer protocol may result
in a dead ACU. The only way to recover a dead ACU is to send
it to Zetron for repair.
Note
The DCU supports the zip file compression format. After the zip file
has been transferred, the DCU will CRC check the zip file, unzip it,
and update to flash.
15. After the file has been transferred, the DCU will flash the file to memory. This will
take approximately 60 seconds. Once the firmware has been flashed, the DCU will
return to the prompt.
16. Press Enter, then type RESET /Y to reset the DCU/ADS. In about 120 seconds,
the DCU should come online.
17. After the DCU is online, check the firmware version to verify that the uploaded
firmware is now active (see To record the firmware version: on page 282).
Note
The DCU holds two copies of the firmware images, and both
images should be updated. The first time you send a firmware
update, the DCU is using one firmware image while overwriting the
other with your update. After the reset in Step 16, the DCU
automatically uses the newer of the two firmware images, leaving
the older firmware image ready for an update.
18. Repeat the firmware update to load the new firmware version into the other
firmware image.
284
025-9574E
Replacing DCU Cards
Updating the DCU firmware (FTP alternative method):

Use the following procedure to update the firmware on one DCU, or the first of many
DCUs.
1. Place the DCU firmware file in a location on the IMS console computer where you
can easily find it and FTP it to the DCU. The firmware file must be unzipped and it
must be named dcu.binary.
STOP
Warning! Sending a ZIP file or using the wrong file may result in an
inoperable DCU.
2. At a Windows Command Prompt, navigate to the location of the firmware file.

3. Use the following command to FTP to the DCU where [IP Address] is the IP
address of the DCU:
> FTP [IP Address]
4. Press Enter for the user name (none).

5. Type the password (default is 8564888).
6. Select binary mode:
FTP> binary
STOP
Warning! Failure to use binary mode will cause FTP to send a corrupt file
to the DCUs firmware. This may result in an inoperable DCU.
7. Upload the firmware file:

FTP> put dcu.binary
(This may take a few minutes.)

8. When the FTP prompt returns, check the directory for file errors:
FTP> dir
If there are file errors in the directory, the firmware update has failed. Press the
reset button on the DCU.
9. Exit FTP.
FTP> quit
10. Press the reset button on the DCU.

11. The resetting DCU will put on an LED lightshow while booting up. The status
LEDs will return to normal in a minute or two.
To update the firmware for all networked DCUs:

If you havent already, use the previous procedure to update the firmware on the first
DCU. The following procedure copies the updated firmware from that first DCU to all
other networked DCUs.
1. At a Windows Command Prompt, Telnet to the DCU with the updated firmware:
285
> telnet [IP Address]
where [IP Address] is the IP address of the DCU.

2. Press Enter for the user name (none).
3. Type the password (default is 8564888) and press Enter. You should have an LR>
prompt.
4. Use the following two commands to check the version of this DCU and all other
networked DCUs:
LR> ver
LR> rver
5. The first DCU should have a newer version than the other networked DCUs.
6. Update the networked DCUs:
LR> rdown /M
7. As each DCU is being updated, you should see the following message where XXX
is the DCU address and YY is the slot holding the DCU.
Rack Address XXX in slot YY is burning.
After several minutes of updating DCU firmware, the LR> prompt returns. This is
an indication that the update process is complete.
8. Each DCU will reboot itself after the firmware update is complete.
To restore ADS configuration

1. Launch IMS ADS on the PC. Select Communications then Connect. Enter the
network address of 1 when prompted, click OK.
If using a network address of 1 does not allow you access to the MCU, try using 0
or 255.
2. At password screen click default.
3. Click File, Load From Disk, and select the file name that was saved earlier (see To
save the DCU configuration: on page 281).
4. Click File, Update to rack.
5. When prompted for the network address, use the address that provided access in
Step 1.
6. When prompted for the Configuration name, use the one supplied, which should be
the name of the DCU that was replaced.
7. Access the Configure menu and select Set Address. Enter the Network Address
recorded earlier in To save the DCU configuration: on page 281.
8. Click File, Update to rack.
9. To finalize the changes, click Tools, then Reset Rack from the IMS menu.
10. When the DCU is back up and running (top right LED on DCU card is blinking
slowly) proceed to the following section.
To reconnect the cables

286
025-9574E
Replacing Acom Console Units
2. Re-connect the cables to the front of the card.

3. Turn power on the ADS.
4. Wait 120 seconds for the ADS to come on line.
5. Make ALSs connected to this DCU/ADS active by performing an ALS changeover
described in Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293.
6. Test some line resources to verify that the system resources are functional on this
DCU/ADS.

The Acom Console Unit provides the console data and voice interfaces for the position.
The unit holds up to four expansion modules.
To remove an Acom Console Unit:

1. Back up the unit's configuration to disk using IMS. (See Acom Software
Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.) Note the Acom Console Units
network address displayed in the title bar of IMS ACU.
2. Make a note of the unit's firmware version; the new Acom Console Unit must be
the same revision. Using IMS ACU, access the ACU and hover the mouse over the
Dual E1 card and the firmware version will appear in the status bar on the bottom
of the IMS ACU program.
3. Turn off power to the Acom Console Unit using the switch on the rear of the unit.
4. Disconnect AC power from the rear of the unit.
5. Disconnect all serial connections from the data ports, noting their connection and
marking if needed.
6. Disconnect all voice connections from the OAM or 4-Wire E&M Modules.
7. Disconnect the Digital Input and Digital Output connectors if used.
8. Remove the ground lead from the Acom Console Unit.
9. Remove the E1 cables from the Dual E1 card.
10. With all leads disconnected, unscrew the unit from the underside of the desk.
287
To install a Acom Console Unit/ACU:

Note
If a firmware update is needed, then a zipped ACU firmware update

file is required for this procedure. This file is typically supplied via
email from Zetron technical support or located on the Acom Install
CD. The supplied file may be titled ACU_101.zip or similar.
Note
This procedure requires a terminal program capable of serial

communication and file transfers using the 1K xmodem protocol.
1. If the ACU is not being mounted under the desk, skip to Step 5.
2. Install any required modules in the ACU. See Replacing Acom Console Unit
Daughter Cards on page 290.
3. Install the under desk mounting option.
4. Screw the ACU to the under side of the work surface using self-tapping screws.
5. Make all serial connections to the data ports. The ACS serial connection often uses
ACU COM1.
6. Make all voice connections to the OAM or 4-Wire E&M Modules. Refer to the
position layout drawing for your system for specific details on position
connections.
Jackbox or TRHI
Speakers
PC Tones
7. Connect any digital I/Os. This may include foot switches, TRHI, or active
conversation lamps.
8. Connect the ground lead to the ground post near the power connection.
9. Connect the AC power cable and turn on the ACU using the power switch on the
rear of the unit.
10. Access the ACU using IMS ACU. When prompted for the network address, try
using 2, 0, or 255.
11. Hover the mouse over the Dual E1 card and note the firmware version. If the
firmware version is NOT the same as the ACU being replaced, continue to the next
step. Otherwise, skip to Step 20.
12. Move the ACS cable currently plugged in the ACU Data Port COM1 to COM4.
13. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the ACU. The COM
Bits per second = 38400 (default for a ACU)
Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = None
288
025-9574E
and its settings.
15. When the Password prompt appears, type 8564888 and press Enter.
16. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter and record the current version.
protocol.
STOP
in a dead ACU. The only way to recover a dead ACU is to send
it to Zetron for repair.
Note
The ACU supports the zip file compression format. After the zip file
has been transferred, the ACU will CRC check the zip file, unzip it,
and update to flash. It is recommended that you keep the firmware
update in the zip file and do not unzip it before transferring to the
ACU. This will minimize the transfer time and protect the bin file
with the CRC checking provided by the zip format.
18. After the firmware has been uploaded, the ACU will reset itself. Once it appears
that the ACU is operating again, press Esc three times to get another Password
prompt. Enter 8564888 and type ver to verify that the ACU now has the current
version.
If the version is correct, type Exit to end the debug session.
19. Move the ACS cable currently plugged in the ACU Data Port COM4 to COM1.
20. Using IMS ACU, access the File menu and select Load from disk.
Locate the save file and load it.
21. From the File menu, select Update to NVRAM.
When prompted for the Network address, try 2, 0, or 255.
When prompted for the Configuration name, use the one supplied.
22. Access the Configure menu and select Network Address.
23. Enter the appropriate Network Address recorded earlier.
24. Access the File menu and select Update to NVRAM.
25. Power down the ACU and connect the E1 cables to the Dual E1 card.
26. Power on the ACU and verify that it is online and ACS is operational.
289
Replacing Acom Console Unit Daughter Cards

The Acom Console Unit daughter cards are available in several varieties:
Dual E1 Module
Provides multiple E1 connections for installing the position

in an E1 loop. The Dual E1 must be installed in slot 0
(farthest away from data ports).
Dual 4-Wire
E&M Module
Provides two 4-wire E&M interfaces for IRR, desk mic,

speakers or other purposes.
Operator's Audio
Module (OAM)
Provides voice and data ports for speakers, handsets, mics,

and more.
DCOAM
Provides voice, logging, foot switch, PC Tones, and handset

ports.
Removal:
STOP

1. Ground yourself to the Acom Console Unit using an ESD wrist strap.
2. Remove the Acom Console Unit (see Replacing Acom Console Units on page
287).
3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover on the Acom Console Unit using a
medium Phillips screwdriver.
4. Remove the Allen screws that secure the cover plate on the rear of the module.
5. Remove the two Phillips screws that secure the card inside the Acom Console
Unit.
6. Gently pull the card toward the rear of the Acom Console Unit to unseat the
connector.
7. Lift the module out over the guide posts and place it in an ESD bag.
8. Secure the top cover of the Acom Console Unit using the existing screws.
Installation:
1. Ground yourself to the Acom Console Unit using an ESD wrist strap.
2. Follow the instructions for removing the Acom Console Unit.
3. Remove the screws that secure the top cover on the Acom Console Unit using a
medium Phillips screwdriver.
4. If there is a cover plate at the intended location for the module, remove the Allen
screws that secure the cover plate and set the plate aside.
5. Set the module into the Acom Console Unit slot so it fits over the guide posts and
gently slide it into the connector.
6. Secure the card inside the Acom Console Unit with two provided Phillips screws.
290
025-9574E
Replacing EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards
7. Attach the new cover plate using the existing Allen screws.
8. Secure the top cover of the Acom Console Unit using the existing screws.
9. Install the Acom Console Unit (see Replacing Acom Console Units on page 287).
Replacing EIE, TIE, or EMU Cards
STOP

The EIE card provides six independent ring in/loop out channels that interface to CO
provided POTS circuits. This card is hot-swappable.
The TIE card provides six independent ring out/loop in channels that interface to local
phones. This card is hot-swappable.
The EMU card provides six independent 4-wire E&M channels that interface to radios or
other 4-wire circuits. This card is hot-swappable.
Note
Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable to turn off

the power when swapping out any cards in the system.
To remove the old card:

1. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup and it is currently in control, force
control over to the other ALS:
a. Launch IMS Terminal, and login.
2. Power down the subrack by setting the toggle switch on the MSU card to the UP
position.
4. Carefully disconnect the EURO96 connectors from the front of the card by
squeezing at the top and bottom of the connector while pulling straight out.
291
To install the replacement card:

3. For an EIE card with part numbers 950-0522 or 950-0637, check jumpers JP6, JP8,
and JP9. These jumpers need to be set to Dual or Single (as printed on the
board itself), depending on whether the subrack has dual or single backplanes. EIE
cards with part number 950-0491 do not have jumpers for this purpose and are
compatible with dual backplanes only.
Note
For a 5v-12v version of the EMU card (P/N 950-0841), jumpers J1

through J12 must always be in the 2-3 position.
5. Slowly and carefully slide the card into the subrack.
7. Connect the EURO96 connectors to the front of the card.
8. Apply power to the subrack.
9. Verify in IMS Terminal that the new card appears and the slot box for it is green.
10. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control back to this ALS:
a. From the Tools menu in IMS Terminal, select Change Over.
b. Select the Manual option and select this ALS.
c. Verify the ALS icon in IMS turns light blue to show that this ALS is in control.
d. Once this ALS has taken control, select the Automatic option and exit the
Change Over menu.
11. Test the new card. Verify that the run LED flashes.
Replacing Jackbox 950-0474

The jackbox is the headset or handset interface for the Acom Console Unit.
Removal:
1. Remove the jackbox audio connection from OAM RJ45 port on the rear of the
Acom Console Unit.
2. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the cover plate of the jackbox.
3. Remove the jackbox by unscrewing it from its mounted location.
Installation:
1. Using a flat head screwdriver, remove the cover plate of the jackbox.
292
025-9574E
Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS
2. Secure the jackbox to the underside of the work surface using self-tapping screws.
Mount the jackbox far enough away from the front edge of the work surface to
prevent the handset connector from protruding.
3. Install the jackbox cover plate using the existing flat head screws.
4. Route the audio connection to the OAM module of the Acom Console Unit and
connect it to one of the HS ports (HS1/HS2).

This procedure is only for an MCU3 or MCU4 in an ALS. For an MCU4 in an ADS, see
Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS on page 297.
If an MCU card is installed in slot 0 of an ALS, it is considered the primary MCU; it holds
the configuration for the subrack and controls all rack messaging.
STOP
Warning! The Primary MCU is NOT hot-swappable. Only secondary MCU

cards are hot-swappable.
Caution!
Note
The new MCU must be the same revision as the one you
removed.
It is preferred that the power be turned off when swapping out any
cards in the system.
Required Equipment
Straight-through RS232 serial cable
(Zetron cable part number 709-7345)
Laptop/PC with Windows or better and a serial port.
IMS Program. (Typically installed from the Acom install disk)
Winzip or other unzipping utility if installing using an emailed zip file.
To backup the MCU configuration:

1. Connect the laptops serial com port to port 1 of the MCU card. (Port 1 of the MCU
card is the top 9-pin serial connector on the front of the MCU card, labeled X17 on
the PCB.)
2. Launch IMS ALS on the laptop.
3. From the main menu, select Communications then Connect.
293
4. When prompted, enter the Network Address of the subrack, and click OK. (The
network address is typically on a sticker on the subrack and can also be found in
the as-built documents for your system.)
5. At the password screen click the default button.
6. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup, force control to the other ALS:
b. Select the Manual option and select the other ALS.
c. Verify the ALS icon in IMS turns light blue to show that the other ALS is in
control.
d. Once the other ALS has taken control, select the Automatic option and exit
the Change Over menu.
7. Once connected choose File then Save to Disk. Save the file with a descriptive
name, for example:
ADS<network address>.cfg
Note
A Progress Meter window will appear when saving the file to disk. It
can take several minutes to completely save the file. When the file
save is complete, the Progress Meter window will disappear.
8. Choose Configure then Subrack Address write down the subrack address. Also
note if this is the Main or Standby ALS.
9. Select the Communications menu then Disconnect to disconnect from the ALS.
To record the current firmware version:

2. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the MCU. The COM
Bits per second = 38400 (default for an MCU)
Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = None
and its settings.
4. When the Password prompt appears, type the password (default 8564888) and
press Enter.
5. Once logged in, type ver and press Enter.
6. Record the results.
294
025-9574E
To remove the old MCU card:

1. Power down the subrack by setting the toggle switch on the MSU card to the up
position.
3. If the cables are not labeled, label them now so you know where to plug them in on
the new card.
4. Disconnect all cables from front of MCU card.
For SMB connections, grab them at the elbow with the thumb and index finger,
and pull gently straight out.
If a net clock connection exists, make a note of the port it is connected to before
removing it.
5. Flip the top lever on MCU card to dislodge it from the backplane connector. Slide
the card out slowly and carefully.
To install the new MCU card:

Do NOT connect the SMB cables to the new MCU at this time.
6. Apply power to the subrack and verify that the top right green LED is blinking
slowly approximately once per second. This shows that the MCU up and running.
To verify or upgrade the firmware of the card:

Note
The sub rack will not function while updating the firmware on a
Primary MCU card.
Requirements:
A zipped MCU3 firmware update file. This is typically supplied via email
from zetron technical support or located on the Acom Install CD. The supplied
file may be titled ADS_100.zip or similar.
Bits per second = 38400 (default for an MCU)
Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
295
Flow Control = None

and its settings.
4. When the Password prompt appears, type the password (default 8564888) and
press Enter.
Note
If the firmware version is the same as recorded in To backup the

MCU configuration: on page 293, then skip the remaining steps in
this procedure and proceed to the next procedure.
6. At the prompt, type Download and press Enter. This command will cause the
MCU to prompt for a Xmodem transfer by sending a C character repeatedly.
protocol.
STOP
in a dead MCU card. The only way to recover a dead MCU card
is to send it to Zetron for repair.
Note
The MCU supports the zip file compression format. After the zip file
has been transferred, the MCU will CRC check the zip file, unzip it,
and update to flash. It is recommended that you keep the firmware
update in the zip file and do not unzip it before transferring to the
MCU. This will minimize the transfer time and protect the bin file
with the CRC checking provided by the zip format.
8. After the MCU has reset itself and appears to be operating again, press Esc three
times to get another Password prompt.
9. Type ver and note the results.
To restore the ALS configuration:

(only if replacing MCU in slot 0)
1. On the laptop, launch IMS ALS.

2. Select Communications then Connect.
3. Enter the network address of 1 when prompted, and click OK.
If using a network address of 1 does not allow you access to the MCU, try using 0
or 255.
4. At the password screen, click default.
5. Click File, then Load From Disk and choose the file name that was saved in To
backup the MCU configuration: on page 293.
6. Select File, then Update To Rack to transfer the new file to the ALS.
296
025-9574E
Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS
7. When prompted for the network address, use the one that worked correctly in
Step 3.
8. When prompted for the configuration name, use the one supplied, which should be
the name of the MCU that was replaced.
9. Click Tools, then Reset Rack from the IMS menu to finalize the changes.
10. Click File, Update To Rack.
11. When the rack is back up and running (top right LED on MCU card is blinking
slowly), reconnect and verify the network and subrack addresses.
12. Select Configure, then Subrack Address.
Set the subrack address to the value recorded in To backup the MCU configuration:
on page 293, then click Save.
13. Click Configure, then Network Address.
Set the network address to the same value recorded in To backup the MCU
configuration: on page 293, then click Save.
14. Power down the rack and reconnect the SMB cables to the MCU.
15. Power up the rack.
Within a minute or two, the rack should be operating normally. Only the top right
green LED on the MCU should be flashing and on if everything is normal.
To switch back to this rack and test:

1. Select Tools, then Change over.
2. Set Mode to manual.
3. Under Select Active Device click the button for the offline rack. This should
force a cut over back to this ALS.
4. Set Mode back to Automatic.
5. Go to the Acom Console PC. Verify in IMS ALS that this subrack is now blue
(online-OK) and the other rack is green (offline-OK)

This procedure is only for an MCU4 in an ADS. For an MCU3 or MCU4 in an ALS, see
Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293.
Required Equipment
Zetron straight through cable part number 709-7345
PC/Laptop equipped with Windows or better and an RS232 Serial Com Port
IMS ADS software
(installation for this software is located on the Acom Install CD)
297
WinZIP or other file compression utility

(this may be required if the firmware file is not in .ZIP format)
To verify MCU4/ADS is not active:

1. If this is a standalone ADS, skip to the next procedure To record the
firmware version: on page 298.
If this ADS is part of a redundant setup with two or more ADSs, then continue.
2. Make sure no E1 links are active on the ADS. This can be verified by viewing the
second row of green LEDs (right below the top right flashing green LED) on each
MCU4 card in the ADS. For a diagram of MCU LEDs, see Figure 60 MCU4 Status
Indicators (When Used in an ADS) on page 187.
If any of these LEDs are lit solid, there is either a link to a Acom Console Unit/
ACU or an active link to an ALS. Consult the system Network Diagram or follow
the cables and make sure its NOT an active E1 link to an ALS.
If there are no active E1 links to an ALS, skip to the next procedure, To record the
firmware version: on page 298. If there are active links to an ALS, make sure that
all ALS E1 links are switched active to the other ADS:

a. At the IMS console, launch IMS Terminal, and login.
To record the firmware version:

Bits per second = 38400 (default for a MCU)
Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = None
and its settings.
5. A menu should appear with some selections. Enter 1 and press Enter.
7. Record the results for Release and Library.
298
025-9574E
8. Press the Esc key then press X to exit debug.

STOP
Warning! The new MCU4 must be the same revision as the one you are
replacing.
Note
Although the MCU4 card is hot-swappable, it is preferred that the

power be turned off when swapping out any cards in the system.
9. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the ADS rack.

STOP
Warning! If the cables are not labeled, label them so you know where to
connect them on the replacement card.
10. Disconnect the SMB connections from the front of the MCU4 card by grasping the
gold connectors and pulling on them. DO NOT pull on the cable itself or you may
damage the cable.
11. Disconnect the DB9 serial cable.
13. Remove the card and place in an ESD bag.
To install the MCU4:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap to the rack.
4. Slide the card into the subrack and press the card into the rear connector using both
hands on the front of the card.
5. Apply power to the subrack by turning on (down) the MSU card.
6. Verify LED activity.
To verify and update the firmware version:

1. It is necessary to make sure the MCU4 card installed has the same firmware
version of the MCU4 card removed.
2. Check the firmware version of the new card and compare it with the firmware
version you recorded for the old card (see To record the firmware version: on page
298).
3. If the MCU4 firmware is the same, skip to To reconnect the cables: on page 300.
4. Before you proceed, make sure you have a copy of the MCU4<version>.zip
firmware file. If you do not have this file, call Zetron.
299
Bits per second = 38400 (default for a MCU)

Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = None
and its settings.
9. A menu should appear with some selections. Enter 1 then press Enter.
10. At the MCUX> prompt, type download. The download process will begin.
protocol.
STOP
in a dead MCU4 card. The only way to recover a dead MCU4
card is to send it to Zetron for repair.
Note
The MCU4 supports the zip file compression format. After the zip
file has been transferred, the MCU4 will CRC check the zip file,
unzip it, and update to flash.
12. After the file has been transferred, the MCU4 will flash the file to memory then
reset. This will take about 60 seconds.
13. After the MCU4 is online, check the firmware version to verify that the uploaded
firmware is now active (see To verify and update the firmware version: on page
299).
To reconnect the cables:

2. Re-connect the cables to the front of the card.
3. Restore power to the ADS by switching the MSU power switch on (down).
4. Wait 120 seconds for the ADS to come on line.
5. Make ALSs connected to this MCU4/ADS active by performing a changeover
described in Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS on page 293.
6. Test some line resources to verify that the system resources are functional on this
MCU4/ADS.
300
025-9574E
Replacing MSU Cards
Replacing MSU Cards
Note
STOP
Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions when

handling all cards.
Warning! The MSU card is NOT hot-swappable.
To remove the old MSU card:

1. If this ALS is part of a Main-Standby setup and it is currently in control, force
position.
3. Remove power from the rack at the fuse or breaker panel.
5. Carefully disconnect the EURO96 connector from the front of the card by
6. Remove the weidmuller 48volt power connection from the front of the MSU by
pulling straight out.
Install replacement card:

1. Verify that power has been removed from the subrack at the fuse or breaker panel.
4. Review the jumpers on the old card and verify all jumpers are set the same on the
new card.
5. Place card old card in ESD bag.
6. Verify MSU power switch is in the UP position.
301
10. Connect the EURO96 connector and weidmuller power connector to the front of
the card.
11. Apply power to the rack using the fuse panel or circuit breaker.
12. Push the power switch DOWN on the MSU.
13. Verify in IMS Terminal that the ALS with the replaced MSU card appears and has
no Urgent Alarms.
b. Select the Manual option and select this ALS.
c. Verify the ALS icon in IMS turns light blue to show that this ALS is in control.
d. Once this ALS has taken control, select the Automatic option and exit the
Change Over menu.
15. Test the new card. Verify that the run LED flashes.
Replacing RVA Cards

The RVA card provides Acom with the capability of using recorded voice announcements.
The RVA card is hot-swappable. Recorded announcements are stored in non-volatile
memory, so recordings are retained even if the RVA card loses power. This also means you
can move the RVA card from one slot to another without losing the recordings.
STOP

To remove an RVA card:

1. If the ALS that contains the RVA card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force
b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, click Change Over, the Manual
option, and then select the ALS NOT in control.
2. In IMS, make a note of the cards firmware version; the new card must be the same
revision. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap attached to the rack.
3. If there is an audio device connected to the headset jack, remove the device.
5. Remove the card and place it in an ESD bag.
302
025-9574E
Replacing SMU Cards
To install an RVA card:

1. Ground yourself with an ESD wrist strap attached to the rack.
4. Slide the card into the subrack.
5. Press the card into the rear connector using both hands on the front of the card.
6. If applicable, reconnect the audio device to the headset jack.
7. Verify that the card can be seen in IMS and that the run LED flashes (see Recorded
Voice Announcement (RVA) Card on page 235).
8. Upgrade the unit's firmware if necessary (contact Zetron Technical Support).
9. If necessary, use IMS to download or record your voice announcements to RVA
card. (See Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)
Replacing SMU Cards
Caution!
Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions

The SMU card provides all signalling for the subrack (VOX, DTMF, TRC, AGC, ). It
may alternatively be used for VoIP radio interfaces such as OpenSky. This card is hotswappable.
Note
Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable that the

power be turned off when swapping out any cards.
No subrack programming is required when replacing these cards.
Required Equipment
Zetron SMU cable, part number 709-7592-xxx (xxx=cable length)
PC with Windows, serial com port, and terminal software capable of serial comm
To record the current Firmware version:

1. If the ALS that contains the SMU card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force
b. Double click the ALS. From the Tools menu, click Change Over, the Manual
option, and then select the ALS NOT in control.
303
2. Connect the SMU cable between the PC and the front connector on the SMU. The
connector on the SMU is keyed and can only fit properly one way.
4. Open a terminal connection using the COM port connected to the SMU. The COM
Bits per second = 38400 (default for a SMU)
Data bits = 8
Parity = None
Stop bits = 1
Flow Control = None
and its settings.
7. Once logged in type ver and press Enter, record the results.

1. If the ALS that contains the SMU card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force
To install the replacement card:

6. Verify in IMS Terminal that the ALS is reporting no Urgent Alarms.
304
025-9574E
Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI)
To verify or upgrade the firmware of the SMU:

STOP
Warning! The sub rack will not function properly while updating the SMU
firmware.
Requirements:
SMU update file. This is typically supplied via email from Zetron technical
support or located on the Acom Install CD. The supplied file may be titled
smu_141.raw or similar.
1. Open a terminal session as described in To record the current Firmware version:
on page 303.
2. Press Esc until you see a Password: prompt, it should only take three presses. If
you do not get the Password: prompt, check the COM port and its settings.
4. Once logged in type ver and press Enter, record the results.
Note
If firmware version in the new card is the same as the firmware

version recorded earlier in the old card, then the install has been
completed.
5. Type Download and press Enter. This command will cause the SMU to prompt
for a Xmodem transfer by sending a C character repeatedly.
protocol.
STOP
in a dead SMU card. The only way to recover a dead SMU card
is to send it to Zetron for repair.
7. Press Esc three times to get another Password prompt.

8. Type 8564888 and press Enter.
9. Type the ver command again and note the results.
Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces (TRHI)

The Telephone Radio Handset Interface (TRHI) provides a common point between a
phone and radio system to allow for a single headset to service both systems. It functions
as a jackbox and handset interface, but also as an audio amplifier and switching device.
305
Removal:
1. Disconnect the ground wire from the rear of the TRHI.
2. Disconnect power from the TRHI.
3. Disconnect the DB9 and Weidmuller connections from the rear of the TRHI.
4. Remove the side screws that hold the TRHI to the top cover and remove the unit
from under the desk. If you are not replacing this unit, remove the top cover as
well.
Installation:
1. Remove the top cover and set the jumpers as required. Refer to the previously
installed unit's settings or TRHI manual 025-9553.
2. Secure the TRHI top cover to the bottom of the writing surface using the supplied
screws. Mount the TRHI far enough away from the front edge of the work surface
to prevent the handset connector from protruding.
3. Attach the body of the interface to the top cover.
4. Connect the case ground, located on the rear panel, to the central earth ground.
5. Install cable 709-7629 or 709-7684 between the DB9 connector of the TRHI and
one of the HS ports of the OAM (HS1/HS2). (Cable 709-7629 draws power from
the Acom Console Unit and cable 709-7684 draws power from an AC/DC
transformer.)
6. Connect the lead labelled PTT to the Acom Console Units digital output pin 2.
7. Connect the lead labelled HSE to the Acom Console Units digital input pin 6.
8. Connect the 12V power source to the TRHI.
9. Perform level adjustments described in the TRHI manual (P/N 025-9553).
Replacing UIO Cards
Caution!
Note
Please exercise electro-static discharge (ESD) precautions

Although these cards are hot swappable, it is preferable that the

power be turned off when swapping out any cards in the system.

1. If the ALS that contains the UIO card is part of a Main-Standby setup, force
306
025-9574E
Replacing UIO Cards
position.
4. Carefully disconnect the EURO96 connector from the front of the card by
Install replacement card:

3. Review the jumpers on the old card and verify all jumpers are set the same on the
new card.
4. Place card old card in ESD bag.
8. Connect the EURO96 connector to the front of the card.
9. Apply power to the subrack.
10. Verify in IMS Terminal that the new card appears and that the slot box for it is
green.
c. Verify that the icon in IMS turns blue for this ALS.
12. Test some of the UIO input to make sure they are functional.
307
308
025-9574E
Changeover Control
This document explains the use of a Changeover Subrack to switch Acom radio or
telephone resources between redundant Acom Line Subracks (ALS).
Use of a main and standby subrack is supported to maximize Mean Time Between
Failures (MTBF). A failure in one rack will not result in a lost resource because a
duplicate resource is available in the standby subrack. If the currently selected ALS
triggers an alarm because of a major fault, the other ALS will lose confidence and demand
control of the lines from the changeover subrack.
Note
The main rack and standby rack should have the same hardware
and same configuration (except for addresses). See Cloning an ALS
on page 316.
309
Changeover Control
Changeover Hardware
The Acom changeover control system is primarily composed of a main, standby, and
changeover subrack. Each rack is equipped with cards to support the hot standby
application. The E1 links from the subrack to the ADS (Acom DS3 Switch) are not
switched, a combination of signaling lines between the racks determine which E1 link is
considered active to be presented to the system backbone.
The Acom Line Subrack (ALS)

An Acom Line Subrack consists of a Main Control Unit (MCU), a Main Supply Unit
(MSU), a subrack assembly, and line cards. Each redundant pair of ALSs in the
changeover system should be equipped and configured identically with all of the same
resources so switchover is seamless to the user.
An ALS will demand control when it loses confidence in the opposite subrack. By
monitoring the Watchdog (AI13) and Standby Fault (AI21) alarm outputs of the opposite
subrack, the MSU card can demand a switchover to take control by asserting the System
Select (AO11) output. By momentarily grounding this output, the MSU will signal the
Changeover Control Card (CCC) in the Changeover subrack that it wishes control of the
radio and phone lines. The CCC will command all COV-V, COV-R, and COV-T relay
cards to switch lines over to give the subrack control and will assert the System A Selected
or System B Selected outputs to tell the subracks which ALS now has control. This CCC
output is connected to the MSU System Selected input (AI11) and a parallel connection
is made to the ADS input.
MSU
The Main Supply Unit (MSU) serves many functions in an Acom system, system tone
generation, DC-DC conversion, and alarm inputs and outputs. The MSU has six input and
six output alarms. MSU input alarms are pulled high to 48 volts by the MSU cards
internal jumpers JP1-JP6. A ground on any of these inputs will cause the input to become
active. The output alarms of the MSU are opto-isolated common collector outputs that pull
to ground (+VV) when active.
System Selected and Select System (AO11/AI11)
The SYSSEL output (AO11) is grounded by the MSU card to signal the CCC card that it
wishes to take control. AI11 is then grounded by the CCC card to signal the MSU that it
has control. The subrack will take control when it sees its Standby Fault input go active or
its Watchdog Fault input go inactive. The subrack may additionally take control if the
local alarms clear and the opposite subrack still has either a Standby Fault or Watchdog
Fault.
310
025-9574E
Changeover Hardware
Standby Fault (AO21/AI21)

This is the primary health alarm of the subrack. It is used to signal the other subrack when
it has an urgent alarm. The output is programmable; it is useful to configure this alarm
identically to the Urgent Output alarm.
This input is expected to be normally inactive and if it becomes active a fault in the
standby rack is assumed. This signal is used in conjunction with the Watchdog Fault to
provide communication between main and standby subracks. If the Standby Fault input
goes active, the local subrack will take control of the lines.
Watchdog (AO13/AI13)
The Watchdog output (AO13) is in an active state under normal operation. There are two
alarms that are hard coded (fixed) to the Watchdog output alarm. Should the Primary
MCU card in the ALS go dead, or the MSU lose power, the Watchdog output will go
inactive to indicate it has failed. In addition to these two non-configurable triggers,
additional alarm inputs can be mapped to this MSU output to trigger a changeover (see
Alarms in Acom Software Installation and Configuration P/N 025-9529). It is common
to connect all operational alarms to the Standby Fault output and leave only the loss of
power and failure of a primary MCU to trigger the watchdog.
The Watchdog input (AI13) monitors the Watchdog output of the other sub rack. If this
input goes inactive the MSU will demand control by asserting the SYSSEL Output
(AO11).
Bad E1 (AO23/AI23)
The AI23 input is commonly used to detect a problem associated with the E1 link
connected to the rack. The ADS that services this subrack provide this signal if any of the
E1 links from the ALS to the switch fail. It provides a faster indication of a lost E1 than
waiting for a LOS, NOS, or RRA signal and will result in a quicker changeover between
subracks.
Changeover Subrack
A Changeover Subrack consists of a Changeover Control Card (CCC), a subrack assembly
without the lower backplane, and one or more COV-V/COV-R/COV-T cards. The lower
backplane of the Changeover Subrack is removed to allow for the connection of IDF
cables to the back of each changeover card (COV-V/COV-R/COV-T). Unlike an Acom
Line Subrack, the Changeover Subrack does not require an MCU or MSU card to
function.
In an Acom system, to minimize the number of resources affected by a problem, only two
ALSs should be connected to one Changeover subrack. The complexity involved in
switching more than two ALSs from a single Changeover is more trouble than its worth. If
a fault existed in one of the A ALSs and one of the B ALSs, there is not good state
where all resources are in working order unless each ALS pair is switched independently.
311
Changeover Control
There are applications where two ALSs could be switched together but that is beyond the
scope of this document.
The CCC card is designed to take changeover control commands from the connected
subracks and command the installed COV-V, COV-R, or COV-T relay cards to switch the
common connections to the subrack in control. The CCC card accepts dual 48vdc power
inputs so it does not lose power if one supply fails. Signaling leads in the audio/alarm
interface from each MSU power supply connect to the CCC DB9 ports on the front edge
of the CCC card. The CCC signals the Changeover Subracks COV-V/COV-R voice
circuit cards or COV-T coaxial circuit cards to switch between the A and B system. LEDs
on the front of the CCC card indicate A power, B power, and a status of which system is in
control (see CCC in Acom Maintenance, P/N 025-9528).
Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V / COV-R)
The COV-V and COV-R cards switch 24 2-wire circuits (or pairs) between an A and B
system through a bank of relays. LEDs on the front of the card indicate the switched state
of the cards relays. Another LED on the front of the card indicates if it is receiving power
from the CCC card. Each of the six LEDs on the front of the card reflects the switched
state for 2 of the 12 relays on the card (see Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch (COV-V
and COV-R) on page 123).
Inputs from the A ALS are connected to the top connector of the COV card (P2 on the
COV-V card or J1 on the COV-R card). Inputs from the B ALS are connected to the
bottom connector (P3 on the COV-V or J2 on the COV-R). The common outputs of the
COV-V and COV-R cards are connected to the back connector P1 and are terminated at an
independent distribution frame (IDF) for connection to the physical line or circuit.
Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch (COV-T)
A COV-T card switches three sets (pairs) of coaxial links between an A and B system.
This card is typically used to switch E1 or ISDN links from the phone system and the A
and B rack. It is not used to switch E1 links between subracks and the backbone switch
(ADS). The COV-T is not meant to switch E1s between the Acom Console Unit loops and
backbone switch. These connections are already redundant and do not need to pass
through a changeover card.
The common pair of coaxial lines connect to the top SMB pair on each of the three
connection sets. The first set of connections is on the top front of the COV-T card. The top
pair is the common, the second pair is the A side, and the third pair is the B side. Just
below these coaxial connections are the second set and the third set of coaxial links are
connected to the rear of the COV-T card. Unlike the COV-V and
COV-R cards, the common connections are NOT made through the back, instead there are
two common sets of connections on the front of the card, and one on the back. (See
Changeover Card - 3 Way Coax Switch (COV-T) on page 118.)
312
025-9574E
Changeover Hardware
Card Placement
The CCC card should be located in slot 0 (far left) of the changeover cabinet The COV-V,
COV-R, and COV-T cards should be located in slots 1 through 12 of the Changeover
Subrack.
Additional Hardware
The common connections secure to the back of the rack and changeover cards using screw
terminal connections. Care should be taken to verify the card seats completely into the
back cable.
Backbone Switch Signaling

The backbone switch is an Acom DS3 Switch (ADS). The ADS switches E1 circuits to/
from the high speed backbone.
The CCC cards SYSSEL output is used by the backbone switch to determine which E1 is
to be switched onto the high-speed backbone (DS3). With the E1s of both the A and B
subracks permanently connected to backbone switch, the system needs to know which E1
is the valid signal (in control) for the subracks associated lines. The E1 signal from the
subrack that is in control of the physical circuits will be connected to the backbone to be
made available for other Acom devices.
The CCC card has two outputs for the SYSASEL signal and two for the SYSBSEL signal.
One of each signal is connected to the ALS, and the other is connected to the backbone
switch associated with the ALS. The SYSSEL input signals the backbone switch that the
associated E1 link is connected to the active ALS and should be considered the valid
signal (and connected to the backbone).
An output from the backbone switch is connected to the ALS as an advanced indicator of a
problem on the E1 links from the ALS. This signal is connected between one of the
backbone switch digital outputs and the ALS MSU alarm input AI23 Bad E1. If the
backbone switch detects a problem with the E1 on the corresponding link (such as NOS/
LOS) it will signal this output to give the ALS advanced warning and prompt a
changeover. This output can provide a faster indication of a bad E1 than just monitoring
for LOS, NOS, or RRA on the MCU card.
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS)
The ADS digital I/O for changeover control is connected via a 25-pin connector on the
front of the DS3 Control Unit (DCU). The DCU has 8 inputs and eight outputs. The inputs
are pulled to 48 volts using the externally provided bias voltages on the front of the DCU.
An external bias voltage must be provided, the DCU does not have a way to internally bias
these IOs. To signal the DCU that the ALS on the corresponding E1 circuit is in control
and its E1s should be used, an input is pulled low (0Vdc). ADS inputs and outputs are
programmable, any input may be used to set one or more E1 links as active. Any output
can be programmed to activate on a bad E1 link.
313
Changeover Control
The ADS can be signaled which ALS is in control by grounding the corresponding input
on the DCU I/O connector. The input is programmable, any input can be configured to
represent any number of links that are active (in control). This input is typically connected
to the Changeover Control Card (CCC) output SYSASEL or SYSBSEL. The input is
pulled to 48vdc internally by the ADS and is taken active by grounding it (0Vdc).
Once an ALS is communicating with the connected ADS on E1 TS16, the MCU4 LED B1
(link 1) or B2 (link 2) will come on solid for the ALS that has control and will slowly flash
green on the link(s) connected to the standby ALS (see Main Control Unit (MCU) on page
180).
ADS outputs indicating the link status are also available from the DCU I/O connector. The
output is programmable, any output may represent any number of bad E1 links. These
outputs should be connected to MSU AI23 (input 6) and programmed to trigger an Urgent
Alarm LED and Standby Fault when active. The output will indicate active by being
pulled to 0vdc (ground). The connected equipment should pull this output high to 48vdc
and watch for the ground. The programmed DCU output will be pulled to +VV (ground)
by the ADS when there is a failure (NOS/LOS) on the corresponding 2Mbit port.
314
025-9574E
ADS Changeover Wiring Example
ADS Changeover Wiring Example

This is an example only.
Every Acom system has
custom wiring diagrams
included with the package of
on-site documentation.
315
Changeover Control
Forcing a Changeover
A technician can force a changeover using IMS (see Change Over in the Tools
Menu section of Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).
Alternatively, a technician can force a changeover to an ALS by removing the front
edge connector of the MSU card. These are the preferred methods to cause a
changeover because they are the least disruptive.
STOP
Warning! If you change over using IMS, be certain to set Mode back to
Automatic. Leaving this in manual mode will prevent an ALS
from taking control in the event of a failure.
Incorrect wiring of the changeover signaling between the CCC and MSU may cause
the subracks to switch continuously between the A and B system. This could
happen if both racks have Watchdog and Standby faults active. Check your
changeover wiring diagrams against the actual wiring in the Krone blocks.
If the ALS never switches to the other sub rack even though a Watchdog failure has
been triggered, the sub rack may be automatically acknowledging the alarms, check
the mapping for the Alarms ACKd output alarm in IMS (see Alarms in Acom
Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).
If the ALS will not switch to the other subrack even though it has no alarms and the
Watchdog has triggered on the active rack, it may be caused by a lack of confidence
that the other rack is okay because of a problem with the SYSSEL output of the
CCC card is pulled low by an unpowered DS3 Switch alarm I/O. Make sure the
backbone switch alarms are biased by providing an external 48vdc reference. It
may also be caused by the Watchdog alarm not being seen at the other subrack, the
Watchdog input should normally be active. The OK alarm should be normally
inactive.
Cloning an ALS
This section provides instructions for a Zetron Certified Acom technician to clone the
ALS configuration from the main rack to the backup. Cloning the main configuration into
the backup is a fast way to copy your changes to the standby ALS and keep both racks in
sync. It is assumed that both ALSs have identical cards.
Equipment
Straight through RS-232 serial cable (DB9 to DB9)
Computer with IMS installed
316
025-9574E
Cloning an ALS
Procedure
1. Connect to the MCU3 connector X13 of the Main ALS using a straight-through
RS-232 cable.
2. Start IMS and choose Communications-Connect from the IMS menu to connect.
Enter the network address of the main sub rack when prompted.
3. Once connected, click File, Save to Disk from the IMS menu.
4. Disconnect from the Main ALS and move the RS-232 cable from the Main to
the Standby ALS.
5. From the IMS menu, click File, Load from Disk, and select the file you
previously saved from the Main ALS.
6. The only options that should be different between the Main and Standby ALS
are the Sub-rack Address and External Clocking. Click Configure, Subrack
Address from the IMS menu. Set the option to Standby and click Save.
7. Choose File, Update to Rack from the IMS menu to transfer the configuration to
the ALS.
8. Reset the Standby ALS to finalize the changes.
317
Changeover Control
318
025-9574E
Preventative Maintenance
This chapter provides recommended preventative maintenance tips for an Acom system.
Check for Faults

The most important preventative maintenance you can do for your Acom system is to
watch for faults and alarms. There are many faults that can occur that do not cause a loss
of service. You can identify these issues using the IMS fault logs, the IMS alarm displays,
and the LEDs associated with the equipment.
LEDs
The LEDs on the front of the equipment may be the first thing that makes you aware of an
issue. On a periodic basis, walk by the common control electronics and check for any red,
yellow, or amber LEDs that might indicate a problem. The LEDs may direct you to check
the alarms of the associated device. Refer to the chapter Hardware Components on page
73 for a detailed description of the system LEDs.
Alarms
The IMS Terminal application can give you a high-level summary of the alarms in the
system. While it does not include alarms that have come and gone, it does show devices
with active alarms. Once the alarming device(s) have been identified, you could dive
deeper into the specific input alarms or check the fault logs. Consult the chapter Appendix
C: Alarms on page 371 for a detailed description of the input alarm definitions. Consult
the chapter Troubleshooting on page 325 for a list of error messages and their causes.
Fault logs
The IMS fault logs should be checked on a periodic basis to monitor past alarms. If an
alarm came and went before you could look at the alarms, the fault logs would still
provide a history of when the alarm was active and inactive. Compare the fault logs
against your maintenance records and flag anything that cant be explained. Consult the
section IMS Fault Logs on page 373 for a detailed description of the fault log messages.
319
Backups
Creating current backups of the systems configuration is critical to recovering from a
failure quickly. Make backups whenever the configuration changes.
Full Backups
Make full backups of the computer on a regular basis. A full computer backup can be
quickly restored, simplifying the recovery process. It may be possible to automate
backups.
IMS Backup
When changing the configuration of an Acom device such as a Acom Console Unit, save
the configuration to disk on the maintenance terminal. Backup the IMS Terminal folder
C:\Program Files\Zetron\IMS Terminal\ on a regular basis to archive the configurations
off the server.
ACS Backup
Backup the latest copy of your ACS configuration by copying the entire C:\Program
Files\Zetron\ACS\ folder to disk or other backup medium. This only needs be done for one
position.
Standby Backup
Backing up also means copying the system configuration between the main and standby
subracks. Any changes you make to the system A racks should be duplicated or cloned on
the system B racks. Consult the section Cloning an ALS on page 316 for instructions on
cloning an ALS.
Maintenance Log
When performing maintenance, changes, upgrades, or troubleshooting the system, make a
record of the date and time with a short description of the action taken. Note in the log
when backups are made. Note intermittent symptoms and any Zetron trouble ticket
numbers you received as part of a trouble call. The maintenance log should be kept in the
equipment room accessible to you.
320
025-9574E
System Monitoring in IMS
Example Maintenance Log

Date
Time
Description
Corrective action
Zetron EFO
Ticket#
Jan 1
8:12a
Urgent alarm on ALS1A Fault

logs show EMU card 5 removed
Talked with Joe at Zetron,

replaced EMU card
123456
Jan 15
12:30p
Scheduled backup
Backed up IMS configs to disk.
Check for Environmental Issues

When the Acom system was installed, the site was checked for environmental issues such
as dust, moisture, vibration, and temperature. If these conditions have changed, they may
cause operating problems. Check the environmental specs for each piece of equipment on
a periodic basis. Check the equipment room and console positions for moisture, high or
low temperature, and dust on a periodic basis.
Test Backup Systems

If the Acom system was delivered with a redundant backup system (main/standby), the
system should be switched to the backup system a few times a year to verify operation and
configuration. It is advised to do this during a maintenance hour to avoid impacting the
end user. The chapter Changeover Control on page 309 provides detail about the
changeover control system and instructions on how to force the system to the standby
subrack.

IMS is the Acom software application used to manage the Acom infrastructure and
network via a user-friendly graphical user interface (GUI). IMS is used by those
responsible for configuring and maintaining the system. It can be installed on all
dispatcher positions, but this is not necessary.
IMS ALS Module

The IMS ALS module provides a user interface to the Acom system, which allows you to
perform the following functions:
Configure connections, parameter values, and modes of operation.
Monitor link status, alarms, system faults, and signaling status.
Check system diagnostics such as self-tests and alarm simulation.
321
General Configuration
In an ALS, the Primary MCU functions as a master controller for the other cards and has a
non-volatile memory that contains the configuration information. When the Primary MCU
is reset, it uses the configuration data in the memory to set the connections, parameter
values, and modes of operation for all cards in the subrack.
By using IMS, the configuration of the subrack can be changed and if desired, the changes
can be saved to the non-volatile memory so that the subrack uses that configuration after
reset. If no configuration has been saved to the non-volatile memory, then the Primary
MCU uses a default configuration that includes connections to line cards, which may or
may not be fitted in the subrack.
The complete configuration description is located in Acom Software Installation and
Configuration, P/N 025-9529. A brief overview is given in Table 200.
Table 200: Overview of Acom Configuration
Item
Description
Configuration Data The Primary MCU is capable of storing two sets of configuration
information. It can use one set only or can switch between the two sets
upon an event occurring (e.g., alarm becoming active).
Connections
Connection types and definitions must be set for all channels.
Data Formats
The G.703 links can be set for double frame or CRC4 with CAS
enabled or disabled. DIU card interfaces can be configured for
synchronous or asynchronous operation at various data rates.
Alarming
Include settings for slip time and alarm pulse operation. Alarms can be
individually defined.
Synchronization
Clock sources for the subrack may be listed in order of priority for use.
Signaling
Signaling bits may be individually inverted. The handling of signaling
for certain cards can be selected from a set of options.
Ringers
Ringers can be configured for single or dual operation.
Gain
Channel gain for audio circuits may be set.
Other
Date, time, password, and rack address can be changed.
Monitoring
The Acom system is designed for two levels of monitoring. LEDs are provided on the
cards for basic monitoring of the state of the link and channel operation. These are
described in Acom Card Reference on page 111.
The IMS software provides a means for more detailed and informative monitoring and
includes facilities for observing the status of links, alarms, system faults, and signaling
states. A brief summary is shown in Table 201.
322
025-9574E
Table 201: Summary of Acom Monitoring

Item
Description
Link Status
The status of each G.703 link, including the status of alarms relating to the link
may be observed.
Alarm Status
The status of input alarms and of alarms defined by the user may be viewed and
acknowledged.
Signaling Status Windows are provided for observing the status of signaling bits for G.703 links
and for channels of individual cards.
Remote Management
If remote access is required, Symantec pcAnywhere must be installed on the IMS PC. Any
PC running the pcAnywhere client and connected to the IMS PC can then use IMS
remotely. Remote users, depending upon their password-protected access level, can
perform all management and configuration tasks provided by IMS as well as transfer files
between the IMS PC Terminal and the remote PC.
pcAnywhere is a third-party product sold and supported by Symantec Corporation.
Diagnostics
System diagnostics may be checked by viewing the LEDs on Acom cards. Examples are
the LEDs for the Run and Reset indications.
IMS also allows diagnostics to be checked and includes features for performing system
and link level tests. A summary of the diagnostics information is given in Table 202.
Table 202: Summary of Acom Diagnostics
Item
Description
System Faults
Fault logs are generated for the system and may be viewed to
determine the sequence and occurrence of faults.
Card Details
The type, slot position and revision level of cards is displayed.
Loopback
Loopback connections can be set for any type of card for

diagnostic and operational checks.
Self Tests
The MCU3 and other cards can perform self-tests to check the
operation of major circuits.
SIM Mode
An alarm simulation mode allows the MCU3 to simulate a

number of alarms at a G.703 link.
Alarm Indication
AIS may be injected on any G.703 link.
Signal (AIS) Injection
Ping
When connected in a network, the Ping command shows the

addresses of other connected subracks.
323
Performance Testing and Troubleshooting

The Acom system features a facility to monitor and record transmission performance of
the G.703 links using IMS. The parameters monitored include No Signal (NOS), Alarm
Indication Signal (AIS), Loss of Synchronization (LOS), remote alarm and slip detection.
The event log also records the statistical performance of the G.703 data stream, recording
HDB3 code violations, CRC-4 error counts, and an ongoing measure of the bit error rate
(BER) of the data.
A major feature provided by this system is the capability to perform internal loopbacks in
the various signal paths. Loopbacks are used during commissioning and fault finding. By
creating loops on signal paths it is possible to check the integrity of a channel from a given
point in the system. To set a loopback, see Loopback in Acom Software Installation and
Configuration, P/N 025-9529.
Installation and Configuration References

Additional topics related to Acom maintenance are the Installation and Configuration
instructions described in the following documents:
Acom Software Installation and Configuration (P/N 025-9529)
Acom Console Software Operation (P/N 025-9530)
324
025-9574E
General Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
General Troubleshooting
Use the following general methods to detect and identify problems.

Gather symptoms by running a functional test and checking for alarms
and faults.
Other symptoms may arise if you exercise the system. These symptoms may help you find
the source of the problem. Check fault logs, system alarms, and LEDs, as they may lead
you to the solution.
What has changed?
Ask yourself and others what has changed with the system that might have caused this.
For example, recent configuration updates.
Reset the associated device
If you can, reset the associated Acom Console Unit, ALS, or ADS. If your system is
redundant, you may not lose any functionality. While this does not help you understand
what was wrong, it may correct the fault very quickly.
Isolate
Break the problem into blocks and isolate them. Can you isolate the problem to one
position? One loop? A particular ADS? Is it common to a single line or circuit? A group of
lines shared by a line card?
Switch to the backup system and retest; if the problem is now resolved, it may have been
localized to the main system. Once you have isolated a problem, understanding what has
caused it becomes easier.
325
Troubleshooting
Substitute
Once you have isolated the issue, try substituting a spare. Switching to the standby system
is a method of substitution. Substitution can help you isolate problems as well.
Call for help
Zetron technical support is available 24/7. Your support contract will determine if support
is free or requires a credit card. Please have your System ID ready when you call (the ID
number is often found on the front of the Zetron cabinets).
For contact information, see http://www.zetron.com.
Specific Troubleshooting
Audio Problems on page 326
Console Problems on page 327
Other Problems on page 329
Audio Problems
Incorrect Audio or No Audio
There is no transmit audio from one position; all other positions are fine on page 329
One line has no transmit audio on all positions on page 330
Users cannot hear selected lines in the handset/headset on one console only on page 330
There is no receive audio from a monitored line on one console only on page 330
There is no audio from a line on any console on page 331
Selected or monitored lines do not present parallel operator transmit audio, only receive
audio on page 333
Selected lines do not appear in the select speaker on page 334
Select audio does not appear in the select speaker on page 337
Monitored or selected lines are unmonitored or unselected by themselves on page 344
326
025-9574E
Specific Troubleshooting
Mute Not Working

Some functions like Ring Mute and Mute All time out on page 334
The All Mute or Monitor Mute function does not completely mute the receive audio
on page 334
Volume and Audio Quality
Adjacent operators are too loud in my speakers on page 345
The level of the monitored channels cannot be changed on page 335
Crackle or static sound at position on page 344
Noise in speaker, clicking/ticking sound at times. Happens the most during logon on page
344
60hz buzz in speakers. on page 344
Hearing conversation from an adjacent position in headset or speaker on page 345
Console Problems
General
The ACS crashes on startup with a Windows error when run from a Windows login without
administrative permissions on page 338
Cannot exit to Windows on page 332
Cannot log off ACS on page 332
Cannot select a radio channel on the ACS, console plays a Bing sound when line
clicked on page 332
The ACS does not show Tx indication (yellow text) on radio line on page 332
The ACS did not bring up the dial pad, the button is stuck in the depressed position on
page 333
The ACS popup forms, such as dial pad, monitor, and conference, are blocking access to
other buttons and cannot be moved on page 333
The time on the console is wrong on page 335
All lines on the ACS gray out during operation on page 335
Intercom fails and ACS plays a Bing without connecting to selected console on page
345
327
Troubleshooting
Integrator IRR
IntegratorIRR is not recording messages on page 342
IntIRR is recording blank (silent) messages on page 342
Popup message IRR failed to record on page 343
IRR not working. Message: irr.exe has generated errors and will be closed by Windows,
you will need to restart this program, an error log is being created on page 343
IntegratorIRR failure the currently recording message has exceeded the imposed size
limit for a single recorded message. Ensure that your record control configuration
parameters are optimally set to avoid recording messages that are too large on page 343
Console Error Messages
The console displays Heartbeat Timeout message on page 331
The console displays No Audio Interface message on page 331
The status bar says SOMETHING.WAV does not exist on page 333
The Status bar shows Console Waiting ## on page 337
The ACS pops up a dialog Cannot open quick dial database and does not start on page
338
The ACS pops up a dialog Line key XX type does not match physical line XX when
loading the form file on page 338
The ACS logon dialog box shows Fail Over mode instead of Online on page 340
The ACS logon dialog box shows Offline mode instead of Online on page 340
Popup message IRR failed to record on page 343
IRR not working. Message: irr.exe has generated errors and will be closed by Windows,
you will need to restart this program, an error log is being created on page 343
IntegratorIRR failure the currently recording message has exceeded the imposed size
limit for a single recorded message. Ensure that your record control configuration
parameters are optimally set to avoid recording messages that are too large on page 343
Missing or Unavailable Functions
There are missing monitors in the Monitor selection popup. MS1/MS2/MS3/MS4 are gray
and not selectable on page 336
The Dial Pad does not have a Send button when an ISDN line is selected / Cannot make
calls on ISDN lines on page 337
328
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
The Alpha Search button is missing from the Dial Pad on page 338
The Broadcast and Announce buttons are missing from the Intercom popup on page 339
Headset/Handset/Footswitch
The foot switch does not key the selected radio channel on page 339
The handset/headset does not key the selected radio channel, does not show yellow text on
line on page 339
Other Problems
The phone line turns green but will not ring for inbound calls on page 334
The ACS is slow to respond to button presses such as line selection or PTT on page 336
Right-clicking on a radio channel causes a popup dialog to appear instead of causing an
instant transmit on page 340
The passwords for the ACS have been lost or forgotten on page 341
The passwords for the ACU, DCU, or MCU have been lost or forgotten on page 341
Hunt Groups are not working; a line is not selected on page 346
Recommended Actions
There is no transmit audio from one position; all other positions are fine
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Handset not detected.
If the Status Panel in ACS shows Speaker, the

handset is not detected. Check its connection and try
a different handset. The ACS uses the microphone
current to detect the headset/handset.
Console in Demo mode.
Check status bar that console is Online. May have

gone into demo mode because of communications
errors.
Microphone is muted.
Check the Mute function. If it is flashing, the

operators microphone is muted.
329
Troubleshooting
One line has no transmit audio on all positions

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Bad radio/phone.
Check for Tx audio on demarc out of Acom system.
Incorrect radio signaling.
Check for Tx audio on demarc out of Acom system.

Check for guard tone out of Acom. In IMS, check that
TRC frequencies in Radio Tone Database match radio
requirements. (See Radio Tone Database in Acom
Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 0259529.)
Bad line card.
Switch to standby system.

Swap card with spare.
Users cannot hear selected lines in the handset/headset on one console

only
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Handset volume turned down.
Check volume controls for handset and for line.

Check physical volume control if using a TRHI.
Handset not detected.
Check connections, replace handset.
Console in Demo mode.
Check status bar that console is Online. IMS may

have gone into demo mode because of
communication errors.
There is no receive audio from a monitored line on one console only

Possible Cause
330
Recommended Action
Mute All is active.
Check for flashing indication on Mute All function

key.
Monitor Mute active.
Line may be in Monitor Mute; try toggling the

Monitor Mute when there is active audio.
Speaker volume turned down.
Check physical volume control on speaker. Check

that LED on speaker is lit (indicating the speakers has
power).
Line is selected.
Selected lines are removed from the monitor speaker.
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
There is no audio from a line on any console

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
ADS digital I/O incorrectly wired.
Check LEDs on ADS. The active E1 links for the

connected ALS should have solid green LEDs, not
flashing green. Check changeover wiring and ADS
I/O power. Only active ALS receive audio is
connected to backbone.
Line is not triggering VOX.
Check for VOX indication on line. VOX or CD is

required to gate audio on half duplex conference or
patch.
Bad radio/phone.
Check demarc for Rx audio. Generate tone into Acom

to test.
The console displays Heartbeat Timeout message

Possible Cause
Loss of communications with Acom
Console Unit.
Recommended Action
Click Retry on popup.
Check serial cable between PC and Acom Console
Unit.
Check ACS baud rate and port in AcomConsole.ini
file. (9600 baud and COM2 are the default, but your
system may be different.)
Loss of communications with ADS.
Check Acom Console Unit LEDs A and B for green

indication indicating ADS communications.
Check ADS for faults or alarms.
Duplicate Acom Console number in system. Check all serial and audio interfaces for console
number. In IMS, verify the console ID against the
network diagram. Turn off other Acom Console
Units, reset all ADS and retry ACS. Turn on one
position at a time to find conflict.
The console displays No Audio Interface message

Possible Cause
Audio definitions were changed.
Recommended Action
Click OK and retry ACS.
Reset Acom Console Unit after making changes to
OAM.
ACS looking for audio interface for radios.
Check AcomConsole.ini file for HandsetOnly setting.

If you have only configured Headset audio interfaces
on OAM then you must have HandsetOnly=True in
the AcomConsole.ini file to combine radio and
telephone audio into one time slot on an E1.
331
Troubleshooting
Cannot select a radio channel on the ACS, console plays a Bing sound
when line clicked
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
ACS looking for audio interface for radios.
Check AcomConsole.ini file for HandsetOnly setting.

If you have only configured Headset audio interfaces
on OAM then you must have HandsetOnly=True in
the AcomConsole.ini file to combine radio and
telephone audio into one time slot on an E1.
Console not communicating with ADS.
Check the status bar to see if the console is online.
Cannot log off ACS

Possible Cause
Lines are selected or monitored.
Recommended Action
Clear lines and monitors before logging off.
Edit the following AcomConsole.ini setting:
AllowLogoffIfLinesActive=True
If this setting isnt in the AcomConsole.ini, add it

within the [ACS] section.
Cannot exit to Windows

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Operator forgot exit password.
Delete all ACS.#PW files from folder to reset

password to 8564888.
UMS permissions are preventing user from

exiting.
Check UMS using Zetron Account Manager

application (ZAM).
Log off and log on as admin.
The ACS does not show Tx indication (yellow text) on radio line
Possible Cause
332
Recommended Action
AcomConsole.ini not set to show yellow

text.
Verify that DisplayOutgoingPTT=True in [Radio

Lines] section of AcomConsole.ini.
IMS is not configured to pass PTT status.
Check that the line has the Indicate PTT Source

checked in IMS. (See MCU 3/4 Card Options in
Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N
025-9529.)
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
Selected or monitored lines do not present parallel operator transmit

audio, only receive audio
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
IMS not configured to present operator

transmit audio.
Check that Tx and Rx on Monitor and Tx and Rx

on Group are checked in IMS for the line. (See
MCU 3/4 Card Options in Acom Software
Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)
Console Cross Mute enabled.
Check Acom Console Unit audio interface

configuration for any console cross mute. (See
Console Interface Tab in Acom Software
The status bar says SOMETHING.WAV does not exist

Possible Cause
Sound file SOMETHING.WAV was not
found. The console attempted to play it
because of an event.
Recommended Action
Copy the file into the ACS folder.
Change the AcomConsole.ini file to point to another
sound.
The ACS did not bring up the dial pad, the button is stuck in the
depressed position
Possible Cause
Multiple phone lines are selected.
Recommended Action
If more than one phone line is selected, the program
does not know which to dial on. In these conditions,
the Dial Pad button will appear in the depressed
position, waiting for the operator to touch/click one of
the selected lines to use for dialing.
The ACS popup forms, such as dial pad, monitor, and conference, are
blocking access to other buttons and cannot be moved
Possible Cause
The title bar is not enabled for pop-ups.
Recommended Action
The pop-ups may have been locked in place by the
AcomConsole.ini file; check the [Screen Positions]
section for a ,N option that would disable the title
bar on these pop-ups.
333
Troubleshooting
The All Mute or Monitor Mute function does not completely mute the
receive audio
Possible Cause
The mute level is set too high.
Recommended Action
This function attenuates the monitored line to a preset
level setup in the AcomConsole.ini file. The Monitor
Mute Set function can override this level. The default
mute level is also set in the AcomConsole.ini file.
Some functions like Ring Mute and Mute All time out
Possible Cause
Time-out set too low in the
AcomConsole.ini file.
Recommended Action
The time-outs are set in the AcomConsole.ini file for
these options. Check the [Timeout Periods] section.
Set the timeout to 0 seconds to disable.
Selected lines do not appear in the select speaker

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The Speaker Enable function is not active.
Use the Speaker Enable function to place the console

in Dual mode where selected channels are in the
handset and speaker.
The wrong speaker has been selected for

select audio.
Use the Locate Audio function to choose the speaker

to receive select audio. This can be defaulted in the
AcomConsole.ini file under the [Interfaces] section.
The phone line turns green but will not ring for inbound calls
Possible Cause
334
Recommended Action
The line is ring disabled.
Check the lines ring enable state. If the state shows

RD at the bottom of the key, its ring is disabled.
Use the Ringer Enable function key to enable your
phone lines.
The PC sound properties are adjusted to

levels that will not work correctly.
Open the Windows volume control and move the

master volume and wave volume to half way. Verify
they are not muted.
The monitor speaker is turned off or the

volume is down.
Check the volume settings on the monitor speakers.

PC tones play through the monitor speakers.
The console has the Ring Mute function

active.
Check that the Ring Mute function is not active.
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
The level of the monitored channels cannot be changed

Possible Cause
Operator error.
Recommended Action
There is a specific order of steps that must be
followed:
Press the Level button on the Monitor popup.
Click channels to apply the set level to them.
(Their level will be shown on the line key in
negative dB.)
The time on the console is wrong

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The system time is wrong.
The console time is set by the Acom Console Unit on

startup. The Acom Console Unit time is set by the
first ALS in the system. Change the time on that ALS
or your setting will not keep.
The console is set to not take the time from

the system.
Check the Acom Console Unit IMS data port setting,

verify that the No Time Updates option is NOT
checked. (See Console Data in Acom Software
The consoles time zone is incorrectly set.
The ACS Time and Date controls use the local PC

time zone info to convert the Acom system time to the
needed Time and Date controls. Check the Windows
Time Zone setting.
The ACS time control is set to the wrong

time zone.
Check the TimeSourceZone setting of the

AcomConsole.ini file.
All lines on the ACS gray out during operation

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The ADS has reset or been lost.
Check the ADS for alarms or faults. It holds the line

key database for the connect ALSs.
The ALS that provides the lines has been

lost.
Check the ALS that provides the lines, it may have

lost power or E1 connectivity with the ADS. The
redundant ALS may not have taken control; check
changeover signaling.
335
Troubleshooting
The ACS is slow to respond to button presses such as line selection or

PTT
ACS slowdowns and unresponsiveness is caused by excessive E1 messaging.
Possible Cause
Bad or high-loss E1 links.
Recommended Action
Bad E1 links that repeatedly make, then break their
connection can cause consoles to log on repeatedly.
Check for E1 alarms/faults to find the break.
Use an E1 meter/test set to measure loss on the
loop.
Many consoles logging on at once.
After the consoles finish logon, the system will speed

up. Try only logging on a few positions at a time.
Many PTT messages from consoles.
The system design could reduce the effect of many

console PTTs. Move busy consoles off of ADS with
radio ALSs or a lot of other consoles to an ADS with
phone lines. (Contact Zetron Technical Support.)
There are duplicate console addresses in the In IMS, check that the Console ID of this Acom
system.
Console Unit is unique. Check all data and audio
interfaces. Reset the entire system (all ADS/Acom
Console Units), if you feel there were duplicate
addresses, to clear the problem.
Many CD messages from ALS.
Radio ALSs generate many CD messages as the

carrier goes active/inactive.
Increase the VOX hold time. (See Level Settings
Tab in Acom Software Installation and
Configuration, P/N 025-9529.)
Increase the E-Lead tail debounce. (See EMU
Card Options in Acom Software Installation and
Enable the PTT sliding window in IMS to limit
the max number of CD messages.
Find the source of the carrier detects; there may be
a bad radio or radio link.
There are missing monitors in the Monitor selection popup. MS1/MS2/

MS3/MS4 are gray and not selectable
Possible Cause
336
Recommended Action
IMS configuration incorrect.
Verify you have configured each monitor speaker in

the Acom Console Units OAM. (See Configuring
Acom Console Unit Parameters in Acom Software
E1 time slots have been exceeded.
Verify that you have not assigned more audio

interfaces than you have time slots on the E1 loop.
(See Acom Definitions in Acom Software
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
The Status bar shows Console Waiting ##

The ACS is talking to the Acom Console Unit but not the ADS and issues this message to
notify the user.
Possible Cause
The Acom Console Unit has just reset.
Recommended Action
Wait for at least 30 seconds for the Acom Console
Unit to regain communication with the ADS.
Check the fault logs.
There are duplicate console addresses in the Check that the Console ID of this Acom Console Unit
system.
is unique. In IMS, check the addresses all data and
audio interfaces. Reset the entire system (all ADS/
Acom Console Units) if you feel there were duplicate
addresses to clear the problem.
There is a duplicate network address in the
system.
Check that all Acom Console Units have a unique

Acom network address. Reset the system if a
duplicate is found.
The ADS servicing the Acom Console Unit

is bad.
Check the A and B LEDs on the back of the Acom

Console Unit for indication on ADS connectivity.
Check the fault logs and alarms.
Select audio does not appear in the select speaker

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The Speaker Enable function is off.
Check that the Speaker Enable function is active

(blinking). If the handset is removed, it should move
select audio to the speaker as well.
Speaker has become disconnected.
Check the physical connection to the speaker.
Speaker volume turned down or unplugged. Check the volume level and the power LED on the
speaker.
Select audio routed to wrong speaker.
Check AudioPanelLocation and HandsetLocation in

the AcomConsole.ini file in the [Interfaces] section.
These settings may have been set to a non-existent
speaker.
The Dial Pad does not have a Send button when an ISDN line is selected
/ Cannot make calls on ISDN lines
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The console does not know the line is ISDN. Change the AcomConsole.ini setting [Line Key Data]
Check to a value of True. When True, the ACS will
compare each line against the ALS config.
The IMS configuration does not identify the Check the IMS programming for the phone line. It
line as ISDN.
should have a sub type of ISDN. (See Acom
Definitions in Acom Software Installation and
337
Troubleshooting
The ACS crashes on startup with a Windows error when run from a
Windows login without administrative permissions
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The Borland database user file has restricted

access and is causing an access violation
when the ACS attempts to load the Borland
databases.
Give full permissions to Everyone for the file

C:\PDOXUSRS.NET. User or Super User accounts
may not have read/write access to this file, thus
causing an access violation.
The ACS pops up a dialog Cannot open quick dial database and does
not start
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The Borland database engine has not been

installed.
Install or re-install the Borland database engine

(BDE). It is used for database access by the ACS.
The Quickdial database files are missing or

corrupt.
Replace the quicktel.*, quickpage.* files with

backups or reinstall the ACS.
The ACS pops up a dialog Line key XX type does not match physical line
XX when loading the form file
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The ACS form configuration does not match Radios should be Radio Base buttons.
the IMS programming for the line.
EIE phones lines should be Autolines buttons.
TIE hotlines should be CB Phone buttons. CB Phone
lines should have the default dial type set to None.
Check the button line assignments in Console
Designer.
The installer does not want the operator
notified of the bad line configuration, how
do I stop this notice from appearing?
Change the AcomConsole.ini setting [Line Key Data]

HideMismatchResults to a value of True.
The ACS form has lines that do not exist in

the IMS configuration.
Remove the lines or accept the popup.
The Alpha Search button is missing from the Dial Pad

Possible Cause
The button has been removed in the
AcomConsole.ini.
Recommended Action
Setup the following setting in the [Dial Pad] section
of AcomConsole.ini.
ShowAlphaSearchButton=True.
338
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
The Broadcast and Announce buttons are missing from the Intercom
popup
Possible Cause
The button has been removed in the
AcomConsole.ini.
Recommended Action
Change the AcomConsole.ini setting [Intercoms]
ShowAnnounce= and ShowBroadcast= to a value of
True.
The foot switch does not key the selected radio channel
Possible Cause
Foot switch incorrectly wired.
Recommended Action
Check connections between foot switch and console.
It may be connected to TRHI, a digital input, or the
DCOAM. (See Foot Switch on page 69.)
The digital input is not configured correctly. Check the digital input programming in IMS (see
Acom Definitions in Acom Software Installation
and Configuration, P/N 025-9529) and the
AcomConsole.ini file [Digital Inputs] section.
The handset/headset does not key the selected radio channel, does not
show yellow text on line
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The TRHI is set for use with a 4-wire

handset.
Check the jumper settings if using a TRHI jackbox.

(See the Telephone Radio Headset Interface Product
Manual, P/N 025-9553.)
Radio channel is configured as full-duplex.
In general, radios should not be configured as Full

Duplex, even if you can Tx and Rx at the same time.
Just leave off CD Muting if the channel is full duplex.
The full duplex option activates the M1 and M2 leads
whenever the line is selected. (See Acom
Definitions in Acom Software Installation and
The radio is keying but the yellow channel

text is turned off.
Check that the AcomConsole.ini setting [Radio

Lines] DisplayOutgoingPTT is set to True.
The OAM audio interface is set for volume

control.
Configure the OAM port for Use vol pot as PTT.

(See Operators Audio Module in Acom Software
Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529)
The ACS is in demo mode.
Because of a serial timeout the ACS has entered demo

mode (Offline). Shut down and restart the ACS and
watch for Online in the status bar.
339
Troubleshooting
Right-clicking on a radio channel causes a popup dialog to appear

instead of causing an instant transmit
Possible Cause
The ACS is in Maintenance Mode.
Recommended Action
Press CTRL-ALT-M to return the console to normal
mode. Maintenance mode is used for troubleshooting
and will cause problems with instant transmit. Check
the properties of the ACS shortcut for a /m
command line argument. The /m argument starts
the console in maintenance mode.
The ACS logon dialog box shows Fail Over mode instead of Online
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The ACS is unable to connect with the UMS Retry server.

Server.
The ACS can make use of Zetrons User Management
System for controlling permissions. Check for a
network problem.
Try to ping the UMS server.
Check that the UMS Server service and the Apache
service are running on the server. You can check
services from Control Panel -> Administrative Tools.
If other consoles are successfully communicating
with the UMS, try rebooting the PC.
Open ZAM to check the configuration of this console.
Ensure that it is pointing to the correct server.
The ACS has been incorrectly configured to Check that the AcomConsole.ini parameter [ACS]
require UMS on a non-UMS system.
EnableUMS= is set to False.
Try to log in using an offline account to get
the ACS running.
Offline accounts are z_admin or zg_admin with

no password (leave blank).
The ACS logon dialog box shows Offline mode instead of Online
Possible Cause
ZAM is not configured for Online mode.
When offline it will not attempt to connect
to the UMS server, it will use the local
offline databases.
340
Recommended Action
Open ZAM and login with user z_admin (no
password).
Change the Workstation settings to Online mode. Set
the Server Host to the name of the UMS Server and
click Apply.
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
The passwords for the ACS have been lost or forgotten

Possible Cause
Operator forgot exit password.
Recommended Action
Delete file ACS.1PW from folder to reset password to
8564888. You can use the Chg_psw.exe application
to change it to something else.
Operator forgot logon password and is using Use the Zetron Account Manager (ZAM) to change
UMS.
the password on the account. If you cant get into
ZAM, try using logon admin with no password, or
else try zg_admin with no password.
Operator forgot logon password and is NOT Delete file ACS.3PW from folder to reset password to
using UMS.
Operator forgot supervisor password
(databases).
Delete file ACS.2PW from folder to reset password to

The passwords for the ACU, DCU, or MCU have been lost or forgotten
The default password for all of these devices is 8564888. If you have changed the password
from its default and cannot remember or find the password, it can be recovered by calling Zetron
Technical Support.
341
Troubleshooting
IntegratorIRR is not recording messages

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Using contact closure control.
Did you configure a 2-axis, 2-button joystick in

Windows?
Use the Windows Game Controls control panel to
view the state of the joystick inputs. Button
2(Radio) should turn on when the Acom Console
Unit commands the IRR to record.
Look at the LED on the back of the Acom
Console Units 4-Wire E&M Module. The M1
LED should turn red when the Acom Console
Unit commands the start of recording.
Double-check the jumpers in the IRR module and
on the 4-Wire E&M Module for the Acom
Console Unit. (See Integrator Instant Recall
Recorder, P/N 025-9496 and Integrator IRR on
page 58.)
The orange connector VREF on the Acom Console
Unit may be upside down; screws should face up.
Using VOX record control.
VOX threshold may be set too high or too low. Use

the IntIRR VOX Threshold Adjustment to change the
threshold. (See VOX Threshold Adjustment in
Integrator Instant Recall Recorder, P/N 025-9496.)
Using software record control.
Ensure the [ACS] EnableIRR= is set to True,

EnableIRRSoftwareControl= is set to True, and
IRRSoftwareAlias= is set equal to the alias
programmed into IntIRR channel setup.
IntIRR is recording blank (silent) messages

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Playback level set too low.
Check IRR playback volume slider control. (See

Integrator Instant Recall Recorder, P/N 025-9496.)
IRR playback muted.
Check IRR playback mute control. (See Integrator

Instant Recall Recorder, P/N 025-9496.)
Recording problem (vs. playback problem). Verify the PC plays other wave files properly. Try to
play the recordings manually from the IntIRR
recordings folder.
No audio from Acom Console Unit.
Check the Acom Console Unit voice logger output

configuration in IMS. Listen to the audio out of the
Acom Console Unit to isolate.
Using wrong SoundBlaster drivers.
During the installation of the IRR, you should have

canceled the Windows driver install wizard and used
the SoundBlaster installation CD to install the drivers.
Installing the other drivers will result in empty
recordings. Uninstall the sound drivers and reinstall
from the CD.
342
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
Popup message IRR failed to record

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
IRR is closed.
Launch IntegratorIRR. If EnableIRR=True then it

should launch on ACS startup.
Problem with SoundBlaster drivers.
Uninstall and reinstall the SoundBlaster drivers from

the SoundBlaster install CD.
IRR not working. Message: irr.exe has generated errors and will be
closed by Windows, you will need to restart this program, an error log is
being created
Possible Cause
Hardware problem with sound card.
Recommended Action
Remove and reinstall SoundBlaster card.
If problem continues, replace sound card.
Permissions problem.
Verify IRR has full access to its folder and registry

privileges. Your system administrator sets these
permissions.
IntegratorIRR failure the currently recording message has exceeded

the imposed size limit for a single recorded message. Ensure that your
record control configuration parameters are optimally set to avoid
recording messages that are too large
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Large message warning threshold set too

low.
Check the options page of IntegratorIRR (Edit ->

Options) for the warning threshold for max record
length. This warning will not stop recording; it only
presents the popup. The long recording may be valid;
try extending the max length and see if the issue
reoccurs.
Recording triggers are not set correctly.
Check that the IRR can start and stop recording. If it

is set to use VOX, the threshold may be too low.
343
Troubleshooting
Monitored or selected lines are unmonitored or unselected by

themselves
Possible Cause
ADS has reset.
Recommended Action
Check fault logs and alarms for signs of a reset.
Check power into ADS.
Contact Zetron for more info on monitoring ADS
resets.
Acom Console Unit has reset.

A/C power cable may be loose.
ALS has reset.
Crackle or static sound at position

Possible Cause
Hardware problem with backbone switch.
Recommended Action
Force system from A to B side and retest, may be
ADS issue.
Noise is isolated to one Acom Console Unit. Replace Acom Console Unit.
Crackle is from lines.
Listen on demarc for sound, may be coming from

some external source.
Noise in speaker, clicking/ticking sound at times. Happens the most

during logon
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Speaker cables run next to serial data cable. Re-route audio and data cables away from each other
to prevent coupling of noise.
60hz buzz in speakers.

Possible Cause
Transformer coupling onto speaker cable.
Recommended Action
Re-route audio away from transformer.
Try moving transformer to another A/C receptacle.
PC-tones cable not grounded to PC.
344
Check that PC-tones audio cable is connected to PC

sound card. Try replacing cable with spare.
025-9574E
Recommended Actions
Hearing conversation from an adjacent position in headset or speaker

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Parallel console has been assigned the same Check IMS E1 definitions (see Dual E1 Module in
E1 time slot as the local position.
025-9529). Two consoles may be using the same time
slot. Reset Acom Console Units to force reallocation
of audio interface time slots. When the Acom Console
Unit is reset, it is assigned audio interface E1 time
slots by the ADS if configured for Define External
Device or Configure Acom Console Unit over E1
Link in IMS.
Cross-talk occurring on external circuits.
Check punchdown blocks for possible cross talk on

the systems receive.
Intercom fails and ACS plays a Bing without connecting to selected

console
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The destination console is busy.
The destination console may not have another free

intercom button to receive the intercom call on.
The destination console is not online.
The destination console may not be logged in or the

ACS is not started.
Adjacent operators are too loud in my speakers

Possible Cause
Operators microphone sensitivity is too
high.
Recommended Action
Use IMS ACU to reduce the Rx gain on the OAM
microphone channel. (See Operators Audio
Module in Acom Software Installation and
Configuration, P/N 025-9529).
Try disabling operator AGC on the Acom Console
Unit to reduce input gain. (See Operators Audio
Module in Acom Software Installation and
Operator is too close, causing feedback.
Enable position cross muting for the adjacent

positions in IMS. (See Operators Audio Module in
025-9529).
Turn off the Enable Tx and Rx on Group and
Enable Tx and Rx on Monitor to remove parallel
operator Tx audio from selected and monitored
channels.
345
Troubleshooting
Hunt Groups are not working; a line is not selected

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The AcomConsole.ini file can point toward

the Acom Console Unit or the PC database
for the Hunt Group configuration.
Check the AcomConsole.ini file setting [Hunt

Groups] UseDatabase= setting. If =True it will use the
DBEditor database, or else it will use the IMS ACU
configuration for the Hunt Groups.
None of the lines in the Hunt Group are

visible on the screen.
You must configure the lines in the Hunt Group on the

ACS form file.
All of the lines in the Hunt Group are in use. Clear and unmonitor the lines in the Hunt Group.
The Dial pad is not using the hunt group
when no lines are selected.
Check the AcomConsole.ini setting [Line Selection]

DialPadHuntGroup=X
X = the number of the Hunt Group (1-8)
346
025-9574E
Appendix A: Acom Glossary
Name
Description
2-Wire Interface
A term used to describe Tip and Ring connections to telephone

handsets and exchanges. The Acom TIE and EIE cards use 2-wire
to 4-wire converters to allow connection to 2-wire interfaces and
provide separate receive and transmit audio paths to the MCU card
in the ALS.
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution
ACS
Acom Console Software
ACU
Acom Console Unit
ADS
Acom DS3 Switch
AFD
Acom File Distributor
AIS
A signal that replaces the normal data stream with a continuous

string of 1s when a maintenance alarm has been activated. Such
maintenance alarms include NOS and LOS.
(Alarm Indication Signal)

A-Law
A nonlinear companding (compressing-expanding) function for

analog-to-digital conversion of voice signals. It provides a higher
digital resolution at low signal levels to give an improved signalto-noise ratio.
ALI
Automatic Location Information
ALS
Acom Line Subrack
AMUX
Acom multiplexer
ANI
Automatic Number Identification
Backplane
Each Acom subrack contains two backplanes, an upper and a

lower. They are used to connect signals and power supplies to each
of the cards contained in the subrack.
Bearer
A communication link. For example, a point-to-point digital radio

link may have two bearers one at 2.4 GHz and one at 2.5 GHz.
Each bearer could be used independently or in a redundant
configuration.
347
Name
BER
(Bit Error Rate)
Description
The ratio of bit errors to bits received in a given period of time. For
example, a BER of 1x10-6 means that for every million bits
received, on average one bit has been corrupted. BER is used to
measure the quality of a digital communication path.
Branching Connection
Used to describe a point-to-point connection, such as the

connection of a time slot to a line card channel. In the IMS
package the term normal connection is used to describe a branch
connection.
Broadcast Connection
Used to describe a point-to-multipoint connection. With this type

of connection, one time slot (or line card channel) is broadcast to a
multiple number of line card channels.
CAD
Computer-Aided Dispatch
CAS
CAS is a transmission protocol used by G.704 systems to transmit

signaling data associated with the line cards. Such signaling data
includes handshaking signals for the DIU1-2 card and E&M
signals for an EMU card. The CAS protocol places the signaling
data in TS16 of each frame.
(Channel Associated Signaling)
CCC
CCC-E
Changeover Controller Extender Card
CCE
(Common Control Equipment)
Comprises all backroom system elements such as racks and card

cages.
CCU
Common Controller Unit
CDS
Console Design Software
Channel
Used to describe the point-to-point communication path with in the

Acom system. It is also used to describe and single interface circuit
on any of the system line cards.
CLI
Calling Line Identification
Clipping
Audible distortion that occurs when a signals level exceeds the

limits of the amplifier circuit. When the analog signal is a sine
wave, clipping results in a waveform with a flat top. Clipping
can be reduced by decreasing the input signal amplitude to the
amplifier or by reducing the gain of the amplifier.
Clock
A precise timing signal generated by a quartz crystal. In the Acom

system the clock is used for system synchronization and as a
timing base for the G.704 links.
Clock Signal
Clock Source
CMOS
Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor
CND
Calling Number Display. The phone number of the service used by

the calling party will be displayed automatically to customers who
subscribe to CND Services.
COC
Changeover Control card
CODEC
A CODEC (Coder/decoder) is a device that converts analog

signals to digital signals and vice versa. In the Acom system,
Codecs are used to convert the analog voice signals to and from 8bit PCM bit streams.
(Coder/Decoder)
348
025-9574E
Name
Description
Codirectional Interface
Codirectional is normally used to describe an interface where both

data and timing signals are transmitted in the same direction. This
means that a receiver is sent both data and a synchronizing clock
signal from the transmitter.
Companding
Literally means compression and expanding. It is a term used to

describe a type of signal conditioning that is used to improve some
characteristics of audio signals. See A-law and Mu-Law.
COR
Carrier Operated Relay
COS
Changeover Subrack
COV-R
Changeover card (RJ-21) for voice
COV-T
Changeover card (SMB coax) for data
COV-V
Changeover card (Euro/DIN96) for voice
CRC
CRC is a technique used by G.704 systems to detect errors in

transmitted data. A 4-bit CRC code (called CRC-4) is generated
for a block of data, which is then sent along with the data. The
receiver compares the received CRC-4 code against the CRC-4
code generated from the received data. If the two codes do not
match, then some of the data has been corrupted during
transmission.
(Cyclic Redundancy Check)
Crosspoint Switch
Also called a Digital Crosspoint Switch in this set of manuals.

This is a key component that provides the physical switching
(connecting) of time slots within the MCU3. The crosspoint switch
has an internal switching matrix that allows any input to be
connected to any output.
CSR
Conferencing Subrack
CTCSS
Continuous Tone-Coded Squelch System
CTS
Clear To Send
DCD
Data Carrier Detect
DCE
This term is used in serial data communication to refer to a device

that provides the signal conversion and coding between a DTE and
a transmission line. A modem is an example of a DCE device. Two
DCE devices are usually connected using a null modem serial
cable.
(Data Circuit Equipment)
DCU
DS3 Control Unit Card
Decadic Signaling
A system for transmitting telephone numbers using loop break/

make (disconnect/connect) pulses. Each break pulse momentarily
interrupts the DC voltage on the line. The number of pulses equals
the number of the digit transmitted (ten pulses are used to represent
the number 0). Also known as pulse dialing.
DID
A phone line dedicated for incoming calls.
(Direct Inward Dialing)
349
Name
Description
Differential Data
A method of increasing transmission distances by transmitting data

on two wires simultaneously at opposite polarities. The receiver
only responds to the difference in voltage between the wires and
therefore cancels out the noise picked up on both wires during
transmission. RS-422/485 protocols use differential data
transmission.
Digital Multiplex Hierarchy
This is a system (described in CCITT Recommendations) that

allows connection of lower rate multiplexers to higher rate
multiplexers in order to construct larger networks. The system is
arranged in a hierarchy so that each level in the hierarchy can
combine and transmit a whole number of channels from the system
below. For example, a system at the 8 Mbps level contains four 2
Mbps channels, each of which in turn contains 32 64 Kbps
channels. The Acom system conforms to the Recommendations
and can be used with other equipment to form a large
communication system.
DIU
Data Interface Unit
DPLL
Digital Phase Locked Loop
DS3
Digital Signal, level 3 (44.736 Mbps)
DSR
Data Set Ready
DTE
(Data Terminal Equipment)
A DTE is a device that functions as a data source or sink for a DCE

device. An example of a DTE is a PC; it sends and receives data to
and from a DCE device, such as a modem. A straight through cable
is usually used to connect a DTE to a DCE device.
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
E&M
E&M (Ear and Mouth) signaling originated from early telephone

systems to provide a means of establishing calls between
exchanges. Modern systems do not use E&M signaling and use
either in-band signaling or dedicated data channels to set up calls.
E&M leads are now commonly used as multipurpose signaling
connections. To avoid confusion, the terms E and M are often
replaced by SO (Signaling Out) and SI (Signaling In) throughout
this manual set.
(Ear and Mouth Signaling)
Earth Recall Signal
A signaling method used in 2-wire analog telephone systems. An

earth recall signal is send by earthing one wire of the 2-wire
interface. This function is currently not implemented by the Acom
system.
EBER
Excessive Bit Error Rate
EIE
(Exchange Interface Equipment)
In Acom EIE may also refer to the EIE card, which provides an
interface to PSTN or PABX lines.
EMC
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
EMU
E&M Unit card
EPIC
Extended PCM Interface Controller. A type of integrated circuit.
350
025-9574E
Name
Description
ESD
Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute. A

standardization organization in the telecom industry in Europe.
They have been successful in standardizing the GSM cell phone
system and the TETRA professional mobile radio system.
FAS
(Frame Alignment Signal)
A special bit sequence is contained in TS0 of a frame, which

allows the receiver to synchronize itself to the incoming data. This
frame is transmitted only once per multiframe using the double
frame format, 8 times per multiframe if the CRC-4 format is used.
FPGA
A type of integrated circuit.
(Field Programmable Gate Array)

Frame Alignment
Frame alignment is used by each G.704 interface to gain

synchronization with other G.704 devices. The MCU3 achieves
frame alignment by looking for frame alignment words within the
G.704 data stream. Once frame alignment has been achieved, the
MCU3 knows the exact position/time slot of the incoming G.704
data stream.
Frame
A fixed-length cross-section of a data stream. A 2 Mbps E1 link

has 8-bit long frames, each frame containing one segment of each
of the 32 time slots. The relative position of each time slot remains
constant from frame to frame. The time slots in a frame are
numbered 0-31. TS0 is the first 8 bits (first time slot) of a frame
and is used to carry the frame alignment word and other control/
error code bits. TS16 is used to carry CAS signaling information
and multiframe alignment words in the G.704 link. TS16 may also
be used as a standard data channel when using in-band signaling
instead of CAS.
Framer
A circuit on the MCU3 card that performs the HDB3 conversion

and frame alignment of the incoming G.704 data.
Gain
A figure used to describe amplification. For example, an amplifier

with a gain of two will produce an output signal that is twice the
amplitude of an input signal.
Handshaking
Handshaking is a term used to describe the signaling lines (RTS,

CTS, etc.) of serial communication links such as RS-232.
HDB3
A tertiary level form of line encoding used in the G.703

specification. HDB3 allows the receiver to extract a synchronized
clock regardless of the content of the incoming stream.
(High Density Bipolar of Order 3)

HDLC
(High Level Data Link Control)
Hot Plugging
HDLC is a communication protocol used within the Acom system

to communicate between devices on the backplane. It is a
synchronous full duplex framed protocol that allows multiple
devices to communicate on one bus.
Hot Plug Capable
Hot plugging means inserting or removing a card into a subrack

while the power is still applied to the system. All cards within the
Acom system are designed to be hot plugged. (MSU3 has some
exceptions.)
IDF
Intermediate Distribution Frame (or Floor) Distribution
351
Name
IMS Terminal
(Integrated Management System)
IMS
(Integrated Management System)
Description
A top level applications package that manages access to the IMS
applications for configuration, monitoring, and diagnostics for
each part of every CCE and Acom Console Unit in your system.
ACS may have the following modules installed: IMS ALS, IMS
ADS, and IMS ACU.
A software suite produced by Zetron for the management of Acom
systems. The suite contains several IMS modules that can each run
in a stand-alone environment or within ACS. IMS provides a fully
functional network management system capable of configuration,
remote reconfiguration, fault detection, and diagnostics through a
graphical display interface. IMS allows easy configuration and
maintenance for the entire system, from general component setting
and network adjustments, to individual card configuration.
In-band Signaling
In-band signaling is a method use to transmit signaling

information. The signaling information is placed into the same
time slot as the data for that channel.
IOM-2
(ISDN Oriented Modular bus,
version 2)
This is a communication bus used internally by the Acom system,

that provides a means for communication with voice and signaling
interfaces on line cards. It is a framed protocol with data sent in
time slots between cards in the subrack.
IPAT
A type of integrated circuit.
(ISDN Primary Access Transceiver)

IRR
IRR is an application used to control the voice recording process.
(Instant Recall Recorder)

ISB
(Intersite Bearer)
ISDN
A means of interconnecting two or more Acom systems that are at

different sites to provide remote or backup operation. ISB
connections are implemented between ADSs of separate Acom
sites, by way of E1 or T1 connections on the MCU4 cards.
(Integrated Services Digital Network)
A network that provides or supports a range of telecommunication

services by providing digital connections between user network
interfaces.
LCB
Link Control Block
Line Break
A term used in telephone systems to indicate a break (opening) of a

telephone line. Brief line breaks are used in decadic dialing, while
an extended line break is used to release (hang up) a connection.
Line Card
This is a general term that refers to the voice and data cards. A line
card contains a number of channels to decode/encode local signals
that can then be branched to other channels or time slots by using a
G.703 link.
Link
This term is used to describe a communication path that is used to

transfer multiple channels of information. In the case of the Acom
documentation, link means a connection from a 2048 or 1544
Kbps G.703 interface.
LIT
Line Integrity Test card
352
025-9574E
Name
Description
LLCB
Line Logic Control Block memory that contains information

about the lines. See also OLCB.
LMFA
Loss of Multiframe Alignment
Loop Detect
A term used in telephone line connections. It is a system that

detects a call has been answered by checking the status of the DC
loop. In the Acom system, the TIE card uses loop detection to
determine when a call has been answered. If a loop is detected, the
TIE card switches the line from a ringer to an audio circuit.
Loop Out
Loop out is a DC loop for signaling to the other end of a telephone

line. See Loop Detect.
Loop Seize
Line Loop
LOS
(Loss of Synchronization)
This is an alarm condition within the Acom system that is active

when synchronization of the G.703 link is not present. This means
that the MCU3 Framer is unable to detect the frame alignment
word.
Master Clock
Each MCU3 card within a subrack has clock generation and

selection circuits that are used to generate the timing and
synchronization required for data transmission. When an MCU3 is
installed in slot 0 of a subrack, it becomes the primary MCU3, and
its clock signal is used as a Master Clock for all other cards
contained in the subrack. By default the subrack will synchronize
to the Master Clock of the primary MCU3 but can be changed to
synchronize to other clock signals if required.
MCU
(Main Control Unit)
The core of the Acom system is the MCU. The MCU3 comprises a
Framer, a digital crosspoint switch and G.703 interfaces and
controls the internal backplane interfaces and connections.
MDF
Main Distribution Frame (or Building) Distributor
MSU
Main Supply Unit card
Multiframe
A cyclic set of consecutive frames, in which the relative position

of each frame is known. In 2 Mbps G.704 systems, a multiframe
may comprise two frames (Double Frame mode) or sixteen frames
(CRC-4 mode).
MUSAC
A type of integrated circuit; a digital cross point switch used for

multipoint switching and conferencing
MUX
(Multiplexer)
In Acom documentation the term multiplexer means digital

multiplexer: a device that uses time division multiplexing (TDM)
to combine multiple digital signals into a single composite digital
signal.
Non Urgent Alarm
This is a G.732 prompt maintenance alarm condition.
NOS
No Signal
NRZ
Non-Return to Zero
353
Name
NTP
(Network Time Protocol)
Description
An internationally recognized standard that can be used to
synchronize clocking devices on computers and other network
devices over the Internet. It is used by Application Layer clientserver applications that communicate by way of UDP port 123. Its
primary benefit is to counter the effects of variable latency caused
by queuing on packet-switched networks. An NTP client fetches a
time data stream from an NTP server at regular intervals and
corrects local time-keeping devices. It synchronizes to Universal
Time Coordinated (UTC) only; it has no knowledge of time zones,
Daylight Saving Time, or Summer Time. For more information,
see www.ntp.org.
OAM
OLCB
Operator Logic Control Block memory that contains

information about the consoles. See also LLCB.
Omnibus Connection
A conference connection where voice signals are converted from

A-law to linear and summed before conversion back to A-law.
Data signals and channel signaling are also added.
Order Wire
A conference connection where an input to a channel is output on

all other channels and not the originating channel. May be used for
2-wire telephone conferencing.
P25
Project 25, also known as APCO-25 but most commonly as P25,

Project 25 encompasses a suite of standards to advance
interoperability among digital wireless communication products
and systems. The P25 standards were created by a committee
representing manufacturers, public safety agencies, and other
communication professionals, with the intent of ensuring that all
purchasers of P25-compatible equipment can communicate with
each other. For more information, see www.apcointl.org.
(Project 25)
PABX
(Private Automated Branch Exchange)
A telephone network commonly used by medium and larger

offices, call centers, and other businesses and organizations. PABX
provides an efficient internal telephone service with, typically, a a
single number for outside callers and a limited number of outgoing
lines.
Partial Time Slot Allocation
Portions of a time slot may be allocated to multiple lower rate

devices. For example, two 32 Kbps data sources may be allocated
one time slot, with each 32 Kbps data stream only requiring each
alternate frame (or 4 of the 8 bits per time slot). See also Subrate
Communication.
PCM
PCM is a technique used to convert an analog signal to a serial bit

stream. In the Acom system, analog voice signals are digitized into
8-bit words at a sample rate of 8 kHz, producing a serial bit stream
of 64 Kbps for each voice signal.
(Pulse Code Modulation)
354
025-9574E
Name
Description
PCM-30
PCM-30 generally refers to the specific case of PCM G.704 where

TS0 and TS16 contain framing and Channel Associated Signaling
(CAS). The CAS signals contain the signaling information for the
other 30 information (voice or data) channels. The data format
containing 30 information channels, together with the associated
signal data in time slot 16, is referred to as PCM-30.
PE
Protective Earth
PLL
A circuit that synchronizes an internal oscillator to an incoming

signal. A PLL circuit is used on the MCU3 to produce a stable
clock signal from the incoming G.703 link.
(Phase Locked Loop)

Primary MCU
When the MCU is installed in slot 0 of the Acom Line Subrack, it

becomes the Primary MCU, which functions as a system master
and provides configuration setup parameters for other MCU cards
and line cards installed in the subrack. The MCU detects that it has
been installed in Slot 0 and then enables the Primary MCU circuits
and functions.
Primary Rate
The primary rate is the data rate from which all other rates (both
higher and lower) in the digital multiplexing hierarchy are derived.
Protective Earth (PE)
An earth point in the building installation that provides earthing for

safety purposes. This may also be called grounding conductor.
PSTN
Public Switching Telephone Network
PTT
Push to talk or press to talk.
Recovered Clock
A clock signal derived from the incoming data signal. In the Acom
system, this is possible because the G.703 signals use HDB3 line
coding, which allows the receiver to extract a synchronized clock
regardless of the content of the incoming stream.
Redundant Bearer
A channel used to carry the traffic of a failed bearer.
RF
Radio frequency
RGU
Ring Generator Unit card
Ring Cadence
The timing of a ring signal (e.g., 1 second ring, 1 second pause, 1

second ring, 5 second pause, then repeat).
Ring out Signaling

Loop in Signaling
This is a signaling scheme used by 2-wire telephone lines. The

signaling is by means of a current loop when the handset is picked
up to initiate either a ring out or a loop in.
Ring Signal
An AC waveform used to drive the ring circuit of a telephone.
Ring Voltage
RMS
Root Mean Square
RRA
Received Remote Alarm
RTC
Real Time Clock
RTS
Request To Send
RVA
Recorded Voice Announcement card
RX
Receive
RXD
Receive Data
355
Name
Description
SCC
Serial Communication Controller
SDI
Slip Direction Indication
SELV
A SELV circuit is circuit with no direct connection to mains

power. It obtains power from an isolating transformer, isolated
power, or a battery. Under a single fault condition, a SELV circuit
should not exceed 71V peak or 120VDC.
(Safety Extra Low Voltage)
Service Word
This is a term used to describe the contents of time slot 0 in a

frame. If the time slot does not contain a frame alignment word, it
is called a service word.
Signaling
Binary information passed between communicating devices to

manage the establishment, clearing, and control of connections. An
example of signaling is the handshake used in an RS-232
communication channel.
Slave Clock
A clock whose timing output is phase-locked to the timing signal

received from another clock.
Slip
The loss of a data bit on a T-1 or E-1 link, due to a frame

misalignment between the timing on a transmit node and the
timing on a receive node.
Slot
As distinct from a time slot, a slot refers to the physical space

and electrical connector available in a subrack for a circuit board.
SMB
Coaxial connector for RG179 Cable
SMU
Signal Management Unit card
Submultiframe
A term used to describe the first 8 frames or the last 8 frames of a

CRC-4 multiframe structure.
Subrack
This term is used to distinguish from a larger rack, which may

support several subracks. A subrack is a standard 6RU 19-inch
assembly that supports a backplane with sockets for connecting up
to 13 cards.
Subrate Communication
Connection of one or more low data rate devices to a single time

slot. For example, two devices that transmit data at a rate of 32
Kbp/s could be connected (using IMS) to one time slot.
Synchronous Communication
A protocol that allows bits of data to be sent at a fixed,

synchronized rate between the transmitter and receiver. Sending
synchronized data eliminates the need for start and stop bits as
used with asynchronous communication.
TIE
Telephone Interface Equipment card.
Time Division Multiplexing
A technique employed in the Acom system for combining multiple

electronic signals into one stream by sampling each signal at
regular intervals and coding each sample into a separate time slot
of the combined stream. A period of time containing one time slot
per signal is termed a frame. Frames are repeated at the signal
sampling rate. A G.704 E1 link carries 8,000 frames per second.
TDM
356
025-9574E
Name
Time Slot
TS
TNV
(Telecommunication Network Voltage)
Description
In the context of TDM, the data stream is divided into parallel time
slots. An E1 link carries 32 time slots, each representing one 64
Kbps channel. Each time slot is divided into serial frames, each 8
bits long.
A circuit that under normal operating conditions carries
telecommunication signals. Telecommunication signals are a
steady state, varying amplitude, or intermittent voltage or current
intended for use on a telecommunication network. A TNV circuit,
which is connected to a telecommunication network, may be
subject to over-voltages due to lightning or power system faults.
TNV excludes the mains supply, TV cable systems and SELV
circuits.
Traffic
General reference to data signals, that are intended for

multiplexing and demultiplexing within an Acom system. Intended
to distinguish from and exclude signals, that are used internally to
the system, such as for system coordination and CPU operations.
Transceiver
A circuit that can connect to a shared bus for the purpose of

receiving and transmitting. A cooperative protocol for the bus
ensures that only one transceiver on a bus transmits at any one
time.
TRC
Telecom Reference Conductor
TS
Time Slot
TSI
Time Slot Interchange
TTL
Transistor-Transistor Logic
TX
Transmit
TXD
Transmit Data
UIO
Universal Input/Output card
UMS
(User Management System)
UMS is a client/server application used to control system access

and privileges.
Urgent Alarm
This is a G.732 service alarm condition.
VF (Voice Frequency)
An audio signal in the band 300-3400 Hz.
VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol)
A method for using IP-compatible networks such as a LAN or

WAN to convey voice communication or other audio such as radio
control tones.
Watchdog Timer
A watchdog timer is a circuit that monitors a microprocessor. If the

microprocessor stops responding, the watchdog timer will reset the
microprocessor in an attempt to resume normal operation.
357
358
025-9574E
Purpose
Appendix B: System Failure Worksheet
Purpose
To provide a worksheet to be filled out in case of an Acom system with a severe failure
such as an inactive or unstable system. Capturing the state of the LEDs captures
information required to help determine the cause of failure. Fill out each section
applicable to the failure, and report your findings to Zetron. See http://www.zetron.com
for contact information.
Note
Make as many copies of these worksheet pages as needed to

capture the LED information from all ACUs, DCUs, MSUs, and MCUs
in the system.
Worksheets are available for:

DCU LEDs on page 360
MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS) on page 362
MCU4 LEDs (in ADS) on page 364
MSU LEDs on page 366
Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs on page 368
359
DCU LEDs
Go to each Acom DCU in the system and record the name (example: DCU1) and the status
of the LEDs on the front edge of the card. Record the LED status by filling in the LED
indicators in the DCU front edge picture. Record any notes of color or flashing LEDs by
checking the appropriate boxes. If you need to record more than seven DCU cards, make
copies of the following pages as needed to record all DCU front edge LEDs.
AB
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Name___________________________________________________________

Port 1 Wrap State
Status of ADS
Cycle Master
Port 2 Wrap State
Spare
AB
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Name___________________________________________________________

Port 1 Wrap State
Status of ADS
Cycle Master
Port 2 Wrap State
Spare

Port 1 Wrap State
Status of ADS
360
AB
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Name___________________________________________________________
Cycle Master
Port 2 Wrap State
Spare
025-9574E
DCU LEDs
AB
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Name___________________________________________________________

Port 1 Wrap State
Status of ADS
Cycle Master
Port 2 Wrap State
Spare
AB
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Name___________________________________________________________

Port 1 Wrap State
Status of ADS
Cycle Master
Port 2 Wrap State
Spare
AB
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Name___________________________________________________________

Port 1 Wrap State
Status of ADS
Cycle Master
Port 2 Wrap State
Spare

Port 1 Wrap State
Status of ADS
AB
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Green
Yellow
Red
Flashing?
Name___________________________________________________________
Cycle Master
Port 2 Wrap State
Spare
361
MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS)

Go to each MCU in the Acom Line Subracks and record the name (example: ALS1A,
MCU slot 0) and the status of the LEDs on the MCU front edge. Record the LED status by
filling in the LED indicators in the MCU front edge picture. If you need to record more
than seven MCU cards, make copies of following page as needed to record all MCUs in
the ALS Subracks.
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare/Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
RUN Indicator (flashing)

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare/Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare/Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
362
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
025-9574E
MCU3/4 LEDs (in ALS)
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare/Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare/Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare/Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare/Master State
Spare
Ringer 1 OK
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

Spare
Ringer 2 OK
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
363
MCU4 LEDs (in ADS)

Go to each MCU4 in the Acom DS3 Switches and record the name (example: ADS1A,
MCU slot 2) and the status of the LEDs on the MCU4 front edge. Record the LED status
by filling in the LED indicators in the MCU4 front edge picture. If you need to record
more than seven MCU4 cards, make copies of following page as needed to record all
MCU4 cards in the Acom DS3 Switches.
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
364
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
025-9574E
MCU4 LEDs (in ADS)
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
Name___________________________________________________________
AB
Spare
LCB 1
Spare
Link 1 Bad/RRA
Link 1 LMFA
Link 1 NOS
System Reset
Link 1 LOS
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GREEN
GREEN
GREEN
YELLOW
YELLOW
YELLOW
RED
RED

LCB 2
Spare
Link 2 Bad/RRA
Link 2 LMFA
Link 2 NOS
Programmable Alarm
Link 2 LOS
365
MSU LEDs
Go to each MSU in the system and record the name (example: ALS1A, MSU slot 12) and
the status of the LEDs on the MSU front edge. Record the LED status by filling in the
LED indicators in the MSU front edge picture. If you need to record more than 10 MSU
cards, make copies of the following page as needed to record all MSUs in the system.
Name__________________________________ Name__________________________________
LED Indicators
+12V
-12V
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
+12V
-12V
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
Watchdog alarm
RED
Input supply present GREEN
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
OFF
ON
Green - Information Alarm

Yellow - Non-Urgent Alarm
Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
OFF
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
Name__________________________________ Name__________________________________
LED Indicators
+12V
-12V
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
+12V
-12V
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
OFF
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
366
1
2
3
4
OFF
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
025-9574E
MSU LEDs
Name__________________________________ Name__________________________________
LED Indicators
+12V
-12V
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
+12V
-12V
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
OFF
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
OFF
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
Name__________________________________ Name__________________________________
LED Indicators
+12V
-12V
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
+12V
-12V
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
OFF
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
OFF
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
Name__________________________________ Name__________________________________
LED Indicators
+12V
-12V
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
LED Indicators
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
+12V
-12V
GREEN
GREEN
1 GREEN
2 GREEN
TNV -12V
+5V
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
Watchdog alarm
RED
3 RED
4 GREEN
Over Voltage Alarm

Supply ON
OFF
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
OFF
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
ON

Red - Urgent Alarm
1
2
3
4
Power Switch
X1
Power
Supply
Connector
367
Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs

Go to each Acom Console Unit in the system and record the name (example: DS1) and the
status of the LEDs on the Acom Console Unit rear panel. Record the LED status by filling
in the LED indicators in the Acom Console Unit rear panel picture. Record any notes of
color or flashing LEDs by checking the appropriate boxes. If you need to record more
Acom Console Unit rear panels, make copies of the following page as needed to record all
Acom Console Unit rear panel LEDs.
Note
The following LED work sheets represent the rear view of a Acom
Console Unit. These diagrams are represented in a manner that is
truncated and not to scale.
Acom Console Unit name:________________________________________________________

A B C D
DUAL 4W E&M
1 2 3 4 5 6
PORT 1
PORT 1
Green Orange Red

Green Orange Red
Port C: Green Orange Red
Port D: Green Orange Red
Port 1: Green Orange Red
Port A:
Port B:
DUAL E1
OPERATORS AUDIO
PORT 2
Green Yellow Red

Green Yellow Red
Port 2L: Green Yellow Red
Port 2R: Green Yellow Red
Port 1L:
Port 1R:
H/S 1
H/S 2
AUDIO CTRL
On Flash Off
On Flash Off
H/S2 Green: On Flash Off
H/S2 Yellow: On Flash Off
Audio Green: On Flash Off
Audio Yellow: On Flash Off
CTRL Green: On Flash Off
CTRL Yellow: On Flash Off
H/S1 Green:
H/S1 Yellow:
Rx
Tx
PORT 2
Rx
Tx
Green Red
Green Red
Port 2 Top:
Green Red
Port 2 Bottom: Green Red
Port 1 Top:
Port 1 Bottom:
Acom Console Unit Name:________________________________________________________

A B C D
DUAL 4W E&M
1 2 3 4 5 6
PORT 1
PORT 1
Green Orange Red

Green Orange Red
Port A:
Port B:
368
DUAL E1
OPERATORS AUDIO
PORT 2
Green Yellow Red

Green Yellow Red
Port 1L:
Port 1R:
H/S 1
H/S 2
AUDIO CTRL
On Flash Off
On Flash Off
H/S1 Green:
H/S1 Yellow:
Rx
Tx
PORT 2
Rx
Tx
Green Red
Green Red
Port 2 Top:
Green Red
Port 1 Top:
Port 1 Bottom:
025-9574E
Acom Console Unit (ACU) LEDs

A B C D
DUAL 4W E&M
1 2 3 4 5 6
PORT 1
Green Orange Red

Green Orange Red
Port A:
Port B:
PORT 2
Green Yellow Red

Green Yellow Red
Port 1L:
Port 1R:
OPERATORS AUDIO
H/S 1
H/S 2
AUDIO CTRL
On Flash Off
On Flash Off
DUAL E1
PORT 1
PORT 2
Green Red
Green Red
Port 2 Top:
Green Red
H/S1 Green:
Port 1 Top:
H/S1 Yellow:
Port 1 Bottom:

A B C D
DUAL 4W E&M
1 2 3 4 5 6
PORT 1
Green Orange Red

Green Orange Red
Port A:
Port B:
PORT 2
Green Yellow Red

Green Yellow Red
Port 1L:
Port 1R:
OPERATORS AUDIO
H/S 1
H/S 2
AUDIO CTRL
On Flash Off
On Flash Off
DUAL E1
PORT 1
PORT 2
Green Red
Green Red
Port 2 Top:
Green Red
H/S1 Green:
Port 1 Top:
H/S1 Yellow:
Port 1 Bottom:

A B C D
DUAL 4W E&M
1 2 3 4 5 6
PORT 1
Green Orange Red

Green Orange Red
Port A:
Port B:
PORT 2
Green Yellow Red

Green Yellow Red
Port 1L:
Port 1R:
OPERATORS AUDIO
H/S 1
H/S 2
AUDIO CTRL
On Flash Off
On Flash Off
DUAL E1
PORT 1
PORT 2
Green Red
Green Red
Port 2 Top:
Green Red
H/S1 Green:
Port 1 Top:
H/S1 Yellow:
Port 1 Bottom:
369
370
025-9574E
Alarm System
Appendix C: Alarms
Major topics in this chapter are:

Alarm System on page 371
IMS Fault Logs on page 373
Fault Log Input Alarms on page 377
Fault Log Output Alarms on page 382
General Alarms on page 383
ALS Alarm Definitions on page 385
Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarm Definitions on page 402
ADS Alarm Descriptions on page 408
Supervisor Alarms in IMS on page 426
Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarms in IMS on page 428
Alarm System
Aside from the visual alarms that can be defined and monitored, there are relay contacts
on the MSU card. The contacts may be connected to a wide range of external circuits and
equipment; they may be configured to activate when a user defined alarm occurs. They
can be deactivated in many ways, depending on the alarm mode (see Output Alarms on
page 372).
Typical applications may include connection of the urgent alarm relay to a visual or
audible alarm, alerting personnel of a link failure.
Note
Many of the alarms identified in this chapter are listed as not used
with Acom. These alarms, although not used with Acom hardware,
appear in the IMS software because other hardware system use
the alarms. All alarms are included here for completeness.
371
Appendix C: Alarms
Input Alarms
Input Alarm Status
The status of an alarm is stored as a two-bit code in the alarm log viewable in Acom
Console Software (see Alarm Log Display Panel in Acom Console Software Operation,
P/N 025-9530). Table 203 shows status bits and what they mean.
Table 203: Input Alarm Status
Alarm Status Bits
Alarm Status
00
Idle.
01
Was active. Shows that at some point the alarm was raised but is not currently active.
10
Acknowledge. The input alarm is still active but the output alarm is not asserted.
11
Active. The only state during which an alarm output is active.
Figure 95 shows the input flow.

Figure 95: Alarm Input States
11
Active
Alarm input
detected as active
00
Idle
Alarm input
becomes
active
Idle
Alarm input
acknowledged
Alarm input still active, but

has been acknowledged
Alarm
input is
deactivated
01
Was Active
10
Acknowledge
Alarm input no longer active
The was active state is functionally different from the idle state, in that the was
active state is used to indicate to a user that an alarm has been active.
Output Alarms
Each input alarm can be sent to one, many, or all output alarms. One, many, or all input
alarms can be sent to the same output alarm. The required configuration is set through
IMS (see Alarm Menu in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 0259529).
Operating Modes
An output alarm can be set to operate in any of the modes listed below.
Passive Mode
In passive mode, the alarm output becomes active when alarm input becomes active; it is
deactivated only when it is acknowledged from within IMS or the ACK ALL output alarm
372
025-9574E
IMS Fault Logs
or the input alarms become deactivated. Passive mode is the default operating mode for
alarm outputs.
Locked Mode
In locked mode, the alarm output becomes active when the alarm input becomes active. It
can only be deactivated when acknowledged from IMS or the ACK ALL output. The
alarm input becoming deactivated does not put the alarm output into the idle state. The
alarm output can be set active from IMS, but again it is only cleared by acknowledging it.
In this mode a brief failure, such a temporary link failure, is latched until the alarm is
acknowledged.
Pulsed Mode
In pulsed mode, the alarm output becomes active when alarm input becomes active. The
output will stay active for a set time and then become deactivated. The active pulse time is
set from IMS and is common for all pulsed outputs. Before the output can become active
again, the alarm input has to be deactivated or the alarm acknowledged.
Protected Mode
In protected mode the alarm output becomes active when the alarm input becomes active.
It can only be deactivated when the input alarm is deactivated. The alarm input becoming
acknowledged from IMS or the ACK ALL does not put the alarm output into the idle state.
Protected mode outputs are used for scenarios where acknowledging input alarms does not
change the system state, for example Acom subrack redundancy state. Refer to ISB Status
in the manual Acom Software Configuration (P/N 025-9529).
IMS Fault Logs

The fault log is a long-term record of all input alarms, output alarms, and events for the
rack. It provides a history to help explain what has happened in the past.
373
Appendix C: Alarms
IMS Fault Log Tool

The following screen shot shows the IMS Fault Log tool. The Fault Log tool enables you
to view, save, and clear the racks fault log. All fault records are stored in the rack until
viewed or deleted by this tool.
STOP
Warning! Once the logs are retrieved (using Show Current Faults),
the rack's fault log is cleared. You must save the logs in order
to view or search them off-line using IMS. You should save the
logs for future reference.
For detailed information on using this tool, see Fault Log in Acom Software Installation
and Configuration, P/N 025-9529.
Figure 96: IMS Fault Log Tool
Table 204: Using the IMS Fault Log Tool

Control
Description
Clear Rack Fault Log
The faults stored in the rack will be cleared without saving them to disk.
Delete All Saved Faults
The fault logs for this device will be deleted from the local PC fault database.
Delete Selected
The selected start/stop range will be deleted from the local PC fault database.
Close
Closes the fault log selection form without displaying any faults.
Display
Opens a display window showing either the current faults or a range of saved
faults. Depends on the selection.
Show Current Faults
With this selected, clicking Display will retrieve the current fault list from the
rack. Once retrieved the fault log will be cleared and the downloaded faults are
saved to a database on the local PC or the IMS Router. After being saved the faults
are shown to the user, an opportunity to save the faults to a plain text file is
available at this time. This option is only available when on-line.
Show Selected Faults
The range selection fields are enabled for choosing the start and stop time/data to
view. After selecting the range, click Display to view the historical faults stored in
the PC database. This does not retrieve any faults from the subrack. This option is
available on-line and off-line.
374
025-9574E
IMS Fault Logs
Fault Log Header

Syntax
The fault log header uses the following syntax:
------------------------------------------Device
Time
Date
Alarm (State)
Device is the Acom identifier for the card with an alarm.

Time/Date is the time and date of the event.
Alarm is the type and name of alarm that occurred (see Table 205).
(State) is the event that the alarm changed to (Active/Inactive).
Alarm Types
Alarms will be one of three types: Input Alarms, Output Alarms, or Other Events.
Input Alarms
Prefixed by alarm text Input Alarm (InActive) or Input Alarm (Active). Input alarms
are created by digital inputs on the MSU card, an internal fault or message, or an E1/T1
fault.
For a complete list of fault log input alarms, see Fault Log Input Alarms on page 377.
Output Alarms
Prefixed by alarm text Output Alarm (InActive) or Output Alarm (Active). Output
alarms are created as a result of one or more connected/mapped input alarms. They may
trigger LEDs, relays, E1/T1 alarms, or internal messages. See the Output alarm list for a
complete description of the output alarms and their meaning.
For a complete list of fault log output alarms, see Fault Log Output Alarms on page 382.
Other Events
Other internal messages are logged to the fault log as they happen. Here is a description of
some common events.
Alarm Names
375
Appendix C: Alarms
Table 205: Alarm Names in the Fault Log

Alarm Text Examples
Description
Rack was reset
The ALS, DS3 Switch (ADS), or Acom Console Unit was

reset.
Saved configuration is corrupt
This can occur during power up if the config location does

not have a valid configuration. This may occur because
Acom does not make use of the 2nd config location so it is
always corrupt.
New clocking source selected. Slot 0 [Default]
The rack has a list of E1 clock sources that should be used.

All of the preferred sources have been lost so the rack is
generating its own clocking. [Default]
Musac Conf Resource Low
The MCU card has 2 Musac chips for conferencing time

slots. Each Musac can create 21 connections. When the
MCU reaches this limit this alarm can occur. The system
may operator fine with this alarm, but a check should be
done to verify the number of logged lines/access channels
does not exceed the racks ability.
Selftest Good
The rack finished a power on self test.
MCU installed in slot 0
The rack found an MCU card in the first slot. This may be
part of a normal power up sequence.
Lcb Bad or Lcb OK
The LCB is a data communications link over time slot 16 of

the E1 between the subrack and the ADS. This may occur
because of a break in the E1 link.
Max DSP instruction cycles exceeded - DSP 0
The SMU resource use has exceeded its maximum cycle

limit. This may cause the rack to stop decoding/encoding
signaling. Check the SMU programming, the error message
will indicate what card and DSP is overloaded (see SMU
Card Options in Acom Software Installation and
Codec has died in slot 6
The MCU card has lost communications with the CODEC

(Coder/Decoder) chip on this card. This may occur because
the card has died or has been removed.
SMU installed in slot 10
The MCU has found an SMU card in slot 10. This can occur
as part of a normal power up sequence. It could occur as part
of an SMU reset.
EIE removed from slot 6
The MCU has detected that the EIE in slot 6 has been
removed or is dead.
Card in slot 7 has reset
The card in slot 7 has reset on its own. This may be because
of a problem with the card or because it was commanded to
do so from the debug prompt.
2Mb Link 1 has gone faulty
The first E1 link on this card is bad. Could be caused during

a reset or because of a device or cable failure.
2Mb Link 1 is bad, signaling was reset
The first E1 link on this card is bad. Could be caused during

a reset or because of a device or cable failure.
376
025-9574E
IMS Fault Logs
Alarm Text Examples
Description
Unknown Error. Code: 134
Often seen as part of a reset, this error code represents that

link 1 has failed. Error code 135 would indicate that link 2
has failed.
Reset Watchdog
The rack has reset because of a watchdog fault. The

processor may have died or the MCU card may have been
removed.
Console Reset
The ACS has reset its serial link with the Acom Console
Unit. There may have been a timeout that expired.
Console Ok or Console Bad
The ACS has lost (bad) or established (OK) serial

communications with the Acom Console Unit.
DSP IDMA read/write failure
This could occur if the SMU has been over allocated. Check
the resource programming. The maximum memory may
have been exceeded.
Fault Log Input Alarms

Alarm
Number
07
IMS Alarm Name

Digital Input 1 8
Alarm Description
External Digital Inputs
Internal Link Error MCU A link 1
Internal Link Error MCU A link 2
10
Internal Link Error MCU B link 1
11
Internal Link Error MCU B link 2
12
Internal Link Error MCU C link 1
13
Internal Link Error MCU C link 2
14
Internal Link Error MCU
reserved for future MCU D link 1
15
16
reserved for future MCU E link 1
17
18
reserved for future MCU F link 1
19
Internal (FW) alarm generated when the system has

detected an error in the E1 link.
377
Appendix C: Alarms
Alarm
Number
IMS Alarm Name
Alarm Description
20
Internal Link Master MCU A link

1
21
Internal Link Master MCU A link

2
22
Internal Link Master MCU B link

1
23
Internal Link Master MCU B link

2
24
Internal Link Master MCU C link

1
25
Internal Link Master MCU C link

2
26
Internal Link Master MCU
27
28
29
30
31
31
Card Configuration
Difference between saved and installed cards.
Internal (FW) alarm generated when the LCB associated

with an E1 link has been set as the active in a changeover
system.
(Difference may be revision or type.)
378
32
DS3 Link A Loss of Signal
Loss of signal on DS3 Link A
33
DS3 Link B Loss of Signal
Loss of signal on DS3 Link B
34
DS3 Link A Loss of Framing
Loss of frame alignment/synchronization on DS3 Link A
35
DS3 Link B Loss of Framing
Loss of frame alignment/synchronization on DS3 Link B
36
DS3 Link A AIS Alarm
Received an Alarm Indication Signal on DS3 Link A.
37
DS3 Link B AIS Alarm
Received an Alarm Indication Signal on DS3 Link B.
38
DS3 Link A Failed
Unable to remove wrap on Link A.
39
DS3 Link B Failed
Unable to remove wrap on Link B.
40
DS3 Link A Wrapped
DS3 Link A is currently in wrapped mode.
41
DS3 Link B Wrapped
DS3 Link B is currently in wrapped mode.
42
DS3 Ring Offline
The Backbone DS3 ring has come online or gone offline.
43
Incorrect DS3 Port Connection
The DS3 Link was unable to negotiate a communications

link with the remote end, due to the fact that Port A (or
Port B) on the current ADS has been incorrectly
connected to Port A (or Port B) on the remote ADS.
44
DCU NV Configuration
DCU NV configuration corrupted
45
No backplane time slots available
A connection failed because no time slot available on the

backplane.
025-9574E
IMS Fault Logs
Alarm
Number
IMS Alarm Name
Alarm Description
46
DCU Packet Memory Exhausted
No more memory available in memory pool to allocate to

packets for the DS3 backbone or the ADS Backplane
HDLC messaging queues.
47
DCU Packet Memory Insufficient
Available memory free in memory pool smaller than

requested allocation size for a new packet for the DS3
backbone or the ADS Backplane HDLC messaging
queues.
48
MCU A Packet Memory

Exhausted

packets for the ADS Backplane or E1 messaging queues.
49
MCU A E1 Loss of Signal
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

Loss of signal on an E1 Link.
50
MCU A E1 Loss of Framing
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1
Link
51
MCU A E1 AIS Alarm
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

Received an Alarm Indication Signal on an E1 Link.
52
MCU A E1 Remote Alarm
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

Received a remote alarm on an E1 Link.
53
MCU A E1 Remote Alarm 1
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

Received a remote alarm 1 on an E1 Link.
54
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

55
MCU A LCB missing
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

An LCB is expected but not present (expected is based
upon the system receiving a signal on the E1 link).
56
MCU A E1 Framing Slip
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

Received an E1 framing slip.
57
MCU A Backup Mode Change
MCU4 Slot A Link 1

An LLCB for an LSR is entering/leaving backup mode.
58
MCU A E1 Loss of Signal
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

59
MCU A E1 Loss of Framing
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

Loss of frame alignment or synchronization on an E1 Link
60
MCU A E1 AIS Alarm
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

61
MCU A E1 Remote Alarm
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

62
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

379
Appendix C: Alarms
Alarm
Number
63
IMS Alarm Name

Alarm Description
MCU4 Slot A Link 2
64
MCU A LCB missing
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

65
MCU A E1 Framing Slip
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

66
MCU A Backup Mode Change
MCU4 Slot A Link 2

67-71
MCU A Spare
reserved for future
72
MCU B Packet Memory

Exhausted

73
MCU B E1 Loss of Signal
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

74
MCU B E1 Loss of Framing
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

Link
75
MCU B E1 AIS Alarm
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

76
MCU B E1 Remote Alarm
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

77
MCU B E1 Remote Alarm 1
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

78
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

79
MCU B LCB missing
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

80
MCU B E1 Framing Slip
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

81
MCU B Backup Mode Change
MCU4 Slot B Link 1

82
MCU B E1 Loss of Signal
MCU4 Slot B Link 2

380
83
MCU B E1 Loss of Framing
MCU4 Slot B Link 2- Loss of frame alignment or

synchronization on an E1 Link
84
MCU B E1 AIS Alarm
MCU4 Slot B Link 2- Received an Alarm Indication

Signal on an E1 Link.
85
MCU B E1 Remote Alarm
MCU4 Slot B Link 2- Received a remote alarm on an E1

Link.
025-9574E
IMS Fault Logs
Alarm
Number
86
IMS Alarm Name

Alarm Description
MCU4 Slot B Link 2
87
MCU4 Slot B Link 2

88
MCU B LCB missing
MCU4 Slot B Link 2

89
MCU B E1 Framing Slip
MCU4 Slot B Link 2

90
MCU B Backup Mode Change
MCU4 Slot B Link 2

91-95
MCU B Spare
reserved for future
96
MCU C Packet Memory

Exhausted

97
MCU C E1 Loss of Signal
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

98
MCU C E1 Loss of Framing
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

Link
99
MCU C E1 AIS Alarm
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

100
MCU C E1 Remote Alarm
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

101
MCU C E1 Remote Alarm 1
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

102
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

103
MCU C LCB missing
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

104
MCU C E1 Framing Slip
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

105
MCU C Backup Mode Change
MCU4 Slot C Link 1

106
MCU C E1 Loss of Signal
MCU4 Slot C Link 2

107
MCU C E1 Loss of Framing
MCU4 Slot C Link 2- Loss of frame alignment or

synchronization on an E1 Link
108
MCU C E1 AIS Alarm
MCU4 Slot C Link 2- Received an Alarm Indication

Signal on an E1 Link.
381
Appendix C: Alarms
Alarm
Number
IMS Alarm Name
Alarm Description
109
MCU C E1 Remote Alarm
MCU4 Slot C Link 2- Received a remote alarm on an E1

Link.
110
MCU4 Slot C Link 2

111
MCU4 Slot C Link 2

112
MCU C LCB missing
MCU4 Slot C Link 2

113
MCU C E1 Framing Slip
MCU4 Slot C Link 2

114
MCU C Backup Mode Change
MCU4 Slot C Link 2

115-119
MCU C Spare
reserved for future
120
DCU Boot Error
Error starting DCU code, running from backup or failsafe

image
121
2Mb Clock Source Error
A 2Mb clock source configured to generate an alarm has

failed.
Fault Log Output Alarms

Alarm
Number
Function
Urgent Alarm
Non-urgent Alarm
Information Alarm
3-10
Represents External Digital Output 1-8
11-16
Internal System Select.

(Used to tell the DS3 that the LCB is the selected active for a
changeover. Usually driven by a digital input that is wired to a
CCC changeover controller.)
11 MCU A, E1 Link 1
12 MCU A, E1 Link 2
13 MCU B, E1 Link 1
14 MCU B, E1 Link 2
15 MCU C, E1 Link 1
16 MCU C, E1 Link 2
382
025-9574E
General Alarms
General Alarms
The following events will cause an alarm. The columns urgent and non urgent show
the default programming for alarms to the system alarm outputs. (The alarm numbers are
used to identify the alarms uniquely within MCU3 and IMS.)
Table 206: Input Alarm Names
No.
Alarm Name
Configuration Alarm
64kbp/s G703 NOS
64kbp/s G703 Slip
64kbp/s G703 AIS
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 NOS
Remaining 2Mbp/s NOS
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 LOS
Remaining 2Mbp/s LOS
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 RRA
Remaining 2Mbp/s RRA
10
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 EBER
11
Remaining 2Mbp/s EBER
12
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 Slip
13
Remaining 2Mbp/s Slip
14
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 MFA
15
Remaining 2Mbp/s MFA
16
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 CRC4
17
Remaining 2Mbp/s CRC4
18
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 AIS
19
Remaining 2Mbp/s AIS
20
2Mbps Slot 0 P1 MRRA
21
Remaining 2Mbp/s MRRA
22
Acom Self Test Failure
23
Ringer Failure
24
Alarms Acknowledged
25
No Alarms Active
26
Not used with Acom
27
MSU In1 (AI11) System Selected
28
MSU In2 (AI21) Standby Fault
29
MSU In3 (12)
30
MSU In4 (AI22)
Urgent
Non Urgent
MCU B7 LED
383
Appendix C: Alarms
No.
Alarm Name
31
MSU In5 (AI13) Watchdog
32
MSU In6 (AI23)
33
Loopback Present
34
Maintenance Terminal
35
DIU4 Slip
36
DIU4 No Clock
37
DIU4 No HDLC
38
Acom Rack Alarm
39
Acom Site Alarm
40
Console Alarm
41
Backup Alarm
42
Data Alarm
43
Line Alarm
44
Bearer Alarm
45
Remote Alarm
46
LCB Alarm
47
E1-T1 Converter RA (Pri)
48
E1-T1 Converter RA (Sec)
49
Excessive Clipping
50
NA
51
NA
52
NA
53
NA
54
NA
55
NA
56
NA
57
NA
58
SMU Alarm
59
2Mbit Clocking Alarm
60
MCUx Slot 0 P1 RA1
61
MCUx Slot 0 P1 RA2
62
MCUx Slot 0 P2 RA1
63
MCUx Slot 0 P2 RA2
Urgent
Non Urgent
MCU B7 LED
The following input alarms should be monitored closely and will trigger an urgent alarm:
Standby Fault - Monitors the health of the other rack (main or standby ALS).
MSUin4 - Monitors power supply alarm.
MSUin6 - Monitors the health of an ADS.
384
025-9574E
ALS Alarm Definitions
MSUin3 - If you have a slave ALS, this alarm is programmed in the master ALS.
This is to monitor the health of the slave ALS.
SMU Alarm - Monitors SMU DSP resources and alarms.

Configuration Error
ALARM No. 0 CE
On power up the MCU3 checks to see if all the line cards and smart cards (those that use
the HDLC backplane bus) are present and configured according to the setup stored in the
configuration Flash RAM. If any change is detected, then the Configuration Error alarm
is made active. The alarm is only cleared if the configuration is updated (using IMS), or
the subrack configuration is changed to match the configuration saved in Flash RAM.
During normal operation, the MCU3 checks that all cards are present at least once every
minute. The MCU3 will also check the status of the smart cards. The CE alarm will be
raised if the card reports a failure of some kind. The CE alarm will also be raised if the
MCU3 does not detect the cards normal heartbeat message. The alarm log stores which
card caused the alarm.
Note
The check of the CODECs does not indicate if the analog portion of
the CODEC circuit is operating, only that the MCU3 can
communicate with the CODEC.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The installed cards do not match the programmed

Look for a slot with a red or yellow indicator as the
configuration. One is missing or an unexpected card problem slot.
was found. Communications may have been lost with Check the fault log for fault details.
the card.
To clear a Configuration alarm the faulty/missing
cards can be replaced or the current subrack
configuration can be updated to Flash RAM using
IMS.
385
Appendix C: Alarms
Loss of Signal at 64k G703 Interface

ALARM No. 1 64K NOS
DIU3 card alarm.
Alarm No. 1 is an application for the DIU3. If any of the DIU3 channels lose receive
signal, then the loss of signal alarm will be raised. The alarm will only be automatically
cleared when a signal is detected again or that channel is disabled by IMS.
The alarm log stores which one of the 60 possible DIU3 channels raised the alarm. This
information is available through IMS.
This alarm is part of the G.735 and G.737 requirements.
Slips at 64k G703 Interface
ALARM No. 2 64K SLIP
DIU3 card alarm.
This alarm is raised if there is one slip (elastic buffer empty or overfilled) in 60 minutes or
less (exact time set in IMS). It is cleared by disabling the channel, or correcting the cause
of the synchronization fault. This alarm condition needs to be averaged over a long time to
avoid setting it to detecting one slip, which might only be occurring at a rate of once every
one hundred days. This alarm should not be activated when there are alarms like NOS and
LOS active for the same link. It is automatically cleared only after a slip free time period
(60 minutes). The averaging time is programmable from IMS.
The alarm log stores which one of the 60 possible DIU3 channels raised the alarm. This
AIS from Remote End of 64k G703 Interface
ALARM No. 3 64K AIS
DIU3 card alarm.
If the DIU3 receives a remote AIS (all 1s) on a channel then this alarm is raised. This
alarm is cleared by either the removal of the AIS signal from the remote end (64K port) or
by disabling the channel through IMS.
The alarm log stores which of the 60 possible DIU3 channels raised the alarm. This
Loss of Incoming Signal at 2 MBPS Interface
ALARM No. 4 and 52M NOS P and 2M NOS S
NOS stands for NO Signal. If any 2 Mbps-bit receive signal falls below a level of
approximately 1-volt, then this alarm is raised. This corresponds to a loss of 6 dB. In a
386
025-9574E
system that has more than two MCU3s, alarm 4 corresponds to the 2 Mbps link of the
primary MCU3 in slot 0, and alarm 5 corresponds to an OR function of all the other 2
Mbps interfaces. When an MCU3-DUAL is installed in slot 0, and both of the 2 Mbps
channels are in operation, Alarm 4 is for the first 2 Mbps link of the MCU3 in slot 0.
Alarm 5 is an OR function of all the other 2 Mbps channels in the system (this includes
the second 2 Mbps link on the MCU3 in slot 0).
This alarm is cleared by either disabling the MCU3, replacing the MCU3, or restoring the
signal. It is automatically cleared only when the 2 Mbps signal is fully restored.
The operation of this alarm is controlled directly by the framer IC on the MCU3. The
framer raises the NOS alarm if the following conditions are detected:
Three or less ones are received in a time internal of 250 micro-seconds,
or
The receive clock pulse fails to occur in a time interval of 4 internal clock cycles
(4096 kHz).
The alarm log will store alarm 4 and which of the 6 remote ends raised alarm 5. This
information is available through IMS. This alarm is part of the G.732 requirement.
Possible Cause
The MCU does not detect a E1/T1 signal from the
connected device on the alarming port.
Recommended Action
Check E1/T1 connections between the MCU and
connected equipment using the system map.
This alarm is cleared by either disabling the MCU3
framer, replacing the MCU3, or restoration of the
signal. It is automatically cleared only when the
2Mbps signal is fully restored.
The E1/T1 signal is not strong enough.
The inbound E1/T1 signal may not be strong enough

to drive the circuit input. No more than 6dBm @
1000Hz may be allowed.
Use E1/T1 test set to check inbound signal strength.
Swap Tx/Rx pairs on both ends and see if the problem
follows the cable.
Check/replace connectors on Rx cable.
387
Appendix C: Alarms
Loss of Frame Alignment of the G.703 2 MPBS Link

ALARM No. 6 and 72M LOS P and 2M LOS S
Alarm 6 is for link 1 (2 Mbit) of the primary MCU3. Alarm 7 is for the remaining 2 Mbps
links. Loss of frame alignment is in reality a loss of synchronization or frame
synchronization (LOS = Loss of synchronization).
The LOS alarm is asserted when the Framer chip detects three consecutive incorrect
Frame Alignment Signal (FAS) words. After loss of synchronization, the Framer chip will
resynchronize automatically if the following conditions are met:
The presence of the correct FAS word in frame n
The presence of the correct service word in frame n + 1
For a second time the presence of a correct FAS word in frame n + 2
After this, the sequence synchronization is regained and the LOS alarm is cleared.
When CRC multiframe structure is enabled (using IMS), the CRC multiframe alignment
(as opposed to frame alignment outlined above) is assumed to be lost if pulse frame
synchronization has been lost. In this state the LOS alarm is asserted.
CRC multiframe alignment is regained after two consecutive CRC multiframes have been
received without a framing error. At this point the LOS alarm is cleared.
The alarm log stores alarm 6 and which of the 6 remote ends raised alarm 7. This
This alarm is part of the G.732 requirement.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
No signal from the E1/T1 port. LOS would be

accompanied by a NOS alarm.
See NOS alarm.
Noise or poor signal strength has made the frame

alignment difficult or impossible to detect.

The quality of the inbound link may be questionable,
isolate circuits and troubleshoot.
Use E1/T1 tester to measure signal strength.
Check and replace connectors on cable.
388
025-9574E

ALARM No. 8 and 9 2Mbps RRA P and 2Mbps RRA S
The 2 M RRA alarm is raised when the Framer chip receives a RRA (Receive Remote
Alarm, all 1s) from the device connected to the remote end of the G.703 link.
Alarm 8 is the RRA for the first 2 Mbps link of MCU3 in slot 0.
Alarm 9 is the RRA for the remaining MCU3 2 Mbps links.
The alarm log stores alarm 8 and which of the six remote ends raised alarm 9. This
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The connected device is reporting a remote alarm (all Follow the circuit to the alarming device looking for
1s) on the E1 link.
an open E1 and/or an RRA output alarm on the
connected device.
Excessive EBER G703 2 MBPS for Channels 1 and 2

ALARM No. 10 and 11 2Mbps EBER P and 2Mbps EBER S
Alarm 10 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 11 is for remaining G.703 links.
The EBER alarm will be raised if the received G.703 data has an error rate greater than
10-3.
The alarm log stores which of the six remote ends raised alarm 11. This information is
available through IMS.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
No signal from the E1/T1 port (loss of signal is

accompanied by a NOS alarm).
See NOS alarm.
High loss on the E1 circuit.

389
Appendix C: Alarms
Slips Occurring on 2 MBPS Link

ALARM No. 12 and 13 2Mbps SLIP P and 2Mbps SLIP S
Alarm 12 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 13 is for the remaining G.703 links.
This alarm is raised for each slip except the first slip after restart. It is cleared by disabling
the channel, or replacing the card (at either end). It is cleared automatically only after a
slip free period of 60 minutes or less (programmable in IMS).
Possible Cause
Clocking sources for E1/T1 devices are not in sync
causing intermittent slips.
Recommended Action
Allow the Acom device to accept clocking from the
E1/T1 link using IMS.
1. From the IMS menu select Configure->System
Clocking.
2. Add all of the Available Clocking Sources to the
list of clocking sources.
3. Repeat for the other Acom devices.
2 MPPS Multi-frame Sync Loss

Alarm no. 14 and 15 2Mbps MFA P and 2Mbps MFA S
Alarm 14 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 15 is for remaining G.703 links.
Multiframe synchronization is lost when the Framer chip does not detect the multiframe
sync bit. If this occurs, the MFA alarms are raised. The MFA alarms are cleared when the
first correct multiframe alignment signal is detected.
Possible Cause
Connected device is not using TS16 for the same
purpose as the alarming device.
Recommended Action
TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling
bits, or as a clear voice channel. The expected
signaling was not detected on TS16, check E1/T1
configuration on both ends.
1. From the IMS menu right-click on the MCU card
and select Link Signaling->Link1 or Link2.
2. Choose an LCB Signaling Scheme if the port is
connected to a DS3 Switch E1 port or choose CAS if
operating the subrack as an MX-3.
390
025-9574E
2 MBPS-CRC-4 Error
ALARM No. 16 and 17 2Mbps CRC P and 2Mbps CRC S
Alarm 16 is for link 1 of the primary MCU3 and alarm 17 is for the remaining G.703 links.
This alarm is raised when a CRC error is reported by the Framer chip and cleared when it
has received 2 correct CRC multiframes.
information is viewed through IMS.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Connected device is not using TS16 for the same

purpose as the alarming device.
TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling

bits, or as a clear voice channel. The expected
signaling was not detected on TS16, check E1/T1
configuration on both ends.
Noise or poor signal strength.

AIS Detection at 2 MBPS Input

ALARM No. 18 and 19 2Mbps AIS P and 2Mbps AIS S
The alarm indication signal (AIS) is a continuous stream of ones. This alarm is raised
when the incoming bit stream has less than two zeros in a time interval of 250 us (that is,
two G.704 frames).
Possible Cause
The remote device is running a test.
Recommended Action
Stop test.
391
Appendix C: Alarms
Remote Multiframe Alarm on 2 MPBS Input

ALARM No. 20 and 21 2Mbps MRRA P and 2Mbps MRRA S
MRRA alarm is raised when the Framer detects a Multiframe Receive Remote Alarm. The
Acom system is capable of both sending and receiving this alarm.
The MRRA bit is set on a transmitted multiframe under the following conditions:
Loss of incoming 2 Mbps signal
Loss of multiframe align signal on incoming 2 Mbps link (alarm 6 and 7)
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Remote device has detected loss of incoming 2Mbps

signal.
Follow MRRA and RRA alarms to the source.
Remote device has detected loss of multiframe

alignment signal.
Follow MRRA and RRA alarms to the source.
Acom Fault During Restart or Self-test

ALARM No. 22 Acom Self Test Failure
Alarm 22 is raised when a fault is detected during a restart or self test.
Possible Cause
Bad MCU.
Recommended Action
Repeat self test, replace MCU if you receive a second
failed self test.
Ring Fail Alarm

ALARM No. 23 RFA
The RGU sets a signal on the subrack backplane. This signal is checked by the MCU3.
When the signal stops the RGU has failed and MCU3 raises this alarm.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
One of the ringers has been removed.
Check the IMS configuration on the number of

expected ringers (see Configuring ALS Parameters
in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N
025-9529).
One of the ringers has failed.
Replace the faulty RGU card or external ring source.
392
025-9574E
Alarms Acknowledged
ALARM No. 24 ACK
This alarm is raised when any alarm is acknowledged but not yet cleared.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The system is automatically acking alarms.
Remove all input alarms from the Ack All output

alarm definition in IMS (see Define Alarms in
025-9529).
A technician has pressed the Ack All button on the

Input Alarms panel and acknowledged all alarms.
Technicians should not press Ack All button on the

Input Alarms panel.
No Alarms
ALARM No. 25 OK
When no alarms are active (excluding the OK alarm), the OK alarm is raised. This alarm
can be considered an ALL OK alarm.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The normally active Watchdog alarm from the

standby subrack has been lost.
The standby ALS may be dead. Check its input and

output alarms in IMS.
The system is operating in a non-redundant mode.
This is normal for a non-redundant ALS.
Local Input Alarms

ALARM No. 27 to 32 LIN1 to LIN6
These alarms are received through the local MSU alarm input ports.
LIN1 and LIN2 are the defaults used as SI1 and SI2 inputs for the audio channel on the
MSU board. These inputs can be programmed as alarm inputs through IMS (see Define
Alarms in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).
System Selected MSU, Input 1 (AI11)
The SYSSEL output (AO11) is grounded by the MSU card to signal the CCC card that it
wishes to take control of the lines in the Changeover subrack. Input AI11 is then activated
by the Changeover Control Card (CCC) to signal the MSU that it is in control.
AI11 is used as an E1 lead if the MSU audio channel is enabled.
Possible Cause
The local subrack is in control.
Recommended Action
None required.
393
Appendix C: Alarms
Standby Fault MSU, Input 2 (AI21)

This is the health alarm of the standby subrack. This input is expected to be normally
inactive and if it becomes active a fault in the standby rack is assumed. Like the Watchdog
alarm it provides communication between main and standby MSU cards. It is common to
duplicate the same type of alarm mapping to the Standby Fault alarm as the Urgent Alarm
Output so as to switch control if an Urgent alarm was to occur.
AI11 is used as an E2 lead if the MSU audio channel is enabled.
Possible Cause
The redundant standby subrack has a problem.
Recommended Action
Use IMS to view the input/output alarms of the
standby subrack.
MSU Input 3 (AI12)

This is an MSU input alarm that may be used for other purposes such as monitoring the
power supply alarms.
MSU Input 4 (AI22)
This is an MSU input alarm that may be used for other purposes such as monitoring the
power supply alarms.
Watchdog, MSU Input 5 (AI13)
Note
The Watchdog output (AO13) is in an active state under normal

operation. For this reason a redundant ALS will never have the All
OK alarm active.
Should the Primary MCU card in the ALS go dead, or the MSU lose power, this output
will go inactive to indicate it has failed. In addition to these two non-configurable triggers,
additional alarm inputs can be mapped to this MSU output to trigger a changeover (see
Define Alarms in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). It is
common to connect all operational alarms to the Standby Fault output and leave only the
loss of power and failure of a primary MCU to trigger the watchdog. The Watchdog input
(AI13) monitors the Watchdog output of the other subrack. If this input goes high
(inactive) the MSU will demand control by asserting the SYSSEL Output (AO11).
MSU Input 6 (AI23)
The AI23 input is commonly used to detect a problem with the E1 link associated with the
local subrack. The backbone switch (ADS) connected to the E1 ports of the Primary MCU
card provides this signal. It provides a faster indication of a lost E1 than waiting for a
LOS, NOS, or RRA signal on the E1 link and will result in a quicker changeover between
subracks.
394
025-9574E
Test Condition
ALARM No. 33 TEST
This alarm is raised when a loopback test is initiated from the maintenance terminal.
Possible Cause
A loopback test is underway on an E1 link in this
subrack.
Recommended Action
Use IMS to remove the loopback test. (See
Loopback in Acom Software Installation and
Maintenance Terminal Active

ALARM No. 34 MAINT
This alarm is raised when a maintenance terminal is opened on the ALS.
Possible Cause
A local IMS connection is active with this subrack.
Recommended Action
Not a problem, indicates there is a local RS232 IMS
session active.
DIU4 Alarms
ALARM No. 35, 36, 37 DIU4 SLIPS, DIU4 NO CLOCK, DIU4 NO HDLC
These alarms are raised when the DIU4 board detects a slip, loss of clocking, or loss of
HDLC (High-level Data Link Control) communication with the Primary MCU3.
ALARM No. 40 Console Alarm
Indicates a console from the local Operator SubRack (OSR) has lost serial
communications with the console PC.
Possible Cause
Console PC turned off.
Recommended Action
Check the power to the console PC and that it is
turned on.
ACS application not running.
Check that the ACS application is running and logged

in. Acknowledge any popup messages it might
display and check the status bar to verify
communications with the Acom Console Unit.
Baud rate or serial settings wrong in DIU

configuration.
Check the IMS and ACS configuration for the serial

port and baud rate (see Serial Port in Acom
Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 0259529).
The physical RS422 port to the console PC is bad.
Check DIU connection to console.
395
Appendix C: Alarms
ALARM No. 41 Backup Alarm

Not used with Acom.
ALARM No. 42 Data Alarm
The Data Alarm is generated by the External Clock serial port. The ALS expects regular
time updates from the external time source. If the Alarm Timeout in the External Clock
programming of IMS expires, the Data Alarm will activate. If a time source has never
been connected, this alarm will not activate.
Possible Cause
The ALS is not receiving time updates.
Recommended Action
Check the serial connection to the ALS. It may be
connected to an MCU port or a DIU card.
At the debug prompt, issue the command Test 8 80
to show time updates. To get to the debug prompt:
With a laptop, use cable 709-7345 and a terminal
program to connect directly to the Primary MCU
cards serial port 1 (38400 baud, 8N1). Press ESC
three times to get a login, and type in your password
(default 8564888).
ALARM No. 43 Line Alarm

The Line Alarm is generated by the LIT card. If a line test fails the alarm is activated.
ALARM No. 44 Bearer Alarm
Not used with Acom.
ALARM No. 45 Remote Alarm
Not used with Acom.
ALARM No. 46 LCB Alarm
Not used with Acom.
If the ALS loses communications with the Acom DS3 Subrack (ADS), this alarm will
activate.
Possible Cause
The E1 link to the ADS has been broken.
Recommended Action
Check for any associated RRA, NOS, or LOS alarms.
Check for a physical break in the link. Check the
SMB connectors for slippage.
The ALS can no longer communicate with the ADS

over time slot 16.
396
Check the Link Signaling Scheme in IMS (see Acom

Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 0259529). The Link Signaling Scheme should be set to
LCB 1-4, the number refers to the physical port the
ALS is connected to on the ADS.
025-9574E
ALARM No. 47 E1-T1 Converter RA (Pri)

When the Acom subrack is configured as an E1 to T1 protocol rate converter, this alarm
indicates a problem on the primary side (local to the ADS).
ALARM No. 48 E1-T1 Converter RA (Sec)
When the Acom subrack is configured as an E1 to T1 protocol rate converter, this alarm
indicates a problem on the secondary side (local to the remote console end).
ALARM No. 49 Excessive Clipping
Not used with Acom.
ALARM No. 56 SMU LAN Alarm
Not used with Acom.
Generated by the SMU on an OpenSky VoIP system.
ALARM No. 57 SMU Ping Alarm
Not used with Acom
Generated by the SMU on an OpenSky VoIP system.
SMU Alarm
ALARM No. 58 SMU
This alarm indicates a problem has developed with the SMU card.
Possible Cause
DSP signal processing loop has too many modules
enabled, exceeding the maximum number of DSP
instruction cycles allowed.
Recommended Action
Check the SMU programming. If using User Defined
resource allocation, verify the number of resources
does not exceed the CPU clock cycles or memory of
the DSP. (See SMU Card Options in Acom
Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 0259529.)
From the SMU debug prompt, issue the command
SMU and verify that the each DSP does not exceed
100% clock cycles. To get to the debug prompt: With
a laptop, use cable 709-7345 and a terminal program
to connect directly to the SMU cards debug serial
port (38400 baud, 8N1). Press ESC three times to get
a login, and use password 8564888.
SMU host processor believes DSP is running at the

wrong speed. (A corrupt EEPROM can cause this.)
Replace SMU.
EEPROM cannot be read.
Replace SMU.
EEPROM read error (checksum bad).
Replace SMU.
397
Appendix C: Alarms
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Any of the three DSPs have a fault (watchdog, self

test).
Replace SMU.
DSP IDMA read/write failure.
Replace SMU.
FPGA failed to load.
Replace SMU.
2MBPS Clocking
Alarm No. 59
2M CLK
The current clocking source has been programmed to trigger a clocking alarm.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The current clocking source has been programmed to Check the ALS System Clocking programming. A
trigger a clocking alarm.
checkbox next to an available clocking source will
cause this alarm if the checked clock is used to drive
the 2Mbit links of the ALS.
Remote End Alarms

ALARMS No. 50 to 63 RAIN101-262 (with exception of alarms 58 and 59)
Two alarms are available for each of the remote ends connected to the G.703 links. If these
input alarms are to be used the remote end must be capable of sending these alarm signals.
ALARM No. 60 and 62 MCU Slot 0 PX RA1
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The connected backbone switching device (ADS) is Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected
reporting a remote alarm because of a failed backbone backbone switch (ADS) port A.
link.
ALARM No. 61 and 63 MCU Slot 0 PX RA2

Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The connected backbone switching device (ADS) is Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected
reporting a remote alarm because of a failed backbone backbone switch (ADS) port B.
link.
Input Alarm Handling

Alarm Storing
When a General Alarm is raised (see General Alarms on page 383), the time and type of
alarm is stored in non-volatile memory on the MCU in the ALS. The memory has space
398
025-9574E
for a total of 256 individual alarm events. The alarm memory also stores the time of the
last restart.
Alarm Urgency
Alarm urgency defines how urgent a maintenance action is following an alarm. The level
of alarm urgency is defined by the user to suit the level/type of maintenance the system is
intended to receive. The following levels are common:
Table 207: Alarm Urgency
Urgency
Maintenance Action
High
Immediate action any time of the day
Medium
Immediate action but only during normal work hours
Low
Action during next scheduled visit
None
Information only
The user can set any alarm output for any of the above alarm urgency levels. The alarms
that require actions of a desired urgency are simply programmed to go to the port allocated
for this level of urgency. This means that the alarm is assigned to an output to indicate a
particular urgency rather than assigning an urgency level to an alarm. This output is then
labeled the appropriate urgency level.
Alarm Acknowledgment
The acknowledgment can be initiated from IMS or when one or more of the input alarms
become active. Which input alarms initiate an acknowledgment is defined in IMS (see
Alarm Menu in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).
Alarm Outputs
Table 208 contains a list of the alarm outputs. The default column shows the default
programming for each output. You can change this configuration using IMS.
Table 208: Alarm Outputs
Output Alarm Name
Default
Output No.
Urgent Alarm LED
URGENT ALARM
Non Urgent Alarm LED
NON-URGENT ALARM
OK ALARM
MSU OP 1 (AO11)
SO1
MSU OP 2 (AO21)
SO2
MSU OP 3 (AO12)
URGENT ALARM
MSU OP 4 (AO22)
NON-URGENT ALARM
MSU OP 5 (AO13)
SYS ALARM
MSU OP6 (AO23)
OK ALARM
399
Appendix C: Alarms
Output Alarm Name
Default
Output No.
IMS Output Alarm
NONE
10
MCU3 Slot 0 Port1 RRA
RRA
11
MCU3 Slot 0 Port1 MRRA
MRRA
12
MCU3 Slot 0 Port1 RA1
NONE
13
NONE
14
MCU3 Slot 1 RRA
RRA
15
MCU3 Slot 1 MRRA
MRRA
16
MCU3 Slot 1 RA1
NONE
17
MCU3 Slot 1 RA2
NONE
18
MCU3 Slot 2 RRA
RRA
19
MCU3 Slot 2 MRRA
MRRA
20
MCU3 Slot 2 RA1
NONE
21
MCU3 Slot 2 RA2
NONE
22
MCU3 Slot 3 RRA
RRA
23
MCU3 Slot 3 MRRA
MRRA
24
MCU3 Slot 3 RA1
NONE
25
MCU3 Slot 3 RA2
NONE
26
MCU3 Slot 0 Port2 RRA
RRA
27
MCU3 Slot 0 Port2 MRRA
MRRA
28
NONE
29
NONE
30
MCU3 Slot 5 RRA
RRA
31
MCU3 Slot 5 MRRA
MRRA
32
MCU3 Slot 5 RA1
NONE
33
MCU3 Slot 5 RA2
NONE
34
MCU3 Slot 6 RRA
RRA
35
MCU3 Slot 6 MRRA
MRRA
36
MCU3 Slot 6 RA1
NONE
37
MCU3 Slot 6 RA2
NONE
38
Primary MCU3 LED B7
URGENT ALARM
39
ACK All
LIN5 + RAIN01
40
Application Software Use
Alarm Output Defaults

This section defines the input alarm conditions that cause a default alarm to become
active. See Table 209 for definition of input alarms.
400
025-9574E
Table 209: Alarm Output Defaults

Alarm Type
Default Input Alarm
URGENT
CE, 2M NOS P, 2M NOS S, 2M LOS P, 2M LOS S, 2M EBER P, 2M EBER S, 2M MFA

P, 2M MFA S, 2M AIS P, 2M AIS S, ACOM, RFA, LIN3, LIN6
NON URGENT
64K NOS, 64K SLIP, 64K AIS, 2M SLIP P, 2M SLIP S 2M RRA P, 2M RRA S+ 2M
MRRA P, 2M MRRA S, LIN4, TEST
OK
OK
SYS
WATCHDOG, URGENT
RRA
CE, 2M NOS P, 2M LOS P, 2M EBER P, 2M NOS S +2M LOS S, 2M EBER S
MRRA
2M NOS P, 2M MFA P, 2M NOS S, 2M MFA S
SO1, SO2
These MSU outputs are default set up as SO1 and SO2 outputs (SO = E+M Signal Output)
associated with the audio channel on the MSU board. These outputs can be programmed as
alarm outputs through IMS.
ACK ALL
LIN5, RAIN101. This output is only used to initiate acknowledgment of all existing
alarms. Although this is not an ordinary output, it can be programmed as any other output.
Alarm Outputs over the G.703 Link

The Acom system is capable of transmitting alarm signals over any of the G.703 links.
This can be used to inform remote devices or other systems of any alarms that are
currently active. The Acom system provides 4 alarm outputs over a single G.703 link
according to the following:
RRA
MRRA
Multiframe Remote Received Alarm
RA1
Remote Alarm 1 (multiframe error)
RA2
Remote Alarm 2 (multiframe error)
These alarm names are used because they are part of the G.704 standard, however in the
Acom system they become arbitrary, as any input alarm can be used to raise any of these
output alarms. These output alarms are configured through IMS (see Alarm Menu in
Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529).
MSU Alarm Inputs/Outputs
Refer to the Acom Software Installation and Configuration manual P/N 025-9529.
401
Appendix C: Alarms
Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarm Definitions

Configuration Error
ALARM No. 0
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The installed modules do not match the programmed

configuration. One is missing or an unexpected
module was found. Communications may have been
lost with the module. This alarm is usually
accompanied by an active C LED on the back of the
Acom Console Unit.
In IMS or on the Acom Console Unit itself, look for a

red or yellow indicator as the problem slot.
Check the fault log for fault details. (See Fault Log
in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N
025-9529.)
To clear a Configuration alarm the faulty/missing
cards can be replaced or the current Acom Console
Unit configuration can be updated to Flash RAM
using IMS.
Amux Alarm
ALARM No. 1
Raised when a fault is detected during a restart or self test.
Possible Cause
Bad Acom Console Unit.
Recommended Action
Reset the Acom Console Unit. Replace Acom
Console Unit if you receive a 2nd alarm.
Acked Alarms
ALARM No. 2 ACK
This alarm is raised when any alarm is acknowledged but not yet cleared.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The system is automatically acking alarms
Remove all input alarms from the Ack All output

alarm definition in IMS. (See Define Alarms in
025-9529).
A technician has acked alarms
Technicians should not ACK active alarms.
All OK
ALARM No. 3
No alarms appear in the system. This is a good alarm to have.
402
025-9574E
Test Condition
ALARM No. 4 TEST
This alarm is raised when a loopback test is initiated from the maintenance terminal.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
A loop back test is underway on an E1 link in this

Acom Console Unit.
Use IMS to remove the loopback test. (See

Loopback in Acom Software Installation and
Maintenance Terminal Active

ALARM No. 5 MT
The IMS maintenance terminal is connected to this Acom device.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
A local IMS connection is active with this Acom

Console Unit.
Not a problem, indicates there is a local RS232 IMS

session active.
Digital Input 1 (through 6)

ALARMS No. 6 through 11
Programmable input alarm using IMS. These inputs may be active when the local input is
programmed as an Acom Alarm and the input is active. Not used with Acom.
Link A Offline
ALARM No. 12
The Acom Console Unit has lost communications with the Acom DS3 connected to E1
port 1. This alarm is accompanied by a red A LED on the back of the Acom Console
Unit.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
An Acom Console Unit is not

passing the data to the ADS.
Reset the Acom Console Units between this device and the ADS. Each
Acom Console Unit is responsible for passing data from E1 port to E1
port.
Acom Console Units hooked up

incorrectly.
Check the connections between Acom Console Units and the ADS. Port
1 on a Acom Console Unit should connect with E1 port 2 on the next.
There should not be any E1 port 1 links connected to an adjacent E1
port 1.
Broken E1 link.
The E1 link that is serviced by the Dual E1 card port 1 does not have a
data connection to an ADS on time slot 16. Check for breaks in the E1
down the line. Check for red LEDs on the Dual E1 cards of the Acom
Console Units between the local and the ADS.
403
Appendix C: Alarms
Link B Offline
ALARM No. 13
The Acom Console Unit has lost communications with the Acom DS3 connected to E1
port 2. This alarm is accompanied by a red B LED on the back of the Acom Console
Unit.
Console Alarm
ALARM No. 14
This Acom Console Unit has lost previously established communications with the ACS.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Serial cable unplugged.
Check RS-232 cable between ACS COM port and Acom Console Unit
COM1 port.
PC turned off.
Check the power to the console PC and that it is turned on.
ACS turned off.
Check that the ACS application is running and logged in.

Acknowledge any popup messages it might display and check the
status bar to verify communications with the Acom Console Unit.
Baud rate or serial settings wrong in

Acom Console Unit data port.
Check the Acom Console Unit programming for the console data port.
The Acom Console Unit baud rate should match the AcomConsole.ini
setting (see [Digital Outputs] in Acom Software Installation and
Console Audio Facilities Alarm

ALARM No. 21
Not used with Acom.
The Audio Facility Alarm is generated when the Acom Console Unit was in
communications with an audio interface through the Data connector on the OAM and
has since lost the heartbeat signal.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
OAM Data cable unplugged from audio Check the data cable between the Acom Console Unit OAM
interface.
Data port and the audio interface.
Audio interface turned off.
Check the power to the audio interface and that it is turned on.
Resetting the Acom Console Unit will remove this alarm, it will
no longer expect an audio interface.
404
025-9574E
E1 Slot 0 Link X No Signal

ALARM No. 33 and 44 NOS
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
The Acom Console Unit does not detect an E1 Check E1 connections between the Acom Console Unit and
signal from the connected device on the
alarming port.
This alarm is cleared by either disabling the E1 framer,
replacing the E1 daughter card, or restoration of the signal. It
is automatically cleared only when the 2 Mbps signal is fully
restored.
The E1 signal is not strong enough.
The inbound E1 signal may not be strong enough to drive the

circuit input. No more than 6 dBm @ 1000 Hz may be
allowed.
Use an E1 test set to check inbound signal strength.
Swap Tx/Rx pairs on both ends and see if the problem
follows the cable.
Check/replace connectors on Rx cable.
E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of Sync

ALARM No. 34 and 45 LOS
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
No Signal from the E1 port. LOS would be

See NOS alarm.
Noise or poor signal strength has made the

frame alignment difficult or impossible to
detect.
Check E1 connections between the MCU and connected

equipment using the system map.
The quality of the inbound link may be questionable; isolate
circuits and troubleshoot.
Use an E1 tester to measure signal strength.
E1 Slot 0 Link X Receive Remote Alarm

ALARM No. 35 and 46 RRA
Possible Cause
The connected device is reporting a remote alarm (all
1s) on the E1 link.
Recommended Action
Follow the circuit to the alarming device looking for
an open E1 and/or an RRA output alarm on the
connected device.
405
Appendix C: Alarms
E1 Slot 0 Link X Exceeded Bit Error Rate

ALARM No. 36 and 47 EBER
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
No Signal from the E1 port. LOS would be

See NOS alarm.
High loss on the E1 circuit.
Check E1 connections between the Acom Console Unit and

Use E1 tester to measure signal strength.
E1 Slot 0 Link X frame slips

ALARM No. 37 and 48 SLIP
This alarm is raised for each slip except the first slip after restart. It is cleared by disabling
the channel, or replacing the card (at either end). It is cleared automatically only after a
slip free period of 60 minutes or less (programmable in IMS
Possible Cause
Clocking sources for E1 devices are not in
sync causing intermittent slips.
Recommended Action
Allow the Acom device to accept clocking from the E1/T1 link
using IMS.
1. From the IMS menu select Configure, System Clocking.
2. Add all of the Available Clocking Sources to the Clocking
list.
Repeat these two steps for the other Acom devices on the E1
ring.
E1 Slot 0 Link X Loss of MultiFrame Alignment

ALARM No. 38 and 49 MFA
Multiframe synchronization is lost when the framer chip does not detect the multiframe
sync bit. If this occurs, the MFA alarms are raised. The MFA alarms are cleared when the
first correct multiframe alignment signal is detected.
Possible Cause
Connected device is not using TS16 for the
same purpose as the alarming device.
Recommended Action
TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling bits, or as
a clear voice channel. The expected signaling was not detected
on TS16; check E1 configuration on both ends (see Dual E1
Module in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/
N 025-9529).
E1 Slot 0 Link X
ALARM No. 39 and 50 CRC4
406
025-9574E
This alarm is raised when a CRC error is reported by the framer chip and cleared when it
has received two correct CRC multiframes.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Connected device is not using TS16 for the

same purpose as the alarming device.
TS16 can be used as a data channel, CAS signaling bits, or as a

clear voice channel. The expected signaling was not detected
on TS16, check E1 configuration on both ends.
Noise or poor signal strength.
Check E1 connections between the Acom Console Unit and

Use an E1 tester to measure signal strength.
E1 Slot 0 Link X MultiFrame Remote Alarm

ALARM No. 40 and 51 MFR
The MFR alarm is raised when the Framer detects a Multiframe Receive Remote Alarm.
The Acom Console Unit is capable of both sending and receiving this alarm. An E1 bit is
set on the transmitted multiframe to signal a MFR.
Possible Cause
Recommended Action
Remote device has detected loss of incoming 2Mbps signal.
Follow MFA and RRA alarms to the source.
Remote device has detected loss of multiframe alignment

signal.
Follow MFA and RRA alarms to the source.
E1 Slot 0 Link X RA1

ALARM No. 41 and 52
Possible Cause
The connected DS3 is reporting a remote alarm
because of a failed DS3 link.
Recommended Action
Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected DS3
Switch port 1.
E1 Slot 0 Link X RA2

ALARM No. 42 and 53
Possible Cause
The connected DS3 is reporting a remote alarm because
of a failed DS3 link.
Recommended Action
Check for a broken DS3 link on the connected DS3
Switch port 1.
407
Appendix C: Alarms
ADS Alarm Descriptions

This section describes ADS alarms and how they are detected.
Input Alarm Description

Digital Inputs
Purpose
The Digital Inputs are for any general purpose external alarm input to be used by the ADS.
The first six inputs are typically configured to allow the current state of a Changeover
Subrack to be known by the ADS.
Alarm IDs
Note
The following table shows a typical configuration.
Alarm
Number
Alarm
Name
Digital 0
Is typically used internally by the ADS as the

Changeover state indicator for MCU Slot 1 Link 1
Digital 1

Digital 2

Digital 3

Digital 4

Digital 5

Digital 6
Digital 7
Comment
Description
The DCU supports eight optically isolated digital inputs. The digital inputs shall be polled
at a rate of 100ms. The Digital Input alarm shall be active when a voltage is applied to the
digital input.
The first six digital inputs are typically configured to monitor the Changeover State for the
first three MCU cards. In this case, each E1 link on an MCU card is assigned a digital
408
025-9574E
input. Therefore, when a digital input is active it indicates that the ALS connected to the
associated E1 link is active.
Internal Link Error
Purpose
The Internal Link Error alarm is required to provide a method for the ALS to discover if
the ADS it has been connected to is working correctly. A normal setup of the system
would define a Digital Output as being activated when the Internal Link Error is active.
This Digital Output is then connected to the ALS. The ALS will use this signal to decide if
it can be the master ALS or if it must release control to the standby ALS.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
MCU A Link1
MCU Slot 1 Link 1
MCU A Link 2
MCU Slot 1 Link 2
10
MCU B Link 1
MCU Slot 2 Link 1
11
MCU B Link 2
MCU Slot 2 Link 2
12
MCU C Link 1
MCU Slot 3 Link 1
13
MCU C Link 2
MCU Slot 3 Link 2
Comment
Description
Each E1 link on an installed MCU card in an ALS system shall support an Internal Link
Error alarm. An Internal Link Error alarm can only be generated after an ALS/ACU has
started communication with the ALS on an E1 link and caused a Link Control Block to be
created (A Link Control Block is only created when the ADS has received a
CREATE_OLCB or CREATE_LLCB command from the ACU or ALS). An Internal
Link Error alarm shall be activated when any of the following is present for the specified
E1 link:
E1 link : No Signal
E1 link: Loss of Sync
E1 link : AIS being received
Link Control Block in Standby mode and Digital Input from Changeover Subrack for this
E1 link indicates it is selected.
When the Link Control Block is destroyed (due to the ALS or ACU being removed from
the system or having a fatal failure) then the Internal Link Error alarm shall maintain its
active state. The alarm can only be cleared once the Link Control Block is created again
and all error conditions are cleared.
409
Appendix C: Alarms
If a Link Control Block has never been created then the Internal Link Error alarm shall be
inactive.
Description for Intersite Bearer
If the port is configured for use as an Intersite Bearer (ISB main, ISB main backup, ISB
standby, or ISB standby backup port), the alarm indicates that the port is unable to be used
for main/backup/standby.
Internal Link Master
Purpose
This alarm enables the IMS Maintenance Terminal to indicate which of the ALS links are
active.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
20
MCU A Link 1
MCU Slot 1 Link 1
21
MCU A Link 2
MCU Slot 1 Link 2
22
MCU B Link 1
MCU Slot 2 Link 1
23
MCU B Link 2
MCU Slot 2 Link 2
24
MCU C Link 1
MCU Slot 3 Link 1
25
MCU C Link 2
MCU Slot 3 Link 2
Comment
Description
Each E1 link on an installed MCU card in an ADS system shall support an Internal Link
Master alarm. A total of six MCU cards are allowed for but support is only implemented
for the first three MCU cards. An Internal Link Master alarm can only be generated when
an ALS has started communication with the ADS on an E1 link and caused a Link Control
Block to be created (Note: This alarm is never generated if an ACU is connected to the E1
link). An Internal Master alarm shall be activated when the Link Control Block is in the
active mode. As such this alarm is actually a state indicator and not a real alarm.
When the Link Control Block is destroyed, the Internal Link Master alarm shall be
returned to its idle state.
Description for Intersite Bearer
If the port is configured for use as an Intersite Bearer (ISB main, ISB main backup, ISB
standby, or ISB standby backup port) the alarm takes a different meaning.
410
025-9574E
This alarm would typically be mapped to the information output alarm for all ISB
controller ports, so at a glance a user can tell if any port at this ADS is actively controlling.
Likewise, backup or standby controller ports can also map this alarm to the major output
alarm notifying users of the critical condition that their 1:1 redundancy has been called
upon and they may no longer be resilient to further failures.
Card Configuration
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when the installed cards do not match what the ADS system was
expecting. This could be that a new card has been installed, or an existing card has failed.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
31
Configuration
Comment
Description
When IMS does an Update to NVRAM the current list of installed cards is saved. The
DCU will then use this saved list and the list of cards present to decide if the Configuration
alarm is to be active. If extra cards are found in the rack, or if the saved configuration
indicates a card is missing, then the configuration alarm shall be activated.
DS3 Loss Of Signal
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is not connected or has failed. A DCU card has
two DS3 links.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
32
Link A LOS
Loss of Signal for DCU Link A
33
Link B LOS
Loss of Signal for DCU Link B
Comment
Description
Loss of Signal from a DS3 Link is detected by the PM4328 IC. (Bit 0 of register 0x100F).
Whenever a change in state occurs an interrupt is generated and the new state is passed to
the alarm handler.
411
Appendix C: Alarms
DS3 Loss Of Frame

Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is connected but cannot detect the DS3 frame.
This can be due to AIS being received, errors on the DS3 link, or insufficient signal level.
A DCU card has two DS3 links.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
34
Link A LOF
Loss of Frame for DCU Link A
35
Link B LOF
Loss of Frame for DCU Link B
Comment
Description
Loss of Frame from a DS3 Link is detected by the PM4328 IC. (Bit 1 of register 0x100F).
Whenever a change in state occurs an interrupt is generated and the new state is passed to
the alarm handler.
DS3 Alarm Indication Signal
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is connected but has detected all ones on the
link. A DCU card has two DS3 links.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
36
Link A AIS
Alarm Indication Signal for DCU Link

A
37
Link B AIS
Alarm Indication Signal for DCU Link

B
Comment
Description
Alarm Indication Signal from a DS3 Link is detected by the PM4328 IC. (Bit 2 of register
0x100F). Whenever a change in state occurs an interrupt is generated and the new state is
passed to the alarm handler.
412
025-9574E
DS3 Link Failure

Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link is unable to be used to pass audio/data around
the ADS ring.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
38
Link A Failed
Link A not usable
39
Link B Failed
Link B not usable
Comment
Description
The Link Failed alarm is made active whenever the DCU discovers that it cannot use the
link to talk to the adjacent racks. This alarm shall be set when any of the following
conditions are present:
DS3 Loss Of Signal
DS3 Loss Of Frame
Failure of C-Bit messaging to talk to adjacent rack
Lockup of adjacent rack
DS3 Link Wrapped
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when a DS3 link has been placed into the wrapped mode.
Wrapped mode is used to cause all data and audio to go around the ring in the opposite
direction and hence skip the broken link.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
40
Link A Wrapped
Link A is wrapped
41
Link B Wrapped
Link B is wrapped
Comment
413
Appendix C: Alarms
Description
The Link Wrapped alarm is made active whenever the DCU discovers that it cannot use
the link to talk to or pass audio to an adjacent rack. This alarm shall be set when any of the
following conditions are present:
DS3 Loss Of Signal
DS3 Loss Of Frame
Failure of C-Bit messaging to talk to adjacent rack
Lockup of adjacent rack
Failure of Link startup negotiations
Forced wrap by the IMS maintenance terminal
DCU Ring Off-Line
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when both sides of the DS3 link has failed and hence this DCU
card has been isolated.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
42
Ring Offline
Comment
Description
The Ring Off Line alarm is made active whenever the DCU discovers that it cannot use
either DS3 links. This implies that both DS3 Link A Wrapped and DS3 Link B Wrapped
shall be active. The alarm is cleared when either of the wraps are removed.
Incorrect DS3 Port Connection
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate if a DCU has been connected to the incorrect port on an adjacent
DCU. An incorrect connection is defined as connecting Port A to Port A or Port B to Port
B.
414
025-9574E
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
43
Alarm Name
Comment
Incorrect Port
Connection
Description
When the DCU communicates with an adjacent DCU they shall exchange information
about the DS3 port being used. If the DS3 ports are different (i.e. Port A connected to Port
B) then the alarm is cleared. If the DS3 ports are the same then the alarm is set.
DCU NV Configuration
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate if the saved configuration is valid.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
44
NV Configuration
Comment
Description
When the loads its configuration from NVRAM it shall generate a checksum for the data
read and compare it to the expected value. If the values dont match the NV Configuration
alarm is set and the saved configuration is not restored. The NV Configuration alarm shall
only be cleared once a valid saved configuration is loaded.
No Backplane Time Slots Available
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate if an audio connected failed due to there not being any free time
slots on the ADS rack backplane bus.
415
Appendix C: Alarms
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
45
Alarm Name
Comment
No Backplane Time
Slots
Description
When an audio channel is required to be passed on an E1 link to a ALS or ACU then the
DCU card must connect the required channel on the DS3 ring to the backplane bus. If the
backplane bus is fully used the No Backplane Time Slots alarm shall be activated. This
alarm shall remain active until a new connection is required and a free time slot on the
backplane is found.
DCU Packet Memory Exhausted
Purpose
This alarm shall indicate when the DCU was unable to send a message due to there being
no memory available to store the message to be sent. This is a serious alarm since it
indicates that a message has failed and hence the system can enter an unknown state. (i.e.
message to turn PTT off might be lost and hence some radio resources might be left keyed
up)
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
46
Alarm Name
Comment
Packet Memory
Exhausted
Description
When the DCU attempts to send a message on the Ring it must allocate a temporary
storage for the message. If the temporary storage cannot be allocated then the Packet
Memory Exhausted alarm is set. This alarm shall only be cleared once the IMS terminal is
used to Ack the alarm.
DCU Packet Memory Insufficient
Purpose
Reserved for future use
416
025-9574E
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
47
Alarm Name
Comment
Packet Memory
Insufficient
Description
This alarm is unused.
MCU Packet Memory Exhausted
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
Comment
48
MCU A Packet
Memory Exhausted
MCU Slot 1
72
MCU B Packet
Memory Exhausted
MCU Slot 2
96
MCU C Packet
Memory Exhausted
MCU Slot 3
MCU E1 Loss Of Signal

Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is receiving a signal or not.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
49
MCU A Link 1 LOS
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
58
MCU A Link 2 LOS
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
72
MCU B Link 1 LOS
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
81
MCU B Link 2 LOS
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
96
MCU C Link 1 LOS
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
105
MCU C Link 2 LOS
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
417
Appendix C: Alarms
Description
The E1 Loss Of Signal shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC bit 7 of register
FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. (If LOS is detected the alarm shall
be set
MCU E1 Loss Of Framing
Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is receiving a signal but cannot
detect or sync to the E1 framing.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
Comment
50
MCU A Link 1
LOF
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
59
MCU A Link 2
LOF
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
73
MCU B Link 1
LOF
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
82
MCU B Link 2
LOF
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
97
MCU C Link 1
LOF
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
106
MCU C Link 2
LOF
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Description
The E1 Loss Of Frame shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC (bit 5 of register
FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. If LOF is detected the alarm shall
be set.
MCU E1 Alarm Indication Signal
Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is receiving an alarm indication
signal.
418
025-9574E
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
51
MCU A Link 1 AIS
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
60
MCU A Link 2 AIS
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
74
MCU B Link 1 AIS
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
83
MCU B Link 2 AIS
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
98
MCU C Link 1 AIS
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
107
MCU C Link 2 AIS
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
Description
The E1 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC
(bit 6 of register FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. If AIS is detected
the alarm shall be set.
MCU E1 Remote Alarm
Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link is receiving a Remote Alarm indication from the far
end.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
52
MCU A Link 1 RA
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
61
MCU A Link 2 RA
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
75
MCU B Link 1 RA
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
84
MCU B Link 2 RA
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
99
MCU C Link 1 RA
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
108
MCU C Link 2 RA
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
Description
The E1 Remote Alarm shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC (bit 4 of register
FRS0) on the MCU4 card and passed to the DCU card. If RA is detected the alarm shall be
set.
419
Appendix C: Alarms
MCU E1 Remote Alarm 1

Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if the CCS signaling on an E1 link is receiving a Remote Alarm
1.
Remote Alarm 1 is defined as bit 2 of the CCS stream for time slot 16.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
53
MCU A Link 1 RA1
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
62
MCU A Link 2 RA1
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
76
MCU B Link 1 RA1
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
85
MCU B Link 2 RA1
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
100
MCU C Link 1 RA1
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
109
MCU C Link 2 RA1
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
Description
The E1 Remote Alarm 1 shall be detected by the DCU card. When the ALS or ACU
activates its Remote Alarm 1 output a CCS message for time slot 16 is sent. This is passed
by the MCU4 card to the DCU card. The DCU card shall then check if the CCS message
was for time slot 16 and if so shall test bit 2. If bit 2 is a 0 the alarm shall be made active.
MCU E1 Remote Alarm 2
Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if the CCS signaling on an E1 link is receiving a Remote Alarm
2.
Remote Alarm 3 is defined as bit 2 of the CCS stream for time slot 16.
420
025-9574E
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
54
MCU A Link 1 RA2
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
63
MCU A Link 2 RA2
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
77
MCU B Link 1 RA2
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
86
MCU B Link 2 RA2
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
101
MCU C Link 1 RA2
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
110
MCU C Link 2 RA2
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
Description
The E1 Remote Alarm 2 shall be detected by the DCU card. When the ALS or ACU
activates its Remote Alarm 2 output a CCS message for time slot 16 is sent. This is passed
by the MCU4 card to the DCU card. The DCU card shall then check if the CCS message
was for time slot 16 and if so shall test bit 3. If bit 3 is a 0 the alarm shall be made active.
MCU LCB Missing
Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if an Link Control Block had been created (by either the ALS or
ACU sending the required create message) and is then destroyed (due to failure or the
ALS/ACU, etc.).
This Alarm is used mainly to indicate that some external device was present but is now
missing. This alarm can be activate by the user changing the system configuration (e.g.
moving an ACU loop to a different MCU).
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
55
MCU A Link 1 LCB
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
64
MCU A Link 2 LCB
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
78
MCU B Link 1 LCB
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
87
MCU B Link 2 LCB
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
102
MCU C Link 1 LCB
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
111
MCU C Link 2 LCB
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
421
Appendix C: Alarms
Description
When a ALS or ACU communicates with the ADS and request a Operator Link Control
Block or a Line Link Control Block is created the ADS shall record this creation request.
If this Link Control Block is later destroyed (could be due to failure of the ALS/ACU,
failure of the E1 link, or a configuration change) it shall activate the LCB Missing alarm.
This alarm can only be cleared by a Link Control Block being created for the link or a
reset of the system. When the system first powers up there shall be no LCB Missing
alarms active.
MCU E1 Framer Slips
Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if an E1 link on an MCU card is slipping (2Mb clock different
between the internal source and the source on the other end of the E1 link).
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
56
MCU A Link 1 Slip
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
65
MCU A Link 2 Slip
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
79
MCU B Link 1 Slip
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
88
MCU B Link 2 Slip
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
103
MCU C Link 1 Slip
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
112
MCU C Link 2 Slip
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
Description
The E1 Slip shall be detected by the FALC54 or FALC55 IC (bit 3 of register FRS0) on
the MCU4 card. When a slip is detected a 60 second timer shall be started. If a second slip
is detected within this 60 second period then the Slip alarm is set and passed to the DCU
card. The slip alarm shall only be cleared if there are no more slips within a 60 second
window.
MCU LCB Backup
Purpose
Alarm is used to indicate if an Link Control Block is in the standby mode. This alarm shall
only be active if a Link Control Block has been created.
422
025-9574E
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
57
MCU A Link 1 Backup
MCU Slot 1, Link 1
66
MCU A Link 2 Backup
MCU Slot 1, Link 2
80
MCU B Link 1 Backup
MCU Slot 2, Link 1
88
MCU B Link 2 Backup
MCU Slot 2, Link 2
103
MCU C Link 1 Backup
MCU Slot 3, Link 1
112
MCU C Link 2 Backup
MCU Slot 3, Link 2
Comment
Description
An ALS must be connected and a Link Control Block must have been created for this E1
link. If the ALS is in the standby mode then the LCB Backup alarm shall be active. When
the ALS becomes the master the LCB Backup alarm shall be cleared.
DCU Boot Error
Purpose
The DCU Boot Error is used to indicate if a fault occurred when the DCU started. This
alarm cannot be cleared unless the DCU is reset.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
120
DCU Boot Error
Comment
Description
When a DCU first boots it runs a boot loader. The boot loader shall verify the following
items:
RAM is OK
Meta File Checksum is OK
Meta File Version is valid
Boot Loader Checksum is OK
Valid application firmware present
Application firmware can be unzipped ok.
If any of the above checks fails then the failsafe code shall be loaded and the reason
recorded. The failsafe code shall then generate the DCU Boot Error alarm. This alarm can
only be cleared by fixing the boot problem and rebooting the DCU card.
423
Appendix C: Alarms
2Mb Clock Source Error

Purpose
The 2Mb Clock Source Error shall be set if IMS had defined one or more 2Mb clock
source and had triggered the clock source to cause an alarm.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
121
2Mb Clock Source
Comment
Description
IMS is used to define what 2Mb clock sources the DCU card is to use. Each of these clock
source can be specified to trigger an alarm when they become the active source. When the
DCU checks for a valid 2Mb clock to use it shall scan the provided list and select the first
active clock source. If this clock source is defined as triggering an alarm then the 2Mb
Clock Source alarm is set.
DCU Selftest Failure
Purpose
The Selftest Failure alarm shall be set if any of the tests done during a selftest fails.
Alarm IDs
Alarm
Number
Alarm Name
122
Self Test
Comment
Description
A DCU selftest is done at powerup and can also be done via IMS. The failure of any of the
selftest shall result in the Selftest Failure alarm being set. Once this alarm is set it cannot
be cleared except via a power cycle.
Input Alarm Handling

Alarm Storing
The alarms specified in section Input Alarm Description above are stored in an alarm log
in RAM storing 123 alarms. The alarm log is lost at restart of the DCU (reset or power
424
025-9574E
up). The change of state of an input alarm shall also be stored in the DCU Fault Log. The
Fault Log is stored in NVRAM and hence shall not be lost when the DCU is restarted. The
Alarm Fault Log entry shall include the time the alarm changed states and what the new
state is.
Alarm Outputs
General
Each input alarm can be sent to one, many or all alarm outputs. One, many or all input
alarms can be sent to the same alarm output. The required configuration is entered via IMS
Alarm Outputs
The following table contains a list of the alarm outputs.
Output Alarm Name
Alarm
Output
No.
Urgent Alarm LED
This is a RED Led on the MSU. It is

used to indicate a condition exists that
requires immediate action.
Non Urgent Alarm LED
This is a YELLOW Led on the MSU.

It is used to indicate a possible fault
exists that might required action
This is a GREEN Led to indicate that

there might be a fault. No action is
required.
Digital Output 1
Optical Isolated digital output
Digital Output 2
Digital Output 3
Digital Output 4
Digital Output 5
Digital Output 6
Digital Output 7
Digital Output 8
10
MCU A Link 1 System Select
11
Alarm reserved for MCU Slot 1 Link 1
MCU A Link 2 System Select
12
MCU B Link 1 System Select
13
MCU B Link 2 System Select
14
MCU C Link 1 System Select
15
MCU C Link 2 System Select
16
Purpose
425
Appendix C: Alarms
Output Alarm Operating Modes

An output alarm can be set to be in one of three operating modes:
1. Passive Mode
In passive mode the alarm output becomes active when an alarm input becomes
active and is de-activated only when it is acknowledged from IMS. This is the
default operating mode for alarm outputs.
2. Locked Mode
In locked mode the alarm output becomes active when an alarm input becomes
active. It can only be de-activated when acknowledged from IMS. The alarm input
becoming de-activated does not put the alarm output into the idle state. (In this
mode a brief failure, such a temporary link failure is latched until the alarm is
acknowledged.)
3. Pulsed Mode
In pulsed mode the alarm output will become active when an alarm input becomes
active. The output will stay active for a set time and then become de-activated. The
active pulse time is set from IMS and is common for all pulsed outputs.
Before the output can become active again the alarm input has to be de-activated or
the alarm acknowledged.
Supervisor Alarms in IMS

Supervisor alarms are designed to alert a supervisor that there is a problem with the
console system.
Supervisor Console Alarms
Output alarms will cause the on-screen ALARM button to flash red and an audible sound
to be played to the supervisor. This functionality was designed to alert supervisors that
there is an alarm condition within the system so that he/she may take appropriate action in
a timely fashion. Note that some alarms are easily resolved by the supervisor without
calling in the system maintenance technician. In order to see alarm indications at an
operator console position you must use the login type SUPERVISOR and you must
have the desired alarm strings defined in the AcomConsole.ini file. Alarm strings are
defined in the AcomConsole.ini file under the [ALARMS] section. Note that if an alarm
is not defined then it will not be displayed on the supervisors console. There are four
types of alarms that can be defined and displayed at the supervisor position. These alarm
types include NAME, ACU, CONSOLE, and DEVICE alarms (ACU is Acom Console
Unit). These alarms are generated by various system components and are passed around
the system via time slot 16 of the E1 console loops.
If the Alarm button exists on the Acom Console Software screen, the device alarms will be
reported regardless if you are logged in as Supervisor or any other operator type.
426
025-9574E
Supervisor Alarms in IMS
Any position can be a Supervisor position using one of the two methods.
1. AcomConsole.ini has Operator Types set with ,S after the name.
Example: Type1=SUPERVISOR,3,3,S
2. The Acom Console Unit supervisor checkbox is enabled in the Acom Console Unit
settings in IMS. This means that this position will be a Supervisor Position
regardless of the login type set in the AcomConsole.ini file.
Name Alarms
NAME alarms are generated by an ALS within a system whenever one of its Output
Alarms goes active. NAME alarms are assigned a unique identifier number (0-115) within
the ALS programming and can be viewed or configured via IMS (see Alarm Menu in
Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). To define NAME alarms
within your AcomConsole.ini file use the following format, (where: n = 0 115 from
Table 210):
NAMEn=description
Table 210: NAME Alarm Cross-Reference

N Value
ALS (IMS) Value
Alarm Reference
Urgent Alarm LED
Non-Urgent Alarm LED
Not used with Acom
Standby Fault
MSU Out3 (A012)
MSU Out4 (A022)
Standby Fault (watchdog)
MSU Out6 (A023)
Not used with Acom
10
10
MCU Slot 0 Port1 RRA
11
11
MCU Slot 0 Port1 MRRA
12
12
MCU Slot 0 Port1 RA1
13
13
14
14
MCU Slot 0 Port2 RRA
15
15
MCU Slot 0 Port2 MRRA
16
16
17
17
18-113
18-113
114
114
Primary MCU LED B7
115
115
Ack All
Not used with Acom
427
Appendix C: Alarms
Acom Console Unit (ACU) Alarms in IMS

ACU alarms are generated by a Acom Console Unit within a system whenever one of its
Output Alarms goes active. ACU alarms are assigned a unique identifier number (1-96)
within the Acom Console Unit programming and can be viewed/changed via IMS (see
Alarm Menu in Acom Software Installation and Configuration, P/N 025-9529). To
define ACU alarms within your AcomConsole.ini file use the following format (where:
n = 0 96 based on Table 211):
ACUn=description
Note that the ACU alarms as viewed by IMS are zero based but the alarms seen by the
supervisor console will be 1s based. So, to customize ACU alarm 0 your string would
start with ACU1= urgent alarm.
428
025-9574E
Table 211: ACU Alarm Cross-Reference

N Value
ACU (IMS) Value
Alarm Reference
Urgent Alarm LED
Non-Urgent Alarm LED
Digital Output 1
Digital Output 2
Digital Output 3
Digital Output 4
Digital Output 5
Digital Output 6
10
Not used with Acom
11
10
Ack All
12-28
11-27
Not used with Acom
29
28
E1 Slot0 Link1 RRA
30
29
E1 Slot0 Link1 MRRA
31
30
E1 Slot0 Link1 RR1
32
31
E1 Slot0 Link1 RR2
33
32
E1 Slot0 Link2 RRA
34
33
E1 Slot0 Link2 MRRA
35
34
E1 Slot0 Link2 RR1
36
35
E1 Slot0 Link2 RR2
37-96
36-95
Not used with Acom
Console Alarms
CONSOLE alarms are generated by a Acom Console Unit anytime the Acom Console
Unit fails to receive responses to polling from its associated ACS. CONSOLE alarms are
assigned a unique identifier number (1-128) which represents the number of the alarming
console position (refer to Table 3). To define CONSOLE alarms within your
AcomConsole.ini file use the following format (where: n = 0 128 based on Table 212):
CONSOLEn=description
429
Appendix C: Alarms
Table 212: Console Alarm Cross-Reference

N Value
Alarm Reference
Console Position 1
.
.
.
.
.
.
128
Console Position 128
Device Alarms
DEVICE alarms are generated by the Acom Console Unit (ACU) whenever a device fails
to respond to polling. DEVICE alarms are assigned a unique identifier number (1-255)
which represents the network address of the alarming equipment. Acom Console Unit
addresses are typically 1-99 and subracks are typically 100-255 (see Table 213). DEVICE
alarms do not need to be defined unless you want to customize the text associated with the
alarms. In other words, DEVICE alarms will always be displayed at the supervisor console
position regardless of your alarm definitions within your AcomConsole.ini file. To
define DEVICE alarms within your AcomConsole.ini file use the following format
(where: n = 0 255 based on Table 213):
DEVICEn=description
Table 213: Device Alarm Cross-Reference

N Value
Alarm Reference
ACU1
.
.
.
.
.
.
99
ACU99
100
ALS100
.
.
.
255
.
.
.
ALS255
Sample AcomConsole.ini file

Here is a sample [ALARMS] section of an AcomConsole.ini file. Note that in this
particular example there are four specific console positions that are being monitored by
this supervisor. The NAME and ACU alarms have been defined and will output a message
to contact technical support. Note that the Urgent alarms tell the supervisor to call
immediately and the non-urgent alarms specify normal business hours. The alarm strings
also allow us to tell the supervisor which area of the system is experiencing problems
(CCE room vs. console room). The CONSOLE and DEVICE alarms have been defined to
give meaningful names to each console position. Note that a CONSOLE alarm alerts the
430
025-9574E
supervisor that a console has been shut down and a DEVICE alarm indicates that a console
is actually experiencing a failure.
[Alarms]
;NAME Alarms (ALS Generated Output Alarms)
NAME0=Urgent Alarm Active in CCE Room- Call 24/7 Support Immediately
NAME1=Non-Urgent Alarm Active in CCE Room - Call helpdesk during
normal business hours
;OCU Alarms (ACU Generated Output Alarms)
OCU1=Urgent Alarm Active in Console Room - Call 24/7 Support
Immediately
OCU2=Non-Urgent Alarm Active in Console Room - Call helpdesk during
normal business hours
;CONSOLE Alarms (ACU Generated Output Alarms)
CONSOLE1=MTCE Console has been shut down
CONSOLE4=FlightDispatch Console #1 has been shut down
CONSOLE5=FlightDispatch Console #2 has been shut down
CONSOLE22=De-Ice Console has been shut down
;DEVICE Alarms (IMS Terminal Generated Output Alarms)
DEVICE1=MTCE Console is out of service
DEVICE4=FlightDispatch Console #1 is out of service
DEVICE5=FlightDispatch Console #2 is out of service
DEVICE100=Backroom Equipment Failure (ALS1A is out of service)
431
Appendix C: Alarms
432
025-9574E
Index
Index
Numerics
2-wire interface, 347
A
Acom Console Software (ACS), 347
Acom Console Unit (ACU), 22, 73, 347
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS), 347
Acom DS3 Switch (ADS) Subrack, 102
Acom Line Subrack (ALS), 347
Acom Multiplexer, 347
Acom System Overview, 20
ACU
COM Ports, 78
Mounting, 50
specifications, 74
ACU Alarm Definitions, 402
ACU Expansion Slots, 83
ACU Internal Layout, 76
ACU Jumpers, 70
ACU Main Board COM Ports 1-3, 78
ACU Main Board Connections, 78
ACU Main Board Functions, 76
ACU Plug-In Modules, 84
ACU service port (port 4), 78
ADS, 102
Alarm Generation, EIE, 166
Alarm Generation, EMU, 177
Alarm Generation, MSU, 212
Alarm Generation, TIE, 258
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), 347
Alarm Inputs, MSU, 213
Alarm Interface, MSU, 215
Alarm System, 371
Alarms, 371
ACU, 402
ALS, 385
General, 383
Logs, 373
A-Law, 347
ALS, 92
Building Earth Conductors, 97
Cable Assemblies, 99
Card installation, 94
Connection of Cable Shield, 100
Earth Connections (Acom), 97
Electrical Isolation, 96
Grounding, 97
Maximum Ratings, 101
Physical Characteristics, 101
Signal Cable Connections, 99
Slot compatibility, 95
Specifications, 100
Surge Suppression, 100
Antistatic Work Practice, 31
As-Built Documentation, 32
audible distortion, clipping, 348
Audio Interface, MSU, 214
Audio Jackbox
Mounting, 51
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD), 347
Automatic Location Information (ALI), 347
Automatic Number Identification (ANI), 347
B
Back Room Preparations, 33
Backbone Status, 26
backbone time slots, 26
backplane, 347
433
Index
Backup System Configurations, 320

Basic ADS Rack, 103
BDM Connector, SMU, 246
bearer, 347
bearer redundant, 355
Bearer Status, 27
bearer time slots, 25
bit error rate (BER), 348
branching connection, 348
broadcast connection, 348
C
CAD, 348
Calling Line Identification (CLI), 348
Calling Number Display (CND), 348
Capacity, 27
Card placement, 107
Carrier Operated Relay (COR), 349
CAS, 348
CCC, 106, 112
Replacing, 278
CCC Changeover Details and Specifications, 116
CCC Status LED Indications, 114
CCC Technical Specifications, 117
CCE, 20, 23, 348
CCE Components, 73
CCE Installation, 43
CCE Installation Procedures, 29, 43
CCU, 348
Changeover Card - 3 Way Coaxial Switch, 118
Changeover Card - 48/96 Way Switch, 123
Changeover Control Card, 112
Changeover Control Card (CCC), 348
Changeover Controller Extender Card (CCC-E),
348
Changeover Hardware, 106

Changeover Subrack, 106
Changeover Subrack (COS), 349
Changeover Subrack Description, 105
Changeover Troubleshooting, 108
channel, 348
Channel Associated Signaling (CAS), 348
Check Cabinet Route, 39
Circuit Card Installation (ADS), 104
Circuit Card Installation (ALS), 94
CLI, 348
clipping, 348
clock, clock source, 348
434
Cloning an Acom ALS, 102

CMOS, 348
CND, 348
Coax Loops, 41
COC, 348
CODEC, 348
codirectional interface, 349
COM 1 - COM 3, 78
Common Control Electronics, 20
Common Control Equipment (CCE), 348
Common Controller Unit (CCU), 348
communication link bearer, 347
communications ports, 78
companding, 349
Computer Aided Dispatch (CAD), 348
connection
branching, 348
broadcast, 348
Console Installation Procedures, 49
Console Loop Installation, 40
Console Network Installation, 42
Console Room Preparations, 40
COR, 349
COS, 349
COV-R, 123, 349
Replacing, 279
COV-R card, 107
COV-R Status LED Indications, 126
COV-R Technical Specifications, 131
COV-R Voice and Data Signals, P2, J1, and J2,
129
COV-T, 107, 118, 349

Replacing, 279
COV-T Status LED Indications, 121
COV-T Technical Specifications, 122
COV-V, 123, 349
Replacing, 279
COV-V card, 106
COV-V Status LED Indications, 126
COV-V Technical Specifications, 131
COV-V Voice and Data Signals, P4, P2 and P3,
128
CRC, 349
crosspoint switch, 349
CTCSS, 349
CTS, 349
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC), 349
025-9574E
Index
D
Data Circuit Terminating Equip (DCE), 349
Data Interface Unit, 142, 151
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE), 350
DCD, 349
DCE, 349
DCU, 349
Replacing, 280
decadic signaling, 349
Deskmic, 57
Diagnostic RS-232 Interface, 247
Diagnostic Serial Port, SMU, 245
DID, 349
differential data, 350
digital crosspoint switch, 349
Digital Input Interface, 81
digital inputs, 74
digital multiplex hierarchy, 350
Digital Output Interface, 82
digital outputs, 75
DIP Switch Settings, MSU, 207
DIU, 350
DIU1-2, 142
DIU1-2 Technical Specifications, 148
DIU1-4, 151
DPLL, 350
DS, 73
DS3, 350
DS3 Switch, 24
DSP Functions, 83
DSP Interfaces, 248
DSR, 350
DTE, 350
DTMF, 350
DTR, 350
Dual 4W E&M Module, 89
Dual E1 Fiber Module, 88
Dual E1 Interface Module, 86, 87
E
E&M 4-Wire Interface Unit, 168
E&M signaling, 350
E1 Digital Interfaces, 71
earth recall signal, 350
EBER, 350
EIE, 159, 350
EIE Technical Specifications, 166
Electromagnetic Compatibility, 101

EMC, 350
EMI, 350
EMU, 168, 350
EMU Connector Detail, 174
EMU Status LEDs, 172
EMU Technical Specifications, 178
Environment, 39
Environmental Issues, 321
EPIC, 350
ESD, 351
Ethernet Interface, 247
Ethernet Interface, SMU, 250
Ethernet Port, SMU, 245
ETSI, 351
Excessive Bit Error Rate, 350
Exchange Interface Card, 162
Exchange Interface Equipment (EIE), 350
Exchange Interface Unit Card, 159
External Interfaces (ACU), 77
F
FAS, 351
Fault Logs, 373
Faults, 319
Foot Switch, 69
FPGA, 351
FPGA and Interface Circuits, 247
frame, 25, 351
frame alignment, 351
Frame Alignment Signal (FAS), 351
framer, 351
G
gain, 351
Gain Setting and Impedance, TIE, 256
General Alarms, 383
General Preparation, 30
H
handshaking, 351
Hardware Connections (ACU), 76
HDB3, 351
HDLC, 195, 351
High Density Bipolar of Order 3 (HDB3), 351
High-Level Data Link Control (HDLC), 351
hot plugging, 351
435
Index
I
I/O Connector, 248
IDF, 351
IMS, 352
IMS terminal, 352
inband signaling, 352
Input Alarm Handling, 372
Install Additional Power, 35
Install Cable Trays, 37
Install Grounding System, 36
Installation in Subrack
MCU, 211
SMU, 249
Installation in Subrack, EMU, 177
Installation Procedures, 105
Instant Recall Recorder, 352
Integrated Management System (IMS), 352
Integrated Services Digital Network, 352
Integrator IRR
Acom Overview, 58
Installation, 61
intersite bearers, 25
intersite resources, 25
IOM-2, 352
IPAT, 352
IRR, 352
ISB, 25
ISDN, 195, 352
ISDN Oriented Modular Bus, v2, 352
ISDN Primary Access Transceiver, 352
J
JTAG Connector, SMU, 246
Jumper Link Settings, 207
L
LCB, 352
Lightning Protection, 38
line break, 352
line card, 352
Line Subrack Alarm Definitions, 385
Line Subracks, 92
link, 352
LIT, 352
LMFA, 353
Local Area Network (LAN), 21
local resources, 26
436
Log On, 23
Logger Card, 131
Logs
Alarm, 373
loop detect, 353
loop out, 353
loop seize, 353
loop signaling, 355
LOS, 353
loss of sync, 353
M
Main Control Unit, 353
MAINTENANCE LOG, 320
Maintenance Terminal Interface, 250
Manual Reset, 48
master clock, 353
MCU, 353
MCU Card Replacement (ADS), 297
MCU Card Replacement (ALS), 293
MCU Installation in ADS, 196
MCU Installation in LSR, 196
MCU Part Numbers and Compatibility, 104, 180
MCU Technical Specifications, 197
MDF, 353
Model 3030 PSAP TDD, 64
Mount Acom Punchdown Blocks on Demarc
Wall, 38
MSU, 353
MSU Interfaces, 209
MSU Technical Specifications, 213
multiframe, 353
Multiplexer Supply Unit, 202
MUSAC, 353
MUX, 353
N
non urgent alarm, 353
NOS, 353
NRZ, 353
O
OAM, 354
Operating Environment, 30
Operator Active Lamp, 65
Operators Audio Module, 85
Operators Audio Module LEDs, 85
025-9574E
Index
order wire, 354
P
partial time slot allocation, 354
PCM, 354
PCM-30, 355
PE, 355
Phase Locked Loop, 355
PLL, 355
Preventative Maintenance, 319
primary MCU, 355
primary rate, 355
Programmable Alarms, MSU, 213
Protective Earth (PE), 355
PSTN, 355
PTT, 355
Pulse Code Modulation, 354
R
Rack Configuration, 103
Rack Unit, 93
Radio Interface Unit (RIU), 224
Recommended Installer Materials and
Equipment, 33
Recorded Voice Announcement Card, 235
Recovered Clock, 355
redundant bearer, 355
Reference Voltage Strapping, 207
Replacing Acom Cards and Devices, 277
Replacing CCCs, 278
Replacing COV-R Cards, 279
Replacing COV-T Cards, 279
Replacing COV-V Cards, 279
Replacing Daughter Cards in a Acom Console
Unit, 290
Replacing DCU Cards, 280
Replacing EIE Cards, 291
Replacing EMU Cards, 291
Replacing Jackboxes, 292
Replacing MCU Cards in an ADS, 297
Replacing MCU Cards in an ALS, 293
Replacing MSU Cards, 301
Replacing RVA Cards, 302
Replacing SMU Cards, 302, 303
Replacing Telephone Radio Handset Interfaces,
305
Replacing UIO Cards, 306
Replacing YIE Cards, 291

Reset, manual, 48
RGU, 355
ring cadence, 355
Ring Cadence and Ring Tone, TIE, 256
Ring Generator Unit (RGU), 215
ring out signaling, 355
ring signal, 355
ring voltage, 355
RIU Card, 224
RMS, 355
RRA, 355
RS-232, 78
RS-485, 78
RTC, 194, 355
RTS, 355
RUN LED Indicator, SMU, 244
RVA, 355
RVA Card, 235
RX, 355
RXD, 355
S
Safety, 30
Safety Extra Low Voltage, 30
Safety Extra Low Voltage (SELV), 356
SCC, 356
SDI, 356
SELV, 30, 356
serial ports, 78
service word, 356
signaling, 356
Signaling Management Unit, 240
slave clock, 356
slip, 356
slot, 356
SMB, 356
SMU, 240, 356
SMU Daughter Boards, 248
SMU Technical Specifications, 249
SoundBlaster
configuration, 60
Speakers
Zetron-Brand, 54
Specifications (ALS), 100
Status LED Indicators, MCU, 186
Status LED Indicators, MSU, 205
Strap Settings, UIO, 264
437
Index
sub-multiframe, 356
subrack, 356
subrack backplane, 347
Subrack Mounting, 93
Subracks (additional), 108
subrate communication, 356
synchronous communication, 356
System Architecture, 31
System Card Descriptions, 111
System Console Connectors and pin-outs, 23
System Console Electrical Requirements, 23
System Console Hardware Requirements, 22
System Power Up Sequence, 46
System Reset, 206
System Reset, EMU, 173
System Reset, MCU, 190
System Reset, TIE, 255
T
TDM, 356
Telecom Network Voltage, 30
Telecommunication Network Voltage (TNV),
357
Telephone Interface Unit, 252

terminal, IMS, 352
Testing Backup Systems, 321
Testing of New/Existing Circuits, 34
TIE, 252, 356
TIE Connections, 256
TIE Installation, 258
TIE Interfaces, 254
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM), 356
time slot, 25
Time Slot (TS), 357
time slots, backbone, 26
438
TNV, 30, 357

traffic, 357
transceiver, 357
TRC, 357
TRHI
Mounting, 53
Troubleshooting, 108, 325
Troubleshooting Actions, 329
TS, 357
TSI, 357
TTL, 357
Twisted Pair Loops, 40
TX, 357
TXD, 357
U
UIO, 260, 357
UIO Input Interface, 262
UIO Interfaces, 262
UIO Output Interface, 262
UMS, 357
Universal Input/Output, 260
urgent alarm, 357
User Management System (UMS), 357
V
VF, 357
Voice Frequency (VF), 357
VoIP Line Subrack, 101
W
Watchdog Alarm, MSU, 213
Watchdog Timer, 357
025-9574E

Acom HW &amp; Maint 025-9574

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Acom HW &amp; Maint 025-9574

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Acom

Hardware Installation and Maintenance

Updated jumper locations for Deskmic Option on page 57.

Check Cabinet Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CCE Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Console Installation Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Changeover Control Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acom Card Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

COV-V / COV-R Alarm Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear Edge Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing Acom Cards and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Acom CCC Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Changeover Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Appendix A: Acom Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Appendix C: Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

AIS Detection at 2 MBPS Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DS3 Link Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Acom Software Installation and Configuration

Acom Console Design

Acom Console Operation

See As-Built Documentation Package

Product Definition Sheet

See As-Built Documentation Package

See As-Built Documentation Package

See As-Built Documentation Package

See As-Built Documentation Package

See As-Built Documentation Package

See As-Built Documentation Package

Power and Grounding

See As-Built Documentation Package

See As-Built Documentation Package

System Requirement Spec

See As-Built Documentation Package

See As-Built Documentation Package

Misc. Technical Information

See As-Built Documentation Package

Acom System Overview

A glossary of Acom terms and acronyms is available in Appendix A:

System Conceptual Diagrams

Acom System Overview

Figure 1: Basic Hardware Arrangement

Acom Console Unit

Acom Console Unit

Acom Console Unit

E1 loop to first Acom Console Unit (ACU)

Figure 2: Example System Console (typical operator position)

Acom Console Unit (ACU)

Operator Position and ACU

IMS Maintenance Terminal

LAN and RS-232

Console Hardware Requirements

Acom System Overview

533 MHz FSB

The only operating systems supported are Windows Vista Business

Common Control Equipment (CCE)

Acom System Overview

Acom System Overview

Figure 4: Acom Architecture

Back Room (CCE) Preparations

Recommended Installer Materials and Equipment

Back Room (CCE) Preparations

Testing of New/Existing Circuits

Acom HW & Maint 025-9574

Acom HW & Maint 025-9574